MF 5400 Series Workshop Manual

Massey Ferguson 5400
Workshop service manual

n° 3378545M1
CONTENTS
01 - Introduction - Spécifications
03 - Engine
05 - Gearbox
06 - Rear axle
07 - Power take off
08 - Front axle
09 - Hydraulics
10 - Electrical equipment
11 - Electronics
Return to the book list
AGCO S.A. All rights reserved Beauvais France May 2004

Massey Ferguson 5400
May 2004 AGCO S.A. All rights reserved Beauvais France

Introduction - Spécifications
01 - Introduction - Spécifications
CONTENTS
01A01 - Introduction
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a Contents - i
Contents
Introduction - Spécifications
Contents - ii Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
Introduction
01A01 - Introduction
CONTENTS
A . Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Ground speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
D . General dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E . Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
F . Conversion tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
G . Locking compounds and sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 01A01.1

Contents
Introduction
01A01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
Introduction
accessories.
A . Using the manual Tractor safety features may be impaired if non-genuine
parts are fitted.
General Legislation in certain countries prohibits the fitting of
The purpose of this manual is to assist Dealers and parts that do not comply with the tractor manufac-
Agents in the efficient installation, maintenance and turer’s specifications. Torque wrench setting figures
repair of AGCO equipment. Carrying out the proce- given in the Workshop Service Manual must be strictly
dures as detailed, together with the use of special adhered to. Locking devices must be fitted where
tools where appropriate, will enable the operations to specified. If the efficiency of a locking device is
be completed within the time stated in the Repair Time impaired during removal, it must be replaced.
Schedule. The tractor warranty may be invalidated if non-genuine
AGCO parts are fitted. All AGCO replacement parts
Page numbering have the full backing of the manufacturer’s warranty.
AGCO Dealers and agents are required to supply only
The present manual is divided into chapters and genuine service parts.
sections, and each page is numbered with the
following information:
Example: 10A01.1
10 = Chapter
A = Section
01 = Sequence number within the section
1 = Page number within the section
The issue number and date are indicated at the bottom

of the page.
Using the manual

For quick reference, each chapter of the manual is
preceded by a table of contents listing the sections
included in that chapter.
Meaning of references
(..) : identification of parts and components
Amendments
Amended pages will be issued carrying the same page
number as the former pages; only the issue number
and date will be changed.
Former pages should be destroyed.
Service tools
Where the use of a service tool is necessary to carry
out an operation, the tool reference is mentioned
following the relevant instruction.
Drawings for locally made tools are given in the final
sections of the relevant chapters.
Repairs and replacements

When parts have to be replaced, it is essential that only
genuine AGCO parts are used.
The following points are of particular importance when
carrying out repairs and fitting replacement parts and

Contents
Introduction
Front axle
B . Specifications
Model DANA AG 85
Model 5425 Type Fixed
Rotational direction Clockwise

Engine
Clutch Coupler
DIN power (CV) 65
Swinging fender (4WD) Optional
DIN power (Kw) 49
2WD Optional (standard wheel track / wide wheel track)
Trademark PERKINS
Front linkage (optional) 2.5 T
Type 1104C-44
Hydraulics
Number of cylinders / 4 / 4,4
Cylinder capacity (L) Open Centre 57L/min. Optional
Turbocharger No Open Centre 100L/min. Optional
Intercooler No Orbitrol steering unit 100cc
Injection pump Bosch VE10 Brake master cylinder Standard
Fan Viscostatic Assisted braking No
Alternator 80 A / 120 A Trailer brake Optional (*)
Gearbox Auxiliary spool valves 0 - 4 mechanical
Gearbox model GBA20 Couplers Pressure relief
Clutch / Reverse shuttle Dry clutch / Mechanical reverse shuttle Electronics

Wet clutch / Power Shuttle
Transmission control AUTOTRONIC 5 (if Power Shuttle)
Number of discs 5 pads (mechanical reverse shuttle) Without (if mechanical reverse shuttle)
4 forward discs / 3 reverse discs (Power Shuttle)
Linkage calculator Linkage
Type Speedshift
Draft sensors 1
Creeper unit 4/1 Optional
Sensor capacity 4T
Datatronic Without
Rear axle
Fieldstar Optional
Axle model GPA20
Cab
Final drive units ND
Rear view mirrors Standard / Telescopic (optional)
Wheel shaft Ø 76 mm
Air conditioning Manual (optional)
Flanged shaft Standard
Windscreen Standard / Opening (optional)
Brake discs per trumpet 1
housing Standard bonnet Standard
Handbrake discs 3 Steep nose bonnet Optional
Differential lock Coupler Standard roof Standard
Linkage High-visibility roof Optional
Stabilisers Telescopic / without Slimline roof Optional
Perforated bar Optional Platform Optional
3-point linkage Type 2, hook or ball type (*) Reference (*): according to country
Clevis Standard or assisted
Automatic clevis Standard or assisted
Semi-mounted trailer Closed eye bolt or automatic hook (*)

hitch
Swinging drawbar Standard
Roller swinging drawbar Optional
PTO
Type Interchangeable / shiftable shaft
540/1000/eco Optional (*)
Number of clutch discs 4
Power take-off brake Hydraulics
Proportional PTO Optional
Front power take-off Optional
Contents
Introduction
Model 5435 Front axle
Engine Model DANA AG 85
DIN power (CV) 75 Type Fixed
DIN power (Kw) 56 Rotational direction Clockwise
Trademark PERKINS Clutch Coupler
Type 1104C-44 Swinging fender (4WD) Optional
Number of cylinders / 4 / 4,4 2WD Optional (standard wheel track / wide wheel track)
Cylinder capacity (L) Front linkage (optional) 2.5 T
Turbocharger No Hydraulics
Intercooler No Open Centre 57L/min. Optional
Injection pump Bosch VE10 Open Centre 100L/min. Optional
Fan Viscostatic Orbitrol steering unit 100cc
Alternator 80 A / 120 A Brake master cylinder Standard
Gearbox Assisted braking No
Gearbox model GBA20 Trailer brake Optional (*)
Clutch / Reverse shuttle Dry clutch / Mechanical reverse shuttle Auxiliary spool valves 0 - 4 mechanical
Couplers Pressure relief
Number of discs 5 pads (mechanical reverse shuttle)
4 forward discs / 3 reverse discs (Power Shuttle) Electronics
Type Speedshift Transmission control AUTOTRONIC 5 (if Power Shuttle)
Without (if mechanical reverse shuttle)
Draft sensors 1
Rear axle
Sensor capacity 4T
Axle model GPA20
Datatronic Without
Fieldstar Optional
Cab
housing Air conditioning Manual (optional)
Handbrake discs 3 Windscreen Standard / Opening (optional)
Differential lock Coupler Standard bonnet Standard
Linkage Steep nose bonnet Optional
Stabilisers Telescopic / without Standard roof Standard
Perforated bar Optional High-visibility roof Optional
3-point linkage Type 2, hook or ball type (*) Slimline roof Optional
Clevis Standard or assisted Platform Optional
Automatic clevis Standard or assisted Reference (*): according to country
hitch
PTO

Contents
Introduction
Type 1104C-44T Swinging fender (4WD) Optional
Turbocharger Yes Hydraulics
Injection pump Lucas DP210 Open Centre 100L/min. Optional
Draft sensors 1
Rear axle
Sensor capacity 4T
Axle model GPA20
Datatronic Without
Fieldstar Optional
Cab
hitch
PTO
Contents
Introduction
Type 1104C-44T Swinging fender (4WD) Optional
Draft sensors 1
Rear axle
Sensor capacity 4T
Axle model GPA20
Datatronic Without
Fieldstar Optional
Cab
hitch
PTO

Contents
Introduction
Type 1104C-44TA Swinging fender (4WD) Optional
Intercooler Air / air Open Centre 57L/min. Optional
Gearbox Assisted braking Optional
Draft sensors 1
Rear axle
Sensor capacity 4T
Axle model GPA20
Datatronic Without
Fieldstar Optional
Cab
Linkage Steep nose bonnet No
3-point linkage Type 2, hook or ball type (*) Slimline roof No
hitch
PTO
Contents
Introduction
5465 Front axle
Engine Model CARRARO 20.19
Type 1106C-E60TA Swinging fender (4WD) Optional
Number of cylinders / 6/6 2WD Optional (standard wheel track / wide wheel track)
Cylinder capacity (L)
Front linkage (optional) 2.5 T
Turbocharger Yes
Hydraulics
Intercooler Air / air
Open Centre 57L/min. Optional
Injection pump Bosch VP30
Open Centre 100L/min. Optional
Fan Viscostatic
Orbitrol steering unit 125cc
Alternator 80 A / 120 A
Brake master cylinder Standard
Gearbox
Assisted braking Optional
Gearbox model GBA20
Trailer brake Optional (*)
Clutch / Reverse shuttle Dry clutch / Mechanical reverse shuttle
Wet clutch / Power Shuttle Auxiliary spool valves 0 - 4 mechanical
Number of discs 6 pads (mechanical reverse shuttle) Couplers Pressure relief

5 forward discs / 4 reverse discs (Power Shuttle)
Electronics
Type Speedshift
Transmission control AUTOTRONIC 5 (if Power Shuttle)
Creeper unit 4/1 Optional Without (if mechanical reverse shuttle)
Creeper unit 14/1 Optional Linkage calculator Linkage
Rear axle Draft sensors 1
Axle model GPA20 Sensor capacity 4T
Final drive units HD Datatronic Without
Wheel shaft Ø 76 mm Fieldstar Optional
Flanged shaft Standard Cab
Brake discs per trumpet 1 Rear view mirrors Standard / Telescopic (optional)
housing
Air conditioning Manual (optional)
Handbrake discs 3
Windscreen Standard / Opening (optional)
Differential lock Coupler
Standard bonnet Standard
Linkage
Steep nose bonnet No
Stabilisers Telescopic / without
Standard roof Standard
Perforated bar Optional
High-visibility roof Optional
3-point linkage Type 2/3, hook or ball type (*)
Slimline roof No
Clevis Standard or assisted
Platform Optional
Automatic clevis Standard or assisted
Reference (*): according to country
hitch
PTO

Contents
Introduction
C . Ground speed
Road speed at 2200 rpm for models 5425 and 5435. 16.9R34 tyres
POSITION FORWARD AND REVERSE POWER SHUTTLE REVERSE MECHANICAL REVERSE SHUTTLE
FORWARD MECHANICAL REVERSE
SHUTTLE
RANGE Speedshift Creeper Creeper Speedshift Creeper Creeper
1/4 1/14 1/4 1/14
Version 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40
(kph)
1 C 1,96 2,47 0,49 0,62 0,14 0,18 1,90 2,40 0,47 0,60 0,14 0,17
D 2,47 3,12 0,62 0,78 0,18 0,22 2,40 3,03 0,60 0,76 0,17 0,22
2 C 2,95 3,73 0,74 0,93 0,21 0,27 2,87 3,62 0,72 0,91 0,21 0,26
L D 3,73 4,72 0,93 1,18 0,27 0,34 3,62 4,58 0,91 1,14 0,26 0,33
O 3 C 4,09 5,17 1,02 1,29 0,29 0,37 3,96 5,01 0,99 1,25 0,28 0,36
D 5,17 6,53 1,29 1,63 0,37 0,47 5,01 6,33 1,25 1,58 0,36 0,45
4 C 5,92 7,48 1,48 1,87 0,42 0,53 5,74 7,26 1,44 1,81 0,41 0,52
D 7,48 9,45 1,87 2,36 0,53 0,68 7,26 9,17 1,81 2,29 0,52 0,66
1 C 7,84 9,91 - - - - 7,61 9,61 - - - -
D 9,91 12,53 - - - - 9,61 12,15 - - - -
2 C 11,85 14,97 - - - - 11,49 14,52 - - - -
H D 14,97 18,92 - - - - 14,52 18,36 - - - -
I 3 C 16,39 20,72 - - - - 15,90 20,10 - - - -
D 20,72 26,72 - - - - 20,10 25,40 - - - -
4 C 23,73 30,00 - - - - 23,02 29,10 - - - -
D 30,00 37,91 - - - - 29,10 36,77 - - - -
Contents
Introduction
Road speed at 2200 rpm for models 5445. 16.9R38 tyres

POSITION FORWARD AND REVERSE POWER REVERSE MECHANICAL REVERSE
SHUTTLE; FORWARD MECHANICAL SHUTTLE
REVERSE SHUTTLE
1/4 1/14 1/4 1/14
Version 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40
(kph)
1 C 2,08 2,63 0,52 0,66 0,15 0,19 2,02 2,55 0,51 0,64 0,14 0,18
D 2,63 3,33 0,66 0,83 0,19 0,24 2,55 3,23 0,64 0,81 0,18 0,23
2 C 3,15 3,98 0,79 0,99 0,23 0,28 3,05 3,86 0,76 0,96 0,22 0,28
L D 3,98 5,03 0,99 1,26 0,28 0,36 3,86 4,88 0,96 1,22 0,28 0,35
O 3 C 4,66 5,89 1,16 1,47 0,33 0,42 4,52 5,71 1,13 1,43 0,32 0,41
D 5,89 7,44 1,47 1,86 0,42 0,53 5,71 7,22 1,43 1,80 0,41 0,52
4 C 6,30 7,97 1,58 1,99 0,45 0,57 6,11 7,73 1,53 1,93 0,44 0,55
D 7,97 10,07 1,99 2,52 0,56 0,71 7,73 9,77 1,93 2,44 0,55 0,68
1 C 7,81 9,87 - - - - 7,57 9,57 - - - -
D 9,87 12,47 - - - - 9,57 12,10 - - - -
2 C 11,79 14,90 - - - - 11,44 14,46 - - - -
H D 14,90 18,84 - - - - 14,46 18,27 - - - -
I 3 C 17,46 22,07 - - - - 16,94 21,40 - - - -
D 22,07 27,89 - - - - 21,40 27,05 - - - -
4 C 23,63 29,86 - - - - 22,92 28,96 - - - -
D 29,86 37,74 - - - - 28,96 36,61 - - - -

Contents
Introduction
Road speed at 2200 rpm for models 5455 and 5460. 18.4R38 tyres
REVERSE SHUTTLE
1/4 1/14 1/4 1/14
Version 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40
(kph)
1 C 2,18 2,76 0,55 0,69 0,16 0,20 2,12 2,68 0,53 0,67 0,15 0,19
D 2,76 3,49 0,69 0,87 0,20 0,25 2,68 3,38 0,67 0,85 0,19 0,24
2 C 3,30 4,17 0,82 1,04 0,24 0,30 3,20 4,04 0,80 1,01 0,23 0,29
L D 4,17 5,27 1,04 1,32 0,30 0,38 4,04 5,11 1,01 1,28 0,29 0,37
O 3 C 4,88 6,17 1,22 1,54 0,35 0,44 4,74 5,98 1,18 1,50 0,34 0,43
D 6,17 7,80 1,54 1,95 0,44 0,56 5,98 7,56 1,50 1,89 0,43 0,54
4 C 6,61 8,35 1,65 2,09 0,47 0,60 6,41 8,10 1,60 2,02 0,46 0,58
D 8,35 10,55 2,09 2,64 0,60 0,75 8,10 10,24 2,02 2,56 0,58 0,73
1 C 8,18 10,34 - - - - 7,94 10,03 - - - -
D 10,34 13,07 - - - - 10,03 12,68 - - - -
2 C 12,36 15,62 - - - - 11,99 15,15 - - - -
H D 15,62 19,74 - - - - 15,15 19,15 - - - -
I 3 C 18,30 23,12 - - - - 17,75 22,43 - - - -
D 23,12 29,23 - - - - 22,43 28,35 - - - -
4 C 24,76 31,29 - - - - 24,02 30,35 - - - -
D 31,29 39,55 - - - - 30,35 38,36 - - - -
Contents
Introduction
Road speed at 2200 rpm for models 5465. 18.4R38 tyres

REVERSE SHUTTLE
1/4 1/14 1/4 1/14
Version 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40
(kph)
1 C 2,18 2,76 0,55 0,69 0,16 0,20 2,12 2,68 0,53 0,67 0,15 0,19
D 2,76 3,49 0,69 0,87 0,20 0,25 2,68 3,38 0,67 0,85 0,19 0,24
2 C 3,30 4,17 0,82 1,04 0,24 0,30 3,20 4,04 0,80 1,01 0,23 0,29
L D 4,17 5,27 1,04 1,32 0,30 0,38 4,04 5,11 1,01 1,28 0,29 0,37
O 3 C 4,88 6,17 1,22 1,54 0,35 0,44 4,74 5,98 1,18 1,50 0,34 0,43
D 6,17 7,80 1,54 1,95 0,44 0,56 5,98 7,56 1,50 1,89 0,43 0,54
4 C 6,61 8,35 1,65 2,09 0,47 0,60 6,41 8,10 1,60 2,02 0,46 0,58
D 8,35 10,55 2,09 2,64 0,60 0,75 8,10 10,24 2,02 2,56 0,58 0,73
1 C 8,18 10,34 - - - - 7,94 10,03 - - - -
D 10,34 13,07 - - - - 10,03 12,68 - - - -
2 C 12,36 15,62 - - - - 11,99 15,15 - - - -
H D 15,62 19,74 - - - - 15,15 19,15 - - - -
I 3 C 18,30 23,12 - - - - 17,75 22,43 - - - -
D 23,12 29,23 - - - - 22,43 28,35 - - - -
4 C 24,76 31,29 - - - - 24,02 30,35 - - - -
D 31,29 39,55 - - - - 30,35 38,36 - - - -

Contents
Introduction
D . General dimensions
Dimensions and attachment points for 5425, 5435, 5445 and 5455 tractors
3 4 5 6
9 8 Z 7
10 X 12
0 16
17
X 15
11
13 14
21
19 20
18
2
1
MA-01-03223A 5425/5435/5445/5455
REFERENCE DIMENSIONS (mm) REFERENCE DIMENSIONS (mm)

0 = Engine axis x y z 0 = Engine axis x y z
1 3427 - - - 12 100 - - -
2 2464 - - - 13 249 - - -
3 1012 - - - 14 260 - - -
4 540 - - - 15 216 - - -
5 896 - - - 16 106 - - -
6 890 - - - 17 2xM20 -1215 +/-280 20/-82
7 567 - - - 18 2xM20 -1113 +/-280 20/-82
8 89 - - - 19 2xM20 -665 +/-275 20/-94
9 372 - - - 20 2xM16 120/222 +/-183 -155
10 222 - - - 21 2xM16 120/222 +/-223 -53
11 306 - - - - - - - -
Fig. 1
Contents
Introduction
Dimensions and attachment points for 5460 tractors
3 4 5 6
9 8 Z 7
10 X 12
0 16
17
X 15
11
13 14
21
19 20
18
2
1
MA-01-03224A
5460

1 3447 - - - 12 100 - - -
2 2553 - - - 13 249 - - -
3 1032 - - - 14 260 - - -
4 540 - - - 15 216 - - -
5 896 - - - 16 106 - - -
6 890 - - - 17 2xM20 -1215 +/-280 21/-59
7 567 - - - 18 2xM20 -1113 +/-280 21/-59
8 89 - - - 19 2xM20 -665 +/-275 21/-93
9 462 - - - 20 2xM16 120/222 +/-183 -155
10 222 - - - 21 2xM16 120/222 +/-223 -53
11 306 - - -
Fig. 2

Contents
Introduction
Dimensions and attachment points for 5465 tractors
3 4 5 6
10
8 7
Z
11 9 13
X
0 17
18 19
X 16
12
14 15
21 22
20
2
1
MA-01-03224A 5465

1 3717 - - - 12 361 - - -
2 2780 - - - 13 100 - - -
3 1018 - - - 14 249 - - -
4 772 - - - 15 260 - - -
5 896 - - - 16 216 - - -
6 890 - - - 17 106 - - -
7 567 - - - 18 2xM20 -1452 +/-280 20/-82
8 89 - - - 19 2xM20 -1351 +/-280 20/-82
9 53 - - - 20 2xM20 -903 +/-275 20/-94
10 404 - - - 21 2xM20 59 +/-274 -137/-19
7
11 222 - - - 22 M20 59 +/-274 -35
Fig. 3
Contents
Introduction
E . Capacities
Engine oil Engine cooling Transmission oil Front axle Front final drive Fuel tank Additional Windshield Air conditioning
units tank washer
5425 7,5 16,6 62 (Inv. Méca.) 5,5 0,9 150 50 4 1550

74 (ISC)
5435 7,5 16,6 62 (Inv. Méca.) 5,5 0,9 150 50 4 1550

74 (ISC)
5445 7,5 16,6 62 (Inv. Méca.) 5,5 0,9 150 50 4 1550

74 (ISC)
5455 7,5 16,6 62 (Inv. Méca.) 5,5 0,9 150 50 4 1550

74 (ISC)
5460 7,5 16,6 62 (Inv. Méca.) 6,8 1,1 150 50 4 1550

74 (ISC)
5465 14,5 25 56 (Inv. Méca.) 6 0,7 150 80 4 1550

68 (ISC)
Value in litres, and in grammes for the air conditioning circuit

Contents
Introduction
F . Conversion tables
POWER
LENGTH multiply by
multiply by ps x 0.9863 ch
mm x 0.0394 in ch x 1.0139 ps
in x 25,400 mm kW x 1.3410 ch
m x 3.2808 ft ch x 0.7457 kW
ft x 0.3048 m
km x 0.6214 mile TORQUE
mile x 1.6093 km multiply by

Nm x 738 lbf ft
AREA lbf ft x 1,356 Nm
multiply by
PRESSURE
mm² x 15 in²
multiply by
in² x 645.16 mm²
bar x 14,504 lbf/in²
m² x 10,764 ft²
lbf/in² x 0.0690 bar
ft² x 0.0929 m²
ha x 2.4711 acre
SPEED
acre x 0.4047 ha
multiply by
kph x 0.6214 mph
VOLUME
mph x 1.6093 kph
multiply by
mm3 x 0.6102 in3
WEIGHT
in3 x 163.87 mm3 multiply by
m3 x 35,315 ft3 gramme x 0.0353 oz
ft 3 x 0.0283 m 3 oz x 28,350 gramme
kg x 2.2046 pound
CAPACITY pounds x 0.4536 kg
multiply by kg x 0.00098 British ton
ml x 0.0351 liquid oz British ton x 1016.1 kg
liquid oz x 28,413 ml ton (metric) x 0.9842 British ton
litre x 0.2200 imp. gal. British ton x 1,016 ton (metric)
imp. gal. x 4.5640 litre
litre x 0.2640 gal. English US TEMPERATURE
gal. English US x 3.7850 litre °C °C x 1.8 + 32 °F
imp. gal. x 1.2010 gal. English US °F (°F - 32)/1.8 °C
gal. English US x 0.8330 imp. gal.
Contents
Introduction
- for cylindrical fittings, apply the product on the

G . Locking compounds and seal- two mating faces using a clean brush.
ants - for mating faces, apply a bead to one of the two
faces, circling the holes, and then tighten as
The Loctite compounds mentioned in this manual are quickly as possible.
referred to by their industrial name.
For repair purposes, use their commercial names or NOTE:
the corresponding AGCO references listed in the
following table: a) Do not use too much of the compound in order to
avoid locking adjacent parts.
b) Do not attempt to retighten after 5 minutes of
Loctite industrial Commercial curing, in order to avoid breaking the film of
name name compound.
270 Stud lock c) If the ambient temperature is less than +10°C, and
to ensure quicker setting of Loctite compounds,
242 Lock and Seal (except SILICOMET), use LOCTITE T 747 activator on
Silicone AS 310 Clear silicone at least one of the two parts. Excess sealant outside
the joint will not harden (anaerobic curing of the
5910 black silicone Blacktite compound – i.e. curing takes place only in absence of
trumpet sealant oxygen).
510 mating face sealant Formajoint
Masterjoint Grease
518 mating face sealant Unijoint When grease is used in components which are in
Masterjoint contact with transmission oil, use grease which is
miscible with oil to avoid clogging the hydraulic filters.
NOTE: use the product “Form A gasket 2” when Use "Amber Technical" grease supplied by: WITCO
sealing between plastic material and cast iron (or company, 76320 Saint-Pierre des Elfes, France.
steel).
These products can be ordered from the following

address:
Henkel Loctite France S.A.
10, avenue Eugène Gazeau
BP 40090
F-60304 Senlis Cedex, FRANCE
Application method for Loctite products

1. Remove all traces of previous sealants and corro-
sion
- mechanically: wire brush or emery cloth
- chemically: "DECAPLOC 88"
Leave the product to take effect and then wipe
clean.
2. Degrease the components with dry solvent

- preferably, use “Super Solvant Sec LOCTITE
706”.
3. Allow the solvents to evaporate
4. Apply the recommended type of LOCTITE product

to the parts:
- for blind tapped holes, apply a quantity of the
product to the last threads at the bottom of the
hole.

Contents
Introduction
Contents
Engine
03 - Engine
CONTENTS
03A01 - Perkins engine - General
Contents
Engine
Contents
Perkins engine - General
03A01 - Perkins engine - General
CONTENTS
A . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Specifications and standards concerning fuel, oil and coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Main characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Contents
Contents
A . Introduction
This section only provides general information about
Perkins engines used on this tractor series.
B . Specifications and standards

concerning fuel, oil and coolant
The engines fitted on this tractor series comply with
standards concerning emissions imposed by the
authorities (EU97/68/EC Stage 2 and EPA 40 CFR 89
Tier 2).
The quality of fluids used in these engines as well as
the servicing schedule must be respected in order to
keep pollution emission levels low and to maintain the
tractor’s good performance during it’s whole life.
Fuel quality:
The fuel must comply with standard DIN EN 590 and
with the following specifications:
Density (at 15°C): 0.82 to 0.84 Kg/dm3
Viscosity (at 40°C): 2 to 4.5 mm2/s
Cetane index: min. 51
Sulphur content: max. 0.005 p-%
Water content: max. 200 mg/kg
Oil quality:
The oil used must comply with standard API CH-4.
Coolant quality:
The coolant used must comply with standard ASTM D
3306. It must be composed of pure water and
ethylene/propylene glycol antifreeze agent in the
following proportions:
40 - 60% water
40 - 60% antifreeze agent
The ideal ration is 50% water to 50% antifreeze agent.

Contents
C . Main characteristics
Model 5425
Engine type 1104C-44
Perkins engine list N° (Standard / Steep Nose) RE 37873 / RE 37917
Number of cylinders 4
Bore 105
Stroke 127
Capacity 4,4
Compression ratio 19,3/1
Compression pressure (kPa) 2000 / 3500
Allowable compression deviation between cylinders (kPa) 350
Output at 2200 rpm (kw) ISO 73 (54)
Maximum torque (Nm) 297
at speed (rpm) 1400
Idle speed 950
Nominal speed 2200
Maximum speed at no load 2354
Injection pump
Trademark and type Bosch VE10
Rotation Clockwise
Static timing angle (degrees) 4°
Engine position TDC
Engine check angle (degrees) pin
Pump check angle (degrees) pin
Injection order 1.3.4.2
Injectors
Trademark Delphi
New and servicing setting (bar) 294
Suction system Ambient air

Valve spring simple
Valve seat insert (Inlet / Exhaust) yes
Valve angle 0,30° / 0,30°
Inlet / Exhaust valve tip clearance (mm) 0,20 / 0,45
Oil cooler yes
Number of temperature switches 1
Opening temperature (start/full) 79°C / 93°C
Piston cooling nozzle yes
Oil filter 1
Fuel filter 1
Contents
Model 5435
Engine type 1104C-44
Perkins engine list N° (Standard / Steep Nose) RE 37831 / RE 37919
Bore 105
Stroke 127
Capacity 4,4
at speed (rpm) 1400
Idle speed 950
Nominal speed 2200
Injection pump
Trademark and type Bosch VE10
Rotation Clockwise
Engine position TDC
Injectors
Trademark Delphi
Suction system Ambient air

Valve spring simple
Oil cooler yes
Oil filter 1
Fuel filter 1

Contents
Model 5445
Engine type 1104C-44T
Perkins engine list N° (Standard / Steep Nose) RG 37832 / RG 37915
Bore 105
Stroke 127
Capacity 4,4
at speed (rpm) 1400
Idle speed 950
Nominal speed 2200
Injection pump
Trademark and type Lucas DP 210
Rotation Clockwise
Engine position TDC
Injectors
Trademark Delphi
Suction system Turbo + Waste Gate

Type Garrett GT25
Valve spring simple
Oil cooler yes
Oil filter 1
Fuel filter 1
Contents
Model 5455
Engine type 1104C-44T
Perkins engine list N° (Standard / Steep Nose) RG 37826 / RG 37916
Bore 105
Stroke 127
Capacity 4,4
Output at 2200 rpm (kw) ISO 100 (74,5)
at speed (rpm) 1400
Idle speed 950
Nominal speed 2200
Injection pump
Rotation Clockwise
Engine position TDC
Injectors
Trademark Delphi
Suction system Turbo + Waste Gate

Type Garrett GT25
Valve spring simple
Oil cooler yes
Oil filter 1
Fuel filter 1

Contents
Model 5460
Engine type 1104C-44TA
Perkins engine list number RJ
Bore 105
Stroke 127
Capacity 4,4
Output at 2200 rpm (kw) ISO 112 (83,5)
at speed (rpm) 1400
Idle speed 950
Nominal speed 2200
Injection pump
Rotation Clockwise
Engine position TDC
Injectors
Trademark Delphi
Suction system Turbo + Waste Gate +

Air/air intercooler
Type Garrett GT25
Valve spring simple
Oil cooler yes
Oil filter 1
Fuel filter 1
Contents
Model 5465
Engine type 1106C-E66TA
Perkins engine list number VK 31483 (until 21/09/03)
VK 31486 (from 22/09/03)
Bore 100
Stroke 127
Capacity 6
at speed (rpm) 1400
Idle speed 950
Nominal speed 2200
Injection pump
Trademark and type Bosch VP30
Rotation Clockwise
Engine position TDC
Injection order 1, 5, 3, 6, 2, 4
Injectors
Trademark Bosch
Suction system Turbo + Waste Gate +

Air/air intercooler
Type Garrett GT35
Valve spring simple
Oil cooler yes
Oil filter 1
Fuel filter 1 (+ 1 prefilter)

Contents
Contents
Gearbox
05 - Gearbox
CONTENTS
05A02 - General - GBA20 with Power Shuttle Operation
05B01 - GBA20 input unit with mechanical reverse shuttle
05B02 - Input unit - GBA20 with Power Shuttle
05C01 - GBA20 mechanical reverse shuttle
05C02 - GBA20 Power Shuttle
05D02 - GBA20 Speedshift with Power Shuttle
05E02 - Selector cover - GBA20 with Power Shuttle
05F01 - GBA20 selector rails with mechanical reverse shuttle
05F02 - GBA20 selector rail with Power Shuttle
05G02 - GBA20 output shaft with Power Shuttle
05H02 - GBA20 mainshaft with Power Shuttle
05I02 - GBA20 layshaft with Power Shuttle
05J01 - GBA20 Creeper unit
Contents
Gearbox
Contents
General - GBA20 with Power Shuttle Operation
05A02 - General - GBA20 with Power Shuttle Operation
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Construction and description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
C . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
D . Specifications of the GBA20 transmission assembly with Power Shuttle . . . . . . . 12

Contents
Contents
Gearbox input gear train

A . General
The gearbox input gear train consists of two meshed
The housing of the GBA20 gearbox with Power Shuttle pinions:
consists of the following main components, in the - a driving pinion located at the rear of the input unit,
order given: - a driven pinion integral with the gearbox mainshaft.
- the Power Shuttle, The input gear train transmits drive from the engine to
- the Speedshift input unit, the gearbox.
- the input gear train,
- the main gearbox,
- the creeper or super creeper gearbox (option). Main gearbox
The main gearbox consists of four basic gears and two
Only the gearbox is described in this section. speed ranges (Hare and Tortoise), giving a total of eight
A broad description is given of the major components gear ratios for each direction of travel.
because specific and detailed descriptions can be seen This transmission covers all usage requirements.
in the sections provided for each component.
Creeper unit (option)

Power Shuttle
The creeper unit is fitted to the gearbox output shaft.
The Power Shuttle consists of two oil bath multidisc
clutches (one for forward operation and one for It allows slow travel. It operates at a ratio of 4/1.
reverse operation). These clutches are located to the It is controlled mechanically and should only be
front of the input unit, in front of the Speedshift unit. engaged when the gearbox is in Tortoise range.
The Power Shuttle is controlled by two proportional
solenoid valves operated by a lever located to the left
under the steering wheel and managed by the tractor Super creeper unit (option)
electronic system.
The super creeper unit is also fitted to the gearbox
output shaft.
It consists of two epicyclic gear trains which allow to
Speedshift input unit obtain a reduction ration of 14/1 and therefore allows
The Speedshift input unit consists of a hydraulic mech- very slow travel.
anism and an epicyclic gear train. It is located to the Like the creeper unit, it is controlled mechanically.
rear of the Power Shuttle. It allows to obtain two
gearbox input ratios via a hydraulic control unit and a
solenoid valve.

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 1)

(3) Screw
(4) Ring
(5) Secondary shaft
(6) Output sun gear
(7) Input sun gear
(8) Pinion gear pins
(9) Planet carrier cover
(10) Friction washer
(12) Double pinion gears
(13) Unit
(14) Spacers
(15) Hub
(16) Needle bearings
(18) Spring washer (Belleville)
(19) Ring restrictor
(20) Clutch plate
(21) Brake disc
(22) O’ring
(23) O’ring
(24) Screw
(25) Hydraulic cover
(26) O’ring
(27) Front cover
(28) Clutch piston
(29) O’ring
(30) Intermediate plates
(31) Rings
(33) Ring carrier
(34) Screw
(36) Primary shaft
(37) Circlip
(38) Tab washer
(39) Washer
(40) Ball
(41) Screw
(42) Discs
(43) Spring washers
(48) Brake piston
(50) Planet carrier assembly (30 kph version)
(51) Screw
(52) Cover
(53) Shim(s)
(54) Bearing cup
(56) Driving pinion
(57) Bearing cup
(58) Bearing cone
Contents
GBA20 Speedshift and input gear train with Power Shuttle
Fig. 1

Contents
Parts list Fig. 2 (71) Lubricating pipe

(72) Spring
(1) Bearing cone
(77) Washer with flat sections
(2) Bearing cup
(78) Tab washer
(3) Shim(s)
(79) Needle bearing
(6) Serrated washers
(80) Spacer
(7) 1st driving pinion
(81) Needle bearing
(8) Ring
(82) Spacer
(11) 1st - 2nd double cone synchroniser
(14) 2nd driving pinion
(16) Bearing cup
(17) Bearing cone
(18) 4th driving pinion
(23) 3rd - 4th double cone synchroniser
(24) Needle bearing
(26) Circlip
(27) Washer
(29) 3rd driving pinion (Hare)
(31) Hare / Tortoise double cone synchroniser
(32) Washer
(35) Ring
(36) Tortoise pinion
(37) Bearing cup
(38) Shim(s)
(39) Bearing cone
(40) Bearing cone
(41) Screw
(42) Shim(s)
(43) Laminated shim
(44) Output shaft
(45) Circlip
(46) Stop plate
(48) Bearing cup
(49) Circlip
(50) Deflector
(51) Shim(s)
(52) Bearing cup
(53) Bearing cone
(54) Layshaft
(55) 3rd driven pinion
(56) 4th driven pinion
(57) Spacer
(58) Shim(s)
(59) 2nd driven pinion
(60) 1st driven pinion
(61) Circlip
(62) Needle bearing
(63) Bearing cone
(64) Bearing cup
(65) Gearbox housing
(67) Drive pinion
(68) Nut
(69) Mainshaft
(70) Snap ring
Contents
GBA20 gearbox with Power Shuttle
Super creeper
unit
Creeper
unit
Fig. 2

Contents
Contents
Lubrication
B . Construction and description
The lubricating oil of the lower shaftline is supplied
Construction from the tractor hydraulic system via a 1.5 bar valve. It
crosses a channel in the mainshaft and output shaft.
The GBA20 gearbox with Power Shuttle consists of Radial bores direct the oil to the pinions, bearings,
three gear trains fitted to: rings and synchronisers.
- mainshaft, The splines of the Hare / Tortoise synchro hub are lubri-
- layshaft (or transmission shaft), cated via a radial bore drilled in the output shaft.
- output shaft. The oil flowing inside the layshaft lubricates the taper
It allows to obtain eight basic synchronised gear ratios: roller bearings and needle bearing (62). These bearings
- four gear ratios: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th; are fitted respectively at the ends of the shaft.
- two range ratios: Hare and Tortoise.
Its main characteristic is its assembly of three double Description (Fig. 2)
cone synchronisers. Drive is transferred from the main unit by the driven
The main gearbox consists of four synchronised gears. pinion (67) which is permanently meshed with the
An pinion idle-mounted to the output shaft and driving pinion of the input gear train (Power Shuttle).
controlled by a synchroniser allows to double the four The driven pinion (67) is secured to the mainshaft (69)
initial gears to obtain the eight basic gears. by splines.
The mainshaft and the layshaft are carried by tapered The two synchroniser hubs (11) (23) are splined to the
roller bearings. mainshaft (69).
The output shaft is fitted on two taper roller bearings The 2nd driving pinion (14) is idle-mounted on a
and one needle bearing. ring (8).
The mainshaft bearing cups are fitted up against the The 1st (7) and 4th (18) driving pinions are
housing. idle-mounted directly on the shaft.
All pinions have helical teeth and are continuously The third driving pinion (29) is fitted on needle
meshed. bearings (28). It is also fitted with a needle thrust
To ensure optimum gearbox reliability, the bearings are bearing on each of its faces to absorb any axial pres-
fitted: sure.
- with preload for the mainshaft, The hub of the Hare / Tortoise synchroniser (31) is
- with clearance for the layshaft. secured to the output shaft (44).
The output shaft may be set either with a slight clear- The driven pinions (55) (56) (59) (60) drive the
ance or a slight preload. layshaft (54) by means of splines. The rear teeth of this
shaft are constantly meshed with the Tortoise
pinion (36) idle-mounted on the output shaft.

Contents
C . Operation
NOTE : On GBA20 gearboxes with Power Shuttle, the
gear synchronisers (1st - 2nd and 3rd - 4th) and the
Hare / Tortoise synchroniser are double cone type.
1 5 4 6 2 3
The double cone synchroniser has the following advan-
tages: increased reliability and greater resistance to
transmission effort.
Synchronisers (double cone)

Parts list (Fig. 3)
(1) Sliding coupler
(2) Cone (brake)
(3) Coupling flange
(4) Ball
(5) Pressure element
(6) Spring
(7) Ring
(8) Cone (brake)
Locked position (Fig. 3)

When the sliding coupler (1) moves towards the pinion
to be locked, it is pressed against the ring (7) by the
balls (4) and pressure elements (5).
The ring (7) transmits pressure received to the
cones (2) and (8) to set a synchronisation speed.
When the synchronisation is set, the sliding coupler (1)
can mesh and lock noiselessly with the teeth of the
coupling flange (3).
Neutral position (Fig. 3) V 8 7

Sliding coupler (1) is in the middle position. The
balls (4) are pushed into the V groove of the sliding
coupler by pressure springs (6). The pinions can turn
freely on the shaft. In this neutral position, the sliding
coupler is locked by three balls held in place by the 5 4 6 1 7
pressure springs.
MA-05-00301B
Fig. 3
Contents
Reconditioning Low range (Tortoise)

If the synchronisers (11), (23) et (31) are disassembled, Gear engagement is obtained by moving one of the
check the wear to the cones (2) and (8) in the following synchroniser sliding couplers (11) or (23) to join, in rota-
manner: tion, the mainshaft (69) with one of the idle-mounted
1. Stack the coupling flange (3), cones (2) and (8) and pinions (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th). No matter what gear is
ring (7). selected, the drive is transmitted to the layshaft (54).
2. Correctly position the ring (7) on the cones (2) et The output shaft (44) is driven by the teeth machined
(8), revolving them alternately each several turns on the layshaft, which is constantly meshed to the
and applying pressure manually. idle-mounted pinion (36).
3. Using a set of laminated shims, measure The low range (Tortoise) is obtained by moving the
dimension X (Fig. 4) at three equidistant points. synchroniser sliding coupler (31) backwards.
Calculate the average of the three values and
proceed as described below, depending on the High range (Hare)
result obtained: The high range is obtained by moving the synchroniser
On a new synchroniser, dimension X must be sliding coupler (31) forwards, meshing the driving
1.6 mm minimum. pinion (29) and the output shaft.
After operation, if X is less than or equal to Consequently, in 3rd gear Hare, the layshaft (54) is
0.60 - 0.80 mm: inoperative. The other gears are obtained by moving
- replace the cones (2) and (8), the synchroniser sliding couplers (11) or (23) as with
- check the measurement of X again, using the the Tortoise range. Drive is transmitted to the output
same process. shaft (44) by driven pinions (29) and (55).
If dimension X remains incorrect, also replace
ring (7) or, if necessary, the complete synchro-
niser.
Fig. 4

Contents
D . Specifications of the GBA20

transmission assembly with Power
Shuttle
See Fig. 5.
Legend
J Clearance
P Preload
Contents
Super creeper unit
Creeper unit
Fig. 5

Contents
Contents
GBA20 input unit with mechanical reverse shuttle
05B01 - GBA20 input unit with mechanical reverse shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removing and refitting the input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 05B01.1

Contents
05B01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
A . General
The GBA20 input unit with mechanical reverse shuttle
(Fig. 1) consists of an interchangeable module.
It is located at the front of the main unit.
It is made of two separate parts: the mechanical

reverse shuttle and the Speedshift (see chapter 5).
The input unit receives drive from the engine clutch

and transmits it to the transmission via a driving pinion
(forward operation) or a transfer pinion (reverse opera-
tion).
These pinions are located in the rear compartment of
the input unit.
Fig. 1

Contents
B . Removing and refitting the input

unit
Preliminary operations
1. Disassemble the tractor between the engine and
the gearbox (see chapter 2).
2. Mark the PTO shaft position and remove it from
the gearbox.
3. Separate the hydraulic unit (1) from the input unit
spacer (Fig. 2 and chapter 4)
4. Drain the transmission.
5. Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5).
6. Remove the selector (2) from the mechanical
reverse shuttle (Fig. 2).
7. Attach tool ref. 3376883M1 to the front cover of
the input unit (Fig. 3). Fig. 2
IMPORTANT: To correctly attach the tool to the front
cover of the input unit, use locally obtained screws
(1) (Fig. 3) long enough and of suitable strength.
Fig. 3
Contents
Removal
8. Take out the M10 screws (1) (Fig. 4).
IMPORTANT: Do not take out the M8 screws (2)
(Fig. 4) to avoid removing certain parts from the
input unit.
9. Remove the gearbox input unit using tool ref.
3376883M1 (Fig. 4) and the handling bar (see § C).
Caution: Use the handling bar to

prevent the input unit from tipping over during
removal.
10. After removing the input unit, separate the tool
from the front cover if necessary.
11. Discard the O'rings (2) and (3) (Fig. 5).
12. Recover the cup (64) (Fig. 6) and locating pin (4)
(Fig. 5).
Fig. 4
Fig. 5

Contents
Refitting the input unit

13. Clean the mating faces of the gearbox and input
unit.
14. Check for the presence of the cup (64) (Fig. 6).
15. Fit the gearbox and input unit with new O’rings (2)
and (3).
Place the locating pin (4) (Fig. 5).
16. Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs “G”
into the gearbox (Fig. 7).
NOTE: The guide studs “G” assist insertion of the
unit into the gearbox. Their use is advisable but not
mandatory.
17. With the help of an operator, insert the input unit
into the gearbox and align the gearbox layshaft
with the input unit: slightly raise the layshaft with
the selector cover to ensure alignement (Fig. 8).
Fig. 6
18. Turn the input shaft of the unit.
19. Engage the unit in the locating pin (4).
Place the input unit on the gearbox mating face.
20. Fit and tighten the M10 screws to a torque of
50 - 70 Nm.
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Contents
Final operations
21. After refitting the input unit, remove the tool
ref. 3376883M1 and the handling bar from the
front cover.
22. Assemble the spacer and hydraulic unit (1) of the
engine clutch on the front cover of the input unit
(Fig. 9 and chapter 4).
23. Fit and adjust the selector (2) on the mechanical
reverse shuttle (Fig. 2 and chapter 5).
24. Refit the selector cover (see chapter 5).
25. Refit the PTO shaft (Fig. 10 and chapter 2).
26. Assemble the tractor between the engine and the
gearbox (see chapter 2).
27. Bleed the hydraulic unit of the engine clutch (see
chapter 9).
28. Carry out a road test of the mechanical reverse
Fig. 9
shuttle and the Speedshift (low range and high
range).
Fig. 10

Contents
C . Service tools
Tool available in the AGCO network
• 3376883M1: Sling for input unit (Fig. 11)
Locally made tool

• Handling bar (Fig. 12)
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
Contents
Input unit - GBA20 with Power Shuttle
05B02 - Input unit - GBA20 with Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D . Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
E . Adjusting the progressivity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
F . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
G . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Contents
Contents
A . General
The input unit with Power Shuttle is in the form of an
interchangeable module on which a Power Shuttle is
assembled.
It is fitted at the gearbox input.
It is made of two separate parts:

- the Power Shuttle (see section 5) ;
- Speedshift.
The input unit is fed with movement from the Power

Shuttle and transmits it to the transmission by means
of a drive pinion located in the rear compartment of the
unit.
Speedshift
This is an independent function allowing to obtain two
gearbox input ratios.
It is located in front of the driving pinion of the gearbox
input gear train.
It consists of a hydraulic mechanism and an epicyclic
gear train.
For operation, see section 5.

Contents
B . Preliminary operations
SPECIAL POINT : If the input unit is removed to replace
the complete unit or only the cover (1) and the
casing (2) (Fig. 1), it is necessary, during refitting, to
reshim the layshaft of the gearbox (see section 5).

the gearbox (see section 2).
2. Drain the gearbox and the rear axle.
3. Remove the spacer (4) (see section 3).
1 2
MA-05-06007A
Fig. 1
Contents
C . Removal
4. Remove the forward clutch from the Power 92
Shuttle (see section 5).
5. Take out the PTO shaft (1) from the gearbox
(Fig. 4) and mark its position. 91
6. Remove union (91) (Fig. 2).
7. Extract the transfer pipe (88) (Fig. 2, pressure
connector line, lubrication).
8. Disconnect and remove the progressivity
sensor (1) located above the right-hand side of the
selector cover (Fig. 3). 542
9. Sling the input unit using tool 3378225M11, a
handling bar made locally (see § G) and a suitable
lifting device as in Fig. 4. 88
MA-05-02003A
NOTE : The sling hides two diametrically opposed
Fig. 2
screws (1) on the input unit (Fig. 5). Before fitting
the tool on the unit, remove these screws.
MA-05-06014A
Fig. 3
MA-05-06008A
Fig. 4

Contents
10. Remove the remaining screws (1) securing the

unit to the gearbox (Fig. 5) without touching
screws (2) (8 mm Allen key) (Fig. 5). 2
11. With the help of an assistant, carefully pull the unit
forward. 1 1
12. Pull out the unit from the gearbox and remove it.
WARNING: Use a handling bar to

prevent the input unit from tipping over during 2
removal. 1
13. Discard the O'rings (3) (Fig. 6).
14. Remove the tool and the handling bar.
15. Position the unit vertically.
16. Separate the Power Shuttle reverse clutch from
the input box unit (see section 5). MA-05-00310B
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Contents
D . Refitting
17. Install the reverse clutch previously removed (see 64
section 5).
18. On the input unit, check that the cup (64) (Fig. 7) is
fitted.
19. On the gearbox housing (Fig. 6) place:
- new O’rings (3),
- two guide studs “G” approximately 200 mm in
length (optional).
NOTE: On the Power Shuttle version, there is no
locating pin between the gearbox housing and the
input unit.
20. Using the tools used for removal and with the help
of an assistant, position the unit in the gearbox
housing, taking the same safety steps as those MA-05-06009A
Fig. 7
used during removal.
21. Slide the unit on the guide studs (if mounted) until
they are in contact with the housing.
If it is difficult to fit the input unit home, proceed as
follows:
- Remove the clutch control unit and the selector
cover.
- Check that the bearing cone of the gearbox
layshaft engages correctly in the cup (64) (see
E
section 5). If not, raise the shaft slightly.
22. Replace the O'rings (92) on the transfer pipe (88)
(Fig. 2).
23. On the input unit, tighten screws (1) (Fig. 5) to a MA-05-00313B
torque of 40 - 56 Nm.
24. Lightly smear the thread of the union (91) (Fig. 2)
with Loctite 542 or equivalent. Refit the union to
the gearbox housing.
25. Reinstall and adjust the progressivity sensor (see §
E). Fig. 8
26. Put the PTO shaft in the gearbox, with the longest
end “E” (Fig. 8) directed towards the forward
clutch of the Power Shuttle.
27. Install forward clutch (see section 5).

Contents
E . Adjusting the progressivity

sensor
28. Smear the sensor thread with Loctite 5922 or
equivalent.
Install and adjust the sensor.
29. Screw the sensor (1) home (Fig. 9), without forcing 1
it. Make sure that its end is in contact with the
drive pinion (2) (see section 5).
Unscrew the sensor 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn.
Tighten the nut to a torque of 5 - 7 Nm.
For operation, see section 11 - Electronics.
MA-05-06014A
Fig. 9
F . Final operations
30. Refit the spacer (4) (see section 3).
31. If removed, install the selector cover (see
section 5).
32. If removed, install the Power Shuttle clutch control
unit. Refit the lubricating pipes. Reconnect the
connectors (see section 9).
33. Top up the oil level in the housings. Check it using
the gauge at the rear of the centre housing.
gearbox (see section 2).
35. Carry out a road test of the Power Shuttle and high
and low Speedshift ranges.
36. Check tightness of mating faces of the selector
cover (if necessary), the spacer (4) and the
hydraulic unions.
Contents
G . Service tools
• 3378225M11: Sling for Power Shuttle housing
(Fig. 10)
Locally made tool

• Handling bar (Fig. 11)
Fig. 10
Fig. 11

Contents
Contents
GBA20 mechanical reverse shuttle
05C01 - GBA20 mechanical reverse shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
C . Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
D . Disassembling and reassembling the reverse shuttle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
E . Shimming the secondary shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
F . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 05C01.1

Contents
05C01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
A . General
The mechanical reverse shuttle transmits drive from
the Speedshift to the drive pinion (1) of the gearbox
(Fig. 1).
The mechanical reverse shuttle assembly is located in

the rear housing of the input unit, behind the Speed-
shift.
It comprises (Fig. 2): 1

- two helical pinions (forward operation (5) and reverse
operation (23)) fitted on the needle bearing (6) and
(20);
- a double cone synchromesh (18) whose hub (2) is
MA-05-05035A
splined to the secondary shaft;
Fig. 1
- a secondary shaft (19) fitted on two ball bearings and
supported by the two bearings of the reverse shuttle
unit;
- a selector rail / synchromesh control fork assembly;
- a double transfer pinion (15) constantly meshed with 23 18 5 2
the reverse pinion (23) and the drive pinion (1) of the
gearbox.
19
20 15 6
23
MA-05-05036A
Fig. 2

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 3)

(1) Shim(s)
(2) Synchromesh hub
(3) Sliding coupler
(4) Cone (brake)
(5) Forward driving pinion
(6) Needle bearing
(7) Ring
(8) Friction washer
(9) Ball bearing
(10) Set screw
(11) Spacer
(12) Friction washers
(13) Reverse pinion shaft
(15) Reverse double pinion
(17) Locking device
(18) Synchromesh assembly
(19) Secondary shaft
(20) Needle bearing
(21) Rings
(22) Coupling flanges
(23) Reverse driving pinion
(24) Ball bearing
(25) Circlip
(26) Housing
(39) Cones (brake)
Contents
Overall view
13 14 15 14
26
26 35 20 23 17 18
10
12 11 12
25
19
24
22 39
6 7 9
21 2 3
MA-05-05037A
Fig. 3

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 4)

(1) Shim(s)
(2) Synchromesh hub
(3) Sliding coupler
(4) Cone (brake)
(5) Forward driving pinion
(6) Needle bearing
(7) Ring
(8) Friction washer
(9) Ball bearing
(10) Set screw
(11) Spacer
(13) Reverse pinion shaft
(15) Reverse double pinion
(17) Locking device
(19) Secondary shaft
(20) Needle bearing
(21) Rings
(22) Coupling flanges
(23) Reverse driving pinion
(24) Ball bearing
(25) Circlip
(39) Cones (brake)
Contents
Exploded view
20
19
35
24
1 22
4
25
39
21
3
2
17
21
39
4
22
23
12
14
8
15
5
7 14
6 11
10
13
12
MA-05-05038A
Fig. 4

Contents
B . Operation
Forward operation kinematics (Fig. 5)
The movement of the synchromesh slider (3) to the 3
rear joins the pinion (5) with the shaft (19).
The pinion (1) is secured to the mainshaft (69) by
splines.
The constant meshing of pinions (5) and (1) allows
drive to be transmitted to the gearbox. 19
MA-05-05039A
Fig. 5
Contents
Reverse operation kinematics (Fig. 6)

The movement of the synchromesh slider (3) to the
front joins the pinion (23) firmly with the shaft (19).
Drive is transmitted via the pinion (23), the teeth of the 3
transfer pinion (15), and the pinion (1). Therefore, drive
is transmitted to the mainshaft of the gearbox and
reversed.
19
23
15
MA-05-05040A
Fig. 6

Contents
C . Preliminary operations D . Disassembling and reassembling

the reverse shuttle
IMPORTANT: If the input unit is removed to replace the
complete unit or only the housing (26) , it is necessary Disassembling the transfer pinion (15) for
to shim the layshaft of the gearbox again after
removing the input unit (see chapter 5).
reverse operation (Fig. 7)
6. Take out set screw (10).
1. Disassemble the tractor between the engine and 7. Take out the shaft (13).
the gearbox (see chapter 2). 8. Remove the transfer pinion (15), washers (12),
2. Drain the gearbox and the rear axle. needle bearings (14) and spacer (11).
3. Remove the input unit (see chapter 5).
4. Disassemble the locking device, the selector rail
and the shuttle fork (see chapter 5). Disassembling the reverse shuttle (Fig. 8)
5. Disassemble the Speedshift unit (see chapter 5).
9. Take off circlip (25).
10. Remove the shim(s) (1).
11. Drive the secondary shaft out of the pinion /
synchromesh assembly.
12. Take out the pinion / synchromesh assembly (18)
from the housing. Remove the washer (8), marking
its positioning.
13. Fit the pinion / synchromesh assembly on a work-
bench.
14. Separate (Fig. 9):
- pinion (5);
- ring (7);
- needle bearing (6);
- cones (brake) (4) and (39);
- coupling flanges (22);
- pinion (23);
- needle bearing (20).
15. If required, extract the ball bearing (24) from the
secondary shaft (19).
Remove the washer (35), marking its positioning.
Contents
6 4 18 22 39 20
13 14 15 14
26
10
12 11 12
MA-05-05044A
7 5 23
Fig. 7 MA-05-05042A Fig. 9
25
18
MA-05-05041A
Fig. 8

Contents
Reassembling the reverse shuttle

16. Clean and check all components. Replace any
defective parts. 19
17. Check that the ports and channels of the
secondary shaft (19), shaft (13) and housing (26)
are not blocked.
18. Lubricate the secondary shaft, the ring (7) and
needle bearings (6) and (20). 35
24
19. If removed, place the washer (35) on the
secondary shaft (19) as shown in Fig. 10.
Fit the ball bearing (24) home against the washer
(35) (Fig. 10), using a press and a locally made
sleeve (internal Ø = 47 mm; L = 60 mm).
IMPORTANT: The sleeve is used to push against the
internal cage of the ball bearing. MA-05-05043A
20. Assemble (Fig. 11):
Fig. 10
- pinion (5);
- ring (7);
- needle bearing (6);
- cones (brake) (4) and (39); 6 4 18 22 39 20
- coupling flanges (22);
- pinion (23);
- needle bearing (20).
21. Refit the ball bearing (9) in the housing.
22. Refit the pinion (5) (23) / synchromesh (18)
assembly and the washer (8) in the housing 8
(Fig. 12).
Turn the lubricating grooves of the washer (8)
towards the pinion (5) (Fig. 12).
23. Position the washer centrally (8).
24. Insert the secondary shaft (19) (Fig. 12) into the
pinion / synchromesh (18) assembly through the
bore in the front of the gearbox.
25. Turn the shaft from left to right and vice versa to 7 5 23
MA-05-05042A Fig. 11
partially engage the splines of the secondary shaft
in those of the synchromesh.
26. With the help of an operator, install the fitted unit
on a table press.
27. Position a locally made sleeve
(internal Ø = 44 mm; L = 32 mm) under the
internal ring of the ball bearing (9).
Contents
28. Fit the sleeve used at operation 19 on the internal

ring of the ball bearing (24).
29. Gradually fit home the secondary shaft (19) using a
press until resistance is felt. 8
Simultaneously check that pinions rotate
smoothly.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended to use a press and
sleeves to fit the secondary shaft without
damaging it, and to avoid exposing the ball bear-
ings to excessive force when fitting.
30. Fit the shim(s) (1) removed during disassembly,
and the circlip.
REMINDER: If it is necessary to shim the secondary
shaft (19), see § E.
31. Check the axial clearance and rotation of the
pinions (5) and (23).
Manually check the rotation of the shaft (19).
5
Reassembling the transfer pinion (15) for 18

reverse operation (Fig. 13)
23
32. Slide the needle bearings (14) separated by the
spacer (11) into the transfer pinion(15).
33. Install the assembled transfer pinion in the housing
(26). Slide a washer (12) onto each of its faces.
34. Fit the shaft (13).
35. Lightly smear the thread of the set screw (10) with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten to a torque of
28 - 43 Nm. 19
36. Manually check the axial clearance and backlash of
the reverse transfer pinion.
MA-05-05045A
Fig. 12
13 14 15 14
26
10
12 11 12
MA-05-05044A
Fig. 13

Contents
E . Shimming the secondary shaft

37. Secure the unit in a clamp fitted with soft jaws.
Preparing for shimming

38. Manually check for clearance on the secondary
shaft (19) in the housing (26).
If there is no clearance, momentarily remove one
or several shims (1).
19
Shimming
39. Position the dial gauge feeler pin on the end of the
MA-05-05046A
shaft (19) (Fig. 14). Fig. 14
40. Pull hard on the secondary shaft (19) to correctly
position the ball bearing (24) against the circlip (25).
41. Set the dial gauge to zero.
42. Repeat operation 40 while pushing to bring the ball
bearing (9) up against the shoulder of the housing
(26).
J1 = 0,05 / 0,20 mm
43. Depending on the clearance measured, select a
new thickness of shim(s) (1) to obtain a clearance
of J1 = 0.05 to 0.20 mm (Fig. 15).
NOTE: If possible, shim the secondary shaft close
to the minimum tolerance value.
45. Position the final shim(s) (1) selected during opera-
tion 43 on the bearing (24).
46. Refit the circlip (25). Check that it is positioned
correctly at the bottom of the groove.
MA-05-05047A
Fig. 15
Contents
47. Refit:
- the Speedshift unit (see chapter 5);
- the shuttle fork, the selector rail and its locking
device (see chapter 5).
48. Refit the input unit (see chapter 5).
51. Carry out a road test on all controls.
52. Check the oil tightness of the seals and hydraulic
unions.

Contents
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
05C02 - GBA20 Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removing and refitting the forward clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
C . Disassembling and reassembling the forward clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
D . Shimming the forward clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
E . Disassembling and reassembling the reverse clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
F . Disassembling and reassembling the driving pinion - Shimming the shaft . . . . . . 24
G . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Construction
A . General
The forward and reverse clutches of the Power Shuttle
The Power Shuttle, also called “ISC”, consists of two are of different design.
electrohydraulically controlled clutches. It is designed
to enable operating direction reversal under load. It can Forward clutch
be fitted to all 5400 tractors.
The forward clutch consists of:
- a conventional type oil-bath multidisc clutch
The Power Shuttle transmits the drive from the engine
consisting of a cover (33), the rear side of which is
to the mainshaft mounted on the front of the main
splined to assemble the input sun gear (53),
gearbox by means of pinions located respectively to
the rear of the input unit and at the gearbox input. - an input shaft (19) crossing the spacer (4) which
separates the engine flywheel from the transmission
oil. The shaft is constantly meshed with the damper
A lever located to the left, under the steering wheel, secured to the engine flywheel. It is splined so as to
controls the Power Shuttle. rotate with the clutch unit (18) comprising the inter-
Depending on the position selected by the operator mediate plates (30) and the discs (29) in which
(forward, neutral, reverse), the lever manages the piston (28) moves,
proportional solenoid valves of the forward and reverse - a drive hub (27) comprising the discs (29), which is
clutches by means of the electronic system of the secured to the primary shaft (55). The forward clutch
tractor. is centred in the cover (38) of the reverse clutch by
ball bearing (32).
The solenoid valves are located to the front and to the
right of the gearbox on a clutch unit containing the Reverse clutch
Speedshift hydraulic control system.
The reverse clutch consists of:
A filter (60 microns) located under the selector cover,
upstream from the clutch unit, provides complemen- - an epicyclic gear train consisting of three double
tary filtering for oil supplying the solenoid valves pinion gears (52) and three single pinion gears (59),
(clutches, Speedshift). - a hydraulic braking device for the planet carrier (49),
- a cover (38) supporting the forward clutch and with
A progressivity sensor screwed to the box housing an inner side machined to assemble hydraulic parts.
sends information on shaft rotational speed to the
electronic system. The double and single pinion gears (52) (59) of the
epicyclic gear train mesh respectively on the input and
Shifting of any forward gear to the corresponding output sun gears (53) (58). The pins (50) are
reverse gear, or vice versa, is easy without declutching idle-mounted and held in the planet carrier by
or stopping the tractor. This “assisted” gear reversal plates (63). A central drilled channel and radial ports
enables gradual changing of the operating direction, supply lubrication to the needle bearings (60).
even at high travel speeds without abrupt changes in
speed. The clutches slow down tractor movement The planet carrier braking device consists of an annular
until the required speed is reached so that the direction piston (39) and a plate (43) that is loaded by springs
of travel can be reversed. (62) and discs (47) integral with the planet carrier
through splines.
The conventional hydraulically operated clutch pedal is
replaced by an electrohydraulically operated manoeu- The intermediate plates (46) are immobilised by the
vring pedal. This pedal modulates the pressure in the pins (71).
forward or reverse clutches through the electronic
system of the tractor and thus facilitates precise move-
ments such as implement hitching.

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Fixed unit
The fixed unit (1) has two functions:
- it receives the low pressure supplying the forward
clutch via the pipe (74), 2 1
- it acts as casing for the clutch lubricating and cooling
pump.
The pipes (31) connecting the pump housing (1) and
the cover (38) lubricate the reverse clutch braking
device.
The shims (3) located between the closing spacer (4)
and the fixed unit (1) provide end play for the forward
clutch.
Drive transmission
Drive from the Power Shuttle is transmitted to a
mechanical unit located in the rear compartment of the
input box.
This element comprises a secondary shaft (1) which is
secured to the pinion (2) by splines (Fig. 1).
The shaft is fitted on two taper roller bearings "R", and
is carried by two bearings of the input unit.
The shims (3) (Fig. 1) fitted between the cover and the
unit are used to preload the bearings.
3 R
MA-05-06010A
Fig. 1
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Operating principle a small permanent bleed starting from 13 bar to

provide an automatic bleed of the hydraulic supply of
Forward clutch piston (39).
When the lever under the steering wheel is in the
Forward position, the relevant solenoid valve is acti- Lubrication
vated and supplies a pressure that moves piston (28).
This, in turn, compresses the intermediate plates (30) As the piston (39) moves, it operates spools (44) that
and the discs (29) against cover (33). act as valves and compress springs (45) via the plate
(43). The spools have a drilled centre channel and radial
The drive from the engine to the gearbox complies
ports, allowing oil to flow to the channels in the cover
with the following kinematics:
(38) and the channels in the front cover of the input
- input shaft (19) splined to unit (18), unit, thus lubricating the discs (47) and the interme-
- unit housing (18), diate plates (46). Lubrication of the mechanical parts of
- intermediate plates (30), the epicyclic gear train is via the lubricating system of
- discs (29) compressed by the piston (28), the input unit.
- hub (27), At the same time, the lubricating oil flow to the discs
- primary shaft (55), (29) and intermediate plates (30) of the forward clutch
is stopped, thus preventing any possible driving of the
- main unit mainshaft via the input pinion.
discs through a drag effect.
Simultaneously, the pressure applied behind the
piston (39) of the braking device drops and the planet
carrier assembly (discs (47), intermediate plates (46) Neutral position
and epicyclic gear train) rotate freely. In neutral position, the supply to the solenoid valves is
cut, placing the forward and reverse clutches at rest
Lubrication and eliminating transmission of the engine drive to the
gearbox.
During forward operation, the oil flow from the centre
The oil flow is also interrupted. The pressure in the
housing via the pump (14) is directed towards the inter-
circuit opens the valve (1) (Fig. 18) and directs the oil to
mediate plates (30) and the discs (29) via the ports of
the housing.
the forward clutch unit (18) opened by movement of
piston (28).
At the same time, lubrication of the braking device of NOTE: After replacement of the solenoid valve or its
the planet carrier (discs (47) and intermediate plates solenoid, the Power Shuttle hydraulic unit, the power
(46)) of the reverse clutch is interrupted. shuttle unit or one of its component or the transmis-
sion control unit, it is necessary to calibrate the clutch
(see section 11).
Reverse clutch
When the previously mentioned lever is moved from
the Forward to Reverse position, the solenoid valve
concerned is activated and supplies the piston (39) of
the braking device of the planet carrier. The piston then
presses on plate (43) which compresses discs (47) and
the intermediate plates (46) against the front cover of
the input unit and stops the rotation of the planet
carrier. The drive from the engine is directly trans-
mitted to the cover (33) that is integral with the input
sun gear (53) via splines, without passing through the
discs and intermediate plates of the forward clutch.
Simultaneously, the oil pressure in the piston chamber
(28) drops and frees the discs (29) and intermediate
plates (30).
The input sun gear (53) then drives the double pinion
gears (52) freely mounted on the pins (50) which, in
turn, drive the single pinion gear (59), integral with
primary shaft (55) thus reversing rotation of the output
sun gear (58) splined to the primary shaft (55). The
primary shaft then sends the drive from the engine to
the mainshaft of the main gearbox via the input pinion.
NOTE: A valve screwed to the top of cover (38) ensures

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Parts list (Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4) (54) Snap ring

(55) Primary shaft
(1) Pump casing
(56) Snap ring
(2) Pump cover
(57) Ball bearing
(3) Shim(s)
(58) Output sun gear
(4) Spacer
(59) Single pinion gear
(5) Locking ring
(6) Splined ring
(61) Snap rings
(7) O’ring
(62) Springs
(8) Anti-extrusion ring
(63) Stop plates
(9) Snap rings
(64) Screw
(10) Oil seal
(65) Snap ring
(11) Circlip
(66) Screw
(12) Ball bearing
(67) O’ring
(13) Screw
(68) Ball bearing
(14) Lubricating pump
(69) Seal
(15) Sealing rings
(70) Screw
(16) Ring
(71) Pins
(17) Locating pin
(72) Union
(18) Forward clutch unit
(73) 1.5 bar valve
(19) Input shaft
(74) Pipe
(20) Cotter pin
(75) O’rings
(21) Circlip
(76) Pipe
(22) Ball bearing
(77) Screw
(23) Snap ring
(78) Pipe
(24) Seal
(79) Screw
(25) Belleville washers
(80) Flange
(26) Indexing ports
(81) Seal
(27) Drive hub
(82) Strainer
(28) Forward clutch piston
(83) Cover
(29) Forward clutch discs
(84) Plug
(30) Forward clutch intermediate plates
(85) Seal
(31) Lubricating pipe
(86) Pipe
(32) Ball bearing
(87) Pipe
(33) Forward clutch cover
(88) Transfer pipe
(89) Seal (Loctite)
(35) Rivets
(90) Diagnostics connector (lubrication)
(36) Seal
(91) Union
(37) Cover
(92) O’rings
(38) Reverse clutch cover
(93) Union
(39) Reverse clutch piston
(94) Pipe
(40) Rivets
(95) O’rings
(41) Seal
(96) Dust seal
(42) Seal
(97) Screw
(43) Plate
(98) Snap ring
(44) Spools
(99) Screw
(45) Springs
(100) Ring
(46) Reverse clutch intermediate plates
(101) Elbow union
(47) Reverse clutch discs
(49) Planet carrier
(51) Spacers
(53) Input sun gear
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Overall view
32 35 37 34 36 38 40 42 43 44 45
9 11 12 13 14 15 16
33 46
31 47
10 18 30 49
9 29 48
8 28 50
7 51
19 52
20 26 53
19 98
24 55
6 5 4 3 2 1
25 54
100 56
38 70 18 57
69 58
38 46
68 59
67 60
21 61
23 63
22 62
71
66 27 65 64 95 37 96 97 41 39
MA-05-06017A
Fig. 2

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle

(55) Primary shaft
(1) Pump casing
(56) Snap ring
(2) Pump cover
(57) Ball bearing
(3) Shim(s)
(4) Spacer
(5) Locking ring
(6) Splined ring
(61) Snap rings
(7) O’ring
(62) Springs
(63) Stop plates
(9) Snap rings
(64) Screw
(10) Oil seal
(65) Snap ring
(11) Circlip
(66) Screw
(12) Ball bearing
(67) O’ring
(13) Screw
(68) Ball bearing
(69) Seal
(15) Sealing rings
(70) Screw
(16) Ring
(71) Pins
(17) Locating pin
(72) Union
(73) 1.5 bar valve
(19) Input shaft
(74) Pipe
(20) Cotter pin
(75) O’rings
(21) Circlip
(76) Pipe
(22) Ball bearing
(77) Screw
(23) Snap ring
(78) Pipe
(24) Seal
(79) Screw
(80) Flange
(26) Indexing ports
(81) Seal
(27) Drive hub
(82) Strainer
(83) Cover
(84) Plug
(85) Seal
(86) Pipe
(32) Ball bearing
(87) Pipe
(88) Transfer pipe
(89) Seal (Loctite)
(35) Rivets
(36) Seal
(91) Union
(37) Cover
(92) O’rings
(93) Union
(94) Pipe
(40) Rivets
(95) O’rings
(41) Seal
(96) Dust seal
(42) Seal
(97) Screw
(43) Plate
(98) Snap ring
(44) Spools
(99) Screw
(45) Springs
(100) Ring
(101) Elbow union
(49) Planet carrier
(51) Spacers
(53) Input sun gear
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Overall view
72 31 73 93 31
73 92
91
101
90
94
89
88
87 74
86
76 75 74
78 79
77 F
80 80
MA-05-02006A 85 84 83 82 81
Fig. 3

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle

(55) Primary shaft
(1) Pump casing
(56) Snap ring
(2) Pump cover
(57) Ball bearing
(3) Shim(s)
(4) Spacer
(5) Locking ring
(6) Splined ring
(61) Snap rings
(7) O’ring
(62) Springs
(63) Stop plates
(9) Snap rings
(64) Screw
(10) Oil seal
(65) Snap ring
(11) Circlip
(66) Screw
(12) Ball bearing
(67) O’ring
(13) Screw
(68) Ball bearing
(69) Seal
(15) Sealing rings
(70) Screw
(16) Ring
(71) Pins
(17) Locating pin
(72) Union
(73) 1.5 bar valve
(19) Input shaft
(74) Pipe
(20) Cotter pin
(75) O’rings
(21) Circlip
(76) Pipe
(22) Ball bearing
(77) Screw
(23) Snap ring
(78) Pipe
(24) Seal
(79) Screw
(80) Flange
(26) Indexing ports
(81) Seal
(27) Drive hub
(82) Strainer
(83) Cover
(84) Plug
(85) Seal
(86) Pipe
(32) Ball bearing
(87) Pipe
(88) Transfer pipe
(89) Seal (Loctite)
(35) Rivets
(36) Seal
(91) Union
(37) Cover
(92) O’rings
(93) Union
(94) Pipe
(40) Rivets
(95) O’rings
(41) Seal
(96) Dust seal
(42) Seal
(97) Screw
(43) Plate
(98) Snap ring
(44) Spools
(99) Screw
(45) Springs
(100) Ring
(101) Elbow union
(49) Planet carrier
(51) Spacers
(53) Input sun gear
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Exploded view
65
45
33 44
27
54
53
32
29
30
5 46
9 62
8
47
7
8 71
6 49
9 17
43 57
42 98
41 56
36 63
39 52
15
25 38 60
70 51
60
50
63
21
34
19
99
22
2
13 28
24 59
23
69 60
100
18 51
12
66 60
11
20 50
68 61
16 58
1 61
MA-05-02007A
3 14
Fig. 4

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Removal
B . Removing and refitting the
forward clutch 6. Remove the forward clutch (2) (Fig. 5) and pull it
from the housing using a locally made tool (see §
Preliminary operations G).

the gearbox (see section 2).
2. Drain the gearbox and the centre housing.
Refitting
3. Remove the spacer (4) from the gearbox (see 7. Clean the components. Replace any defective
section 3). parts.
4. Remove the pipes (86) and (87). NOTE : If forward clutch shimming is necessary,
Detach and remove the covers (37) (83), the flange refer to § D.
(80) and the pipe (78) (Fig. 3). 8. Check that PTO shaft (1) is installed (Fig. 5).
5. Remove the pipes (31) (74) (76) (94) (Fig. 3). 9. Refit the clutch using the tool used for removal.
MA-05-02008A
Fig. 5

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Final operations
C . Disassembling and reassembling
10. Replace the seals (67) (75). the forward clutch
11. Refit the pipes (31) (74) (76) (94).
12. Replace the O'rings (95). Disassembly
13. Clean the mating faces on the gearbox housing 23. Separate cover (33) from unit (18). Remove clutch
and the cover (37). Smear the mating face of the discs (29) and intermediate plates (30).
housing with Loctite 510 or equivalent.
24. Remove the front snap ring (9). Remove the
14. Replace the dust seal (96) and the O'ring (81). splined ring (6), the anti-extrusion rings (8) and seal
15. Fit the pipe (78), the flange (80) and the covers (37) (7).
(83) previously coated with Loctite 510 or equiva- 25. Take off circlip (11). Remove the cover (2) from the
lent. Tighten the screws to a torque of pump (14) complete with bearing (12).
84 - 110 Nm.
26. Pull the lubricating pump out of the pump unit (1)
16. Tighten screw (97) moderately and screws (79) to and take it apart from the clutch housing (18).
a torque of 44 - 53 Nm.
27. Remove seal rings (15). If necessary, extract ring
17. Reconnect the pipes (86) (87). (16) and remove the 1.5 bar valve (73).
18. Refit the gearbox spacer (4) (see section 3). 28. Place the partially disassembled clutch on a suit-
19. Top up the oil level in the housings. Check it using able locally made fixture (Fig. 6 and § G).
the gauge at the rear of the centre housing. 29. Compress the Belleville washers (25) and remove
20. Assemble the tractor between the engine and the the rear snap ring (9) (Fig. 6).
gearbox (see section 2). 30. Remove locking ring (5). Gradually release the
21. Carry out a road test of the Power Shuttle and high Belleville washers.
and low Speedshift ranges. 31. Split unit (18) fitted with piston (28) from shaft (19).
22. Check tightness of the mating faces on the spacer 32. Remove the Belleville washers and the ring (100).
(4), covers (37) (83) and the hydraulic unions.
33. Remove snap ring (23). Pull out the shaft (19)
complete with bearing (22) from hub (27).
34. Take off circlip (21). Extract bearing (22) from shaft
(19).
35. Remove the piston.
Remove seals (24) (69). Discard them.
If necessary, extract the bearing (68) from the unit
(1) of the pump (14).
36. If necessary, remove snap ring (54) and remove
the input sun gear (53). Remove snap ring (65).
Extract bearing (32).
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
25 100
MA-05-02009A
Fig. 6

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Reassembly
37. Make sure that pin (20) is fitted.
38. If removed, fit the bearing (32) on cover (33), using
a press and a suitable tool. Fit snap ring (65).
39. If disassembled, refit bearing (68).
40. Lubricate the new seals (24) (69) and fit them on
the piston.
41. Fit the piston (28), using a pin of suitable diameter
to align the index holes bored in the unit (18) and
piston (Fig. 7).
NOTE: The angular position of the piston depends
on the position of unit (18) lubricating ports.
Complete the installation of the piston by gradually
and alternately striking around its top rim with a
plastic mallet.
Check that no fragments of the seal remain after
Fig. 7
assembly,
42. Using a suitable fixture, force fit the bearing (22) on
the shaft (19), with the sealed side directed
towards the reverse clutch. Fit the circlip (21).
43. Put the assembly (shaft, bearing, circlip) in the hub
(27). Fit snap ring (23).
44. Refit the ring (100) and the Belleville washers as
shown in Fig. 8.
45. Assemble unit (18) fitted with the piston (28) on
shaft (19).
46. Compress the Belleville washers using the same
procedure as in operation 28. Position the ring (5),
aligning two of the flat sections with those of the
unit (18). Replace the rear snap ring (9) and
correctly position it in the bottom of the groove. 100
47. Remove the fixture.
48. Check that the seal rings (15) turn freely in their
grooves. Fit the seal rings, lightly coated with
miscible grease, making sure that they do not MA-05-02010A
Fig. 8
protrude beyond the rim of unit (18).
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
49. If required, fit the 1.5 bar valve (73). Tighten to a

Insert ring (16) using a suitable fixture, with the
chamfer “C” turned as shown in Fig. 9.
50. Lubricate the ring. Assemble pump unit (1) on unit
(18).
51. Lubricate pump (14) with transmission oil and posi-
tion it aligning the flat sections of the rotor with
those on the unit (18).
52. Manually check the angular movement of the rotor
on the flat sections of unit (18).
53. Fit the bearing (12) on the cover (2) of the pump. Fit
the cover. Install circlip (11) and screws (13) and
tighten to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
54. Lubricate and install a new assembly (O'ring (7)
and anti-extrusion ring (8)). Slide on the splined ring
(6). Fit a new front snap ring (9).
Fig. 9
55. Soak the discs (29) in a transmission oil bath for
approximately 1 hour. Check that they are correctly
impregnated.
56. Position the intermediate plates (30), aligning the
tabs and the discs (29) on the hub (27) (see remark 30 27 29
and Fig. 10).
NOTE 1: The number of discs and intermediate
plates depends on the tractor type.
Power N° of discs N° of
(CV) intermediate
plates
65 to 105 4 5
110 5 6
NOTE 2: The forward clutch cover (33) differs
according to the number of discs.
57. Put the forward clutch cover (33) on the unit (18)
MA-05-02011A
with Loctite 549 or equivalent, with the tabs of the Fig. 10
intermediate plates inserted in the notches of the
forward clutch cover.
Fit and tighten the screws (66) to a torque of
25.5 - 34.5 Nm.
58. Manually check the rotation of the hub (27).
59. If necessary, refit the input sun gear (53) and fit
snap ring (54).

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
D . Shimming the forward clutch

This operation consists in obtaining an end play J1 of 65 38
0.60 to 0.80 mm between the pump cover (2) and the
spacer (4) (Fig. 11).
Remove the PTO shaft to perform this operation.
60. Install the clutch on the cover (38) of the reverse

clutch, using the tool used in Fig. 5, § B.
61. Fit a 2 mm shim (3) on cover the (2) (Fig. 11).
3
62. Lubricate the lip of seal (10). Protect the lip of the
seal by fitting a protector (see section 3) on the
splines of the shaft (19). Fit two guide screws on 19
opposite sides of the gearbox housing and tempo-
rarily fit the spacer (4) without Loctite. Gradually
tighten several screws.
63. Place a dial gauge at the end of shaft (19) and
check the clearance by moving the shaft sideways
(Fig. 11).
IMPORTANT: Check that the snap ring (65) of the
bearing (32) is correctly in contact with the cover
(38) (Fig. 11).
64. Remove spacer (4).
Depending on the reading previously obtained with
the dial gauge, define a new thickness for shim(s) 4
(3) in order to obtain a J1 clearance of between
0.60 and 0.80 mm (Fig. 11). 2 32
J1 = 0,60/0,80 mm
MA-05-02012A
Fig. 11
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Disassembly (Fig. 12)

E . Disassembling and reassembling
the reverse clutch 67. Remove the screws (70) and the cover (38).
68. Recover the spools (44) and the springs (45)
Preliminary operations (Fig. 12).
69. Remove the large springs (62) and the pins (71).
65. Remove the forward clutch (see § B).
70. On cover (38), remove:
66. Remove the input unit (see section 5).
- the plate (43),
- the seal (42) and discard it,
- the piston (39),
- the seals (36) (41) and discard them,
- the unions (72), the valve (1) (Fig. 18) and the
O'ring (75) of the 17 bar supply port (Fig. 3).
70 61
37
38
58
99
56
34
71
50
17
44
62
45
55
61
Fig. 12
MA-05-06016A

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
71. Immobilise the planet carrier (49) with a holding

tool, ref. 3378240M1 (see Fig. 13 and § G).
72. Remove screws (99) securing the cover (34)
(Fig. 12 and Fig. 13) and remove it.
73. Remove clutch discs (47) and intermediate plates
(46).
74. Separate the output sun gear (58), held by the snap
rings (61), from the primary shaft (55) (Fig. 12).
75. Remove snap ring (56) (Fig. 12).
76. Remove the planet carrier (49) with the double and
single pinion gears (52) (59).
77. On the planet carrier (49), remove:
- the plates (63),
- the double pinion gears (52) and the pins (50).
Mark their position,
- the single pinion gears (59) and pins (50). Mark
their position, Fig. 13
- the snap ring (98) and bearing (57).
NOTE: The rotation of planet gears around the pins
(50) is on two rows of needle bearings (60), joined
and separated by a spacer (51).
IMPORTANT: When the planet gears and the shafts
have been removed, check that no needle or
spacer remains in the planet carrier.
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Reassembly
defective parts.
79. Check that the ports in the pinion gear pins and the
channels in the planet carriers are not blocked.
80. Where necessary, fit the pinion gears with two
rows of needle bearings coated with miscible
grease and separated by a spacer.
81. On the planet carrier, refit:
- bearing (57) and snap ring (98),
- double and single pinion gears (52) (59) posi-
tioned as shown in Fig. 14,
- pins (50), with the lubricating ports placed facing
those in the planet carrier (49).
NOTE: Each end of the pins (50) is provided with:
- a port, one of which is closed off by a rivet (35) Fig. 14
while the other is used for pinion gear lubrica-
tion,
- a flat section and a shoulder that stop any pin
rotation or any side movement.
82. Install the partially assembled planet carrier. Fit the
snap ring (56) and the rear snap ring (61).
83. Position marks "R" (punch marks) on the double
pinion gears (52) (Fig. 15) so that they pass through
a centerline meeting at "O" (Fig. 15).
IMPORTANT: The mark on the front side of the
pinion gear corresponds to the alignment of the
two splines. It is mandatory to respect the posi-
tions of the punch marks during assembly of the
output sun gear (58).
Fig. 15

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
84. Slide the output sun gear (58), correctly turned as

shown in Fig. 2, on to the primary shaft (55),
making sure that the punch marks of each pinion
gear remain in the required position.
85. Fit the front snap ring (61).
86. Soak the discs (47) in a transmission oil bath for
approximately 1 hour. Check that they are correctly
impregnated.
87. Fit the discs (47) and the intermediate plates (46)
depending on the type of tractor (Fig. 16).
Power N° of discs N° of
(CV) intermediate
plates
65 to 105 3 2
110 4 3
88. Check the presence of the locating pin (17) Fig. 16
(Fig. 12).
89. Refit the cover (34). Check that it is correctly posi-
tioned on the pins (50) of the pinion gears and in
the locating pin (Fig. 12).
90. Immobilise the planet carrier, using the same
method as used during disassembly.
91. Install and tighten the screw (99) Fig. 12) to 36 - 46
Nm with its thread lightly greased with Loctite 242
or equivalent.
92. On cover (38), check for the presence of rivets (40)
at the end of the channels.
Refit:
- piston (39) with new lubricated seals (36) (41),
gradually and alternately striking around the
piston rim with a plastic mallet. Check that no
fragments of the seal remain after assembly,
- plate (43) with a new lubricated seal (42), aligning
the holes of the plate with those in the cover
(38). Insert the plate using the same method as
used for piston (39).
NOTE: The thickness of the plate (43) differs
according to the number of discs and interme-
diate plates.
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
93. Install the pins (71) and the springs (62) (Fig. 17) in
their respective location on the input unit.
94. Smear the spools (44) and the springs (45) with
miscible grease. Fit and stick the spools in each
compartment of the cover (38), with the points
towards the unions (72) (Fig. 2). Slide and stick a
spring (45) in each spool.
95. On the external face of the cover (38), place three
sufficiently long and equally spaced studs in the
holes provided for screws (64).
96. Install and position the cover, with the valve port
(1) directed upwards (Fig. 18).
97. Before fitting screws (70), it is mandatory to
check that the spools (44) slide freely in each
compartment of the front cover on the input unit.
To do this, compress the springs (45), using a
screwdriver passed through the tapped holes of
the unions (72). If the springs cannot be
compressed, investigate the cause..
98. Pretighten screws (70).
99. During pretightening, check that the spools (44)
still slide freely. Also check that each end of the
(large) springs (62) is correctly housed in its respec-
tive seat.
100.Tighten screws (70) to a final torque of 36 - 46 Nm
(Fig. 12).
After completing the tightening, check again that
each spool can move freely and restore its initial
position.
IMPORTANT: A spool valve blocked open can limit or
interrupt lubrication of the forward clutch when
operating.
101.It is mandatory to install and tighten the valve (1)
fitted with its seal to 6 - 8 Nm max. (Fig. 18). Fit
and tighten the unions (72). Fig. 17
102.Install the input unit (see section 5) and the
forward clutch (see § B).
Fig. 18

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Reassembly
F . Disassembling and reassembling
the driving pinion - Shimming the 112.Check that the ports of the secondary shaft (1) and
the housing channels (7) are not blocked.
shaft
113.Clean and check all components. Replace any
defective parts.
114.Lubricate the cones and the cups of the bearing
103.Remove the forward clutch (see § B). before assembling.
104.Remove the input unit (see section 5). 115.Fit the cup (10) in the housing. Fit the bearing cone
105.Remove the reverse clutch (see § E). (9) in the cup.
106.Remove the Speedshift unit (see section 5). 116.Position the pinion (2), correctly turned in the
housing (Fig. 19).
117.Fit the bearing cone (6) against the shoulder on
shaft (1). Slide the shaft through the pinion (2) and
bearing (9).
107.Remove the screws (5) and the stop plate (8). 118.Position the cup (4).
108.Recover the shims (3) and the cup (4). Determine the thickness of shims (3) to obtain a
109.Pull out the secondary shaft (1), fitted with the temporary clearance of 0.10 to 0.15 mm approx.
bearing cone, (6) and the unit (7). for final shimming with pre-loading. Position the
110.Note and mark the assembly order of thedriving shims and the stop plate (8). Tighten the screws to
pinion (2). Remove the pinion. a torque of 25 - 32 Nm.
111.Recover the bearing cone (9). Extract the cup (10). 119.Put the unit (7) in a vice.
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
3 8 1 5
6 7
4
2
9 10
MA-05-06011A
Fig. 19

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Shimming the shaft (1) (Fig. 20)

120.Position the dial gauge feeler pin on the end of the
shaft (Fig. 20).
121.Pull the shaft, turning it to and fro from left to right
to correctly “seat” the cones in the bearing cups.
122.Set the dial gauge to zero.
123.Repeat the operation 121, this time by pushing.
124.Depending on the clearance reading, select a thick-
ness of shims (3) to obtain the following P1
preload: P1 = 0.05 to 0.15 mm (Fig. 20).
NOTE : If possible, shim to the maximum toler-
ance.
125.Take out the screws (5). Remove stop plate (8).
126.Position the final shims (3) selected during opera-
tion 124 on the unit (7). Install the plate (8). Install
and definitively tighten the screws (5) to a torque
of 25 - 35 Nm, with their threads lightly greased
with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
127.Manually check the rotation of the shaft (1).
Final operations
128.Refit the Speedshift unit (see section 5).
129.Refit the reverse clutch (see § E).
130.Refit the input unit (see section 5).
131.Refit the forward clutch (see § B).
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
P1 = 0,05 / 0,15 mm
MA-05-06012A
Fig. 20

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
G . Service tools
• 3378240M1: Planet carrier holding tool (Fig. 21)
Locally made tools

• Belleville washer compression tool (Fig. 22)
(1) U iron profile: 60
(2) Threaded rod: Ø 8
(3) Round iron machined with the following dimen-
sions: Ø = 36, L = 60
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
• Sleeve for removing and refitting the clutch

assembly (Fig. 23)
(1) Pipe: Tu52B outer Ø 42.4 thickness 5
(2) Pipe: Tu52B outer Ø 48.3 thickness 2.9
Fig. 23

Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle
Contents
GBA20 Speedshift with Power Shuttle
05D02 - GBA20 Speedshift with Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
C . Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
D . Removing and disassembling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
E . Removing, splitting and disassembling the planet carrier assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 14
F . Disassembling the hydraulic cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
G . Assembling the planet carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
H . Refitting the hydraulic cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
I . Assembling the planet carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
J . Assembling and refitting the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
K . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 05D02.1

Contents
05D02.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
A . General 30 km/h 40 km/h

12 12
The Speedshift unit is mounted between the reverse F F
clutch of the power shuttle and the mechanical unit 21 18 18 21
consisting of the drive pinion (see chapter 5).
This is a hydraulic controlled gear shift system
providing two input gear ratios to the gearbox. This
function is provided by:
- a multidisc hydraulic clutch;
- an epicyclic gear train consisting of a planet carrier
with three double pinion gears, an input sun gear and
an output sun gear.
- a planet-carrier hydraulic braking system.
The design of the Speedshift allows for gear shifting 36
39 39 36
while driving without declutching, even at full load. 6 7 7 6
MA-05-06019A Fig. 1
Specific feature of epicyclic gear train
assembly
Legislation in force in certain countries limits speed to
30 kph. In this case, the sun gears (6) and (7) and pinion
gears (12) of the Speedshift epicyclic gear train should
be positioned as in Fig. 1.

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 2 and Fig. 3)

(1) Seals
(2) Rivets
(3 Screw
(4) Ring
(5) Secondary shaft
(6) Input sun gear (30 kph)
Output sun gear (40 kph)
(11) Rivet
(13) Unit
(14) Spacers
(15) Hub
(20) Clutch plate
(21) Brake disc
(22) O’ring
(23) O’ring
(24) Screw
(26) O’ring
(27) Front cover
(28) Clutch piston
(29) O’ring
(31) Rings
(32) Needle bearing
(33) Ring carrier
(34) Screw
(36) Primary shaft
(37) Circlip
(38) Tab washer
(39) Washer
(40) Ball
(41) Screw
(42) Discs
(43) Spring washers
(48) Brake piston
(50) Planet carrier assembly
Contents
Overall view
11 27 19 33 36 32
22 48 23 34 41 37 38 40 31
39
43 42 15 29 25
1
26
21
28
20
30
18
17
3
12
13
16
50
14
7
16
6
24
5
4 10 9 8 17
MA-05-00357A
Fig. 2

Contents

(1) Seals
(2) Rivets
(3 Screw
(4) Ring
(5) Secondary shaft
(11) Rivet
(13) Unit
(14) Spacers
(15) Hub
(20) Clutch plate
(21) Brake disc
(22) O’ring
(23) O’ring
(24) Screw
(26) O’ring
(27) Front cover
(28) Clutch piston
(29) O’ring
(31) Rings
(32) Needle bearing
(33) Ring carrier
(34) Screw
(36) Primary shaft
(37) Circlip
(38) Tab washer
(39) Washer
(40) Ball
(41) Screw
(42) Discs
(43) Spring washers
(48) Brake piston
Contents
Exploded view
41 30
34 42
1 43
30
42
27 43
11
2
19
36 31
10
37
38
32
40
33
39 4
9
3
18 30
20 28
21 29
23 26
48 25
22
50
17
8
16
14
12
16
17
6
7
5
15
13
24
MA-05-00358A
Fig. 3

Contents
Page left blank intentionally
Contents
As the oil pressure has dropped, the planet carrier (50)

B . Operation is locked in rotation by the Belleville washer (18) which
compresses the intermediate plate (20) and immobi-
Mechanical action: boosting lises disc (21) splined with the planet carrier assembly.
In this position (Fig. 4), the hydraulic devices are not Drive from the primary shaft (36) is fed to the input sun
supplied and the Speedshift operates in a mechanical gear (7) splined to the shaft. The sun gear (7) drives the
manner. The oil in the chamber of pistons (28) and (48) double pinion gears (12) idle-mounted on shafts (8).
returns to the housing via channel "C" and the solenoid The pinion gears in turn drive the output sun gear (6)
valve mounted on the power shuttle clutch unit. This firmly attached to the secondary shaft (5), gear ratio
clutch unit is located to the front right-hand side of the 1.26.
48 12 8
28
36
21
20 18 50
MA-05-00359B
Fig. 4

Contents
Hydraulic action: direct drive reduction washer (18) thus releasing disc (21) and the planet
(Fig. 5) carrier assembly (50). At the same time, the clutch
piston (28) joins the intermediate plates (30) and the
The range shifting is carried out via a pulse button inte- discs (42) driven by hub (15). As the intermediate
grated into the pommel of the gear shift lever. This plates are firmly secured to the planet carrier with
button activates the solenoid valve mounted on the three tabs, the driving movement is transferred from
power shuttle clutch unit located to the right and to the the input shaft (36) to the hub (15) and to the clutch
front of the gearbox. The solenoid valve simultane- unit which drives the planet carrier (50). The primary
ously supplies the chamber of pistons (48) and (28). shaft (36), the planet carrier assembly and the sun
The brake piston (48) then presses against the inter- gears turn at the same speed as the secondary shaft
mediate plate (20) which compresses the Belleville (5), thus ensuring direct drive, gear ratio 1.
30 42 5
48
18
20
21
28
15
36
50
MA-05-00360B
Fig. 5
Contents
C . Preliminary operations
2. Drain the gearbox and the rear axle. Remove the
spacer (4) (see chapter 3).
3. Remove the forward clutch from the Power
Shuttle (see chapter 5).
5. Separate the Power Shuttle reverse clutch from
the input box unit (see chapter 5).
6. Position the unit vertically.

Contents
D . Removing and disassembling the

front cover
Removal (Fig. 6)
7. Take out the screws (24).
8. Using two tabs or two locally made rings, remove
the shaft (36), ring carrier (33) and front cover (27) 33 36
assembly.
9. Take out and discard seals (1).
10. Remove and discard the seal rings (31).
11. Take off circlip (37). Remove the tab washer (38)
and washer (39).
12. Separate the shaft (36) from the ring carrier (33). 1 27 31
13. If necessary, remove screws (34) (41). Separate
and put aside the ring carrier (33) from the cover.
14. Remove piston (48) (Fig. 7) by lightly tapping the
cover with a wooden wedge or using a jet of
compressed air.
15. Remove seals (22) and (23) and discard them.
NOTE 1: The annular restrictor (19) is held in the cover

by a Loctite 648 product or similar.
NOTE 2: Rivets (2) and (11) ensure that the oil pipe is
sealed.
24
MA-05-00361A
Fig. 6
48
MA-05-00364A
Fig. 7
Contents
23 22 39 36 37 38 34 41
2 11
33 19
MA-05-00362A
Fig. 8

Contents
E . Removing, splitting and disas-

sembling the planet carrier
assembly
9
Removal (Fig. 11)
16. Remove brake disc (21), intermediate plate (20),
Belleville washer (18) and planet carrier assembly 3
(50). 6
7
Splitting
25 15
17. Put the planet carrier assembly on a workbench
with the unit (9) turned upwards.
18. Remove the screws (3). MA-05-00365A
19. Separate the unit (9) from the hydraulic cover (25) Fig. 9
while holding sun gears (6) and (7) (Fig. 9).
Disassembly
NOTE: The text and figures in this paragraph concern
the disassembly of a planet carrier for a ground speed
of 40 kph.
20. Remove the input sun gear (7), visually identifying

the direction of the lubricating grooves.
21. Drive out shafts (8) using a drift or a mallet
(Fig. 10).
NOTE: Shafts are tight fitted in the thickest part of 8
the planet carrier with the lubrication hole turned
towards the hydraulic cover (25).
22. Remove pinion gears (12).
23. Recover needle bearings (16), spacers (14) and MA-05-00366A
washers (17). Fig. 10
24. Remove the output sun gear (6).
Contents
21 20
18
50
MA-05-00363A
Fig. 11

Contents
F . Disassembling the hydraulic

cover
28 25
25. Remove the splined hub (15).
26. Remove intermediate plates (30), discs (42) and
spring washers (43).
NOTE:
The clutch consists of:
- two friction discs;
- two spring washers;
- three intermediate plates.
27. Remove piston (28) by lightly tapping the cover
(25) on a wooden wedge or using a jet of
compressed air (Fig. 12). MA-05-00367A
28. Remove seals (26) and (29) and discard them.
Fig. 12
Contents
G . Assembling the planet carrier

29. Clean and check all components. Replace any 6
defective parts.
F
30. Lubricate needle bearings (16).
31. Make sure that the radial ports and axial channels
for lubrication of shafts (8) are not blocked.
REMINDER
Tractor speed can be between 30 and 40 kph.
Other speeds are obtained by turning the pinion gears
and sun gears of the Speedshift epicyclic gear train
(Fig. 1). 9
All sun gears do not have the same number of teeth:
- sun gear (6): 36 teeth; MA-05-00368A
- sun gear (7): 39 teeth. Fig. 13
NOTE: The text and figures in this paragraph concern

reassembling a planet carrier for a ground speed of 40
kph.
C 8
32. Put the output sun gear (6) in the gearbox (9),
turning the sun gear lubricating grooves towards F
side "F" of the unit (Fig. 13). a
33. Install the needle bearings (16), with a spacer (14)
inserted in a pinion gear (12).
34. Put an “assembled” pinion gear in the unit, the
18 tooth pinion turned as in Fig. 1.
NOTE: Each double pinion gear is identified with
one, two or three punchmarks on one of its sides
which is not necessarily the 18 tooth pinion. In this 9
case, make the same marks on the previously
mentioned pinion using an appropriate pen. A
punchmark corresponds to the alignment of two MA-05-00369A
teeth. Fig. 14
35. Position washers (17).
36. Centre the pinion gears and washers with a guide
pin Ø 16 mm, L = 80 mm (Fig. 14).
37. Insert the pin (8) into the free bore on side "F" of 8 F
the unit (9) (Fig. 14). Fit it partially retracted
(Fig. 15), with the radial lubricating port “a” turned
outwards and the end of central channel “C”
turned towards side “F” (Fig. 14).
MA-05-00370A
Fig. 15

Contents
38. Repeat operations 35 to 37 to assemble the two

other pinion gears.
During these operations, position the two pinion R
gears according to marks "R" so that they run in a
line corresponding with "O" (Fig. 16).
39. After final assembly of shafts (8), check again that
marks are correctly aligned.
IMPORTANT: Incorrect alignment may make it
impossible to assemble combined parts or cause
damage to the epicyclic gear train.
"0"
40. Fit the input sun gear (7) turning the lubricating
grooves towards the output sun gear (6).
H . Refitting the hydraulic cover MA-05-00371A

Fig. 16

defective parts.
42. Make sure that the three ports of the 17 bar pipe 17 bar pressure
on the hydraulic cover (25) are not blocked
(Fig. 17).
43. Lubricate seals (26) and (29) and fit them on piston
(28).
44. Lubricate the mating face of piston seals in the
hydraulic cover.
45. Position the piston in the cover, turning the
grooves towards the operator.
46. Fit the piston (28) using a plastic mallet, gradually
and alternately striking around the circumference
of piston (Fig. 18).
Check that there are no fragments of O'rings after
fitting. 25
47. Install the splined hub (15) as shown in Fig. 9. MA-05-00372A
48. Install an intermediate plate (30), a disc (42) and a Fig. 17

spring washer (43). Continue stacking parts,
ending with an intermediate plate.
NOTE: Put the cut section of spring washers oppo-
site.
28
25
MA-05-00373A
Fig. 18
Contents
I . Assembling the planet carrier

49. Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs in
the hydraulic cover (25).
50. Assemble the planet carrier unit (9) on the
hydraulic cover (25) while holding the sun gears (6)
and (7) (Fig. 9).
NOTE: Position the planet carrier unit and the cover
so that the balancing marks (ground marks) are as
far as possible on opposite sides (Fig. 19).
51. Refit the screw (3). They must be tightened to a
52. Strike pins (8) definitively home against the
hydraulic cover (25) with a pin drift. MA-05-00374A
53. Check that:

- the discs (42) are not compressed;
Fig. 19
- the pinion gears (12) and sun gears (6) and (7)
turn freely.
54. Install the planet carrier (50) on shaft (5).
55. Position a Belleville washer (18) as per Fig. 2.
56. Position intermediate plate (20) in housing (13).
57. Install the brake disc (21) on the planet carrier.

Contents
J . Assembling and refitting the

front cover 48
Reassembly
58. Clean the cover. Make sure that the 17 bar channel
and the lubricating channel are not blocked. Check
that sealing rivets (2) and (11) are fitted.
59. Fit seals (22) and (23) on piston (48).
60. Lubricate the mating faces of the piston seals in
the cover (27).
61. Position the piston in the cover, turning the
grooves towards the operator.
62. Fit the piston (48) home using a plastic mallet,
gradually and alternately striking around the
circumference of piston (Fig. 20). MA-05-00375A
Check that there are no fragments of O'rings after Fig. 20
fitting.
63. If work is necessary on the ring carrier (33):
- check that channels are not blocked and that the
18,13 à 18,33 mm
ball (40) is correctly crimped in its port (Fig. 21).
If necessary, force fit the needle bearing (32)
18.13 to 18.33 mm from side "F" (Fig. 21); 32
- position the ring carrier on the cover, making
sure that the low pressure port (17 bar) and the
lubricating port correspond respectively to those 33
in the cover;
- fit and tighten screws (34) and (41), lightly
smeared with Loctite 242 or similar, to a torque
of 25 - 35 Nm. 40
64. Check that the lubricating ports on shaft (36) are
not blocked.
65. Slide the shaft in the ring carrier. F
66. Install washer (38) and circlip (37).
MA-05-00376A Fig. 21
Contents
67. Temporarily fit new rings (31), making sure they

turn freely in the grooves.
68. After this check, remove the rings and coat with
miscible grease.
69. Install rings in their respective grooves making
sure:
- that they do not exceed the circumference of the
ring carrier;
- their ends overlap correctly (Fig. 22).
IMPORTANT: The slightest damage to rings may
cause a leak followed by pressure drop and incor-
rect operation of the Speedshift.
70. Smear washer (39) with grease and put it on the
ring carrier (33).
Refitting Fig. 22
71. Install new seals (1) on housing (13).

72. Refit the shaft (36), ring carrier (33) and front cover
(27) assembly using the same procedure as for
removal.
73. Install and tighten the screws (24) to a torque of
36 - 46 Nm, with thread lightly greased with
Loctite 242 or similar.
74. Remove the locally made lifting tool.
K . Final operations
75. Refit the power shuttle reverse clutch (see
chapter 5).
76. Install the input unit (see chapter 5) and the
forward clutch of the power shuttle (see
chapter 5).
77. Refit the spacer (see chapter 3).

Contents
Contents
Selector cover - GBA20 with Power Shuttle
05E02 - Selector cover - GBA20 with Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
C . Removing and refitting the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
D . Disassembling and reassembling the selector mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
E . Fitting and adjusting the gear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 05E02.1

Contents
05E02.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
A . General
5400 series tractors are equipped with a selector cover
fitted with a single control lever. This lever is located to
the rear of the cover and allows to select the four basic
gears and the Hare / Tortoise (Hi - Lo) function.
The changing of the Hare / Tortoise range is carried out

via a pulse button integrated into the pommel of the
gear shift lever. The gear change action is only vali-
dated when the gear shift lever is in the Neutral posi-
tion.
A cell “C” fitted to the selector cover buzzes to inform

the user if a gear is engaged when the handbrake is on.

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 1 - Fig. 2)

(1) Oil return port
(2) Grounding lug
(3) Screw
(4) Screw
(5) Temperature probe
(6) Stud and nut
(9) Selector cover
(10) Return ports
(13) Gear shift control finger
(14) Gear Selector grid
(15) Screw
(16) Support
(17) Centring bush
(18) Ball
(19) Screw
(20) Spring
(21) Washer
(22) Circlip
(25) Seal
(26) Guide bush
(27) Seal
(28) Neutral position switch
(29) Hexagonal spacers
(31) Plunger
(33) Washer
(34) Toggle
(35) Indexing pin
Contents
Overall view
Fig. 1

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 1 - Fig. 2)

(1) Oil return port
(2) Grounding lug
(3) Screw
(4) Screw
(5) Temperature probe
(6) Stud and nut
(9) Selector cover
(10) Return ports
(13) Gear shift control finger
(14) Gear Selector grid
(15) Screw
(16) Support
(17) Centring bush
(18) Ball
(19) Screw
(20) Spring
(21) Washer
(22) Circlip
(25) Seal
(26) Guide bush
(27) Seal
(28) Neutral position switch
(29) Hexagonal spacers
(31) Plunger
(33) Washer
(34) Toggle
(35) Indexing pin
Contents
Exploded view 13
15
17
16
34
35
33
17
31 14
18
20 19
4 21
22
26 2
25
28 27 5 6 3 29 9
MA-05-00419A
Fig. 2

Contents
MA-05-00421A
Fig. 4
MA-05-06020A
Fig. 3 Fig. 5
Contents
Hare / Tortoise range

B . Operation
The shifting of the Hare / Tortoise range is validated
Gear shift lever (Fig. 3) when the gear shift lever is in the Neutral position.
If the button located on the pommel of the gear shift
Selecting 1st - 2nd gear ratios
lever is pressed and if switch (28) has confirmed the
The gear shift lever (2) operates lever L and engages Neutral position of the lever, the electronic system of
the finger (13) in the 1st - 2nd gear fork. the tractor enables the supply or cutting off of voltage
The first ratio is obtained by moving lever L upwards to the Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve in order to obtain
and the second ratio downwards (Fig. 3). Simultane- movement of the fork in the required range.
ously, the toggle (34) integral with pin A pivots and
moves plunger (31) which thus locks the indexing pin Hare position
(35) and the Hare / Tortoise fork.
The Hare/Tortoise solenoid valve, fitted on the lower
part of the right-hand cover (see section 9) opens and
Selecting 3rd - 4th gear ratio feeds chamber "a" located behind piston (1) (Fig. 4).
In this configuration, the finger (13) integral with pin A The piston moves forward, and pushes the fork (Hare
is engaged in 3rd - 4th gear fork. / Tortoise).
The third ratio is obtained by moving lever L upwards The oil contained in chamber "b" is discharged into the
and the fourth ratio downwards (Fig. 3). Tortoise channel, and returns in the 17 bar circuit.
The locking principle of the indexing pin (35) and Hare
/ Tortoise fork is identical to that used for the 1st - 2nd Tortoise position
ratios.
A fresh activation of the pulse switch (Fig. 3) results in
closure of the solenoid valve, and a drop in pressure in
chamber “a” (Fig. 4). The piston (1) moves back under
the action of the 17 bar pressure exerted on the
annular face.
The oil contained in chamber “a” returns to the
housing via the Hare channel and the solenoid valve.
Identification of Hare / Tortoise function

ports
See Fig. 5.

Contents
Identification and function of

Hare/Tortoise range locking elements
Toggle (34)
This is one of the main elements of the Hare/Tortoise
range locking system. It runs free on pin A (Fig. 3) and
pivots with it by means of a flat section.
Function
- It moves the plunger (31) towards the indexing pin
(35) and locks it during gear engagement
- Using its other face it controls the Neutral position of
pin A (gear shift lever) by means of a switch (28).
Indexing pin (35)

At one end there are two different locking grooves:
- the narrow groove: Hare position,
- the wide groove: Tortoise position.
The other end is designed to house the stop of the
Hare/Tortoise fork.
Function
It avoids any unwanted reverse movement of the
Hare/Tortoise fork in case of electronic or hydraulic
malfunction.
Plunger (31)
Spherically shaped at each end, it moves between
toggle (34) and indexing pin (35).
Function
It acts as the system lock, whatever range is engaged.
Switch (28)
It is controlled by a toggle.
Function
It informs the tractor electronic system when the gear
shift lever is in Neutral position.
Contents
C . Removing and refitting the cover

1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the left rear wheel.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Chock between the frame and the front axle.
4. Drain the gearbox.
5. Raise the rear right-hand side of the tractor with a
suitable jack.
6. Disassemble the wheel. Position an axle stand.
7. Remove the right-hand footstep and any
surrounding elements that might hinder the cover
removal.
Removal (Fig. 6)
8. Disconnect the harness of the cell “C” (Fig. 6).
Remove the ball joint (4). Remove screw (3).
9. Remove pins (11). Remove the ball joint (5).
10. Note the adjustment of the cable (6). Slightly
loosen the top nut (12) and separate the cable from
the bracket (2).
11. Disconnect the control cable (1) from the creeper
unit on tractors fitted with this option (Fig. 7).
12. Remove the screws (3) (4) and the nut (6), marking Fig. 6
the location of the grounding lug (2) (Fig. 1).
13. If fitted, remove the bracket (2) of the creeper unit
control cable (Fig. 7).
14. Loosen and remove the selector cover.
Fig. 7

Contents
Refitting (Fig. 1) Legend Fig. 8

15. Clean the mating faces of the gearbox and the A Indexing pin for locking of Hare / Tortoise fork
cover. L Synchronising the Hare / Tortoise system in Hare
16. Place the 3rd - 4th gear fork in ratio 3 (Fig. 8) (3) Gear engaged: 3rd gear, for example
IMPORTANT: Before refitting the cover, check for (1) Screw
the presence of the screw (1) (Fig. 8). (9) Selector cover
17. Coat the mating face of the housing with a sealing (13) Finger
product such as Loctite 510 or equivalent. (18) Stop
18. Turn the finger (13) (Fig. 8) toward the left.
19. Position the cover on the gearbox, checking that
the finger is correctly placed in the forks.
20. Refit the creeper control cable bracket (if fitted).
21. Refit the grounding lug (2). Fit and tighten screws
(3) (4) and the nut (6) to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm.
22. Depending on the option, reconnect and adjust the
creeper control (see section 5).
23. Reconnect the wiring harnesses to the tempera-
ture probe (5) and the Neutral position switch.
24. Reconnect the gear shift lever and reconnect the
cell. Carry out the operations 8 to 10 in reverse
order.
25. Using a grease gun, grease the links of the gear
shift control on the selector cover.
Contents
Fig. 8

Contents
Final operations
26. Check the smooth engagement of all gears. If
required, adjust the control (see § E).
27. As necessary, refit those components removed
previously from around the cover.
28. Refit the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque
of 400 - 450 Nm.
30. Remove the shims between the frame and the
front axle. Release the handbrake.
31. Check that the buzzer of the safety cell vibrates
correctly (ignition on, handbrake on and gear
engaged).
32. Start the engine.
On the road, check the correct changing up and
down of the gear ratios, as well as the operation of
the Hare / Tortoise range using the pulse button
located on the gear shift lever pommel.
33. Check the oil tightness of the selector cover
mating face and of the hydraulic unions.
Contents
D . Disassembling and reassembling

the selector mechanisms
34. Take off the cover (see § C). Secure it in a clamp
fitted with soft jaws.
35. Take out the screws (1). Remove the key (4) and
selector (3). Separate the bracket (2) from the
cover (Fig. 9).
36. Take out the screws (15). Separate the cover (9)
and bracket (16) comprising the gear shift
assembly. If necessary, extract the locating rings Fig. 9
(17).
On the cover (9)

37. Take off the Neutral position switch (28). Recover
seal (27) and ball (18).
38. If necessary, remove the temperature probe (5)
and the unions screwed on the return ports (1)
(10).
39. Extract and discard seal (25).
On the bracket (16)

40. Take off circlip (22), washer (21) and remove spring
(20).
41. Release washer (33) and toggle (34), marking its
position and profile.
42. Recover the plunger (31). Extract the indexing pin
(35).
43. If necessary:
- remove the screws (19),
- remove the gearbox grid (14),
- extract the locating rings (17).

Contents
Reassembly (Fig. 1)
44. If it was necessary to remove the guide bush (26),
lightly smear its rim with Loctite 648 or equivalent.
Fit it up against the shoulder of the cover.
On the bracket (16)

45. If necessary:
- fit home the locating rings (17),
- refit the gearbox grid (14) on the bracket (16),
- tighten screws (19), lightly smeared with
Loctite 270 or equivalent, to a torque of 29 - 37
Nm.
46. Check that:
- the plunger (31) and indexing pin (35) move
freely in support (16),
- the flat section of the toggle (34) slides normally
on the finger (13).
47. Slide the pin of the finger (13) into the bracket (16).
48. Turn the toggle (34) as required. Fit it onto the
finger (13). Fit washer (33).
49. Refit spring (20) and washer (21). Fit the circlip
(22).
50. Slide the plunger (31) into its cavity in the bracket
(16).
51. Place finger (13) in the Neutral position. Turn the
indexing pin (35) as required and fit it.
On the cover (9)

52. Check for the presence of locating rings (17).
53. Refit the bracket (16) and gear shift assembly on
the cover (9).
54. Lightly smear the thread of the screws (15) with
29 - 37 Nm.
55. Protect the lip of the seal (25) by surrounding the
cylindrical end of the finger (13) with a flexible
protection. Lightly smear the external rim of the
seal with Loctite 542 or equivalent and slide it onto
the protection. Remove the protection. Insert the
seal into the cover using a suitable fixture.
56. Check that finger (13) is in the Neutral position.
57. Slide ball (18) into the depression on the toggle
(34).
Contents
Checking the Neutral position switch (28)

58. Press manually on the button located at the end of
the switch. Release the button and check that the
button returns freely to its initial position. Repeat
the operation several times. The check must be
carried out using a multimeter.
59. Refit the switch complete with its seal and tighten
to a torque of 15 - 25 Nm.
60. Refit the bracket (2), allowing a distance of 29 mm
between the bracket and the 22 mm diameter of
the pin A (Fig. 10).
Lightly smear the screws (1) with Loctite 270 and
tighten them to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
IMPORTANT: This dimension must be met for the
cell to operate correctly, see § A.
61. Refit the selector (3). Fit home and tighten the key
(4) (Fig. 9). Fig. 10
Checking the locking system of the indexing

pin (35)
62. In the grid (14), move the finger (13) from 1st to 4th
gear ratio using the selector (3) (Fig. 9) and manu-
ally check for the correct locking of the indexing pin
in each of its positions.
IMPORTANT: This indexing pin is linked to the Hare
/ Tortoise fork by an adjustable stop. If the replace-
ment of certain components of the locking system
was necessary, it is mandatory to readjust this
stop (see section 5).
Final operation
63. Remove the cover from the clamp. Refit it on the
gearbox (see § C).

Contents
E . Fitting and adjusting the gear

linkage
Cab side
Preparation (Fig. 11)
64. On the end of the link control rod (1) shaped with
an angle of 166°, position the ball joint (2) as shown
in Fig. 11. Tighten nut (3).
65. Tighten the ball joint (4) up against the cable (6).
Tighten nut (5).
Assembly (Fig. 11)

66. Place the bracket (7) on a workbench.
67. On the bracket, fit and tighten:
- the gear shift lever,
- the previously prepared link control rod and
cable.
68. Refit and secure the bracket onto the right-hand
wheel housing of the cab. During this operation,
ensure the link control rod and cable are inserted
through the ports in the compartments.
Fit the protection rings.
Fig. 11
Contents
Selector cover side

Preparation (Fig. 12)
69. Screw the threaded rod (9) (fitted with nuts (3) and
the ball joint (4)) onto the link control rod (1).
70. Tighten the ball joint (5) up against the cable (6).
Tighten nut (7).
Assembly (Fig. 12)

71. Tighten and lock the other end of the ball joint (5)
onto the cam (8).
72. On the previously fitted bracket (2) and lever L ,
position the cam (8) and its extension piece (10).
Fit the pins (11), and lock them in place with new
pins.
73. Fit the ball joint (4) on the lever L. Fit the washer
and tighten the locknut.
Adjusting the link control rod (1) (Fig. 12)

74. Turn the threaded rod (9) and ball joint (4) to obtain
a dimension X of 17 ± 1 mm between the two
nuts (3) when they are tightened.
Adjusting the cable (6) (Fig. 12)

75. Adjust the end-point to balance (as far as possible)
dimensions “C” and “D”. Tighten nuts (12)
without altering the adjustment.
Fig. 12

Contents
Check for the proper engagement of each

gear ratio and the position of the gear shift
lever in the opening of the console.
IMPORTANT: This check should be performed with the
dust cover of the gear shift lever temporarily removed.
1 3
76. Engage each gear ratio. During this operation,
check that the lever is never closer than 5 mm
from the edge of the console (Fig. 13 - Fig. 14).
Results 2 4
• Lever movement is not hindered in any way

by the console
Adjustment is correct. Refit the boot.
• Lever movement is hindered by the console MA-05-00431B
The lever is positioned incorrectly. Readjust the

link control rod (1) (Fig. 12) on the selector cover Fig. 13
side according to the following instructions:
- If the problem concerns the 1st or 3rd gears
(Fig. 13), reduce dimension X (Fig. 12).
- If the problem concerns the 2nd or 4th gears
(Fig. 13), increase dimension X (Fig. 12).
- If the problem concerns lateral movement of
the lever between the 1-2 and 3-4 gear paths
(Neutral position) (Fig. 14), adjust the cable
end-point(6) (dimensions C and D) (Fig. 12). 1 3
Tighten nuts (12).
2 4
MA-05-00431B
Fig. 14
Contents
GBA20 selector rails with mechanical reverse shuttle
05F01 - GBA20 selector rails with mechanical reverse

shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Servicing guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
C . Creeper fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
D . Hare / Tortoise fork and lock- 1st /2nd - 3rd / 4th fork assembly and selector rail 15
E . Mechanical reverse shuttle selector - Fork and selector rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
F . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 05F01.1

Contents
05F01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
A . General
On the gearbox
The selector rail (7) holding the different forks is
located on the right-hand side of the gearbox, on the
selector cover side (Fig. 1). It passes through the
gearbox housing and the control piston of the Hare /
Tortoise range (13).
It is held in position by a set screw (8). A cup plug (9)
closes off the bore at the front and a cover (15) closes
the rear end.
The 1st - 2nd (5) and 3rd - 4th (6) forks are not adjust-
able.
The creeper fork (28) is adjustable by mechanical pres-
sure.
Two adjustments are necessary to obtain the correct

functioning of the fork (20) in both ranges (Hare /
Tortoise):
- adjustment of the space between the fork pads and
the synchromesh sliding coupler;
- adjustment of the stop (18), in relation to the position
of the indexing pin mounted on the selector cover.
An optional creeper unit may be fitted (see Fig. 1 and

chapter 5).
An optional super-creeper unit may also be fitted (see
chapter 5). In this case, the locating pin (29) is not
fitted.
On the input unit (Fig. 1)

The mechanical reverse shuttle synchromesh is
controlled by:
- a selector;
- a selector rail;
- a fork.
The selector and fork are non-adjustable.
Fig. 1

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 2)

(1) Plug
(2) Spring
(3) Locking stud
(5) 1st - 2nd Fork
(6) 3rd - 4th Fork
(7) Guide pin
(8) Set screw
(9) Cup cap
(10) Cylinder
(11) O’ring
(12) O’ring
(13) Hare and Tortoise range piston
(14) O’ring
(15) Cover
(16) Screw
(17) Screw
(18) Stop
(19) Adjusting screw
(20) Hare / Tortoise fork
(26) Nut
(27) Locking screw
(28) Creeper fork
(29) End-of-travel pin
Contents
Overall view
242
20 17 18 3 6 4 1 5 2
648
28 12 14 10 11
29 26 27 16 15 13 19 221 510 7 8 9
270 542
5
6
3 2
MA-05-05026A
Fig. 2

Contents
Contents
Parts list (Fig. 3)

Exploded view
(1) Plug
(2) Spring
(3) Locking stud
(5) 1st - 2nd Fork
(6) 3rd - 4th Fork
(7) Guide pin
(8) Set screw
(9) Cup cap
(10) Cylinder
(11) O’ring
(12) O’ring
(14) O’ring
(15) Cover
(16) Screw
(17) Screw
(18) Stop
(26) Nut
(27) Locking screw
(28) Creeper fork
Fig. 3

Contents
Contents
Tractors with no creeper unit

B . Servicing guide The selector rail can also be removed through the front
on tractors not fitted with a creeper unit. To do this it
This guide describes a succession of operations to be
is necessary to:
followed depending on the mechanical component to
be worked on. - split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox
(see chapter 2);
- remove the gearbox spacer (only on tractors fitted
Creeper fork with 6-cylinder engine) (see chapter 3).
- Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5).
- Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see
chapter 9). Reverse shuttle selector
- Remove the creeper fork.
- Remove the reverse shuttle selector.
Hare / Tortoise fork

- Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5). Reverse shuttle fork
chapter 9). - Disassemble the tractor between the engine and the
- Remove the creeper fork (if fitted).
- Remove (see chapter 5):
- Move the selector rail forward.
- the selector cover;
- Disassemble the hydraulic parts (ram) of the Hare /
Tortoise mechanism. - the reverse shuttle selector;
- Take out the range fork. - the input unit;
- the reverse shuttle fork.
1st-2nd and 3rd-4th gear fork

Reverse shuttle selector rail
- Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see The selector rail is removed using the same procedure
chapter 9). as for the fork.
- Disassemble the hydraulic parts (ram) of the Hare /
Tortoise mechanism.
- Take out the range fork.
- Move the selector rail backwards.
- Take out the 1st-2nd and 3rd-4th gear forks.
Main selector rail

chapter 9).
- Disassemble the hydraulic components of the Hare /
Tortoise mechanism.
- Move the selector rail backwards as far as it will go
and disengage it through the selector cover aperture.

Contents
Contents
15. Note and mark the assembly order of the sleeve (2)
C . Creeper fork (Fig. 9).
Disengage the sleeve / link shaft / coupler
Disassembly assembly towards the outside left-hand side.
1. Disassemble the right rear wheel. Take it out of the fork (28) (Fig. 9) and remove it
Chock the tractor wheels. through the right-hand cover.
2. Disconnect the rear axle creeper unit control cable. 16. Remove the fork (28) on the selector rail (7)
3. Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5). Take (Fig. 10).
out the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the locking 17. Disassemble the lever (3) (Fig. 4).
studs (3) to release the selector rail (Fig. 3). 18. To remove the creeper unit control link (1), turn it
4. Remove the hydraulic cover(s) (see chapter 9). so it passes beneath the selector rail (7) (Fig. 11).
5. Remove screw (1). Pull the guide rod link (2) and Discard the O'ring (3).
the lever (3) outwards to release the finger of the
fork (Fig. 4).
6. Unscrew the nut (26) and the locking screw (27) on
the fork (28).
8. Turn the selector rail (7) and drive out the pin (29)
(Fig. 5 - Fig. 6) without dropping it into the housing.
Move the selector rail forward.
Remove the pin (1) from the coupling sleeve

(2) on a 2 or 4WD tractor (operations 9 to 12)
NOTE: Depending on the angle of the coupling sleeve
(2) located between the gearbox output shaft and the
drive pinion, the pin (1) is accessible or inaccessible.
2WD tractor
9. If the pin (1) is accessible, drive it from the sleeve
(2) (Fig. 7).
10. If the pin (1) is not accessible:
- raise the tractor rear axle beam with a trolley
jack;
- turn the drive pinion to correctly position the
coupling sleeve (2) (Fig. 7);
- drive out the pin (1) (Fig. 7).
4WD tractor
(2) (Fig. 7).
- disconnect the front differential lock control
hoses;
- remove the guard (1). Separate the rear sleeve
(5) from the transmission shaft (3) (Fig. 8);
13. Provisionally fit the set screw (8) in order to hold

the selector rail in place to remove the fork (28).
14. Slide the sleeve (2) and coupler (1) closer together
on the linkage shaft (3) (Fig. 9).

Contents
Reassembly 38. If necessary, on 4WD tractors:

- assemble the rear sleeve (5) of the transmission
shaft (3) (Fig. 8);
defective parts.
- refit the guard (1) (Fig. 8);
20. Refit the control link and pull it as far to the right as
possible. Install a new lubricated O'ring (Fig. 12). - reconnect the front differential lock control
hoses.
21. Reassemble the lever (3) (Fig. 13). Tighten the
screw. 39. Refit the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the locking
studs (3) (Fig. 3). Refit the selector cover (see
22. Refit the fork on the selector rail.
chapter 5). Reconnect and adjust the creeper unit
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the finger (1) of the control cable (see chapter 5).
creeper gear control linkage points towards the
40. Refit the wheel.
front of the tractor (Fig. 13).
41. Remove the axle stand and the jack.
23. Couple the sleeve / link shaft / coupler assembly
inside the housing. Place it in the fork, turning the 42. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of
machined groove on the sleeve (2) towards the 400 - 450 Nm.
rear of the tractor (Fig. 14). 43. Top up the oil level in the rear axle and gearbox.
24. Slide the sleeve and coupler onto the link shaft. 44. Start the tractor.
25. Force fit a new double pin (1) into the sleeve (2) 45. Check the correct operation of electrical and elec-
(Fig. 7). tronic circuits. Check the oil tightness of the cover
26. Take out set screw (8). mating face and of hydraulic unions.
27. Force fit a new pin (29) and turn the selector rail (7) 46. Carry out a road test of the creeper unit controls
(Fig. 5 - Fig. 6). and 1st-2nd, 3rd-4th gears of the Hare / Tortoise
ranges.
28. Clean the set screw (8). Smear its thread with
Loctite 542 and tighten to a torque of 38 - 43 Nm.
29. Ensure that the ball mounted at the end of the
locking screw (27) returns correctly to its initial
position after pressure has been applied manually
by the locking screw. Position the fork (28) and
locking screw on flat section “M” of the selector
rail (7) (between the two locking catches) (Fig. 3).
Fully tighten the screw without forcing it in order to
compress the ball.
Loosen the screw by one-quarter turn. Clean the
nut (26) and smear with Loctite 270 or similar.
Tighten to a torque of 15 - 20 Nm while holding the
locking screw in place.
Check the fork locks correctly.
30. Turn and push the rod (2) in order to engage the
finger in the fork. Fit the screw (1) smeared with
Loctite 542 or similar (Fig. 4).
31. Check that the rod operates correctly.
32. Check that the O’rings of the internal hydraulic
pipes are not damaged (see chapter 9).
33. Refit the right-hand cover (see chapter 9).
34. Attach the electrical harnesses with a clip retainer.
35. Refit the trailer braking valve (if fitted, open
centre), checking that the O’rings are not
damaged. Tighten the screws to a torque of
25 - 35 Nm.
36. Reconnect the pipes and hoses of the hydraulic
cover.
37. Refit the strainer, support and filter (open centre).
Contents
Fig. 4 Fig. 7 Fig. 10 Fig. 13
Fig. 6 Fig. 9 Fig. 12

Contents
Contents
D . Hare / Tortoise fork and lock- 1st

/2nd - 3rd / 4th fork assembly and
selector rail
47. Remove the right-hand rear wheel. Chock the
tractor wheels.
Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see
chapter 9).

Contents
Disassembly
49. Remove the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the
locking studs (3) (Fig. 2 and Fig. 3).
NOTE 1: The locking studs are now extended
(Fig. 2 and Fig. 3). This modification improves their
guiding into the forks (5) and (6) and also into the
buttons (1).
NOTE 2: To optimise operation, a decompression
spring on the locking stud drives out the oil
enclosed in the spring chamber (2). This design
allows the stud to enter and exit the fork more
smoothly, thus improving gear shifting.
50. Take out set screw (8) (Fig. 15).
51. Drive out the cup plug (9) forwards by striking the
rear of the selector rail (7) (Fig. 15).
52. Place the Tortoise and Hare fork (20) in the Hare
position. Fig. 15
53. Remove the adjusting screws (19).
54. Remove the screws (16) and the cover (15).
55. Take out the Hare and Tortoise piston (13) and
discard the O' rings.
56. Take off the cylinder (10) and discard the O' ring.
57. Turn the pump breather pipe (1) upwards (open
centre Fig. 16).
58. Move the selector rail (7) to the rear in order to
release the forks.
Slide the selector rail under the rear axle housing
reinforcement (Fig. 16).
59. Extract the 1st - 2nd and 3rd - 4th forks.
60. Extract the Hare and Tortoise fork.
61. If necessary, disassemble the stop (18).
62. Take the selector rail out through the selector
cover aperture by passing it through the Hare /
Tortoise cylinder bore (Fig. 17).
Fig. 16
Contents
Reassembly
defective parts.
64. Refit the selector rail through the selector cover
aperture by passing it through the Hare / Tortoise
cylinder bore (Fig. 17).
Refit the forks.
65. Check that the hydraulic ports in the Hare /
Tortoise cylinder (10) are not obstructed. Refit the
cylinder fitted with a new O' ring (11) (Fig. 18).
NOTE:
The cylinder (10) is held in position (Fig. 18):
- at the front, by the shoulder machined on its
outer diameter;
- at the rear, by the cover (15).
66. Slide the selector rail forwards into the Hare / Fig. 17
Tortoise fork and the 3rd, 4th and 1st, 2nd forks.
67. On the piston (13), fit O' rings (12) (14), then intro-
duce it into the cylinder bore (10) and onto the
selector rail (7) (Fig. 18).
Turn the adjusting screw holes towards the tapped
holes on the fork. Temporarily lock the piston with
a screw (19).
68. Fit the cover (15) with the screws (16). Tighten the
screws to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
38 - 43 Nm.
70. Smear the cup plug (9) with Loctite 542 or equiva-
lent. Fit it flush with the housing.
71. Fit the locking studs, springs and locking plugs.
Tighten the plugs to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm.
Fig. 18

Contents
Adjusting the clearance of the Hare /

Tortoise fork pads and the synchromesh
sliding coupler
Principle
The positioning of fork (20) is obtained by acting upon
the difference between the distance between the
centre lines of the tapped holes "Y" and the centre lines
of the receiving indents "Z" on piston (13).
A different fork movement is obtained by acting either
on the front screw or on the rear screw according to
the adjustment required (Fig. 19).
Adjustment
72. Position the control piston (13) and the sliding
coupler "C" in the high range (Hare) (Fig. 21).
73. Maintain the sliding coupler manually against Fig. 19
pinion "L" of the high range (Fig. 21).
74. Adjust the position of the fork (20) using the two
adjusting screws (19) previously cleaned in solvent
and lightly smeared with Loctite 221 or equivalent,
in order to obtain a clearance of J1 = 0.3 mm
between the rear face of the pad and the sliding
(Fig. 20 - Fig. 21).
NOTE: For this adjustment, use the locally made
tool (see § F).
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Contents

coupler "C" in the low range (Tortoise) (Fig. 22).
76. Check that there is a clearance of J2 = 0.3
minimum (this value is determined by the clear-
ance J1) between the pad and the sliding coupler
when the latter rests against the pinion "T" of the
low range (Fig. 22)
Alternatively and progressively tighten the screws
(19) to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm taking care not to
modify the adjustment.
IMPORTANT: In the Tortoise position, if face "X" of
the fork pad (20) is driven against the sliding
coupler "C", increase clearance J1 (Fig. 21).
77. Check for the correct operation of the fork.
Fig. 22

Contents
Adjusting the the Hare / Tortoise fork stop

B
Principle 35
locking is adjusted by an adjustable stop (18) located
on the Hare / Tortoise fork. This adjustment is obtained
using a tool (see § F) whose role consists of conveying
to the stop the positioning of the indexing pin, L
mounted on the selector cover.
The aim of this adjustment is to provide safety to the
Hare / Tortoise mechanism, during operation, by
mechanically immobilising the fork in the Hare or
Tortoise position.
IMPORTANT: Before adjusting the stop (18), it is essen-

tial to adjust the clearance between the Hare / Tortoise
X
fork pads and the synchromesh sliding coupler.
MA-05-00465B
Fig. 23
On the cover (Fig. 25)
78. Place the indexing pin (35) in the high range (Hare).
79. Engage 3rd gear.
80. Place the tool on the selector cover (Fig. 23). X
81. It is essential to equally share the clearance 18
between the indexing pin and the plunger (31)
(Fig. 25, detail A). L
82. Using the tool, measure dimension X according to
Fig. 23 and Fig. 25. 17
On the gearbox (Fig. 25)

83. Engage 3rd gear. Using the tool, set dimension X
to the gearbox.
84. Apply manual pressure on the fork towards the
Hare range.
85. Adjust the stop (18) (Fig. 24 - Fig. 25) by placing it
in contact with the tool.
MA-05-00466B
86. Lightly smear the thread of the screw (17) with Fig. 24
40 - 50 Nm.
Contents
35
= =
31
X 18
A
L 3
Legend
L Mechanism synchronised in Hare
X Dimension of tool measured on the
selector cover and set to the gearbox
L 35 (3) Gear engaged: 3rd gear, for example
(18) Stop
(31) Plunger
MA-05-05029A (35) Indexing pin
Fig. 25

Contents
Check
E . Mechanical reverse shuttle
87. Check the operation of the Hare and Tortoise selector - Fork and selector rail
ranges.
88. Check the smooth operation of all gears. Reverse shuttle selector (2)
Disassembly
Final operations
97. Remove screws (1) (Fig. 26).
89. Refit the right-hand hydraulic cover (see chapter 9). Remove the selector (2).
91. Reconnect and adjust the creeper unit control (if Preparing the selector
fitted) (see chapter 5).
98. Clean the thread of screws and tapped holes in the
92. Refit the rear wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts to a
selector. Check that the screws turn freely in the
tapped holes.
99. Slide the selector onto the selector rail and adjust
it.
94. Carry out a road test:
100.Engage the forward then reverse positions, and
- of gears from 1st to 4th and vice versa; vice versa, using the selector rail to position the
- of the Hare and Tortoise ranges; synchromesh components.
- of the creeper unit (if fitted). 101.Next, position the selector rail (3) in neutral
95. Check for the oil tightness of the cover mating (Fig. 26).
faces and the hydraulic unions. 102.Fit the tool ref. 3378054M1 (see Fig. 27 and § F)
on the gearbox housing. Tighten it using two
locally obtained screws.
Adjusting the selector (Fig. 27)

103.Lightly smear the thread of the screws (1) with
Loctite 242 or equivalent.
104.Bring face "F" of the selector (2) flush with the tool,
using the screws (1).
105.Alternately and gradually tighten the screws (1) to
a torque 35 Nm without modifying the selector
position.
Reassembly
106.Refit the selector cover (see chapter 5).
Contents
MA-05-05030A
Fig. 26 Fig. 27

Contents
Fork (6) and selector rail (4)

107.Disassemble the tractor between the engine and
108.Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5).
109.Remove the input unit (see chapter 5).
Disassembly
110.Remove the plug (7), the spring (8) and the locking
stud (5).
REMINDER: The locking stud (5) of the reverse
shuttle fork (6) has a different shape from those
fitted on the 1st / 2nd and 3rd / 4th forks of the
gearbox.
111.Take out the screws (3) from the fork (6).
Remove the pin (4) and the fork.
Reassembly
112.Clean the thread of screws and tapped holes in the
fork. Check that the screws turn freely in the
tapped holes.
113.Slide the fork into the synchromesh slider.
114.Slide the guide pin (4) into the fork (6).
Adjust the fork.
Contents
Adjusting the fork (Fig. 28 and Fig. 29)

Adjusting principle
7
The positioning of the fork (6) is obtained by the differ-
ence between the centre line "Y" of the holes and the
centre line "Z" of the indents on the selector rail (5). A 8
different fork movement is obtained by acting either on
the front screw or on the rear screw (3) according to 5
115.Fit the locking stud (5), spring (8) and plug (7).
Tighten the plug to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm.
IMPORTANT: When disassembling all locking studs
(gearbox and input unit), the positioning of the
reverse shuttle selector rail locking stud must be
respected (see operation 110).
116.Lightly smear the thread of the fork screws with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Fit the screws.
117.Position the locked fork towards the front.
Maintain the synchromesh sliding coupler up
against the pinion. 6
Pre-adjust the fork using the above-mentioned
principle.
118.Check that the front pads of the fork are not driven
hard against the synchromesh sliding coupler. 4
119.Repeat the operation (fork locked at rear).
Check that the pads of the fork are not driven hard 2
against the synchromesh sliding coupler.
The correct adjustment is obtained when the clear-
ance of both (front and rear) fork pads are nearly 3
equal in the synchromesh sliding coupler, in both
the forward and reverse positions.
1
120.Alternately and gradually tighten the screws (3) to
a torque 35 Nm without modifying the fork adjust-
ment. MA-05-05032A
Fig. 28
Y
5 3
6
Z
MA-05-05033A Fig. 29

Contents
Final operations
121.Refit the input unit (see chapter 5).
122.Adjust the selector (2) (see § E).
123.Refit the selector cover (see chapter 5).
124.Assemble the tractor between the engine and the
125.Top up the oil level in the housings. Check it using
126.Bleed the hydraulic unit of the engine clutch (see
chapter 9).
127.Carry out a road test of the reverse shuttle
(forward and reverse positions) and the control
assembly.
128.Check the oil tightness of the mating faces and
hydraulic unions.
Fig. 30
F . Service tools
Tools available in the AGCO network
• 3378325M11: Hare / Tortoise fork lock adjustment
tool (Fig. 30)
• 3378054M1: Adjusting gauge (Fig. 31)
Locally made tool

• Shim hinged on suitable fixture (Fig. 32)
MA-05-05034A
Fig. 31
Fig. 32
Contents
GBA20 selector rail with Power Shuttle
05F02 - GBA20 selector rail with Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Servicing guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
C . Creeper fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
D . Hare / Tortoise fork and lock- 1st /2nd - 3rd / 4th fork assembly and selector rail 15
E . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Contents
Contents
A . General
The selector rail (7) holding the different forks is
located on the right-hand side of the gearbox, on the
selector cover side. It passes through the gearbox
housing and the control piston of the Hare and Tortoise
range (13).
It is held in position by a set screw (8). A cup plug (9)
closes off the bore at the front and a cover (15) closes
the rear end.
The 1st - 2nd (5) and 3rd - 4th (6) forks are not adjust-
able.
The creeper fork (28) is adjustable by mechanical pres-
sure.
Two adjustments are necessary to obtain the correct

functioning of the fork (20) in both ranges (Hare /
Tortoise):
- adjustment of the space between the fork pads and
the synchromesh sliding coupler;
- adjustment of the stop (18), in relation to the position
of the indexing pin mounted on the selector cover.
An optional creeper unit may be fitted (see chapter 5).

An optional super-creeper unit may also be fitted (see
chapter 5). In this case, the locating pin (29) is not
fitted.

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 1)

(1) Plug
(2) Spring
(3) Locking stud
(5) 1st - 2nd Fork
(6) 3rd - 4th Fork
(7) Guide pin
(8) Set screw
(9) Cup cap
(10) Cylinder
(11) O’ring
(12) O’ring
(14) O’ring
(15) Cover
(16) Screw
(17) Screw
(18) Stop
(26) Nut
(27) Locking screw
(28) Creeper fork
Contents
Overall view
242
20 17 18 3 6 4 1 5 2
648
28 12 14 10 11
29 26 27 16 15 13 19 221 510 7 8 9
270 542
5
6
3 2
MA-05-06023A
Fig. 1

Contents
Contents
Parts list (Fig. 2)

Exploded view
(1) Plug
(2) Spring
(3) Locking stud
(5) 1st - 2nd Fork
(6) 3rd - 4th Fork
(7) Guide pin
(8) Set screw
(9) Cup cap
(10) Cylinder
(11) O’ring
(12) O’ring
(14) O’ring
(15) Cover
(16) Screw
(17) Screw
(18) Stop
(26) Nut
(27) Locking screw
(28) Creeper fork
Fig. 2

Contents
Contents
Guide pin
B . Servicing guide
This guide describes a succession of operations to be - Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see
followed depending on the mechanical component to chapter 9).
be worked on. - Remove the creeper fork (if fitted).
Creeper fork - Disassemble the hydraulic components of the Hare /
- Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5). Tortoise mechanism.
- Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see - Take out the range fork.
chapter 9). - Take out the 1st-2nd and 3rd-4th gear forks.
- Remove the creeper fork. - Move the selector rail backwards as far as it will go
and disengage it through the selector cover aperture.

Hare / Tortoise fork
The selector rail can also be removed through the front
- Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5). on tractors not fitted with a creeper unit. To do this it
- Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see is necessary to:
chapter 9). - split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox
- Remove the creeper fork (if fitted). (see chapter 2);
- Move the selector rail forward. - remove the gearbox spacer (only on tractors fitted
- Disassemble the hydraulic parts (ram) of the Hare/ with 6-cylinder engine) (see chapter 3).
Tortoise mechanism.
1st-2nd and 3rd-4th gear fork

chapter 9).
- Disassemble the hydraulic parts (ram) of the Hare/
Tortoise mechanism.
- Move the selector rail backwards.

Contents
Contents
15. Note and mark the assembly order of the sleeve (2)
C . Creeper fork (Fig. 8).
Disengage the sleeve / link shaft / coupler
Disassembly assembly towards the outside left-hand side.
1. Disassemble the right rear wheel. Take it out of the fork (28) (Fig. 8) and remove it
Chock the tractor wheels. through the right-hand cover.
2. Disconnect the rear axle creeper unit control cable. 16. Remove the fork (28) on the selector rail (7) (Fig. 9).
3. Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5). Take 17. Disassemble the lever (3) (Fig. 3).
out the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the locking 18. To remove the creeper unit control link (1), turn it
studs (3) to release the selector rail (Fig. 2). so it passes beneath the selector rail (7) (Fig. 10).
4. Remove the hydraulic cover(s) (see chapter 9). Discard the O'ring (3).
5. Remove screw (1). Pull the guide rod link (2) and
the lever (3) outwards to release the finger of the
fork (Fig. 3).
6. Unscrew the nut (26) and the locking screw (27) on
the fork (28).
8. Turn the selector rail (7) and drive out the pin (29)
(Fig. 4 - Fig. 5) without dropping it into the housing.
Move the selector rail forward.
Remove the pin (1) from the coupling sleeve

(2) on a 2 or 4WD tractor (operations 9 to 12)
NOTE: Depending on the angle of the coupling sleeve
(2) located between the gearbox output shaft and the
drive pinion, the pin (1) is accessible or inaccessible.
2WD tractor
(2) (Fig. 6).
- raise the tractor rear axle beam with a trolley
jack;
4WD tractor
(2) (Fig. 6).
- disconnect the front differential lock control
hoses;
- remove the guard (1). Uncouple the rear sleeve
(5) from the transmission shaft (3) (Fig. 7);
13. Provisionally fit the set screw (8) in order to hold

the selector rail in place to remove the fork (28).
14. Slide the sleeve (2) and coupler (1) closer together
on the linkage shaft (3) (Fig. 8).

Contents
Reassembly 38. If necessary, on 4WD tractors:

- couple the rear sleeve (5) of the transmission
shaft (3) (Fig. 7);
defective parts.
- refit the guard (1) (Fig. 7);
20. Refit the control link and pull it as far to the right as
possible. Install a new lubricated O'ring (Fig. 11). - reconnect the front differential lock control
hoses.
21. Reassemble the lever (3) (Fig. 12). Tighten the
screw. 39. Refit the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the locking
studs (3) (Fig. 2). Refit the selector cover (see
22. Refit the fork on the selector rail.
chapter 5). Reconnect and adjust the creeper unit
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the finger (1) of the control cable (see chapter 5).
creeper gear control linkage points towards the
40. Refit the wheel.
front of the tractor (Fig. 12).
41. Remove the axle stand and the jack.
23. Couple the sleeve / link shaft / coupler assembly
inside the housing. Place it in the fork, turning the 42. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of
machined groove on the sleeve (2) towards the 400 - 450 Nm.
rear of the tractor (Fig. 13). 43. Top up the oil level in the rear axle and gearbox.
24. Slide the sleeve and coupler onto the link shaft. 44. Start the tractor.
25. Force fit a new double pin (1) into the sleeve (2) 45. Check the correct operation of electrical and elec-
(Fig. 6). tronic circuits. Check the oil tightness of the cover
26. Take out set screw (8). mating face and of hydraulic unions.
27. Force fit a new pin (29) and turn the selector rail (7) 46. Carry out a road test of the creeper unit controls
(Fig. 4 - Fig. 5). and 1st-2nd, 3rd-4th gears of the Hare / Tortoise
ranges.
Loctite 542 and tighten to a torque of 38 - 43 Nm.
29. Ensure that the ball mounted at the end of the
locking screw (27) returns correctly to its initial
position after pressure has been applied manually
by the locking screw. Position the fork (28) and
locking screw on flat section “M” of the selector
rail (7) (between the two locking catches) (Fig. 2)
Fully tighten the screw without forcing it in order to
compress the ball.
Loosen the screw by one-quarter turn. Clean the
nut (26) and smear with Loctite 270 or equivalent.
Tighten to a torque of 15 - 20 while holding the
locking screw in place.
Check the the fork locks correctly.
30. Turn and push the rod (2) in order to engage the
finger in the fork. Fit the screw (1) smeared with
Loctite 542 or equivalent (Fig. 3).
31. Check that the rod operates correctly.
32. Check that the O’rings of the internal hydraulic
pipes are not damaged (see chapter 9).
33. Refit the right-hand cover (see chapter 9).
34. Attach the electrical harnesses with a clip retainer.
35. Refit the trailer braking valve (if fitted, open
centre), checking that the O’rings are not
damaged. Tighten the screws to a torque of
25 - 35 Nm.
36. Reconnect the pipes and hoses of the hydraulic
cover.
37. Refit the strainer, support and filter (open centre).
Contents
Fig. 5 Fig. 8 Fig. 11

Contents
Contents
D . Hare / Tortoise fork and lock- 1st

/2nd - 3rd / 4th fork assembly and
selector rail
47. Remove the right-hand rear wheel. Chock the
tractor wheels.
Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see
chapter 9).

Contents
Disassembly
49. Remove the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the
locking studs (3) (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2).
NOTE 1: The locking studs are now extended
(Fig. 1 and Fig. 2). This modification improves their
guiding into the forks (5) and (6) and also into the
buttons (1).
NOTE 2: To optimise operation, a decompression
spring on the locking stud drives out the oil
enclosed in the spring chamber (2). This design
allows the stud to enter and exit the fork more
smoothly, thus improving gear shifting.
51. Drive out the cup plug (9) forwards by striking the
rear of the selector rail (7) (Fig. 14).
52. Place the Tortoise and Hare fork (20) in the Hare
position. Fig. 14
53. Remove the adjusting screws (19).
55. Take out the Hare and Tortoise piston (13) and
discard the O' rings.
56. Take off the cylinder (10) and discard the O' ring.
57. Turn the pump breather pipe (1) upwards (open
centre).
58. Move the selector rail (7) to the rear in order to
release the forks.
Slide the selector rail under the rear axle housing
reinforcement (Fig. 16).
59. Extract the 1st - 2nd and 3rd - 4th forks.
60. Extract the Hare and Tortoise fork.
61. If necessary, disassemble the stop (18).
1
62. Take the selector rail out through the selector
cover aperture by passing it through the Hare /
Tortoise cylinder bore (Fig. 17). MA-05-06024A
Fig. 15
MA-05-06025A
Fig. 16
Contents
Reassembly
defective parts.
64. Refit the selector rail through the selector cover
aperture by passing it through the Hare / Tortoise
cylinder bore (Fig. 17).
Refit the forks.
65. Check that the hydraulic ports in the Hare /
Tortoise cylinder (10) are not obstructed. Refit the
cylinder fitted with a new O' ring (11) (Fig. 18).
NOTE:
The cylinder (10) is held in position (Fig. 18):
- at the front, by the shoulder machined on its
outer diameter;
- at the rear, by the cover (15).
66. Slide the selector rail forwards into the Hare / Fig. 17
Tortoise fork and the 3rd, 4th and 1st, 2nd forks.
67. On the piston (13), fit O' rings (12) (14), then intro-
duce it into the cylinder bore (10) and onto the
selector rail (7) (Fig. 18).
Turn the adjusting screw holes towards the tapped
holes on the fork. Temporarily lock the piston with
a screw (19).
68. Fit the cover (15) with the screws (16). Tighten the
38 - 43 Nm.
70. Smear the cup plug (9) with Loctite 542 or equiva-
lent. Fit it flush with the housing.
71. Fit the locking studs, springs and locking plugs.
Tighten the plugs to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm.
Fig. 18

Contents
Adjusting the clearance of the Hare /

Tortoise fork pads and the synchromesh
sliding coupler
Principle
The positioning of fork (20) is obtained by acting upon
the difference between the distance between the
centre lines of the tapped holes "Y" and the centre lines
of the receiving indents "Z" on piston (13).
A different fork movement is obtained by acting either
on the front screw or on the rear screw according to
Adjustment
coupler "C" in the high range (Hare) (Fig. 21).
73. Maintain the sliding coupler manually against Fig. 19
pinion "L" of the high range (Fig. 21).
74. Adjust the position of the fork (20) using the two
adjusting screws (19) previously cleaned in solvent
and lightly smeared with Loctite 221 or equivalent,
in order to obtain a clearance of J1 = 0.3 mm
between the rear face of the pad and the sliding
(Fig. 20 - Fig. 21).
NOTE: For this adjustment, use the locally made
tool (see § E).
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Contents

coupler "C" in the low range (Tortoise) (Fig. 22).
76. Check that there is a clearance of J2 = 0.3
minimum (this value is determined by the clear-
ance J1) between the pad and the sliding coupler
when the latter rests against the pinion "T" of the
low range (Fig. 22)
Alternatively and progressively tighten the screws
(19) to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm taking care not to
modify the adjustment.
IMPORTANT: In the Tortoise position, if face "X" of
the fork pad (20) is driven against the sliding
coupler "C", increase clearance J1 (Fig. 21).
77. Check for the correct operation of the fork.
Fig. 22

Contents
Adjusting the the Hare / Tortoise fork stop

B
Principle 35
locking is adjusted by an adjustable stop (18) located
on the Hare / Tortoise fork. This adjustment is obtained
using a tool (see § E) whose role consists of
conveying to the stop the positioning of the indexing L
pin, mounted on the selector cover.
The aim of this adjustment is to provide safety to the
Hare / Tortoise mechanism, during operation, by
mechanically immobilising the fork in the Hare or
Tortoise position.
IMPORTANT: Before adjusting the stop (18), it is essen-

tial to adjust the clearance between the Hare / Tortoise
X
fork pads and the synchromesh sliding coupler.
MA-05-00465B
Fig. 23
On the cover (Fig. 25)
78. Place the indexing pin (35) in the high range (Hare).
79. Engage 3rd gear.
80. Place the tool on the selector cover (Fig. 23). X
81. It is essential to equally share the clearance 18
between the indexing pin and the plunger (31)
(Fig. 25, detail A). L
82. Using the tool, measure dimension X according to
Fig. 23 and Fig. 25. 17
On the gearbox (Fig. 25)

83. Engage 3rd gear. Using the tool, set dimension X
to the gearbox.
84. Lightly smear the mating face of the stop (18) on
the fork with Loctite 648 or equivalent.
Apply manual pressure on the fork towards the
Hare range.
MA-05-00466B
85. Adjust the stop (18) (Fig. 24 - Fig. 25) by placing it Fig. 24
in contact with the tool.
86. Lightly smear the thread of the screw (17) with
40 - 50 Nm.
Contents
35
3 = =
31
X
A
35 L
3
18
Legend
L Mechanism synchronised in Hare
X Dimension of tool measured on the
selector cover and set to the gearbox
(3) Gear engaged: 3rd gear, for example
(18) Stop
(31) Plunger
(35) Indexing pin
L
X
MA-05-00467B
Fig. 25

Contents
Check
87. Check the operation of the Hare and Tortoise
ranges.
88. Check the smooth operation of all gears.
Final operations
89. Refit the right-hand hydraulic cover (see chapter 9).
91. Reconnect and adjust the creeper unit control (if
fitted) (see chapter 5).
92. Refit the rear wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts to a
94. Carry out a road test:
- of gears from 1st to 4th and vice versa;
- of the Hare / Tortoise ranges;
- of the creeper unit (if fitted).
95. Check for the oil tightness of the cover mating
faces and the hydraulic unions.
Contents
E . Service tools
• 3378325M11: Hare / Tortoise fork lock adjustment
tool (Fig. 26)
Locally made tool

• Shim hinged on suitable fixture (Fig. 27)
Fig. 26
Fig. 27

Contents
Contents
GBA20 output shaft with Power Shuttle
05G02 - GBA20 output shaft with Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removing and refitting the selector rail and the forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Removing, refitting and shimming the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
E . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 05G02.1

Contents
05G02.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
Parts list (Fig. 1)

A . General Overall view
(21) Synchromesh cone (Hare)
Bearings (28) (30) separated by a spacer (80) rotate (22) Synchromesh cone (Tortoise)
drive pinion (29) on the shaft. Bearings (79) (81) (24) Needle bearing
operate as axial stops. (27) Thrust washer
(28) Needle bearing
A double cone synchromesh enables gear range (29) 3rd driving pinion (Hare)
shifting between pinions (29) (Hare) and (30) Needle bearing
(36) (Tortoise). (31) Hare / Tortoise double cone synchromesh
(32) Thrust washer
Preloading, or the clearance between bearing cones (35) Ring
(39) (40) and their respective cups (48) (37) is adjusted (36) Tortoise pinion
depending on the thickness of circlip (49). (37) Bearing cup
(38) Shim(s)
(39) Bearing cone
Description (40) Bearing cone
(41) Screw
The output shaft transmits movement from the
(42) Shim(s)
different ranges to the rear axle transfer shaft. It is
(43) Laminated shim
fitted on the lower transmission line at the rear of the
unit. (44) Output shaft
(45) Circlip
(46) Stop plate
It is supported at the front by a needle bearing fitted in
(48) Bearing cup
the mainshaft bore and at the rear by two opposing
taper roller bearings. (49) Circlip
(79) Needle bearing
(80) Spacer
The shaft (44) supports:
(81) Needle bearing
- the drive pinion (29) fitted idle onto the combined
bearings (28) (30);
- the idle-mounted pinion (36) and ring (35) assembly;
- the Hare / Tortoise synchromesh (31), held in rota-
tion by splines.
To ensure correct operation of the assembly

depending on the load applied to the transmission,
several adjustments are required:
• J3 clearance: via the circlip (49), this cancels the
clearance between the bearing cones (39) (40) and
their respective bearing cups.
• J4 clearance: the shim(s) (38) positioned between
the shoulder of the shaft (44) and the bearing cone
(39) allow(s) end play for the pinion (29).
• J5 clearance: the shim(s) (42) between the bearing
cone (40) and the laminated shim (43) cancel the end
play of the cones (39) (40) on the shaft (44).
NOTE: The output shaft of the GBA20 gearbox without

creeper speeds can be replaced by two other shafts
corresponding respectively to the following options:
creeper or super-creeper unit.
Fig. 1

Contents
Contents
Parts list (Fig. 2)

Exploded view
(21) Synchromesh cone (Hare)
(22) Synchromesh cone (Tortoise)
(24) Needle bearing
(27) Thrust washer
(28) Needle bearing
(29) 3rd driving pinion (Hare)
(30) Needle bearing
(31) Hare / Tortoise double cone synchromesh 35
(32) Thrust washer
(35) Ring 22
(36) Tortoise pinion
(37) Bearing cup
(38) Shim(s)
(39) Bearing cone 21
(40) Bearing cone
(41) Screw
(42) Shim(s) 79
(43) Laminated shim 30
(44) Output shaft
28
(45) Circlip
27
(46) Stop plate 36
(48) Bearing cup
(49) Circlip
(79) Needle bearing 31
(80) Spacer 41
(81) Needle bearing 46
43
42
38 32
29
80
81
45
48
40
39
37
49
44
24
MA-05-00471B
Fig. 2

Contents
Contents
1. Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear
axle (see chapter 2).
3. If necessary, remove screw (1) (Fig. 11).
C . Removing and refitting the

selector rail and the forks
NOTE: The tractor is split. Consequently, the sensor rail
removal is made easier following separation which is
to be made from the rear side of the gearbox housing.
Apart from this point, the procedure remains Fig. 3
unchanged.
Disassembly
4. If the tractor is fitted with a creeper unit, remove
pin (1), locknut (2), adjustable lock (3), fork (4) with
sleeve (5) (Fig. 3).
If the tractor is fitted with a super-creeper unit, the
fork and its lock are removed as described above,
except for the absence of the pin (1).
5. Remove the selector rail and the forks (see
chapter 5).
Reassembly
defective parts.
7. Refit the selector rail and the forks (see chapter 5).
8. Depending on the equipment, install sleeve (5),
fork (4), adjustable lock (3) and pin (1) (Fig. 3).
To adjust the fork, see chapter 5.

Contents
D . Removing, refitting and shim-

ming the shaft
9. If the tractor is fitted with a creeper unit or
super-creeper unit, remove the unit (see
chapter 5).
Disassembly
IMPORTANT: Bearing cones and cups shall be paired if
reused.

11. Remove stop plate (46).
12. Remove bearing cup (48).
13. Remove circlip (45).
14. Remove laminated shim (43) and shims (42).
15. Remove bearing cones (40) (39).
16. Remove the shims (38) and the cup (37).
18. Pull and remove shaft (44) backwards while
holding the gear train assembly.
19. Through the selector cover aperture, remove:
- the synchromesh (31);
- the Hare / Tortoise synchromesh rings;
- the pinion assembly (29) and needle roller bear-
ings (28) (30);
- the 3rd synchromesh ring;
- the two needle bearings (79) (81);
- the stops (27) (32).
20. If necessary, remove the Tortoise pinion (36).
NOTE: If work is necessary on this pinion, first
remove the input unit (see chapter 5) to gain
access to the layshaft of the gearbox in order to
remove the pinion involved through the gear
selector cover aperture.
21. Remove needle bearing (24). Identify the assembly
direction.
Contents
Reassembly
22. Check and clean the components. Replace any
defective parts.
23. Put needle bearing (24) in the bore of mainshaft
"R", taking care to position the smaller diameter of
the flexible bush towards the 3rd drive pinion
(Hare) (29) (Fig. 4).
24. Fit the shaft in the housing without the pinions.
25. Fit a temporary circlip (49), minimum thickness.
26. Place bearing cup (37).
Preparing for J3 clearance adjustment

(Fig. 5)
27. Slide cones (39) (40) and hold them against the
Fig. 4
shoulder of shaft (44) by applying pressure by
hand. Fill space Y between the rear of cone (40)
and the groove of circlip (45) with shims (42) and
laminated shim (43) which will be placed against
circlip (45). Take a new circlip. The circlip must be
held closed in the groove under a slight pressure
(Fig. 6).
28. Fit cup (48) and stop plate (46). Tighten screws (41)
IMPORTANT: For gearboxes fitted with creeper unit,
use unit plate (1) (Fig. 9) to replace stop plate (46)
(Fig. 8). Tighten the screws to a torque of 33.8 -
51.5 Nm.
Fig. 5
Fig. 6

Contents
Adjusting J3 clearance (Fig. 7)

29. Put the feeler pin of a dial gauge against the end of
shaft (44) (Fig. 8 or Fig. 9).
30. Push the shaft, turning it alternately from right to
left to correctly seat the cones in the cups.
31. Reset the dial gauge to zero.
32. Repeat operation 30 this time pulling.
33. If the axial freeplay is greater tha 0.05 mm, set a
definitive thickness of circlips (49), qui to be fitted
later at operation 42, to obtain
J3 = -0.05 to +0.05 mm.
35. Remove laminated shim (43) and shims (42).
36. Remove screws (41) and stop plate (46).
37. Remove:
- the cup (48); Fig. 7
- the bearing cones (40) (39), pairing them with
their cups;
- the cup (37);
- the provisional circlip (49) fitted at operation 25;
- The shaft (44).
Assembling the pinions and the shaft

38. On a workbench, preassemble 3rd drive pinion (29)
with synchromesh rings (21) and 3rd gear, bear-
ings (79) (81), washers (27) (32) and synchromesh
(31).
39. If removed, put the Tortoise pinion (36) with its
synchromesh ring (22) in the housing.
IMPORTANT: If ring (35) of the Portoise pinion (36) is
damaged, replace the pinion assembly (the ring is
rebored after force-fitting).
Refit the input unit (see chapter 5). Fig. 8
40. In the housing, install:
- 3rd driving pinion (29) fitted with needle roller
bearings (28) (30) (recess "R" turned towards the
3rd - 4th synchromesh (Fig. 10);
- the synchromesh (31).
REMINDER: Needle bearings (28) (30) are
force-fitted and separated by spacer (80).
41. Fit output shaft (44) holding the gear train
assembly (Fig. 11).
Fig. 9
Contents

42. Fit the circlip (49) defined at the operation 33. Slide
the cones and cups paired during operation 37
onto the shaft.
43. Install stop plate (46). Tighten screws (41) to a
IMPORTANT: For gearboxes fitted with creeper unit,
use unit plate (1) (Fig. 9) to replace stop plate (46)
(Fig. 8). Tighten the screws to a torque of
33.8 - 51.5 Nm.
44. Put the feeler pin of a dial gauge against the end of
shaft (44) (Fig. 8 or Fig. 9).
45. Push the shaft, turning it alternately from right to
left to correctly seat the cones in the cups.
47. Repeat operation 45 this time pulling.
Fig. 10
Depending on the value read on the dial gauge,
determine the thickness of shim Z (38) to obtain:
J4 = 0.20 to 0.40 mm (Fig. 12)
48. Remove screws (41) and stop plate (46).
49. Take off bearing cup (48).
50. Remove cones (40) (39).
51. Slide the required thickness of shims Z (38), and
cones (39) (40) onto the shaft.
Fig. 11
Fig. 12

Contents

52. Carry out shimming to obtain clearance J5 = 0.
53. Using the thickness of shims Y (42) (43), deter-
mined during operation 27, determine the thick-
ness of shims Z (38) to obtain clearance J5 = Y - Z.
54. Fit cup (48) and stop plate (46). Tighten screws (41)
55. Slide the thickness of shims selected during
operation 53 on the shaft.
56. Position laminated shim (43) on circlip groove side.
Place circlip (45): it must be held closed in the
groove under slight pressure. Check that it is
correctly positioned.
57. Refit the creeper or super creeper gearbox
(depending on option).
58. Manually check the rotation of the shaft and its
Fig. 13
gear train.
59. Install the forks and the selector rail (see § C).
E . Final operations
60. Refit the selector cover (see chapter 5), previously
checking the presence of the screw (1) (Fig. 11).
61. Assemble the tractor between the gearbox and the
rear axle (see chapter 2).
62. Check:
- hydraulic tightness of the circuits;
- correct operation of electrical circuits.
63. Carry out a road test of controls.
64. Check oil tightness of mating faces (gear selector
cover, gearbox on rear axle).
Contents
GBA20 mainshaft with Power Shuttle
05H02 - GBA20 mainshaft with Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Disassembling and reassembling the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
E . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 05H02.1

Contents
05H02.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
Parts list (Fig. 1)

(1) Bearing cone
The mainshaft (69) is mounted on two taper roller bear- (2) Bearing cup
ings (1) (17) with bearing cups (2) (16), resting in the (3) Shim(s)
two lower bearings of the main unit. Each bearing cup (6) Serrated washers
has a root face giving it maximum contact with the (7) 1st driving pinion
housing. (8) Ring
At the front it receives the drive pinion (67). (11) 1st, 2nd double cone synchronizer
Between the two lower bearings, it holds the 1st (7) (16) Bearing cup
and 2nd (14) idle mounted drive pinions, as well as the (17) Bearing cone
1st and 2nd gear synchromesh assembly (11), whose (18) 4th driving pinion
hub is held by splines. At the rear, it holds the 4th gear (23) 3rd, 4th double cone synchronizer
drive pinion (18) and the 3rd and 4th gear synchromesh
(26) Circlip
assembly (23).
(33) 4th synchromesh cone
(47) 3rd synchromesh cone
The 1st, 2nd (11) and 3rd, 4th (23) synchronizers are of (67) Drive pinion
the double cone type.
(68) Nut
(69) Mainshaft
The rear bore contains a needle bearing that holds the (70) Snap ring
front end of the output shaft. The turning parts are (71) Lubricating pipe
lubricated by a central channel and radial bores.
(72) Spring
(73) 1st synchromesh cone
The taper roller bearings are mounted with preload (74) 2nd synchromesh cone
obtained by shim(s) (3) inserted between the serrated (77) Washer with flat sections
washers (6) positioned against the drive pinion (67) and
(78) Tab washer
the ring (8). A washer (77) with flat sections acts as a
stop for the 1st drive pinion (7).
Fig. 1

Contents
Contents
Parts list (Fig. 2)

Exploded view
(1) Bearing cone
(2) Bearing cup
(3) Shim(s)
(6) Serrated washers
2
(7) 1st driving pinion
(8) Ring 1
(11) 1st, 2nd double cone synchronizer 67
(16) Bearing cup 78
(18) 4th driving pinion
(23) 3rd, 4th double cone synchronizer
(26) Circlip
(33) 4th synchromesh cone
(47) 3rd synchromesh cone
(67) Drive pinion
(68) Nut
(69) Mainshaft
(70) Snap ring
(72) Spring 17
(73) 1st synchromesh cone 16 1
(74) 2nd synchromesh cone 77
(77) Washer with flat sections 7 14
(78) Tab washer
26 73 8
2
6
11
74
3
47
23 69
72
70
71
33
4
MA-05-05083A
18
Fig. 2

Contents
Contents
axle (see chapter 2).
2. Split the gearbox from the engine (see chapter 2).
4. Remove the input unit assembly (see chapter 5).
5. Remove the layshaft (see chapter 5).
6. Remove the selector rail and the forks (see
chapter 5).
Remove the output shaft (see chapter 5).
7. Remove the mainshaft.

Contents

the shaft
Disassembly
NOTE: If work is only carried out on drive pinion (67),
hold the pinion and 1st, 2nd synchronizer assembly in
a straight line using a screwdriver so as not to move
the washer with flat sections (77).

9. Remove 3rd, 4th synchromesh (23) and cones (33)
and (47). Note the assembly order.
Remove the 4th gear pinion (18).
10. Position locking tool 3378082M1 (Fig. 3) and the
holding sleeve of shaft (69) (Fig. 4), made locally
(see § E). Fig. 3
11. Remove lubricating pipe (71) and spring (72).
12. Remove the safety device from nut (68) and loosen
with socket 3378010M1 (Fig. 5 et § E).
13. Remove drive pinion (67) with cone (1).
14. Remove washers (6) and shim(s) (3).
15. Remove the tool and sleeve (Fig. 3 - Fig. 4).
16. Pull the shaft out of the housing backwards, while
holding the 1st, 2nd pinion assembly together.
17. Remove 1st, 2nd pinion and synchromesh (11)
assembly with ring (8). Remove cups (16) and (2).
NOTE: Keep cups and cones paired if reused.
18. If the drive pinion (67), shaft (69) or taper roller
bearings (1) (2) and (16) (17) need to be replaced:
- remove the flat sided washer (77);
- extract the bearings cones (1) and (17);
- remove snap ring (70).
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Contents
Reassembly
19. Clean the housing and the mating faces.
20. With compressed air, check that no channels in the
gearbox or in the shaft are clogged.
defective parts.
22. Lubricate cones, cups, bearings bores and the ring.
23. If disassembled:
- fit bearing cone (17) onto shaft (69) using a press
and a suitable fixture;
- refit the flat sided washer (77), with the lubri-
cating grooves turned towards the 1st gear
pinion (7);
- refit snap ring (70).
24. Assemble the cups (2) and (16) inside the housing.
25. Refit the 1st, 2nd pinion, synchromesh (11), cones Fig. 6
(73) (74) and ring (8) assembly in the housing.
26. Fit the shaft from the rear of the housing while
holding the pinion / synchronizer assembly
together (Fig. 6), making sure that ring (8) is
correctly fitted in pinion (14).
27. Install locking tool 3378082M1 (see § E) and
locally made holding sleeve (Fig. 3 - Fig. 4).
28. If removed, fit the cone (1) on the pinion (67), using
a press and a suitable tool.
29. Install washers (6) separated by a number of shims
(3) sufficiently thick to obtain a temporary clear-
ance of 0.10 to 0.15 mm approx in preparation for
shimming with preload (see later).
30. Install pinion (67) on shaft (69).
31. Screw in the nut (68) using the socket
3378010M1. Tighten to a torque of 130 - 170 Nm
(Fig. 5).
32. Remove the tool and sleeve (Fig. 3 - Fig. 4).
33. Shim the shaft. Fig. 7
34. Position the dial gauge feeler pin at the end of the
shaft (Fig. 7).
35. From the front of the housing, pull hard on the
shaft, turning alternately from left to right to
correctly seat the cones in their bearing cups.
37. Repeat the operation 35, this time by pushing.
38. Depending on the clearance measured, select the
thickness of final shims required to obtain a
preload of P1 = 0.14 to 0.20 mm. If possible, shim
towards the maximum tolerance.
39. Install the locking tool and the holding sleeve
(Fig. 3 - Fig. 4).

Contents
40. Loosen nut (68).

41. Remove pinion (67).
D . Final operations
42. Position shims (3) selected during operation 38 53. Install and shim the output shaft (see chapter 5).
between two washers (6).
54. Refit the layshaft (see chapter 5).
43. Install the pinion.
55. Refit the input unit assembly (see chapter 5).
44. Degrease the thread of the shaft with a solvent.
56. Shim the layshaft (see chapter 5).
45. Lightly smear new nut (68) with Loctite 270 then
57. Refit the selector rail and the forks (see chapter 5).
46. Lock the nut by bending its collar, without breaking
it, into the grooves of the shaft using a suitable pin 59. Couple the gearbox to the engine (see chapter 2).
punch. 60. Couple the gearbox and the rear axle (see
47. Insert spring (72) and lubricating pipe (71) in the chapter 2).
shaft. 61. Check operation of electric circuits.
48. Remove the tool and the holding sleeve. 62. Carry out a road test of controls.
49. Fit pinion (18), 4th, 3rd synchromesh cones (33) 63. Check for hydraulic tightness of the unions and
and (47) and 3rd, 4th synchromesh (23). The lubri- mating faces (selector cover, gearbox on rear axle).
cating grooves should be turned towards the 4th
pinion (18).
50. Fit a new circlip (26), opening it as little as possible.
After assembly, check that the circlip is not bent.
51. Manually check:
- the axial clearance of the pinions;
- the rotation of the shaft and its pinions.
52. Check that the 1st, 2nd synchromesh operates
properly.
Contents
E . Service tools
• 3378010 M1: Socket for nut - Mainshaft (Fig. 8)
• 3378082 M1: Locking tool - Mainshaft (Fig. 9)
Locally made tool

• Holding sleeve for the mainshaft (Fig. 10)
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Fig. 10

Contents
Contents
GBA20 layshaft with Power Shuttle
05I02 - GBA20 layshaft with Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removing and refitting the shaft and pinion assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D . Removing and refitting pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
E . Replacing the taper roller bearings and the layshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
F . Shimming the pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
G . Shimming the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
H . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
I . Service tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 05I02.1

Contents
05I02.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
A . General
Overall view
The layshaft and its pinions (Fig. 1) form the upper line
of the GBA20 gearbox with power shuttle.
It supports the driven pinions of the 1st and 4th gears.
The shaft teeth (54) are constantly meshed with the
Tortoise pinion. 52 53 54 55 82 56 57 60 58 59 61
The shaft is supported by:
- the taper roller bearing (63) and (64) housed in the
rear bearing of the input unit; 64
- the taper roller bearing (52) and (53) located in the
rear bearing of the gearbox.
The four pinions are held in position by the spacers (57) 63
and (82).
The operating clearance of these pinions is obtained by
inserting shims (58) between the driven pinions of the 62
1st (60) and 2nd (59).
50 51
Parts list (Fig. 1)
(50) Oil deflector
MA-05-00492B
(51) Shim(s)
(52) Bearing cup
(53) Bearing cone
(54) Shaft
(55) 3rd driven pinion
(56) 4th driven pinion
(57) Spacer Exploded view
(58) Shim(s)
(59) 2nd driven pinion
(60) 1st driven pinion
(61) Circlip
(62) Needle bearing
(64) Bearing cup 57
60
(82) Spacer
58
59
61
55 63
82 64
50
51
52
53
54
62
MA-05-00493A
Fig. 1

Contents
Contents
IMPORTANT: To correctly shim the taper roller bearings
of the layshaft it is necessary to remove the gearbox.

axle (see chapter 2). 50
51
2. Split the gearbox from the engine (see chapter 2). 52
3. Place the gearbox on a workbench or a suitable
fixture.
Remove the forward clutch from the Power
Shuttle (see chapter 5).
IMPORTANT: After removing the input unit, pair the

bearing cup housed in the input unit rear bearing with
the layshaft of the front bearing cone.
C . Removing and refitting the shaft

and pinion assembly
Removal
6. To release the rear end of the shaft, remove oil
MA-05-00494B
deflector (50), using an inertia extractor, shims (51)
and cup (52) (Fig. 2).
7. Pull out the shaft and related pinion assembly from
the front side of the housing (Fig. 3) by tilting it so
that the set of pinions come out of the lower
shafts. Fig. 2
IMPORTANT: To remove the shaft, do not put the
handling bar in the bore so as not to damage
needle bearing (62) (Fig. 3). If necessary, carry out
the operation with the help of an assistant.
62
MA-05-00495A Fig. 3

Contents
Refitting
defective parts.
9. In the housing, position the assembled shaft with
its related pinions.
10. If necessary, check the shimming of the shaft or
carry it out (see § G). Otherwise, install cup (52),
initial shims and oil deflector (50).
D . Removing and refitting pinions

11. Remove the bearing cone (63).
12. Remove circlip (61) by opening it up as little as
possible.
13. Remove 2nd pinion (59), shims (58), 1st pinion (60)
and spacer (57).
14. Remove 4th pinion (56), spacer (82) and 3rd pinion
(55).
Reassembly (Fig. 1)
defective parts.
16. Install 3rd pinion (55), spacer (82) and 4th pinion
(56).
17. Fit the spacer (57). Install 1st pinion (60) and 2nd
pinion (59) , temporarily without the shims (58).
18. Fit the circlip (61).
19. Shim the pinions (see § F).
20. Install the shaft, assembled with related pinions, in
the housing (see § C).
Contents
E . Replacing the taper roller bear-

J1 = 0 / 0,25 mm
ings and the layshaft 59 60
Disassembly
21. Remove the shaft (54) and pinion assembly (see
§ C).
22. Extract the bearings cones (53) and (63); Discard
them.
23. If necessary, replace the shaft.
Reassembly
24. If the shaft (54) has been replaced:
Using a suitable fixture and a press, insert a new
MA-05-06026A
needle roller bearing (62) thrust up against the Fig. 4
shoulder of the shaft. Check needle rotation after
assembly.
25. Reassemble the pinions (see § D).
26. Fit bearing cones (63) and (53) using a press and a
suitable fixture.
27. Position the shaft, assembled with related pinions,
in the housing (see § C).
28. Shim the shaft (see § G).
F . Shimming the pinions

REMINDER: Pinions shall be stacked temporarily
without shims (58).
29. Measure the space between the 1st pinion (60)

and the 2nd pinion (59) using a set of shims (Fig. 4).
30. Depending on the measured distance, choose
shims of an appropriate thickness to obtain clear-
ance J1 = 0 to 0.25 mm (Fig. 4).
31. Remove circlip (61), opening it up as little as
possible, and remove pinion (59).
32. Slide the final shims, previously selected, onto the
shaft. Install the pinion and correctly fit the circlip.
33. Fit bearing cone (63) (see § E).
34. Install the shaft, assembled with related pinions, in
the housing (see § C).

Contents
G . Shimming the shaft

IMPORTANT: To carry out shimming on the mainshaft,
the new unit must be refitted (see chapter 5).
35. Carry out the shimming on the shaft to obtain

clearance of J2 = 0 to 0.08 mm (Fig. 6)
36. Install the locally made tool (Fig. 7 and § I) in the
shaft.
37. Slightly compress the spring, while tightening the
nut of the tool, to correctly seat the bearing cones
in their cups.
38. Rotate the shaft a few turns. Check spring
compression again.
39. Using a depth gauge (Fig. 5), measure dimension X
between side A of bearing cup (52) and side B of MA-05-00496A
Fig. 5
the housing (Fig. 6).
40. Measure thickness Y of oil deflector (50).
41. Calculate the difference between X and Y.
42. Determine the thickness of shims required to
obtain J2. 50 52
NOTE: If possible, shim so as to obtain minimum B
tolerance. A
43. Remove the compression tool.
44. Fit shims (51) selected in operation 42.
45. Fit the oil deflector in the housing.
X J2 = 0 / 0,08 mm
51
MA-05-00497A
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
MA-05-06013A
Contents
H . Final operations
46. Refit the input unit (see chapter 5).
48. Refit the forward clutch of the Power Shuttle (see
chapter 5).
Attach a sling to the gearbox. Lower it from the
workbench or suitable fixture.
49. Couple the gearbox and the engine (see chapter 2).
50. Assemble the tractor between the gearbox and the
rear axle (see chapter 2).
51. Check:
- oil tightness of the hydraulic circuits;
- correct operation of electrical circuits.
52. Carry out a road test of all controls.
53. Check oil tightness of unions and mating faces
(gear selector cover, gearbox on rear axle).

Contents
I . Service tool
Locally made tool
• Shaft holding tool (Fig. 8)
(1) Locally adapted washer MF 1610037M2
(2) Washer MF 3619200M2 to be machined
(3) Washer LL 2U:
- int. Ø = 12.5
- ext. Ø= 40
- thickness= 2.5
(4) Nut HM10
(5) ext. Ø = 79.7 + 0 / - 0.2
(6) Threaded rod M10 x 150: L = 1150
(7) Spring:
- int. Ø = 40
- thread Ø= 4
- L = 95
Fig. 8
Contents
GBA20 Creeper unit
05J01 - GBA20 Creeper unit
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removing the creeper unit and the ring gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
D . Removing the planet carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
E . Reassembling the planet carrier, refitting the ring gear and the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
F . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
G . Adjusting the control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 05J01.1

Contents
GBA20 Creeper unit
05J01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
GBA20 Creeper unit
Parts list (Fig. 1)

(1) Planet carrier
The creeper gear reduction unit consists of an epicyclic (2) Friction washer
gear train with a planet carrier and ring gear assembly (3) Closing plate
mounted to the rear of the main gearbox. This unit is (4) Grower washer
controlled by a lever located on the cab console and (5) Screw
linked by a cable to an guide rod link mounted to the (6) Snap ring
front right-hand side of the centre housing. This link
(7) Coupler ring
moves the coupler control fork.
(8) Sleeve
(9) Pinion gear
IMPORTANT: Creeper gears shall only be selected if the (10) Needle bearings
main gearbox is in the Tortoise range.
(11) Spacer
(12) Pin
(13) Plate
(14) Plate
(15) Stop plate
B . Operation (16) Circlip
The coupler (8) is splined to the connecting shaft (21).
Movement of lever "A" to Snail position (Fig. 4) moves (18) Friction washer
the coupler (8) backwards and firmly joins it to the (19) Ring gear
planet carrier (1) via its external teeth. The speed of the (20) Locating pin
shaft (21) is 1/4 in relation to the output shaft. (21) Link shaft
In normal gears, the gearbox output shaft is secured to
the link shaft (21) when the coupler (8) is moved
forward, thus ensuring direct drive.
When the creeper gear range is selected, the Snail
indicator light is lit on the instrument panel.
When the Hare range indicator light flashes, the engine
is in Hare position and must be shifted to Tortoise posi-
tion.
The electrical signal corresponding to selection of the
creeper range is sent via switch "C" fitted on the
control unit (Fig. 4).
Fig. 1

Contents
GBA20 Creeper unit
Contents
GBA20 Creeper unit
Parts list (Fig. 2) (10) Needle bearings

(11) Spacer
(1) Planet carrier
(12) Pin
(2) Friction washer
(13) Plate
(3) Closing plate
(14) Plate
(4) Grower washer
(15) Stop plate
(5) Screw
(16) Circlip
(6) Snap ring
(7) Coupler ring
(8) Sleeve
(19) Ring gear
(9) Pinion gear
(20) Locating pin
Fig. 2

Contents
GBA20 Creeper unit
C . Removing the creeper unit and

the ring gear
1. Take off the right-hand hydraulic cover and, if
required, the left-hand hydraulic cover (see chapter
9).
2. Disassemble the PTO assembly.
• 2-speed PTO
Remove (see chapter 7):
- the PTO top cover located at the back of the
centre housing;
- the driving pinion;
- the layshaft;
- the PTO clutch
• 4-speed LSPTO
Remove (see chapter 7):
- the PTO top cover located at the back of the
centre housing;
- the driving pinion;
- the layshaft;
- the PTO clutch.
3. Disassemble the sleeve / connecting shaft /
coupler / assembly and the fork (see chapter 5).
Removing the creeper unit and the reducer

ring gear
4. Remove the screws (5) and the washers (4).
5. Remove the closing plate (3).
6. Pull out the planet carrier (17) and the friction
washers (2) (18).
7. Remove ring gear (19).
NOTE: The locating pins (20) remain in the ring
gear.
8. Remove the stop plate (15) without pulling the
output shaft.
D . Removing the planet carrier

10. Drive out pins (12).
11. Remove the plates (13) (14).
12. Remove pinion gears (9).
IMPORTANT: Replace the planet carrier (1) if the dog
ring (7) is damaged.
Contents
GBA20 Creeper unit
E . Reassembling the planet carrier,

refitting the ring gear and the unit
13. Check and clean the components. Replace any
defective parts.
14. Install the sun gears (9). Use miscible grease in oil
to fit the needles (10).
15. Assemble the plates (13) (14).
16. Assemble the shafts (12), directing them as
required for assembling the circlip (16). 15
18
17. Fit the circlip (16). Manually check the axial clear-
ance and rotation of each pinion gear.
18. Position the stop plate (15) and the ring gear (19) 19
on the housing (Fig. 3).
19. Position the friction washers (2) (18) coated with
miscible grease on the planet carrier (4).
2
20. Slide the planet carrier on the output shaft.
21. Position the closing plate (3). Tighten screws (5) to
1
a torque of 34 - 52 Nm.
5
3
22. Reasassemble the fork and the rear sleeve / link MA-05-00513B
shaft / coupler assembly (see chapter 5).
23. Reassemble the PTO assembly.
• 2-speed PTO
- Refit the power take-off clutch (see chapter 7).
- Refit the layshaft, the driving pinion and the
PTO top cover (see chapter 7).
• 4-speed PTO Fig. 3
- Refit the power take-off clutch (see chapter 7).
- Refit the layshaft, the driving pinion and the
PTO top cover (see chapter 7).
24. Refit the left-hand hydraulic cover (if removed) and
the right-hand hydraulic cover (see chapter 9).
25. Carry out a road test of the creeper unit.
26. Check PTO and PTO brake operation.

Contents
GBA20 Creeper unit
G . Adjusting the control

1
27. Place control lever "A" in the "Snail" position (Fig. 4).
REMINDER: The control lever can be located in two 7
positions on the right-hand instrument panel,
depending on whether or not an autohitch is fitted. 2
28. Screw the clevis (1) flush with the threaded end of
the cable (6) (Fig. 4). 6
29. Fit the clevis (1) on to lever "A" with clip (7). Tighten
nut (2) (Fig. 4).
4
30. Screw nut (3) on the sheath end (5). A
31. Fit the sheath end and Grower washer on the
support. Tighten nut (4). C 3
IMPORTANT: Check that the cable is not pinched.
32. Position guide rod link "B" on "creeper unit" position 5
(Fig. 5) (reducer dog (8) engaged towards the rear MA-05-06021A
Fig. 4
(Fig. 1), fork locked.
the cable (6) (Fig. 5).
34. Fit clevis (9) on link B using clip (10). Tighten nut 14
(11) (Fig. 5). 13
35. Adjust the stop (12) with the nut (13), making sure 11
that guide rod link "B" is still effectively locked. 10
36. Tighten nut (14).
IMPORTANT: After tightening, check that there is no
tension on the cable. 12
B 6
37. Check that the "direct drive" position is locked.
9
11
9
MA-05-00515B Fig. 5
Contents
Rear axle
06 - Rear axle
CONTENTS
06A01 - General - GPA20 operation
06B01 - GPA20 Normal Duty Trumpet housings
06B02 - GPA20 Heavy Duty Trumpet housings
06C01 - GPA20 brake piston
06D01 - GPA20 handbrake unit and control
06E01 - GPA20 differential
06F01 - GPA20 hitch / Linkage
06G01 - GPA20 hitch hooks
06H01 - GPA20 rear wheels / hubs
Contents
Rear axle
Contents
General - GPA20 operation
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Centre housing assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Contents
Contents
Power take-off driveline

A . General
The rotation of the shaft passing through the gearbox,
The rear axle comprises four main housings: proportional to engine speed, is transmitted to the
- the centre housing which contains the bevel gear, hydraulic clutch located at the front of the centre
the power take-off gear in all variants and the housing (see section 7).
4-wheel drive transmission, the handbrake and main In the engaged position, drive is transmitted by a
brake control unit. It also supports the two trumpet layshaft and a set of driving and driven pinions to the
housings, the lift cover, and the side covers (see 540 or 1000 rpm PTO shaft. Speeds are selected by a
section 9) system of interchangeable shafts (see section 7) or by
- the right and left trumpets fixed to each side of the coupler (see section 7).
centre housing, and housing the rear wheel drive A hydraulic braking device stops the rotation of the
axle (see section 6) PTO shaft in the disengaged position.
- The lift cover fitted to the top of the centre housing Two additional options are offered:
supporting the lift arms which are attached to the - 4 speed LSPTO (see section 7)
tractor linkage (see section 6). - GSPTO (see section 7).
B . Centre housing assembly Handbrake assembly

A brake assembly comprising three discs and an
Differential expander mechanism is fitted to the drive pinion (see
section 6).
The drive pinion is driven by the gearbox output shaft,
integral via splined sleeves with the link shaft. The
helical bevel gear assembly transmits the drive to the Main brakes
trumpet final drive units. A differential lock system
Two pistons fitted laterally in two cavities in the centre
fitted with a coupler and activated by hydraulic pres-
housing act on two discs integral with the trumpet
sure is incorporated into the unit (see section 6).
input sun gears. The brake pistons are activated
The differential lock controlled either by the Autotronic hydraulically (see section 6).
5 for models fitted with a power shuttle, or by an elec-
tric circuit for models fitted with a mechanical reverse
shuttle.
4-wheel drive clutch

A driving pinion integral with the drive pinion drives the
counterdriven pinion of the 4 WD clutch assembly.
Drive is then transmitted via Belleville washers to the
clutch output shaft (see section 8).
The 4WD clutch is hydraulically activated.
There is therefore no possibility of accidental disen-
gagement of the 4WD clutch in the event of hydraulic
failure.

Contents
Legend
J Clearance
P Preload
E Apex distance
E = Z + T - (X + Y)
E = 184.955 + T - (X +90.520).
when:
Z: Nominal drive pinion dimension = 184.955 mm
T: Correction of the nominal dimension engraved
on the end of the drive pinion; this may be a posi-
tive or negative value.
X: Dimension of the centre housing stamped on
the rear right-hand side of the housing, behind the
lift ram.
Y: Dimension of the drive pinion with bearing =
90.520 mm.
Contents
Centre housing assembly

(longitudinal section)
Fig. 1

Contents
Rear transmission assembly

(cross section)
Fig. 2
Contents
GPA20 Normal Duty Trumpet housings
06B01 - GPA20 Normal Duty Trumpet housings
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Trumpet assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Planet carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Bearings and seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Preloading the axle shaft bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
F . Replacing a lug stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Contents
Contents
Parts list
A . General
(1) Lug stud
Description (2) Axle shaft
(3) Three-lipped seal
The trumpet housings support the right- and left-hand
(4) Seal cage
side axle shafts and contain the final drive units that
transmit the rotation from the differential assembly. (5) Bearing cup
(5A) Bearing cone
Both trumpet housings are symmetrical and fitted on
either side of the centre housing. (6) Trumpet housing
(7) Seal
(8) Bearing cup
Construction (8A) Bearing cone
The axle shaft (2) is supported by two opposing taper (9) Tab washer
roller bearings (5) (8). External tightness is ensured via (10) Planet carrier
a three-lipped seal (3) and internal tightness by a (11) Snap ring
single-lip seal (7). The three-pinion final drive unit (14) (12) Pinion gear pin
planet carrier assembly (10) is integral in rotation with (13) Friction shim(s)
the shaft (2) via splines. (14) Pinion gear
The Normal Duty planet carriers have a single row of (15) Needle bearings
needles (16). The internal surfaces of the planet carrier (16) Screw
(10) are rough cast and therefore require adjustment
(17) Brake plate
using friction shims (13). Shims (25) placed at the end
of the shaft allow for preloading of taper roller bear- (18) Brake disc
ings. Axle shaft (2) and planet carrier (10) are held in (19) Screw
place by the washer (24) and screw (23). The final drive (20) Pin
ring gear (21) is force fitted into the trumpet and held (21) Final drive ring gear
in place via three screws (16). It has three pins (20) (22) Sun gear
ensuring centring of the brake plate (17). (23) Screw
Differential rotation is transmitted to the pinion gears (24) Washer
of the drive unit via a sun gear shaft (22) on the teeth (25) Shim(s)
of which the brake disc (18) is placed. (26) Pin
(27) Plug
The brake discs are lubricated by a continuous flow of
oil from the lift control valve (see section 9).

Contents
Overall view
Fig. 1
Contents
Exploded view
Fig. 2

Contents
B . Trumpet assembly
Removal
1. Immobilise the tractor. Apply the handbrake. Fit
shims between the frame and the front axle beam
(see section 2).
2. Drain the rear axle.
3. With the help of a trolley jack, raise the relevant
side of the tractor.
4. Position an axle stand.
5. Disassemble the wheel.
6. Remove the stabilising support.
7. Disconnect the hose (1) or (3) and the brake lubri-
cating pipe(s) (Fig. 3).
8. Remove cab attachment screw A (cab with trans-
mission shaft tunnel Fig. 4, flat floor cab Fig. 5). Fig. 3
9. Raise the cab enough to allow trumpet housing
removal (shim the cab).
IMPORTANT: Check the gap between the bonnet
and the windshield (remove the body if required).
10. If the trumpet is replaced, remove shims C by
taking out screws B (Fig. 4 and Fig. 5).
11. Install a suitable fixture under the trumpet and
place it on a trolley jack.
12. For the left-hand trumpet, disconnect the feed pipe
from the lift control valve (block channels).
13. Loosen the attachment screws (19).
14. With the help of an operator and in compliance
with safety regulations, split the trumpet from rear
axle housing.
15. Remove:
- brake disc (18)
- sun gear (22)
- locating pin (26) Fig. 4
16. Remove the brake plate (17).
Fig. 5
Contents
Refitting
17. Clean the mating faces on the rear axle housing
and on the trumpet housing with a non-greasy
solvent.
18. Apply a bead of oil resistant silicone (Silicomet
type) to the inner edge of the centre housing
(Fig. 6).
19. Check that the disc (18) slides freely on the sun
gear (22) (Fig. 7)
20. Refit the locating pin (26), the sun gear (22) and the
brake disc (18).
21. Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs into
the centre housing.
22. Refit the brake plate (17) in the trumpet housing.
NOTE: In order to hold the plate in place, apply a
small amount of miscible grease to the face of the
ring gear (21). Fig. 6
23. Couple the trumpet housing to the rear axle,
following the safety procedures used during its
removal.
NOTE: Turn the shaft (2) to engage the sun gear
(22) in the pinion gears.
24. Clean the screws (19) and smear them with
Plastex, Hylomar or an equivalent gasket seal
paste.
25. Fit and tighten the screws (19) to a torque of 170 -
210 Nm.
26. Carry out operations 11 and 12 in reverse order.
28. Refit the cab attachment screws.
29. Refit the other removed parts.
30. Top up the oil level in the rear axle.
31. Refit the wheel. Tighten to a torque of 400 - 450
Nm.
32. Remove the axle stand. Fig. 7
33. Test the lift mechanism and braking circuit.
34. Check for tightness:
- between the trumpet and rear axle housing
- of the lift control valve feed pipe
- of brake lubricating pipes.

Contents
C . Planet carrier
Disassembly
35. Remove the trumpet housing (see § B).
36. Remove screw (23).
37. Take off the lock washer (24) and the shim(s) (25)
(Fig. 8).
38. Remove the planet carrier (10).
39. Open the snap ring (11).
40. With a hammer, lightly tap on the three pins (12).
41. Take out the three pins (12) and the snap ring (11).
42. Remove the three pinion gears (14), the needles
(15) and the shims (13).
Reassembly
Fig. 8
43. Clean the planet carrier (10), the pins (12) and the
pinion gears (14). Check the components.
44. Smear the needles with miscible grease. Fit a row
of needles in each pinion gear (Fig. 8).
45. Shim the pinion gears.
NOTE: Shims (13) are available in three different
thicknesses.
46. Fit the pinion gears (14) with shims (13) of medium
thickness on either side.
47. Engage the three pins (12).
48. Use a set of shims to determine a thickness of
shims (13) to fit to obtain axial clearance between
0.15 and 0.55 mm on each pinion gear (Fig. 9).
49. Pull gently on the three pins, and fit the shims (13)
selected at operation 48.
50. Drive out the three pins and the snap ring (11).
51. Open the snap ring (11) (Fig. 10).
52. Tap lightly on the three pins so that the snap ring Fig. 9
fits into the groove of the planet carrier (Fig. 10).
53. Ensure that the tab washer (9) is present.
54. Refit the planet carrier.
55. Fit shims to obtain the required preload (see § E).
56. Refit the trumpet housing (see § B).
Fig. 10
Contents
D . Bearings and seals

Disassembly
57. Remove the trumpet housing from the rear axle
housing (see § B).
58. Remove the planet carrier (see § C).
59. Remove:
- the tab washer (9)
- the cone (8A) (idle-mounted on shaft).
60. Take the shaft (2) out of the trumpet housing.
61. Extract the cone (5A).
62. Drive off the lip seal (3).
63. Using an extractor, take out:
- the cup (5)
- the cage (4) from the seal (3)
Fig. 11
- the cup (8).
64. Drive off the seal (7).
Reassembly
NOTE: The ring gear (21) is force fitted in the trumpet
housing (6). It is centred by the three pins (20) (Loctite
638) and tightened by the screws (16). Tighten to a
torque of 79 - 90 Nm (Loctite 242).
65. Clean the seal mating faces and the location of
cups and cones inside the trumpet and on the
shaft. Seal, cup and cone mating faces should be
free of burrs and dents.
66. Smear the external diameter of the seal (7) with
Loctite 542 (metal cage).
NOTE: Follow the assembly order of the seal.
67. Replacing the seal (7):
without shaft replacement (2): to avoid the seal
lip from bearing on the same place on the shaft, Fig. 12
insert the seal 4 mm from the shoulder of the cup
(8) (Fig. 11).
with shaft replacement (2): position the seal 5
mm from the shoulder of the cup (8) (Fig. 12).
68. Lubricate the cups (8) (5) and fit them home
against the shoulder.
69. Fit the cage (4) into the base of the shoulder
(Fig. 13).
Fig. 13

Contents
70. Fit the three-lipped seal (3) home against the

shoulder of the shaft.
NOTE: Follow the assembly order of the seal
(Fig. 13).
71. Lubricate the shaft (2) and fit the cone (5A) home
72. Moderately grease the cone (5A) and seal lips (3)
(7) (BP Agricharge grease or equivalent).
73. Protect the shaft splines (2) and insert it into the
trumpet housing.
NOTE: The seal lips (3) must be turned outwards.
74. Take off the shaft protection and lightly lubricate
the cone (8A).
75. Refit the cone (8A), washer (9) and planet carrier
(10).
77. Replace plug (27) with a grease nipple. Partially fill Fig. 14
the trumpet cavity between the cone (5A) and the
seal (3) with BP Agricharge grease or equivalent.
Take off the grease nipple and tighten the plug
again (Fig. 13).
E . Preloading the axle shaft bear-

ings
78. Place trumpet assembly in vertical position.
79. Remove the screw (23) and washer (24).
80. Seat the cones (5A) (8A) in their cups by turning the
trumpet on its pin.
81. Set a thickness of shims (25) greater than dimen-
sion X in order to obtain clearance (Fig. 14).
82. Fit the washer (24) and screw (23) and tighten to a
83. Using a dial gauge, check the clearance by moving
Fig. 15
the planet carrier axially (Fig. 15).
Depending on the dial gauge reading, take off the
surplus shim thickness (25) in order to obtain a
preload of:
P1 = 0.025 to 0.125 mm
85. Clean the tapping at the end of the shaft (2).
86. Refit the washer (24).
87. Clean the screw (23) and smear it with Loctite 241.
Tighten to a torque of 270 - 440 Nm.
Contents
F . Replacing a lug stud

88. Drive off the defective stud with the help of a
bronze drift and a hammer.
89. Use a brush and solvent to clean the streak marks
left by the stud on the shaft flange.
90. Dry using compressed air.
91. Place several drops of Loctite 270 on the new stud
serration.
92. Place the new stud over the serration marks left by
the former stud.
93. After checking that splines are properly engaged,
bring the stud head towards the inner flange of the
axle shaft with a bronze hammer.

Contents
Contents
GPA20 Heavy Duty Trumpet housings
06B02 - GPA20 Heavy Duty Trumpet housings
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Trumpet assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Planet carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Bearings and seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Preloading the axle shaft bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
F . Replacing a wheel stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Contents
Contents
Parts list
A . General
(1) Wheel stud
Description (2) Axle shaft
(3) Three-lipped seals
The trumpet housings support the right- and left-hand
(4) Seal cage
side axle shafts and contain the final drive units that
transmit the rotation from the differential assembly. (5) Bearing cup
(5A) Bearing cone
Both trumpet housings are symmetrical and fitted on
either side of the centre housing. (6) Trumpet housing
(7) Seal
(8) Bearing cup
Construction (8A) Bearing cone
The axle shaft (2) is supported by two opposing taper (9) Tab washer
roller bearings (5) (8). External tightness is ensured via (10) Planet carrier
a three-lip seal (3) and internal tightness by a single-lip (11) Snap ring
seal (7). The three-pinion final drive unit (14) planet (12) Pinion gear pin
carrier assembly (10) is integral in rotation with the (13) Friction shim(s)
shaft (2) via splines. (14) Pinion gear
The reinforced Heavy Duty planet carriers have a (15) Spacer
double row of needles (16). The internal surfaces of (16) Needle bearings
the planet carrier (10) are rough cast and therefore
(17) Screw
require adjustment using friction shims (13). Shims
(26) placed at the end of the shaft allow for preloading (18) Brake plate
of taper roller bearings. The axle shaft (2) and planet (19) Brake disc
carrier (10) are held in place by the washer (25) and (20) Screw
screw (24). The final drive ring gear (22) is force fitted (21) Pin
into the trumpet and held in place via three screws (22) Final drive ring gear
(17). It has three pins (21) ensuring centring of the (23) Sun gear
brake plate (18). (24) Screw
Differential rotation is transmitted to the pinion gears (25) Washer
of the drive unit via a sun gear shaft (22) on the teeth (26) Shim(s)
of which the brake disc (18) is placed. (27) Pin
(28) Plug
The brake discs are lubricated by a continuous flow of
oil from the lift control valve (see section 9).

Contents
Overall view
Fig. 1
Contents
Exploded view
Fig. 2

Contents
B . Trumpet assembly
Removal
1. Immobilise the tractor. Apply the handbrake. Fit
shims between the frame and the front axle beam
(see section 2).
2. Drain the rear axle.
3. With the help of a trolley jack, raise the relevant
side of the tractor.
4. Position an axle stand.
6. Remove the stabilising support.
7. Disconnect the hose (1) or (3) and the brake lubri-
cating pipe(s) (Fig. 3).
8. Remove cab attachment screw A (cab with trans-
mission shaft tunnel Fig. 4, flat floor cab Fig. 5). Fig. 3
9. Raise the cab enough to allow trumpet housing
removal (shim the cab).
IMPORTANT: Check the gap between the bonnet
and the windshield (remove the body if required).
10. If the trumpet is replaced, remove shims C by
taking out screws B (Fig. 4 and Fig. 5).
11. Install a suitable fixture under the trumpet and
place it on a trolley jack.
12. For the left-hand trumpet, disconnect the feed pipe
from the lift control valve (block channels).
13. Loosen the attachment screws (20).
14. With the help of an operator and in compliance
with safety regulations, split the trumpet from rear
axle housing.
15. Remove:
- brake disc (19)
- sun gear (23)
- locating pin (27) Fig. 4
16. Remove the brake plate (18).
Fig. 5
Contents
Refitting
solvent.
18. Apply a bead of oil resistant silicone (Silicomet
type) to the inner edge of the centre housing
(Fig. 6).
19. Check that the disc (19) slides freely on the sun
gear (23) (Fig. 7)
20. Refit the locating pin (27), the sun gear (23) and the
brake disc (19).
21. Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs into
the centre housing.
22. Refit the brake plate (18) in the trumpet housing.
NOTE: In order to hold the plate in place, apply a
small amount of miscible grease to the face of the
ring gear (22). Fig. 6
23. Couple the trumpet housing to the rear axle,
following the safety procedures used during its
removal.
NOTE: Turn the shaft (2) to engage the sun gear
(23) in the pinion gears.
24. Clean the screws (20) and smear them with
Plastex, Hylomar or an equivalent gasket seal
paste.
25. Fit and tighten the screws (20) to a torque of 170 -
210 Nm.
28. Refit the cab attachment screws.
29. Refit the other removed parts.
31. Refit the wheel. Tighten to a torque of 400 - 450
Nm.
32. Remove the axle stand. Fig. 7
33. Test the lift mechanism and braking circuit.
- between the trumpet and rear axle housing
- of the lift control valve feed pipe
- of brake lubricating pipes.

Contents
C . Planet carrier
Disassembly
35. Remove the trumpet housing (see § B).
37. Take off the lock washer (25) and the shim(s) (26)
(Fig. 8).
38. Remove the planet carrier (10).
39. Open the snap ring (11).
40. With a hammer, lightly tap on the three pins (12).
41. Take out the three pins (12) and the snap ring (11).
42. Remove the three pinion gears (14), needles (16),
spacers (15) and shims (13).
Reassembly
Fig. 8
43. Clean the planet carrier (10), the pins (12) and the
pinion gears (14). Check the components.
44. Smear the needles with miscible grease. On each
pinion gear, place two rows of needles (16) sepa-
rated by a spacer (15) (Fig. 8).
45. Shim the pinion gears.
NOTE: Shims (13) are available in three different
thicknesses.
46. Fit the pinion gears (14) with shims (13) of medium
thickness on either side.
47. Engage the three pins (12).
48. Use a set of shims to determine a thickness of
shims (13) to fit to obtain axial clearance between
0.15 and 0.55 mm on each pinion gear (Fig. 9).
49. Pull gently on the three pins, and fit the shims (13)
selected at operation 48.
50. Drive out the three pins and the snap ring (11).
51. Open the snap ring (11) (Fig. 10). Fig. 9
52. Tap lightly on the three pins so that the snap ring
fits into the groove of the planet carrier (Fig. 10).
53. Ensure that the tab washer (9) is present.
54. Refit the planet carrier.
56. Refit the trumpet housing (see § B).
Fig. 10
Contents
D . Bearings and seals

Disassembly
57. Remove the trumpet housing from the rear axle
housing (see § B).
58. Remove the planet carrier (see § C).
59. Remove:
- the tab washer (9)
- the cone (8A) (idle-mounted on shaft).
60. Take the shaft (2) out of the trumpet housing.
61. Extract the cone (5A).
62. Drive off the lip seal (3).
63. Using an extractor, take out:
- the cup (5).
- the cage (4) from the seal (3)
Fig. 11
- the cup (8).
64. Drive off the seal (7).
Reassembly
NOTE: The ring gear (22) is force fitted in the trumpet
housing (6). It is centred by the three pins (21) (Loctite
638) and tightened by the screws (17). Tighten to a
torque of 79 - 90 Nm (Loctite 242).
65. Clean the seal mating faces and the location of
cups and cones inside the trumpet and on the
shaft. Seal, cup and cone mating faces should be
free of burrs and dents.
66. Smear the external diameter of the seal (7) with
Loctite 542 (metal cage).
NOTE: Follow the assembly order of the seal.
67. Replacing the seal (7):
without shaft replacement (2): to avoid the seal
lip from bearing on the same place on the shaft, Fig. 12
insert the seal 4 mm from the shoulder of the cup
(8) (Fig. 11).
with shaft replacement (2): position the seal 5
mm from the shoulder of the cup (8) (Fig. 12).
68. Lubricate the cups (8) (5) and fit them home
69. Fit the cage (4) into the base of the shoulder
(Fig. 13).
Fig. 13

Contents
70. Fit the three-lipped seal (3) home against the

shoulder of the shaft.
NOTE: Follow the assembly order of the seal
(Fig. 13).
71. Lubricate the shaft (2) and fit the cone (5A) home
72. Moderately grease the cone (5A) and seal lips (3)
(7) (BP Agricharge grease or equivalent).
73. Protect the shaft splines (2) and insert it into the
trumpet housing.
NOTE: The seal lips (3) must be turned outwards.
74. Take off the shaft protection and lightly lubricate
the cone (8A).
75. Refit the cone (8A), washer (9) and planet carrier
(10).
77. Replace plug (28) with a grease nipple. Partially fill Fig. 14
the trumpet cavity between the cone (5A) and the
seal (3) with BP Agricharge grease or equivalent.
Take off the grease nipple and tighten the plug
again (Fig. 13).
E . Preloading the axle shaft bear-

ings
78. Place trumpet assembly in vertical position.
80. Seat the cones (5A) (8A) in their cups by turning the
trumpet on its pin.
81. Set a thickness of shims (26) greater than dimen-
sion X in order to obtain clearance (Fig. 14).
82. Fit the washer (25) and screw (24) and tighten to a
83. Using a dial gauge, check the clearance by moving
Fig. 15
the planet carrier axially (Fig. 15).
Depending on the dial gauge reading, take off the
surplus shim thickness (26) in order to obtain a
preload of:
P1 = 0.025 to 0.125 mm
85. Clean the tapping at the end of the shaft (2).
86. Refit the washer (25).
87. Clean the screw (24) and smear it with Loctite 241.
Tighten to a torque of 270 - 440 Nm.
Contents
F . Replacing a wheel stud

89. Use a brush and solvent to clean the streak marks
left by the stud on the shaft flange.
91. Place several drops of Loctite 270 on the new stud
serration.
92. Place the new stud over the serration marks left by
the former stud.
93. After checking that splines are properly engaged,
bring the stud head towards the inner flange of the
axle shaft with a bronze hammer.

Contents
Contents
GPA20 brake piston
06C01 - GPA20 brake piston
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Contents
GPA20 brake piston
Contents
GPA20 brake piston
A . General
The brake pistons are housed in two lateral cavities of
the rear axle housing, concentric with the mating face
of each trumpet housing (see chapter 6).
They comprise a shouldered part and are guided by 3

locating pins force-fitted in the housing.
Sealing is ensured by two O’rings fitted in grooves of

the rear axle housing. Each piston is controlled by a
master cylinder topped by a tank whose level is kept
constant by the residual oil flow from the 17 bar valve.
Each piston acts directly on a friction disc with inserted

hub, fitted to the trumpet input sun gear and a plate
centred by pins and bearing on the ring gear of the final
drive unit. When the brake is released, a self-adjusting
device ensures a minimal clearance between the
piston and the brake disc and maintains a constant
pedal travel.
The brake discs are lubricated by an oil flow. This

continuous flow from the lift valve is directed to the
brake discs via a pipe and a restrictor union screwed
onto the trumpet housing. The oil circulating between
the discs and the pistons lubricates the braking
surfaces when they are not in use and cools the brakes
when they are used.

Contents
GPA20 brake piston
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
B . Disassembly
1. Remove the trumpet housing. (see chapter 6).
2. Remove the disc (1), the sun gear (2), and locating
pin (3) (Fig. 1).
3. Remove the brake plate (1) (inside the trumpet
housing) (Fig. 2).
4. Remove the screws (3) (Fig. 3) with a locally made
socket.
Take the piston (1) out of the housing with a jet of
compressed air applied to the union (2) (Fig. 4).
NOTE: To facilitate access to the union (2), if neces-
sary, disconnect the 4-speed LSPTO control (if
fitted) and position the union correctly.
5. Remove the O'rings (1) (2) on the housing and
discard them (Fig. 5).
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Contents
GPA20 brake piston
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
C . Reassembly
6. Check and clean all components. Replace any
defective parts.
NOTE: To ensure that the brake self-adjusting
system operates correctly, it is mandatory to
centre the right- and left-hand differential flanges
with a locally made tool (see chapter 6).
7. Fit the piston (1) without seals in the housing (2)
(Fig. 6) and check that it slides freely in the bore of
the housing and that it fits onto the locating pins (3)
without any friction points. Remove the piston
after carrying out this check.
8. Fit spring pins (4) about 8 mm from machined face
“F” of the piston (3) (Fig. 7).
Fit new O'rings (1) (2) (Fig. 5) after smearing them
Fig. 7
with a moderate quantity of miscible grease so
that they remain at the bottom of the groove.
9. Position the piston over the locating pins, then fit it
in place using a plastic mallet, striking in alternate
points around the circumference (Fig. 8).
Fit the screws (3) (Fig. 9) after lightly smearing
them with Loctite 241 and tighten them to a torque
of 10 Nm with the locally made socket.
Fig. 8

Contents
GPA20 brake piston
Hydraulic test
NOTE: If work is carried out on the brake piston and
O'rings, it is necessary to check for leaks.
10. Check the condition of the supply union fitted on

the centre housing.
11. Fit a pressure gauge to the union.
12. Supply the circuit with compressed air at approx. 5
bar to ensure that the piston and O'rings are posi-
tioned correctly. Reduce pressure to 0.3 bar to
carry out the test.
13. Close the pressure relief valve. For one minute, no
drop in pressure must be observed on the pres-
sure gauge.
14. Remove the pressure gauge and reconnect the
brake hose.
Fig. 9
Refitting the trumpet housing
solvent. Apply a bead of oil resistant silicone (Sili-
comet type) to the inner edge of the centre
housing (Fig. 10). Refit the sun gear (2), the disc
(1), and locating pin (3) (Fig. 11).
NOTE: Check that the disc slides freely on the sun
gear.
16. Refit the trumpet housing (see chapter 6).
17. Bleed the main brake circuit and trailer brake circuit
(if fitted) (see chapter 9).
18. Test:
- linkage
- braking on the road
- between the trumpet and rear axle housing Fig. 10
- of the lift control valve feed pipe.
Fig. 11
Contents
GPA20 handbrake unit and control
06D01 - GPA20 handbrake unit and control
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Assembling and adjusting the control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Contents
Contents
A . General
The handbrake assembly is fitted on the drive pinion. It
consists of a mechanism placed between three friction
discs splined to the drive pinion.
The mechanism comprises two cast iron plates held by

springs and separated by balls housed in ramps.
The three discs are fitted to the drive pinion as follows:

- two discs separated by an intermediate plate
between the thrust plate (29) and the mechanism,
- a disc between the mechanism and the closing plate
(24).
B . Operation
When the handbrake lever in the cab is pulled, the cam
(14) is moved via the pin (20). The cam pushes the
guide rod link (13) which causes the plates of the
mechanism (31) to rotate and move apart. The discs
(30) are thus compressed between the moving plates
(31), the intermediate plate (34), the closing plate (24)
and the thrust plate (29), preventing the drive pinion
from rotating.
When the handbrake lever is released, the spring (17)

moves the cam (14) to the rest position and the mech-
anism is closed by its springs.

Contents
Parts list
(1) Circlip
(2) Pinion
(3) Stud
(4) Nut
(5) Plate
(6) Pin
(7) Clevis
(8) Pin
(9) Cotter pin
(10) Left-hand cover
(11) Plug
(12) Seal
(13) Link
(14) Cam
(15) Circlip
(16) Finger
(17) Spring
(18) Locating pin
(19) Seal
(20) Control pin
(21) Snap ring
(22) Washer
(23) Finger
(24) Closing plate
(25) Screw
(26) Drive pinion
(27) Shim(s)
(28) Screw
(29) Thrust plate
(30) Discs
(31) Mechanism
(32) O’ring
(33) Retainer ring
(34) Intermediate plate
Contents
Overall view
Fig. 1

Contents
Exploded view
18
29
33
28
19
30
32 34
30
20 31 26
30
17
21 3
6
22
2 7
9
8
16
14 13
5
15 4
24
23
25
1
MA-06-00105A
Fig. 2
Contents
C . Disassembly
1. Drain the rear axle housing.
2. Chock:
- the front wheels of the tractor
- between the frame and the front axle (Fig. 3)
3. Raise the tractor using a jack.
4. Place stands.
5. Remove the rear wheels.
6. Remove the right- and left-hand hydraulic casing
covers (see chapter 9).
Tractor with no creeper unit A (Fig. 4)

7. Drive out the double pins (2) (4) from the coupling
sleeves (1) (5) (Fig. 4). Slide the sleeves towards
each other on the shaft (3) linking the drive pinion Fig. 3
(26) and the gearbox ouptut shaft.
Remove the shaft and sleeves assembly (Fig. 4).
On 4WD tractors: if the pins are not accessible,
separate the front axle shaft by sliding the rear
sleeve and manually turning the front axle clutch
shaft to position the shaft (3).
8. Take off circlip (1) (Fig. 2).
9. Remove the pinion (2) (if fitted).
Tractor with creeper unit B (Fig. 4)

10. Remove the creeper unit fork and the sleeve
assembly (link shaft and coupler).
11. If the pins are not accessible, see operation 7.
12. Carry out operations 8 and 9.
Tractors with or without creeper unit

Fig. 4
13. If necessary, remove the cab attachment screws.
Raise and chock the cab.
Check that there is enough space between the
bonnet and the windscreen (if the space is insuffi-
cient, remove the bodywork).
14. Disconnect the cable (3). Take out the pin (1) and
remove the control linkage (2) (Fig. 5).
Fig. 5

Contents
15. Remove the retainer ring (33) and remove the seal
(19).
16. Release the spring (17) using pliers.
17. Loosen the nut (4) to release the guide rod link (13)
from the cam (14).
19. Remove the cam (14) with the finger (16).
21. Remove the closing plate (24) and the control pin
(20).
NOTE: Keep the mechanism (31) and the brake
discs (30) towards the rear. Extract the closing
plate (24) (Fig. 6), tilting it to disengage it from the
pin (18), finger (23) and drive pinion (26) and to
release the pin (20) from the housing.
22. Remove the spring (17) and the washer (22).
23. Remove the snap ring (21) (if necessary) on the Fig. 6
control pin (20).
24. Remove the discs (30) and the mechanism (31).
If the mechanism needs to be replaced

25. Unscrew the nut (4), remove the plate (5) and the
pin (6).
26. Take out the pin (9), remove the pin (8) and the
clevis (7).
NOTE: The stud (3) is smeared with Loctite 270 and
locked in the clevis (7).
If the thrust plate (29) needs to be replaced

27. Remove two diametrically opposed screws (28)
and screw in two guide studs (A) (Fig. 7). The
purpose of this operation is to hold the shims (27)
(Fig. 8).
28. Loosen the two remaining screws. Fig. 7
29. Remove the thrust plate (29).
NOTE: Check that the shims have all remained on
the housing.
The finger (16) smeared with Loctite 270 is
screwed into the cam (14). The finger (23) smeared
with Loctite 270 is screwed into the thrust plate
(29).
The locating pin (18) is fitted fully home on the
shoulder of the closing plate (24).
Fig. 8
Contents
D . Reassembly
defective parts.
If the thrust plate (29) has been replaced

31. Refit the plate.
32. Smear two screws (28) with Loctite 270, then
If the mechanism has been replaced

33. Refit the clevis (7) prepared with the stud (3) and
the pin (8). Replace the pin (9).
34. Fit the guide rod link (13) with its pin (6) on the stud
(3) of the clevis.
35. Refit the plate (5), tighten the nut (4). Fig. 9
NOTE: The plate (5) is rectangular. It must be posi-
tioned horizontally so that the pin (6) fits correctly
on the link (13) (Fig. 9).
36. Refit the discs (30), placing the mechanism (31)
between them.
NOTE: Fit the guide rod link (13) on the finger (23).
Check that the discs slide freely on the shaft of the
drive pinion (26).
37. Place the snap ring (21) (if removed) on the pin (20).
38. Fit the pin (20) in the closing plate (24) with the
washer (22), the spring (17) and the seal (32).
39. Carry out operation 21 in reverse order.
40. Check that the discs (30) and the mechanism (31)
are correctly positioned.
41. Fit and tighten the screws (25) to a torque of 90
-120 Nm.
42. Fit the cam (14) with its finger (16).
Fig. 10
43. Place circlip (15). Tension the spring (17), posi-
tioning its ends E as indicated (Fig. 10).
44. Lightly smear the pin (20) with AS 767 Anti-Seize
grease or equivalent. Fit the seal (19) on the
housing and compress it to 5.8 ± 0.15 mm using a
retainer ring (33) (Fig. 11).
Fig. 11

Contents
45. Refit the pinion (2) (if fitted).

46. Position the circlip (1).
47. Depending on the model:
- with creeper unit: refit the sleeve assembly (link
shaft and coupler) and the creeper unit fork. Turn
the groove on the drive pinion sleeve towards
the rear of the tractor. Replace the pins. Adjust
the forks (see chapter 5).
- without creeper unit: refit the sleeve assembly
(link shaft and coupler). Turn the groove on the
drive pinion sleeve towards the rear of the
tractor. Replace the pins.
48. Refit the left-hand cover (see chapter 9).
49. Position the guide rod link (2) (Fig. 12) with the cam
(14) in contact with the guide rod link (13) to obtain
a distance of 315 mm ± 12mm between the cable
attachment pin and the support (3). Fit the pin (1)
(Fig. 12). Fig. 12
50. Adjust the mechanism (31) with the adjusting nut,
so that cam displacement from rest position “a” to
maximum position “b” is 60° (Fig. 13).
NOTE: The adjusting nut (4) is accessed via the plug
port (3) on the left-hand cover (Fig. 14).
51. Reconnect the control.
52. Adjust the handbrake control.
See out operations 63 to 69.
If the rear of the cab is raised, carry out operation
13 in reverse.
55. Refit the wheels.
56. Remove the stands and the jack.
57. Tighten wheels to a torque of 400 - 450 Nm.
58. Remove the chocks at the front of the tractor
between the frame and the front axle. Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Contents
59. Top up the rear axle housing with oil.

60. Check the operation of the electrical circuits, low
pressure switch, solenoids, and clogging indicator.
61. Check the operation of the linkage and handbrake.
62. Check for the oil tightness of the mating faces,
covers and hydraulic unions.
E . Assembling and adjusting the

control
63. Introduce the cable (1) from below towards the cab
interior and fasten with the clip (2) (Fig. 15).
64. Fix the clevis (7) on the brake lever (4) with the pin
(5), the washer (6) and the pin (3) (Fig. 16).
NOTE: Check that the cable is not pinched.
65. Fit the sheath end (2) in the clamp (1) (Fig. 15).
Fig. 15
66. Attach the end of the cable (7) to the lever (6)
(Fig. 16).
67. Place the handbrake lever in the released position.
Adjust imperatively to obtain a distance of 315 mm
± 12 mm between the nut (5) and the cable end
axis (7) (Fig. 16).
68. Tighten the nut (3) on the washer (4) (Fig. 16).
69. Check the operation of the control.
- Tighten the lever. Initial braking travel should be
approximately 8 notches. The indicator light on
the instrument panel should come on and the
buzzer ring if a gear is engaged.
- Release the lever. The control must return freely
to the rest position. In this position, the buzzer
and the indicator light on the instrument panel
should switch off.
Fig. 16

Contents
Contents
GPA20 differential
06E01 - GPA20 differential
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removing the left-hand flange and differential lock assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
C . Disassembling and reassembling the differential lock assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Refitting the left-hand flange and the differential lock assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Removing the differential assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
F . Disassembling the differential assembly and the ring gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
G . Removing and disassembling the drive pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
H . Reassembling the ring gear and differential assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
I . Adjusting the bevel gear distance, refitting and shimming of the drive pinion . . . 15
J . Refitting and shimming of the differential assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
K . Adjusting and checking the backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
L . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Contents
GPA20 differential
Contents
GPA20 differential
Differential lock
A . General
The left-hand flange contains the differential lock
The bevel gear rotation is provided by the output shaft mechanism. The system consists of a piston and a
of the gearbox and drives the rear axle. The helical mobile coupler integral via splines with the input sun
drive pinion is supported on either side of its teeth by gear in the left-hand trumpet housing. The mobile
two taper roller bearings fitted in opposition. Lubrica- coupler is moved by the piston which is supplied by
tion of the bearing (30)(37) is ensured by a flow of the 17 bar hydraulic circuit via a solenoid valve fitted on
transmission oil from the PTO upper cover located at the right-hand cover. The piston moves and pushes
the rear of the tractor (see section 7). The bearing against the mobile coupler, compressing the spring.
cones are force fitted to the drive pinion and the rear The teeth of the mobile coupler engage with a fixed
cup, smeared with Loctite 603, is also force fitted in coupler that is integral with the differential unit. In this
the rear axle housing. The front cup is free in its bore position, the input sun gears of the left- and right-hand
to allow for shimming of the drive pinion. side trumpet housings turn at the same speed. When
The ring gear is fixed to the differential unit by rivets. the pressure is released, the mobile coupler is forced
The differential assembly turns on two taper roller backwards by the spring.
bearings supported by two lateral flanges centred by
rings and screwed to the rear axle housing.
The differential assembly comprises two half-housings
holding two pinion gears for models up to 75 hp and 4
pinion gears for models whose power exceeds 75 hp.
The housing also holds two sun gears. The drive pinion
is fitted in the rear axle housing.
The bevel gear is adjusted using shims fitted between
the centre housing and the bearing cup (37).
The pre-loading of the taper roller bearings (31) (33)
and (30) (37) is obtained by shim(s) placed between the
handbrake plate and the centre housing.
The pre-load shimming of the differential assembly is
carried out by deflectors (13) of different thicknesses
placed behind the left-hand bearing cup (14). If needed,
an additional shim (49) can be fitted between flange (9)
and the deflector.

Contents
GPA20 differential
Parts list (55) Locking nut (differential support)

(56) Screw
(1) O’ring
(2) Stud
(3) O’ring
(4) Circlip
(5) Piston
(6) Spring
(7) Mobile coupler
(8) O’ring
(9) Left-hand flange
(10) Differential lock hydraulic assembly
(12) Finger
(13) Deflector
(14) Bearing cup
(15) Screw
(16) Fixed coupler
(17) Bearing cone
(18) Washer
(19) Sun gear
(20) Pinion gear
(21) Washer
(22) Spider
(23) Ring gear
(24) Rivets
(25) Right-hand flange
(26) Screw
(27) Bearing cup
(28) Bearing cone
(29) Unit
(30) Bearing cone
(31) Bearing cone
(32) Screw
(33) Bearing cup
(34) Drive pinion
(35) Thrust plate
(36) Shim(s)
(37) Bearing cup
(38) Shim(s)
(39) Union
(40) Differential lock feed pipe
(41) Lubricating plug
(42) Locking nut (differential support)
(44) Washer
(45) Locating ring (differential support)
(46) Stud
(47) Pipe
(48) Union
(49) Shim(s)
(50) Shim(s)
(51) Nut (holds lubricating pipe)
(52) Lubricating union
(53) Spool valve tank return pipe
(54) Locking nut
Contents
GPA20 differential
Overall view
Fig. 1

Contents
GPA20 differential
Exploded view
Fig. 2
Contents
GPA20 differential
B . Removing the left-hand flange

and differential lock assembly
NOTE: It is possible to carry out servicing on the differ-
ential lock hydraulic assembly (10) by removing only
the left-hand trumpet housing.
1. Remove the left-hand trumpet housing (see

section 6).
2. Disconnect the supply pipe (2), unscrew the union
(39) and take out the pipe (40) (Fig. 3).
NOTE: If access to the union (39) is difficult on trac-
tors fitted with 4-speed LSPTO, remove the
control (1) (Fig. 3).
3. Remove the brake piston (see section 6).
Fig. 3
Special points
Purpose of studs (2) and (46)
- Stud (2) (Fig. 2):
• helps attach the left-hand side flange (9),
• it holds the lubricating pipe (47) of the drive pinion
(34).
NOTE: To reach the nut (3), remove the auxiliary spool
valve support and work through the resulting opening.
NOTE: If this operation has to be carried out on a tractor
fitted with 4-speed LSPTO, it is necessary to also
remove the hitch support and the top PTO cover
located at the rear of the tractor, the double pinion and
control fork.
- Stud (46) (Fig. 2):
• attaches the right-hand flange (25).
• supports the return pipe (53) of the hydraulic spool
valves (see section 9).
The two studs (2) and (46) are fitted in the housing with
a locking product (Loctite 242 or equivalent). The nuts
on either side are tightened like the other screws
holding the flanges, to a torque of 85 - 100 Nm.
Removal
4. Remove the flange (9), the locating ring (45), and if
necessary, the friction washer (11), mobile coupler
(7) and spring (6).

Contents
GPA20 differential

the differential lock assembly
Disassembly
5. Take out cup (14), deflector (13) and shim (49) (if
fitted).
NOTE: Carefully note the assembly direction of the
deflector and the location of the shim (49).
7. Drive out the piston (5) using a compressed air jet
(Fig. 4).
8. Take off the O'rings (3) (8) (1).
9. Unscrew finger (12) (if necessary).
Reassembly
Fig. 4
10. Check the components and replace any found to
be defective.
11. Clean finger (12), smear it with Loctite 542, then fit
it and tighten it on flange (9).
12. Smear the O'rings (3) (8) with miscible grease
(Amber technical or equivalent), and place them
correctly at the end of their respective grooves.
13. Using a plastic hammer, insert the piston (5) into
the flange (9) (Fig. 5) while respecting the location
of the finger (12).
14. Fit circlip (4), shim (49) (if necessary) (Fig. 2), and
deflector (13), respecting its assembly direction,
and cup (14) (Fig. 6).
IMPORTANT: The shim (49) (if used) must be placed
between flange (9) and deflector (13).
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Contents
GPA20 differential
D . Refitting the left-hand flange and

the differential lock assembly
15. Fit the O'ring (1).
16. Assemble washer (11), mobile coupler (7) and
spring (6).
17. Refit the assembly in the left-hand flange (9).
Flange fitting method (9) (Fig. 7)

18. Screw two guide studs “G” (L = 60 mm approx.)
to the centre housing (Fig. 7).
Check for the presence of the ring (45) (Fig. 8).
Position the flange assembly (9) turning it so that
the oil passage is at the bottom.
Fit washer (44). Tighten alternately and uniformly
the screw (56) and nut (42) to a torque of 85 - 100 Fig. 7
Nm.
REMINDER: See special points § B.
Replace the guide studs with two other screws
and tighten them to the previously indicated
torque.
19. Fit pipe (40) and union (39) (Fig. 3).
Fig. 8

Contents
GPA20 differential
Hydraulic test
If servicing has been carried out on piston (5), seals (3)
(8), or flange (9), it is necessary to check the tightness
of the assembly.
20. Fit a pressure gauge that has been previously

tested for air tightness to the supply union (39)
(Fig. 9).
21. Supply the circuit with compressed air at approxi-
mately 5 bar so as to correctly place the piston and
O'rings in the left-hand flange (9).
Redue the pressure to 0.3 bar and carry out the
tightness test.
22. Close the valve. For approximately 1 minute, no
drop in pressure must be observed on the pres-
sure gauge.
23. Disconnect the pressure gauge and reconnect the Fig. 9
supply pipe (2) (Fig. 3).
If removed, reconnect the 4-speed LSPTO control
(Fig. 3) and set the control (see section 7).
24. Refit the brake piston and left-hand trumpet
housing (see section 6).
Check the oil tightness of the supply pipe (2)
(Fig. 3) and the correct operation of the differential
lock.
Contents
GPA20 differential
E . Removing the differential

assembly
axle (the cab remains integral with the gearbox)
(Fig. 10).
27. Remove the wheels.
28. Separate the left- and right-hand trumpet housings
from the centre housing (see section 6).
29. Remove the lift cover (see section 6).
30. Disassemble the hitch support (see section 6).
Remove the upper PTO cover, the drive pinion and
the layshaft (see section 7).
31. Take off the pipe (40) (Fig. 11).
Fig. 10
Removal
32. Remove the brake pistons (see section 6).
33. Carefully place a sling on the differential assembly
using a clamp (Fig. 12).
34. Before working on the screws (56) and the nut
(42). Loosen the screws (56) and nut (42) alter-
nately to gradually release the spring (6).
REMINDER: See special points § B.
35. Remove the flange (9), spring (6), coupler (7) and
washer (11).
37. Take off the flange (25).
38. Take out the differential assembly from the centre
housing (Fig. 12).
Fig. 11
Fig. 12

Contents
GPA20 differential
F . Disassembling the differential

assembly and the ring gear
Disassembling the differential assembly
39. Place the differential assembly on a workbench.
40. Extract the cones (17) (28) and cup (27), recover
shims (38).
41. Mark the two half-housings (29) with joining paint
lines. Take out the screws (15).
42. Remove the fixed coupler (16).
43. Separate the two half-housings (29).
NOTE: These components both display the same
number. They must always be fitted as pairs.
44. Remove washers (18), sun gears (19), pinion gears
(20), washers (21) and spider (22) (Fig. 13).
NOTE: Replacement of the ring gear automatically Fig. 13
requires replacement of the drive pinion. These
components both bear the same number. They
must always be fitted as pairs. In the factory, the
ring gear and unit are assembled using rivets.
During repairs, these rivets are replaced by nuts
and screws.
Disassembling the ring gear (23)

45. Remove the ring gear from the unit.
46. Centre punch each rivet (24) (on toothed side of
ring gear).
47. Using a 5 mm drill, drill out the rivets to a depth of
10 mm (Fig. 14).
48. Carry out a second drilling operation with a 12 mm
drill to the same depth.
49. Drive out the rivets using a suitable drift punch
(Fig. 15).
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Contents
GPA20 differential
G . Removing and disassembling the

drive pinion
50. Remove the right- and left-hand hydraulic cover
(see section 9).
51. Take off the circlip (1) (Fig. 16).
52. Remove the pinion (2) (if fitted) (Fig. 16).
53. Remove the handbrake mechanism assembly (see
section 6).
Removing the drive pinion

54. Remove screws (32), thrust plate (35) and shims
(36).
55. Remove the bearing cup (33) and the drive pinion
complete with cones (30) (31).
Fig. 16
56. Remove lubricating pipe (47). Remove and discard
the cap (41), extract the cup (37) and recover the
shims (50).
Disassembling the drive pinion

57. Extract the bearing cones (30) (31).

Contents
GPA20 differential
H . Reassembling the ring gear and

differential assembly
Refitting the ring gear
58. Check that the ring gear and drive pinion display
the same serial number.
59. Clean the mating faces of the new ring gear (23)
and unit (29), the nuts and the screws referenced
in the spare parts catalogue.
60. Smear the first threads of the screws (1) (Fig. 17)
with Loctite 270 and place them in the ring gear
and unit.
61. Tighten and lock the nuts (2) (Fig. 17) to a torque of
150 - 160 Nm.
Reassembling the differential assembly Fig. 17

62. Check the components and replace any found to
be defective.
63. Reassemble the differential assembly. Carry out
the operations 42 to 44 in reverse order.
64. Smear the screws (15) with Loctite 270 then
NOTE: The clearance “J1” between the pinion
gears and sun gears must be between 0.08 mm
and 0.30 mm.
65. Insert bearing cones (17) (28) respectively in the
bottom of the shoulder of the fixed coupler (16)
and the left-hand flange (25), using a press and a
suitable fixture.
Special point
Place shim(s) (38) in the half-housing (29) to pre-adjust
the backlash and then insert the bearing cup (27) (see
Fig. 18
§ K).
Contents
GPA20 differential
I . Adjusting the bevel gear distance,

refitting and shimming of the drive
pinion
Preparation
66. Check the components and replace any defective
parts.
67. Using a press and a suitable fixture, insert the cone
(30) fully into the drive pinion shoulder.
Adjusting the bevel gear distance

IMPORTANT: The bevel gear distance must be adjusted
before the pre-load shimming of the drive pinion bear-
ings.
The thickness of shims “E” (50) (Fig. 19) required to
position the drive pinion is calculated as follows:
E = Z + T - (X + Y)
E = 184.955 + T - (X +90.520).
Legend:
Z Nominal drive pinion dimension = 184.955 mm
T Correction of the nominal dimension engraved on
the drive pinion; this may be a positive or negative
value.
X Dimension of the centre housing stamped on the
rear right-hand side of the housing, behind the lift
ram.
Y Dimension of the drive pinion with bearing =
90.520 mm.
Fig. 19

Contents
GPA20 differential
Refitting
68. Using a press and a suitable fixture, insert the
bearing cone (31) fully into the drive pinion
shoulder.
69. Place shims (50), their thickness determined by
the above formula.
70. Lightly smear the external diameter of the cup (37)
with Loctite 603 or equivalent and insert it to make
contact with shims (50) using a suitable fixture.
Eliminate any traces of Loctite.
NOTE: Cones and bearings must be clean and lubri-
cated after fitting.
71. Fit the drive pinion and bearing cup (33).
Preparing for drive pinion shimming

72. Set a thickness of shims greater than the overhang
Fig. 20
dimension “a” on the bearing cup (33) measured
in relation to the housing face (Fig. 20) to obtain a
provisional clearance of 0.10 mm to 0.15 mm
maximum for the pre-load shimming that follows.
73. Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs on
to the housing. Place the shims (36) determined in
operation 72 and fit the thrust plate (35).
74. Fit and tighten the screws (32) to 90 - 120 Nm after
removing the studs.
Shimming the drive pinion

1st method: preload adjusting
75. Place the dial gauge feeler pin on the end of the
drive pinion (Fig. 22).
76. Pull hard on the pinion through the front of the
centre housing and turn it alternately from left to
right in order to correctly seat the bearing cones in
their cups. Fig. 21
77. With the assistance of another operator, set the
dial gauge to zero.
Fig. 22
Contents
GPA20 differential
79. Depending on the clearance measured, select a

definitive thickness of shims in order to obtain the
following preload:
P1 = 0.03 to 0.09 mm
NOTE: If possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.
80. Take out the two diametrically opposed screws
(32) and replace them with two guide studs.
Remove the two other screws and thrust plate
(35).
81. Fit the shims selected in operation 79 and replace
the thrust plate.
82. Fit the screws (32) lightly smeared with Loctite
270 or its equivalent and tighten to a torque of 90 -
120 Nm, having first removed the guide studs.
2nd method: torque adjusting

83. Remove or add shims (36) to obtain a drive pinion
rotational torque of 0.80 to 2 Nm, measured using
a dial torque wrench, with the drive pinion turning
at approximately 1 to 5 rpm.
NOTE: Where possible, shim to obtain the
maximum torque value.
Once the correct torque has been obtained, refit
the screws (32) lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or
equivalent, then tighten to a torque of 90 - 120 Nm.
84. Position the cap (41) (Fig. 21) in the housing, then
refit the union (52) and lubricating pipe locking nut.

Contents
GPA20 differential
J . Refitting and shimming of the

differential assembly
Refitting the right-hand flange (25)
85. Carefully place the differential assembly in the
housing (Fig. 23).
NOTE: The right-hand flange (25) is assembled on the

centre housing in a similar way to the left hand flange
(9). The positioning is ensured out by the locating ring
(45).
86. Use the assembly method described in § D.
Refitting the left-hand flange (9)

Fig. 23
87. Remove the bearing cup (14) and deflector (13)
from the flange (9).
88. Place the bearing cup on the cone (17).
89. Fit the tool ref. 3376847M91 on the housing, using
two screws (56) tightened to a torque of 85 - 100
Nm (Fig. 24).
90. Tighten the central screw to a torque of 10 Nm.
NOTE: Check that the ring gear is not constrained
by the drive pinion and turn it several times to
correctly seat the bearing cones in their cups.
Check the tightening torque of the central screw of
the tool once again.
91. Assemble and moderately tighten the hexagonal
calibrated spacers “A” (Fig. 24) in the other two
holes. Check that they are in contact with the
housing.
Fig. 24
Contents
GPA20 differential
Shimming
92. Carry out shimming to obtain:
P2 = 0 to 0.25 mm(Fig. 25)
93. Place a steel ruler edge against the two calibrated
spacers (Fig. 26).
94. Using a set of laminated shims, measure the clear-
ance “J” between the finger of the tool and the
ruler “B” (Fig. 26).
95. Calculate dimension “C” between bearing cup (14)
and the mating face of the flange (9) (Fig. 27).
C = (114 + J) - 70
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
Fig. 27

Contents
GPA20 differential
96. On flange (9), measure dimension “Y” using a

depth gauge and a ruler (Fig. 28).
97. Select the thickness “E” of the deflector (13) and
shim (49) (if used) (see table) to obtain:
E = P2 + (C - Y)
NOTE: To carry out “P2” shimming, nine different
deflector thicknesses are available.
NOTE: If possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.
98. Remove the shimming tool and cup (14). Centring punch holes
Fig. 29
Mating face on the housing
Mating face of cup (14)
Fig. 28
Number of centring punch

Reference mm
holes (Fig. 29)
187,689 M2 0 0,73 - 0,78
892,173 M2 1 0,864 - 0,914
892,172 M2 2 0,991 - 1,041
892,171 M2 3 1,118 - 1,168
Deflectors 892,170 M2 4 1,245 - 1,295
191,124 M2 5 1,37 - 1,42
191,125 M2 6 1,49 - 1,54
521,401 M2 7 0,61 - 0,66
1 686 054 M2 8 0,50
Shim 3794403H1 - 0,70
Contents
GPA20 differential
99. In flange (9), place deflector (13) and shim (49) (if
used) selected during operation 97, and bearing
cup (14).
NOTE: The shim (49) (if used) must be placed
between flange (9) and deflector (13). Ensure
correct direction of assembly of the deflector
(Fig. 30).
100.Refit flange (9). Carry out final operations in § D.
101.Fit the pipe (40).
102.Check the backlash (see § K).
Fig. 30

Contents
GPA20 differential
K . Adjusting and checking the back-

lash
Reminder
- The backlash between the ring gear and drive pinion
ensures reliability of the bevel gear and the correct
operation of the assembly.
- This clearance must be checked or adjusted after:
• adjusting the bevel gear distance
• shimming the differential unit.
Preparation
103.Remove the differential assembly (see § E).
104.Using a standard reversible flange extractor,
remove bearing cup (27) (Fig. 31).
Pre-adjustment
105.Prepare a thickness of shims (38) of 0.30 mm.
NOTE:
- Do not take into consideration the DC (ring gear
offset, e.g.: -0.20) embossed on the external diam-
eter of the ring gear after the pairing number
(Fig. 31).
- The pre-adjustment can be followed by an adjust-
ment, if the backlash is incorrect during the final
check.
106.Place the previously prepared shim(s) in the cavity
of half housing (29). Lubricate and insert cup (27)
(Fig. 31).
107.Refit and shim the differential assembly unit (see §
J).
Fig. 31
Contents
GPA20 differential
Checking J2 backlash
J2 = 0.15 to 0.40 mm
108.Place the dial gauge feeler pin half-way along a ring
gear tooth (Fig. 32).
109.Check that the backlash remains between 0.15
and 0.40 mm. Carry out this check at three points
of the ring gear separated approximately by 120°.
IMPORTANT:
- If the backlash is incorrect, select and fit a new
thickness of shim(s).
- Then offset the ring gear (23) in the desired direc-
tion, by increasing the value of shims (38) and by
reducing by the same amount the value of the
deflector (13) or vice versa, in order to obtain the
required backlash, without modifying the differ-
ential unit preload.
Fig. 32
NOTE: If possible, set J2 backlash to its minimum
value.
Final operations
110.Refit the handbrake mechanism assembly (see
section 6).
NOTE: The plate (5) is rectangular. It must be posi-
tioned horizontally, along its length, so that the
shaft (6) is correctly positioned in the link (13)
(Fig. 33).
111.Refit the pinion (2) (if fitted) and circlip (1) (Fig. 34).
112.Refit the left-hand side cover (see section 9).
Fit the handbrake control support, the GSPTO
support (if fitted on the cover), remove the guide
studs, fit and tighten the screws to a torque of 72
- 96 Nm.
113.Position the control link and adjust the handbrake
Fig. 33
mechanism (see section 6).
114.Refit the right-hand hydraulic cover (see section 9).
115.Refit the intermediate shaft, the driving pinion and
the 3rd point hitch support.
Fig. 34

Contents
GPA20 differential
116.Refit the lift cover and brake pistons (see section

6).
117.Refit the left- and right-hand trumpet housings (see
section 6).
118.Refit the stabiliser supports.
119.Refit the hitch support (see section 6).
120.Refit the wheels. Tighten to a torque of 400 - 450
Nm.
121.Couple the tractor between the gearbox and rear
axle.
122.Top up the oil level in the housings and check it on
the gauge located at the rear of the rear axle.
Remove the safety chocks. Refit the body (if
removed).
123.Prepare for service. Bleed the main brakes and
trailer brake (if fitted) (see section 9). Carry out a
road test. Check the correct operation of controls
and electrical circuits. Fig. 35
124.Check the oil tightness of the trumpet housing
mating faces with the housing, covers and
hydraulic unions.
L . Service tools
Tool available in AGCO SA network
- 3376 847 M91 - Shimming tool (Fig. 35)
Contents
GPA20 hitch / Linkage
06F01 - GPA20 hitch / Linkage
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
E . Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
F . Rear Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
G . Presentation of the hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
H . Disassembling and reassembling a lift ram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Contents
Contents
Parts list
A . General
(1) Washer
The lift cover is fitted on the upper face of the rear axle (2) Screw
housing. Via two bushes (8), it supports the shaft (4), (3) Lockwasher
which has the two lift arms (5) (11) splined to it. (4) Lift shaft
(5) Right-hand lift arm
A cam (9), screwed on the shaft, inside the cover, (6) Nylon ring
shows the different positions taken by the lift arms. (7) O’ring
This information is recorded and sent by a sensor (26) (8) Ring
to the Electronic Linkage Control (ELC) system. (9) Cam
(10) Lift cover
To ensure correct clearance between the lift arms and (11) Left-hand lift arm
the cover, shims (12) are fitted on the left-hand end of (12) Shim(s)
the shaft. (13) Ring
(14) Set screw
Two friction washers (30) are fitted between the lift (15) Ground speed sensor
arms and the linkage cover to avoid their direct (16) Nut
contact. (17) Cup plug (2-speed PTO)
(18) Screw (4-speed PTO)
The rear face of the linkage cover supports the auxiliary (19) Control finger (4-speed PTO)
spool valves. The ground speed sensor (15) is screwed (20) O’ring (4-speed PTO)
in the front of the cover, which also supports the (21) Linkage (4-speed PTO)
4-speed PTO control linkage (21), if fitted. (22) Screw (4-speed PTO)
(23) Elbow union
(24) Screw
(25) Nut
(26) Position sensor
(27) Cup plug (version without linkage)
(28) Threaded plug (version without linkage)
(29) Seal

Contents
Overall view
Fig. 1
Contents
Exploded view
Fig. 2

Contents
B . Removal
1. Remove (Fig. 3):
- the trailer electronic connector (1),
- the spool valve control cables (2),
- the hydraulic unions connected to the spool
valves (3),
- the trailer brake take-off an dits support, by loos-
ening the unions at both ends (Fig. 4),
- the lift rams supply pipes,
2. Disconnect (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)
- the ground speed sensor harness (15),
- the position sensor harness (26),
- the PTO control cable 4-speed PTO, if fitted).
3. Remove the four screws from the spool valve
support. Fig. 3
4. Remove the spool valve support with the spool
valves.
5. Remove the upper pins from the rams and lift rods.
6. Remove the attachment screws (24) from the lift
cover (10).
7. Sling the cover and remove it.
Fig. 4
Contents
C . Disassembly
8. Place the cover on a workbench.
9. Remove the elbow union (23).
10. Unscrew the nut (16) and remove the ground
speed sensor (15).
11. Unscrew the nut (25) and remove the position
sensor (26).
For tractors fitted with 4-speed LSPTO

(Fig. 5), carry out operations 12 to 15.
12. Loosen the Allen screw (22) in the linkage (21).
14. Remove the control finger (19).
15. Remove the O'ring (20).
16. Unlock the screws (2) retaining the lift arms. Fig. 5
17. Loosen the screws.
18. Remove the washers (1).
19. Remove shims (12).
20. Remove the lift arms (5) (11) and the washers (30).
21. Remove the nylon rings (6) and the O'rings (7).
22. Remove the set screws (14) from the cam (9).
23. Extract the lift shaft (4) from the cover.
24. Remove the cam (9).
25. Remove the rings (8) (Fig. 6).
26. Remove the cup plug (17) (2-speed PTO).
Fig. 6

Contents
D . Reassembly
NOTE: Fit the rings (13) up against face "A" (Fig. 7).

defective parts.
28. Clean the mating faces of the lift cover and of the
spool valve support.
29. Fit the rings (8) home in the cover.
30. Fit the cup plug (17) smeared with Loctite 542
flush with the cover (2-speed PTO).
31. Fit the lift shaft (4) and the cam (9) in the cover (Fig.
8).
NOTE: Ensure that the direction of the shaft and the
position of the cam are correct.
32. Tighten the set screws (14) smeared with Loctite
241 to a torque of 5 Nm. Fig. 7
NOTE: Protect the splines of the shaft. Lubricate
the O'rings before fitting (Fig. 9).
33. Grease the splines of the shaft (4) (Anti-Seize
Grease or equivalent).
34. Fit the lift arm (5) (sensor side), the washer (1), the
lockwasher (3) and the screw (2).
NOTE: Grease the face of the cover (Anti-Seize
Grease or equivalent) before fitting the arms.
35. Tighten screws (2) to a torque of 360 - 470 Nm.
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Contents
NOTE: If work has been carried out but it was not

necessary to carry out J1 shimming (e.g.: replacement
of seals), shims (12) must be fitted at the left-hand end
(factory assembly) to secure the cam in the correct
position and to avoid adjusting the sensor (26).
36. Carry out shimming of the shaft (4) (Fig. 11) to

obtain end play:
J1 = 0.10 to 0.20 maximum
Fit the arm (11), the washer (1) and the screw (2).
NOTE: grease the face of the cover (Anti-Seize
Grease or equivalent) before fitting the arms.
37. Tighten the screw to position the lift arms (5) and
(11) correctly on the shaft.
38. Measure the distance between face “A” of the
shaft and face “B” of the arm using a depth gauge
(Fig. 10 and Fig. 11). Fig. 10
39. By measuring dimension “X”, determine the thick-
ness of shims “Y” needed to obtain (Fig. 11):
J1 = 0.10 to 0.20 maximum
Y = X + J1
40. Fit the shims (12) selected previously (Fig. 11), the
washer (1), the lockwasher (3) and the screw (2).
41. Tighten the screw (2) to a torque of 360 - 470 Nm.
For tractors fitted with 4-speed PTO, carry

out operations 42 to 46.
42. Refit the finger (19) (Fig. 12).
43. Fit the O’ring (20) from the external side of the
cover (Fig. 12).
44. Smear the screws (18) (22) with Loctite 241 and
tighten.
45. Check that the control functions smoothly.
46. Fit the elbow union (23). Fig. 11
Fig. 12

Contents
E . Refitting
47. Clean the mating face of the cover on the rear axle
housing.
48. Smear the mating face with a sealing product
(Master Joint 510 Loctite or equivalent).
49. Sling the cover and refit it.
NOTE: when refitting the cover, ensure that the
differential lock supply tube and the 4-speed PTO
control finger engage properly in their respective
positions (Fig. 13).
50. Fit the PTO control cable support (depending on
the version) and fit the attachment screws (24) on
the cover (10). Tighten to the following torque:
• screws Ø 12 = 72 - 96 Nm
• screws Ø 16 = 160 - 200 Nm
51. Refit the upper pins of the lift rams. Refit the trailer Fig. 13
brake valve support if fitted. Retighten the tube at
both ends.
52. Refit (Fig. 1):
- the feed pipe on the differential lock union (23)
- the control cable (21) (4-speed PTO, if fitted).
53. Fit the ground speed sensor (15) with Loctite 577
Sensor Sealing or equivalent (Fig. 14).
54. Screw home the speed sensor without forcing it
until it touches the differential ring gear.
55. Unscrew the sensor 3/4 of a turn to obtain a clear-
ance of approx. 1 mm between the sensor and the
ring gear (Fig. 14).
56. Tighten the nut (16) to a maximum torque of 5 Nm
(Fig. 14).
57. Connect the sensor harness.
58. Fix the harness with a clip retainer.
59. Clean the mating face of the spool valve support.
Fig. 14
60. Smear the mating face of the spool valve support
cover with a sealing compound (Master Joint 510
Loctite or equivalent).
61. Refit the spool valve support.
Contents
62. Refit the 4 screws to the spool valve support after

smearing their thread with Loctite 510. Tighten the
63. Refit the parts that were removed at operation 1.
64. Adjust the PTO control (4-speed) (see section 7).
65. Smear the thread of the position sensor (26) with a
sealing compound (Hylomar or equivalent), then
screw the sensor in a few turns.
67. Using the external controls, ensure that the lift
arms are in raised position (continuous pumping).
Stop the engine.
68. Screw in the sensor (without forcing it) up against
the cam (9). Connect the sensor to the female
connector using a locally made harness (Fig. 15).
Connect the other test harness connector to the
tractor harness. Connect terminals 1 and 2 to a
multimeter.
Start the engine.
Lower the hitch by 3 to 5 cm between the hook
and ground.
Unscrew the sensor to obtain a voltage between
6.92 and 6.96 volts.
Reconnect the tractor harness.
Stop the engine.
69. Tighten the nut (25) to a torque of 25 Nm using a
locally made wrench (Fig. 16).
70. Check for tightness of:
- the mating faces of the lift cover and the spool
1 : Ground
valve support,
2 : Signal
- the hydraulic unions. 3 : Sensor power supply 9.5 V
Version without lift

• The ports of the shaft (4) are plugged with cup plugs Fig. 15
(27) sealed with Loctite 542.
• The position sensor (26) is replaced with a threaded
plug fitted with a sealing ring (29).
Fig. 16

Contents
F . Rear Hitch
The hitch consists of several elements, depending on
the country:
- a hook or ball joint 3-point hitch,
- two lower links with ball joints, automatic hitch or
telescopic end-pieces (depending on version),
- two levelling units,
- 2 tube type blades
- a perforated bar
G . Presentation of the hitch

• 3-point hitch (Fig. 17):
- (1) ball joint 3-point hitch
- (2) hook 3-point hitch
- (3) draft sensor
• Levelling unit (4) (Fig. 17)
• Lower drawbars (Fig. 18):
- (5) hook drawbar
- (6) fixed ball joint drawbar
- (7) telescopic drawbar
• Telescopic stabiliser (8) (Fig. 18)
• Perforated bar (Fig. 18)
Special point
For the adjustment of tube type blades, see the Oper-
ator Instruction Book supplied with the tractor.
Contents
Fig. 17

Contents
Fig. 18
Contents
H . Disassembling and reassembling

a lift ram
71. Run the engine and lower the lower drawbars to
their maximum using the ELC.
72. Disconnect the feed pipe, and remove and drain
the ram of its oil.

73. Remove the 90° union (1) fitted with its O'ring.
74. Pull the shaft of the ram (5) until the snap ring (4)
appears in port O of the union.
75. Insert a screwdriver into this port and while turning
the cylinder ram push the snap ring into the
V-shaped recess.
76. Remove the ram and the snap ring (4). Drive off
scraper seal (2) and sealing ring (3) (systematically
discard these three parts).
Reassembly
IMPORTANT: Carefully clean all components. Replace
any components found to be scratched or distorted. In
case of jamming or serious scratching of the functional
components, replace the hydraulic ram.
77. Dry all components using compressed air.

78. Lubricate the components with clean transmission
oil.
79. Carry out the assembly of the ram. Carry out the
operations 72 to 76 in reverse order.
Fig. 19
IMPORTANT:
- Always fit new snap rings and new seals.
- Use a suitable fixture to fit the parts home without Final operations
damaging the seals. 80. Lubricate the upper and lower pins of the ram with
- Fit the ram into the ram body with care. “Anti-Seize” grease and refit them. Reconnect the
feed pipe.
81. Run the engine. Using the ELC, raise and lower the
lift arms to their maximum positions several times.
82. Check that the hitch is operating correctly and that
there are no oil leaks around either cylinder or ram.

Contents
Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
06G01 - GPA20 hitch hooks
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Presentation of the different hitch hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Adjusting automatic hook tie-rods and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Operating principle of the Dromone retractable hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
A . General
Tractor hitches can be attached to different types of
hitches or hooks:
- Swinging drawbar (different types)
- Clevis on adjustable scale (different types)
- Closed eye bolt for balanced full trailer
- Pick-up hook
Some equipment can be fitted simultaneously

depending on technical possibilities, options and coun-
tries.

Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
B . Presentation of the different

hitch hooks
(See Fig. 1)
A Hitch bracket with quick-adjusting scale
B Hitch bracket with pin-adjusting scale
C Hitch bracket for SAE swinging drawbar
D Hitch bracket with Dromone pick-up hook
E SAE swinging drawbar
F Swinging drawbar with closed eye bolt
G Standard swinging drawbar
H Roller swinging bar
I Quick-adjust clevis with standard pin
J Quick-adjust clevis with automatic pin (Cramer)
K Clevis for standard hook scale
L Clevis for 20 T hook scale
M Clevis for 6 T hook scale
Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
Fig. 1

Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
Fig. 2
Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
C . Adjusting automatic hook

tie-rods and controls
Adjusting the tie-rods
1. On the bracket, disconnect the lower clevises of
the tie-rods and the control cable.
3. Helped by an operator, activate the internal or
external lift control (if fitted) so that the lift arms are
in the maximum lifting position (continuous
pumping).
4. Compress the lower part of the hook along the axis
of the tractor, as shown by “F” (Fig. 3) using a
trolley jack, in order to obtain a dimension X of 6 to
14 mm between the top of the main bracket and
the top of the mobile plate (Fig. 4).
Fig. 3
5. Adjust the length of the rods by turning their sliding
square section (1) in order to engage the clevises
on the axle pins (3) of the bracket (Fig. 4).
6. Fit the pins.
7. Remove the jack.
8. Reconnect the control.
9. Check the operation of the mobile plate and the
hook lock mechanism using the lever (1) (Fig. 5).
NOTE: If the lock does not operate correctly, the
control must be adjusted.
Fig. 4
Fig. 5

Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
Adjusting the control

On the lever (Fig. 6)
10. Place the lever (1) in the “neutral” position.
11. Adjust the nuts to obtain the same thread length
(2) on either side of the bracket (3).
NOTE: Check that the cable is not pinched.
On the auto-hitch control (Fig. 7)

the cable (2).
13. Fit the clevis on link B using the clip (3) and check
that the link is in the locked position. Tighten nut
(4).
14. Assemble the sheath end (5) in the bracket (6) and
tighten the nuts (7) (8) so that there is no play in the
cable (2) and the cable is not pinched.
NOTE: During adjustment, ensure that link B Fig. 6
remains locked.
Fig. 7
Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
D . Operating principle of the

Dromone retractable hook
Construction (Fig. 8)
The auto-hitch assembly comprises a main bracket (2)
attached to the centre housing and a mobile plate (1)
that can be raised or lowered via the adjustable tie-rods
(3) of the linkage system.
Operation
Plate lowered
When the system is unlocked by the lever in the cab
(Fig. 5), the mobile plate (1) can be lowered to ground
level by the linkage system. Once the tractor is in posi-
tion, the trailer can be hitched on.
Fig. 8
Plate raised
In this configuration, the locking safety of the retract-
able hook is ensured at maximum retraction, with the
plate (1) (Fig. 8) previously raised and engaged.
The principle involves two mechanical locks located at
the rear of the main bracket. When the previously
stated conditions exist, the lock screws enter their
respective recesses in the retractable hook and
prevent any untimely movement.
NOTE: When entering the safety position, the locks
must audibly click during maximum hook retraction.
NOTE: When retracting of the hook, the operator in the

driving seat should check that the gear shift and hand-
brake levers are in neutral position. This facilitates the
tractor / trailer hooking manoeuvre and frees it from
any constraints.
NOTE: Periodically grease the safety lock mechanism

and the mobile plate control cable.

Contents
GPA20 hitch hooks
Contents
GPA20 rear wheels / hubs
06H01 - GPA20 rear wheels / hubs
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Description of rear axle wheel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Changing wheel track spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
D . Replacing a wheel stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Contents
Contents
A . General
GPA20 rear axles are fitted with Normal Duty or Heavy
Duty trumpets with a flanged shaft. Two rim types are
available:
- rims with steel discs, wheel track adjusted by
reversing the disc on the brackets
- rims with welded steel discs, wheel track adjusted
by reversing the rim and inserting spacers.
B . Description of rear axle wheel

assembly
Parts list (Fig. 1)
(1) Axle shaft flange (all ND and HD models)
(2) Spacer for steel wheel with welded disc
(3) Bracket
Fig. 1

Contents
C . Changing wheel track spacing

Preliminary operation
1. Engage the parking brake in order to immobilise
the tractor. Thoroughly chock the front wheels.
Removing the wheel

2. Unlock the wheel nuts (1) (Fig. 2) and lift the rele-
vant side of the tractor.
3. Remove the nuts and the wheel.
Adjustment
4. According to the wheel track required for the
flanged shaft, change the position of the rim and/or
disc:
- rim with welded disc and spacer: 4 positions
(Fig. 2)
- rim with brackets: 8 positions (Fig. 3).
Reminder
The rim spacer (2) (if fitted) can be positioned in
different ways (Fig. 2):
- either on the outside of the rim disc,
- or for functional purposes between the shaft flange
and the disc.
5. Refit the wheel and tighten the nuts (see §B).
Tightening torques
Rim on hub: 400 - 450 Nm (Fig. 2).
Rim on disc (wheel with brackets): 180 - 250 Nm
(Fig. 3).
Fig. 2
Contents
Fig. 3
Tyres 13.6R38
16.9R34 520.70R38
16.9R38
16.9R30 18.4R34 520.70R34 600.65R34 540.65R38
Position 18.4R38
480.70R34 600.65R38
480.70R38
1
Wheel disc 2 1538 1636
facing
inwards 3 1626 1626 z 1532 z
4 1740 1744 z z 1736 z
5 1824 1824 z z 1832 z

Wheel disc 6 1928 1942 z z 2036 z
facing
outwards 7 2026 2026 z z 1932 z
8 2140 2144 z z 2136 z

Contents
D . Replacing a wheel stud

7. Clean the stud and its housing on the flange.
9. Place several drops of Loctite 270 or equivalent on
the new stud serration.
10. Place the stud in the flange housing, and use a
bronze sledgehammer and suitable hammer to
knock it in until its head meets the inside flange of
the wheel shaft.
Contents
Power take off
07 - Power take off
CONTENTS
07B01 - Intermediate shaft - Driving pinions - GPA20 brake
07C01 - GPA20 removable shaft
07D01 - GPA20 shiftable shaft
07E01 - GPA20 - GSPTO
Contents
Power take off
Contents
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Existing power take-off types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Contents
Contents
A . General
Description
- The PTO drive mechanism is fitted in the rear part of
the axle, behind the differential. The pinion assembly
rests on taper roller bearings supported by the axle
housing at the front and by the PTO cover at the rear.
- The assembly is driven by the engine via a shaft that
passes through the gearbox primary shaft.
Clutch
- The clutch is located on the upper power take-off
shaftline at the front of the centre housing.
- It is supported by two bearings fitted in the housing.
Upper shaftline
- The PTO upper shaftline transmits drive from the
engine to the driving pinions, either directly or via a
coupler / sliding sleeve allowing to select the
economy speeds (depending on version).
- The system is comprised mainly of 2 shafts (3 if
economy version):
- mainshaft
- secondary shaft
- layshaft (if economy version).
• Standard PTO
The mainshaft drives a double pinion, which trans-
mits drive to two pinions on the secondary shaft. The
PTO speed is selected by securing one of the two
pinions to the secondary shaft via internal splines or
by coupling (depending on option).
• Standard and economy PTO
The mainshaft drives:
- either a double pinion via the coupler / sleeve slid
forwards, transmitting drive like the standard PTO,
- or a series of idle-mounted pinions driving the
double pinion when the coupler / sleeve is slid to
the rear. Drive speed is therefore multiplied,
allowing to obtain PTO speeds when engine speed
is 1550 rpm.
- The bearings supporting the driving pinion shaft are

adjusted with clearance using (a) shim(s) inserted
between the rear cup and the removable cover.
- An internal channel system carries lubricating oil to
the bearings and drive pinions via an oil gallery in the
housing and radial bores in the shaft.

Contents
Lower shaftline
- The lower shaftline is supported at the front by a
bearing force fitted into the housing, and at the rear
by a bearing.
- The lower shaftline output shaft is lubricated at the
front bearing by a deflector and by radial bores in the
output shaft.
- Shaft tightness is ensured by a lip seal fitted firmly to
the rear cover of the housing.
- The PTO shaft type depends on the model:
• Removable PTO (Fig. 1): the shaft can be extracted
by removing a circlip. Two shafts are available; each
one corresponds to a different PTO speed (540/1000
rpm).
The splines of these shafts match with the splines of
the 540 and 1000 rpm pinions. Each shaft is driven
by the pinion that corresponds with its operating Fig. 1
speed.
• Shiftable PTO (Fig. 2): the 540 and 1000 rpm
pinions are idle-mounted on the PTO shaft. The
speed is selected using a coupler located between
the two pinions. Depending on the option, the shaft
can be a flange shaft (3) holding an end fitting with 6
or 21 splines, or a non-removable shaft (2)
comprising a number of fixed splines.
These criteria clearly change according to the imple-
ment to be fitted and the rotational speed to be used.
Power take-off brake

- The rear power take-off is equipped with a brake
located in the rear housing (see chapter 7).
Proportional PTO
Fig. 2
- The GSPTO is driven by a shaft coupled to the front
axle clutch by a sliding sleeve. This shaft then drives
the 540 rpm pinion on the lower shaftline.
- The sleeve sliding on the splines secures the front
axle clutch shaft or allows it to rotate freely.
Contents
B . Existing power take-off types

Removable PTO
- The drive shaft is secured to the double driving
pinion.
- The ratio is chosen by changing the PTO output
shaft, which is provided either with splines to be
driven by the 540 rpm pinion or with splines to be
driven by the 1000 rpm pinion. When the 1000 rpm
pinion drives the shaft, the 540 rpm pinion turns idle
on the shaft.
- The shaft used for the 540 rpm speed has 6 splines.
The shaft used for the 1000 rpm speed has 21
splines.
- The PTO brake acts on the rear bearing cup of the
double driving pinion.
Fig. 3

Contents
Shiftable PTO
- The drive shaft, linked to the PTO clutch, is integral
with a sleeve / coupler which selects the standard or
economy speeds.
- The double drive pinion drives both the 540 and 1000
rpm pinions. These pinions are then secured to the
PTO output shaft by a coupler.
- The PTO brake acts on the rear bearing cup of the
double driving pinion.
Fig. 4
Contents
Shiftable PTO and flange shaft

- Operation is the same as for the shiftable PTO.
- The PTO output shaft has an interchangeable end
fitting to adapt the number of splines to the require-
ments of the drawn implement (6 or 21 splines).
Fig. 5

Contents
Economy power take-off (LSPTO)

- LSPTO mode is selected by moving a sleeve /
coupler. Drive is no longer transmitted directly to the
double pinion, but via an intermediate pinion.
- The ratio of the additional double pinion allows to
obtain PTO speeds when the engine speed is 1550
rpm.
Standard PTO
LSPTO
Fig. 6
Contents
Ground speed power take-off (GSPTO)

- GSPTO is obtained via the front axle clutch. A sliding
sleeve (1) on the splines secures the front axle clutch
cover (2). Drive is transmitted to the 540 rpm PTO
pinion.
REMARK: for 2WD tractors equipped with a creeper
unit, a pinion is fitted instead of the front axle clutch.
- The speed of the PTO output shaft is then propor-
tional to the tractor ground speed.
Fig. 7

Contents
PTO with reinforced sealing

- This PTO type has reinforced sealing at the PTO
output shaft.
- The output shaft turns at the rear on two taper roller
bearings. A sealing ring is fitted behind these bear-
ings.
- The PTO operates exactly the same as the other
shiftable versions.
Fig. 8
Contents
Intermediate shaft - Driving pinions - GPA20 brake
07B01 - Intermediate shaft - Driving pinions - GPA20 brake
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . 2-speed PTO (without shimming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . 2-speed PTO (with shimming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . 4-speed economy PTO (without shimming). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
F . 4-speed LSPTO (with shimming). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
G . Assembling and adjusting the 4-speed LSPTO control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Contents
Contents
A . General
Engine speed is transmitted to the PTO clutch (1) fitted
at the front of the centre housing.
The layshaft (2) is linked via splines at one end to the
clutch and at the other end either to the double pinion
(13) in the 2-speed PTO version, or to the coupler
sleeve (31) in the economy 4-speed PTO version.
The double pinion (13) rotates on two taper roller bear-
ings (3) (4) and (7) (8) respectively mounted in the bore
of the centre housing and the cover (10).
A piston (9), housed in the cover and controlled by the
17 bar hydraulic circuit, allows braking of the double
pinion (13) when the control lever is placed in the PTO
brake position.
B . Operation
2-speed PTO
When the knob is pressed and turned clockwise, the
PTO solenoid valve supplies the clutch, and the
layshaft (2) is driven. It in turn drives the double driving
pinion (13) which is in permanent contact with the 540
rpm and 1000 rpm pinions on the lower shaftline.
4-speed PTO
This feature allows speeds of 540 rpm or 1000 rpm to
be obtained with an engine speed of 1550 rpm.
Standard position
The sleeve (31) being moved forwards, the layshaft (2)
is secured to the shaft (35) that drives the double
driving pinion (13). This configuration is identical to the
2-speed PTO version.
Economy position
By moving the sleeve (31) backwards, drive is trans-
mitted to the coupler pinion (34) (which rotates freely
on the shaft (35)) and to the double pinion (18) which
drives the driving pinion (13). The gear ratio of the
double pinion (18) is 1.292.
Power take-off brake

When the knob is in the PTO brake position, it allows
the opening of the PTO brake solenoid valve mounted
on the right-hand cover. The chamber behind the
piston (9) is supplied. The piston moves, compressing
the cup (8) on the cone (7) thus progressively immobi-
lising the driving pinion (13), constantly engaged with
the 540 rpm and 1000 rpm pinions.

Contents
Parts list
Power take-off
4-speed 2-speed
(1) Clutch z z
(2) Layshaft z z
(3) Cup z z
(4) Cone z z
(5) Washer z z
(6) Screws z z
(7) Cone z z
(8) Cup z z
(9) Brake piston z z
(10) Cover z z
(11) Shims z z
(12) O’ring z z
(13) Driving pinion z z
(14) Double pinion assembly z
(15) Deflector z z
(16) Washer z
(17) Needle bearing z
(18) Double pinion z
(19) Spacer z
(21) Washer z
(22) Set screw z z
(23) Pin z
(24) Locking screw z
(25) Nut z
(26) Fork z
(27) Screws z
(29) Circlip z
(30) Ring z
(31) Coupler sleeve z
(32) Circlip z
(33) Washer z
(34) Coupler pinion z
(35) Shaft z
(36) Pin z
(37) Seal z
Contents
Overall view
Fig. 1

Contents
Overall view
Fig. 2
Contents
C . 2-speed PTO (without shimming)

Disassembly
1. Remove the linkage and 3rd point support (see
chapter 6).
2. Remove (Fig. 3):
- the trailer electric connector (1),
- the spool valve control cables (2),
- the hydraulic unions connected to the spool
valves (3),
- the trailer brake take-off (if fitted) and its support,
by loosening the unions at both ends.
3. Take out the spool valve support screws and
remove the spool valve support.
4. Disconnect the power take-off brake supply pipe
(1) (Fig. 4). Fig. 3
5. Remove lubricating pipe (2) (Fig. 4).
6. Remove the 6 screws (3) and the cover (10)
(Fig. 4).
7. Take out the pinion assembly (13) and the shaft (2)
held in place by the washer (5) and the screw (6).
Take off bearing cone (4).
NOTE: The shaft (2) is fitted into the clutch (1) without
a locking screw.
Fig. 4

Contents
Reassembly
defective parts.
9. Refit the cone (4). Assemble the pinion (13) and
the shaft (2) held by washer (5) and screw (6).
10. Clean the mating face of the cover (10) (Fig. 4).
11. Smear the mating face of the housing with a
sealing product (Loctite 510 or equivalent).
NOTE: In order to ensure lubrication of the cone (7),
a pin (36) fixed by a set screw (22) is fitted at the
location of the pin (23) in the 4-speed LSPTO.
The oil tightness of the pin is ensured by the seal
(37), the central channel in the pin being used to
lubricate the front bearing of the drive pinion.
12. Refit the cover (10). Tighten the 6 screws (3) to a
torque of 130 - 170 Nm (Fig. 4).
NOTE: Check for the presence of the bearing cup
(8).
13. Reconnect the power take-off supply pipe (1) and
lubrication supply pipe (2) (Fig. 4).
with a sealing product (Loctite 510 or equivalent).
16. Refit the support. Coat the thread of the two lower
screws with Loctite 510. Fit and tighten to a torque
of 50 -70 Nm.
18. Check that the PTO and PTO brake operate
correctly.
19. Check for the oil tightness of:
- the mating faces (spool valve support, cover)
- the hydraulic unions.
Contents
D . 2-speed PTO (with shimming)

NOTE: The shimming (preloading or clearance of 0.05)
(Fig. 8) must be carried out in cases of operations on
the following components: pinion (13), deflector (15),
bearing cones (4) (7), bearing cups (3) (8); the lift cover
must be removed.
For correct shimming of cone bearings (4) (7) and
bearing cups (3) (8), it is necessary to remove the lift
cover.
Disassembly
20. Remove the lift cover (see chapter 6).
21. Remove the linkage and 3rd point support (see
chapter 6).
22. Disconnect the PTO brake supply pipe (1) and lubri- Fig. 5
cating supply pipe (4) (Fig. 4).
23. Take the screws (3) out of the cover (10) (Fig. 4)
and remove it.
24. Extract the pinion assembly (13) and the shaft (2)
held by the washer (5) and the screw (6).
NOTE: The shaft (2) is fitted into the clutch (1)
without a locking screw.
25. Take out screw (6) and washer (5).
26. Separate the pinion (13) from the shaft (2).
NOTE: A deflector (15) is fitted between pinion (13)
and the bearing cone (7) in contact with the bearing
cup (8) (Fig. 5).
27. Extract the cone (7) and the deflector (15) (Fig. 6)
then remove cone (4).
NOTE: To extract the bearing cup (3) the 540 / 1000
rpm pinions must be removed. Partially drain the
rear axle housing (see chapter 7).
Fig. 6

Contents
Reassembly
defective parts.
29. Place the deflector (15) on pinion (13), and press-fit
the bearing cone (7) fully home into the shoulder
(Fig. 7). Lubricate the cone bearing (4) and place it
in the bearing cup (3).
NOTE: If the bearing cup (3) has been replaced, refit
the 540 / 1000 rpm pinions (see chapter 7). Top up
the oil level in the rear axle.
30. Extract the piston (9) through the cover (10).
31. Remove the shims (11) and the O'ring (12) to
prepare for the shimming operation.
32. Assemble piston (9) and bearing cup (8) in the
cover (10).
33. Lubricate the bearing cup and the bearing cone (7).
Fig. 7
34. Assemble the pinion (13) inside the housing.
NOTE: In order to ensure lubrication of the cone (7),
a pin (36) fixed by a set screw (22) is fitted at the
location of the pin (23) in the 4-speed LSPTO.
The oil tightness of the pin is ensured by the seal
(37), the central channel being used to lubricate the
front bearing of the drive pinion.
35. Refit the cover. Tighten the screws to a torque of
130 -170 Nm.
36. Carry out the J/P shimming (Fig. 8) to obtain a
preloading of 0.05 with a clearance of 0.05.
37. Place the feeler pin at the end of the pinion (13)
(Fig. 9).
38. Pull on the pinion while turning it alternatively left
and right in order to compress the deflector (15)
and correctly seat the bearing cone (7) in the
bearing cup (8).
39. Reset the dial gauge to zero. Fig. 8
40. Push on the pinion while turning it alternatively left
and right in order to seat the bearing cone (4)
correctly in the bearing cup (3).
41. According to the value read on the dial gauge,
select the thickness of shims in order to obtain
J/P.
42. Remove the cover (10), take out the bearing cup (8)
and the piston (9).
43. Place the shims (11) selected in operation 41 in the
cover (10).
Fig. 9
Contents
44. Fit the piston (9) with a new O'ring (12).

NOTE: Turn the lubricating holes on the piston
towards the bearing (Fig. 10).
45. Fit the bearing cup (8) into the support.
46. Take out the pinion (13) and assemble it with the
shaft (2), washer (5) and screw (6). Tighten to a
torque of 50 Nm.
47. Refit the cone bearing (4). Assemble the pinion
(13) and shaft (2) assembly.
48. Coat the mating face of the cover (10) on the rear
axle housing with a sealing product (Master joint
510 or equivalent).
49. Refit the cover (10). Fit and tighten the screws (3)
to a torque of 130 -170 Nm (Fig. 11).
NOTE: Check for the presence of the bearing cup
(8).
50. Reconnect the power take-off supply pipe (1) and Fig. 10
lubricating supply pipe (4) (Fig. 11).
51. Refit the lift cover (see chapter 6).
Refit the linkage support (see chapter 6).
correctly.
- the mating faces (spool valve support, cover, lift
cover)
E . 4-speed economy PTO (without

shimming)
Disassembly
54. Remove the left-hand side cover. When disassem-
bling the screw (27) and the layshaft. Fig. 11
55. Repeat the operations 1 to 3.
56. Disconnect the power take-off brake supply pipe
(1) (Fig. 11).
57. Remove lubricating pipe (4) (Fig. 11).
58. Take the screws (3) out of the cover (10) and
remove it (Fig. 11).

Contents
59. Take off nut (25) and locking screw (24) from the
fork (26).
61. Take out the pin (23) from the double pinion
assembly (14) in order to disengage the fork (26).
NOTE: To release only the fork, pull pin (23) slightly
rearwards.
62. Remove the friction washers (16) (21).
NOTE: Be careful not to let the washers fall inside
the housing.
63. Take out the double pinion assembly (14) (through
the spool valve support aperture, only for the
version without shimming) (Fig. 13).
64. Remove the needle bearings (17) (20) and the
spacer (19) from the pinion (18).
NOTE: To facilitate access to the circlip, use short Fig. 12
handled circlip pliers.
66. Take out the pinion assembly (13) and the shaft
(35) held in place by the washer (5) and the screw
(6).
67. Remove the flat sided washer (33).
NOTE: Take care not to let the washer or the circlip
fall inside the housing.
Hold in place the coupler pinion (34) and the needle
bearing (28).
The cone bearing (4) remains in the bearing cup (3)
during removal of the pinion.
68. Remove the coupler pinion (34) and the needle
bearing (28).
69. Remove the bearing cone (4).
70. Remove the Allen screw (27) (where necessary).
71. Take out the shaft (2) and the coupler sleeve (31)
(where necessary). Fig. 13
NOTE: The circlip (29) remains on the shaft (2).
Fig. 14
Contents
Reassembly
defective parts.
73. Refit the shaft (2) and the coupler sleeve (31) (if
disassembled).
74. Smear the screw (27) with Loctite 221 and tighten
(if disassembled).
75. Refit the cone bearing (4). Position the pinion (13)
prepared with the shaft (35). Place the coupler
pinion (34), the needle bearing (28), the washer
(33), and the circlip (32). Push on the pinion (13).
Position the washer (33). Fit the circlip (32).
76. In the pinion (18), place the spacer (19) and the
needle bearings (17) (20). Position the double
pinion assembly (14). Place the washer (16)
smeared with miscible grease (Amber technical or
equivalent). Fig. 15
77. Check that the channels in pin (23) are not
obstructed. They are used for lubricating the
needle bearings (17) (20) and the front bearing of
the driving pinion. Slightly engage the pin (23) in
order to hold the washer (16) in place. Place the
washer (21) coated with miscible grease. Centre
the double pinion assembly (14).
78. Definitively fit the pin (23) into the pinion assembly
(14) and into the fork (26) while ensuring the
correct positioning of the set screw hole (22).
79. Smear screw (22) with Loctite 542 and tighten to a
80. Clean the cover (10) mating face.
81. Smear the mating face of the housing with a
82. Check for the presence of the bearing cup (8).
Tighten screws (3) to a torque of 130 -170 Nm.
83. Reconnect the pipes (1) (4) (Fig. 16). Fig. 16
84. Refit the screw (24) and nut (25) on the fork (26).
85. Adjust the locking of the fork (26) (Fig. 15):
- Position the fork (26), with the locking screw (24)
on flat “M” of pin (23) (between the two locking
grooves), tighten the screw to compress the ball.
- Loosen the screw by one-quarter turn. Smear
the nut (25) with Loctite 241. Tighten to a torque
of 15 - 20 Nm.
- Check that the fork locks correctly.

Contents
86. Adjust the control (see § E).

cover with a sealing product (Loctite 510 or equiv-
alent).
89. Refit the spool valve support (Fig. 3).
90. Smear the threads of the two lower screws (4)
with Loctite 510. Tighten the 4 screws to a torque
of 50 - 70 Nm.
91. Carry out operations 1 and 2in reverse order.
correctly.
- the mating faces (spool valve support, cover, lift
cover)
Fig. 17
F . 4-speed LSPTO (with shimming)

NOTE: The J/P shimming is to be carried out when
servicing on the following components: pinion (13),
deflector (15), cone bearings (4) (7), bearing cups (3)
(8), piston (9) and cover (10).
For a correct shimming of cone bearings (4) (7) and
bearing cups (3) (8), it is necessary to remove the lift
cover.
Disassembly
94. Remove the lift cover (see chapter 6).
95. Remove the PTO pinions, carry out operations 56
to 69.
96. Separate the pinion (13) from the shaft (35) using a
press and a suitable fixture (Fig. 17). Fig. 18
NOTE: The friction ring (30) is force fitted into the
shaft (35).
97. Extract the bearing cone (7) and deflector (15)
(Fig. 18).
NOTE: To extract the bearing cup (3) the 540 / 1000
rpm pinions must be removed.
Partially drain the axle housing (see chapter 7).
Contents
Reassembly 112.Reconnect the pipes (1) (4) (Fig. 16).

113.Fit the locking screw (24) and the nut (25). Adjust
the fork (26), carry out operation 85.
defective parts.
114.Refit the lift cover (see chapter 6).
NOTE: For correct lubrication of the ring (30), a
deflector (15) is fitted between the pinion (13) and 115.Adjust the economy PTO control (see § E).
the bearing cone (7), in contact with the bearing 116.Check the correct operation of the PTO and its
cup (Fig. 18). brake.
99. Place the deflector (15) on pinion (13), and force-fit 117.Check for the oil tightness of:
the bearing cone (7) fully home into the shoulder - the mating faces (spool valves support, cover)
(Fig. 7). Fit the cone (4) into the bearing cup (3). - the hydraulic unions.
NOTE: If the bearing cup (3) has been replaced, refit
the 540 / 1000 rpm pinions (see chapter 7). Fill the
housing to the correct oil level.
100.Preparing and shimming the pinion (13). Carry out
operations 30 to 45.
101.Take out the pinion (13) and assemble it with the
shaft (35) (Fig. 19), then fit the washer (5) and
screw (6). Tighten the screw to a torque of 50 Nm.
102.Refit the bearing cone (4), the coupler pinion (34)
and the needle bearing (28).
103.Fit the pinion assembly (13) and the shaft (35).
NOTE: Check for the presence of the coupler
sleeve (31).
104.Position the washer (33), fit the circlip (32).
105.In the pinion (18), place the spacer (19) and the
needle bearings (17) (20).
Position the double pinion assembly (14).
Place the washer (16) smeared with miscible Fig. 19
grease (“Amber technical” or equivalent).
106.Ensure that the channels in the pin (23) are not
obstructed; they are used for lubricating needle
bearings (17) (20) and the front bearing of the drive
pinion. Slightly engage the pin (23) in order to hold
the washer (16) in place. Place the washer (21)
coated with miscible grease. Centre the double
pinion assembly (14).
107.Definitively fit the pin (23) into the pinion assembly
(14) and into the fork (26) while ensuring the
correct positioning of the set screw hole (22).
108.Smear the set screw (22) with Loctite 542. Tighten
109.Clean the cover (10) mating face.
110.Smear the mating face of the housing with a
111.Check for the presence of the bearing cup (8), fit
the cover (10) with screws (3) and tighten to a
torque of 130 - 170 Nm (Fig. 16).

Contents
G . Assembling and adjusting the

4-speed LSPTO control
118.Move the control lever L (Fig. 20) to the 1550 rpm
economy position.
119.Screw the clevis (1) flush with the threaded end of
the cable (6) (Fig. 21).
120.Fit clevis (1) on lever L using the clip (7).
121.Adjust the sheath end (5) so that the nut (3) is flush
with the end of the threaded part.
122.Tighten nut (4) and check that the cable is not
constrained in any way.
123.Place lever M in the 1550 rpm economic position
(a) (Fig. 22) (sleeve locked with the coupler pinion,
the fork locked).
124.Screw the clevis (1) flush with the threaded end of Fig. 20
the cable (6) and fit it onto lever M with the clevis
pin (7).
Tighten nut (2).
125.Adjust the sheath end piece (5), checking that lever
M remains locked.
126.Tighten nuts (3) (4) and check that the cable is not
trapped in any way.
127.Check the locking of the control in the 2000 rpm
position (b) and check for the correct operation of
the indicator light on the instrument panel.
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Contents
GPA20 removable shaft
07C01 - GPA20 removable shaft
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Replacing the 540 or 1000 rpm shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Removing and refitting the rear bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
D . Disassembling and reassembling the rear bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
E . Disassembling and assembling the 540 and 1000 rpm pinions and the front
bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Contents
Contents
A . General
The driven pinions (5) (6) are fitted on the PTO shaft
located on the lower part of the axle housing. These
pinions are constantly meshed with the double driving
pinion driven by the top shaft line whose speed is
transmitted by the PTO clutch.
The PTO shaft (10) is fitted, at the front, on a roller
bearing (1) force-fitted in the axle housing, and at the
rear, on a hub (9) rotating on a roller bearing (15).
The 540 rpm version has 6 splines, and the 1000 rpm
version has 21 splines.
In the 540 rpm configuration, the shaft (10) is integral
with the pinion (5) via splines. The pinion (6) and ring
(4) assembly rotate freely on the shaft (10).
In the 1000 rpm configuration, the shaft is splined to
the pinion (6). The pinion (5) and ring (3) assembly
rotate freely on the shaft (10).
The snap ring (20) holds the shaft in place.
The seal is ensured by the ring (14) and O'rings (11)
(19).
Parts list
(1) Bearing
(2) Deflector
(3) Ring
(4) Ring
(5) Pinion (540 rpm)
(7) Circlip
(8) Snap ring
(9) Hub
(10) 540 or 1000 rpm PTO shaft
(11) O’ring
(12) Unit
(14) Sealing ring
(15) Bearing
(16) Screw
(17) PTO speed sensor
(18) Nut
(19) O’ring
(20) Snap ring

Contents
Overall view
Fig. 1
Contents
Exploded view
Fig. 2

Contents
B . Replacing the 540 or 1000 rpm

shaft
Disassembly
1. Raise the rear of the tractor to avoid oil spillage.
2. Remove snap ring (20) (Fig. 3).
3. Take out the shaft (10).
4. Remove the O'ring (11) and discard it.
Reassembly
5. Install a new O'ring (11).
6. Clean and reinstall the shaft (10).
7. Refit the snap ring (20) and lower the rear of the
tractor
Fig. 4
C . Removing and refitting the rear

bearing
8. Partially drain the rear axle housing. Remove the
two opposing screws (16) (Fig. 5).
9. Screw two guide studs (Fig. 4) in abutment against
the pinion (6). The purpose of this operation is to
hold the pinions (5) (6) in line when removing the
shaft (10) and the rear bearing assembly (Fig. 6).
10. Remove the other two screws (16) (Fig. 5).
11. Remove the shaft and the rear bearing assembly
(Fig. 5).
Fig. 5
Fig. 3
Fig. 6
Contents
Refitting
12. Fit the shaft and the rear bearing assembly (Fig. 6).
13. Smear two screws (16) with Loctite 542, then
14. Take out two guide studs.
15. Coat the two other screws (16) with Loctite 542,
then tighten to a torque of 105 - 120 Nm.
16. Top up the rear axle housing with oil.

the rear bearing
17. Remove the rear bearing and repeat operations 8
to 11.
Fig. 7
Disassembly
19. Remove snap ring (20).
20. Separate the shaft (10) from the bearing assembly.
23. Separate the unit (12) from the roller bearing (15)
(Fig. 7).
24. Remove the snap ring (8).
25. Extract the roller bearing (15) from the hub (9).
26. Remove the sealing ring (14).
Reassembly (Fig. 7)
27. Smear the external diameter of the sealing ring
(14) with Loctite 542.
28. Using a press and a suitable tool, install the sealing
ring (14) in abutment against the shoulder of the
unit (12). The double lip must be turned towards
the roller bearing (15).
29. Assemble the bearing. Reverse operations 17 to
24 and install it. Repeat operations 12 to 16.

Contents
E . Disassembling and assembling

the 540 and 1000 rpm pinions and
the front bearing
Disassembly
To remove the pinions (5) (6), it is necessary to
remove:
- the lift cover (see section 6)
- top cover at the rear PTO drive shaft, the driving
pinion and the layshaft (see section 7).
30. For access to the sensor, remove the left-hand ram
by removing the lower attachment and by discon-
necting the feed pipe. Remove the PTO sensor.
to 11.
32. Remove the pinions (5) (6). Fig. 8
33. Extract the roller bearing (1) and the deflector (2).
41. Refit the left-hand ram, install the lower attach-
Reassembly ment and reconnect the feed pipe.
42. Refit the driving pinion assembly.
defective parts. 43. Refit the lift cover (see section 6).
35. Smear the deflector (2) with Loctite 648 on the 44. Top up the oil level in the rear axle.
mating surface with the housing and put it with its 45. Check the correct operation of the PTO and its
bore. Turn the opening upwards (Fig. 8). brake.
36. Fit the roller bearing (1) in the housing, in abutment 46. Check for the oil tightness of:
with the deflector (2). - mating faces of seals (spool valve support, lift
37. Lubricate the rings (3) (4). cover, cover, PTO rear bearing).
38. Refit the pinions (5) (6) and screw two guide studs - the hydraulic unions.
in abutment on the pinion (6). The purpose of this
operation is to maintain the pinions (Fig. 4) in line
while refitting the rear bearing.
NOTE: If the rings (3) (4) are damaged, replace the
pinions (5) (6).
39. Refit the rear bearing and repeat operations 12 to
15.
40. Smear the thread of the PTO sensor with Loctite
“Form A gasket 2” (sensor sealing or equivalent).
Adjust the sensor:
- Tighten the sensor home, without forcing, until it
comes in contact with the pinion (6).
- Unscrew the sensor by 3/4 turn.
- Tighten the nut (18) moderately and connect the
harness.
Contents
GPA20 shiftable shaft
07D01 - GPA20 shiftable shaft
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Layout of components and different versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Removing and refitting the rear bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Disassembling and reassembling the rear bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Disassembling and reassembling the pinions (540 and 1000 rpm) and the front shaft
bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
F . Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
G . Flange shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
H . Shaft with reinforced sealing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Contents
Contents
A . General
The driven pinions (4) (7) are fitted on the PTO shaft
(13) located on the lower rear part of the axle housing.
These driven pinions are constantly meshed with the
double driving pinion driven by the upper shaftline
whose drive is transmitted by the power take-off
clutch.
The power take-off shaft is freely mounted into the

bearing (2) and force fitted into the bearing (10). The
bearings are fitted into the rear axle housing and
housing unit respectively (14).
The coupler hub (5) is integral with the shaft (13) via
splines. These pinions (4) (7) drive the shaft when the
coupler (5) is moved either forwards (540 rpm) or back-
wards (1000 rpm). When one of the pinions (4) or (7),
equipped with rings (19) (20) is passive, it turns either
on the ring (3) or on the shaft (13).
A control fork (25) fitted to the pin (22) makes it
possible to select speeds of 540 or 1000 rpm.
Tightness is obtained via the sealing ring (11) and the

O'ring (18). The deflector (12) prevents contamination
by foreign particles.
Depending on the version, the power take-off shaft

may be supported by taper roller bearings.
Another version provided with a flange shaft makes it

possible to rapidly change the end-fitting (32) (6 or 21
splines).
Lubricating the pinions (4) (7)

The transmission oil provides lubrication for the two
pinions.
The bearing (2) has a sealed face turned towards the
540 rpm pinion. Lubrication of pinions is obtained via
the oil slave device (1) and the shaft (13) provided with
an axial channel and drilled radial ports.

Contents
Parts list
(1)(1) Oil slave device
(2) Bearing
(3) Ring
(5) Coupler
(6) Hub
(8) Circlip
(9) Snap ring
(10) Bearing
(11) Sealing ring
(12) Deflector
(13) PTO shaft
(14) Unit
(15) Screw
(15A)Screw
(16) Sensor
(17) Nut
(18) O’ring
(19) Ring
(20) Ring
(21) Link
(22) Pin
(23) O’ring
(24) Pads
(25) Fork
(26) Set screw
(27)(27) Special spacers
(28) Plug
(29) "Bayonet" cap
(30) Twist cap
(31) Flange shaft
(32) End-fitting (6 or 21 splines)
(33) Locating pins
(34) Screw
Contents
Legend Overall view

A : Internal control via lever and cable
B : External control
Fig. 1

Contents
Legend
B . Layout of components and
different versions A : with 2-speed PTO
B : with 4-speed LSPTO
C : with GSPTO
D : with flange shaft (540 - 1000 rpm) and inter-
changeable end-fitting
E : with standard shaft (540 - 1000 rpm)
Fig. 2
Contents
Overall view
Fig. 3

Contents
C . Removing and refitting the rear

bearing
Removal
1. Partially drain the rear axle housing.
2. Insert the coupler (5) into the pinion (7).
3. Remove the two opposing screws (15) (Fig. 4).
4. In the location of the two removed screws, tighten
two guide studs home against the pinion (7). The
aim of this operation is to keep the pinions (4) (7)
(Fig. 5), hub and coupler aligned during removal of
shaft (13) and bearing assembly.
5. Remove the other two screws (15).
6. Remove the shaft and the bearing assembly
(Fig. 6). Discard seal (18).
Fig. 4
Refitting
7. Refit the seal (18). Fit the shaft and the bearing
assembly (Fig. 6).
8. Smear two screws (15) with Loctite 542 and
tighten them to 105 - 120 Nm.
9. Remove the two guide studs.
10. Smear with grease and tighten the two other
screws following the instructions described
earlier.
11. Top up the oil level of the rear axle housing and
check its level using a gauge located to the rear of
the centre housing.
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Contents

the rear bearing
12. Remove the rear bearing. Carry out operations 1 to
6.
Disassembly
15. Separate cover (14) from bearing (10).
16. Remove snap ring (9).
17. Extract bearing (10) from shaft (13).
18. Extract sealing ring and deflector (12).
Fig. 7
Reassembly
19. Using a press and a suitable fixture, fit deflector
(12) up against the cover, carefully following the
direction of assembly (Fig. 7).
20. Using a press and a suitable fixture, insert the
sealing ring (11) flush with the chamfer machined
onto the cover (14), with its lip turned towards the
bearing (10) (Fig. 7).
21. Install the housing unit (14) components, carry out
operations 13 to 17 in reverse order, and refit the
rear bearing.
Final operation
11.

Contents

the pinions (540 and 1000 rpm) and
the front shaft bearing
Before removing pinions (4) (7), the following should
be removed:
- the lift cover (see chapter 6)
- the hitch support (see chapter 6).
- the top cover of power take-off at the rear of tractor,
the double driving pinion and, if applicable, the
control fork (4-speed LSPTO).
Disassembly
23. Remove the left lift ram and take off the PTO Fig. 8
sensor.
24. Undo the set screw (26).
25. Take out the pin (22) with the link (21) on the
left-hand side of the tractor, and discard the O'ring
(23).
NOTE: The plug (28) stays inside the housing.
26. Take out the control fork (25) with the pads (24)
without letting them fall into the housing.
to 6.
28. Remove the hub (6) with the coupler (5), the
pinions (4) (7) and the ring (3).
29. Extract the bearing (2) and oil slave device (1).
Reassembly
defective parts. Fig. 9
31. Lightly smear the oil slave device (1) with Loctite
648 or equivalent on the face turned towards the
centre housing. Insert the slave device with its
open end facing up (Fig. 8).
32. Insert the bearing (2) into the housing thrust up
against the oil slave device (1) (Fig. 8).
NOTE: Turn the sealed part of the bearing towards
the pinion (4).
33. Using a jet of compressed air, check that the oil
channel in the shaft (13) is not obstructed. Lubri-
cate the rings (19) (20). Refit the pinions (4) (7), the
coupler (5) with the hub (6), the ring (3), with the
opening of the teeth turned towards the rear of the
tractor (Fig. 9).
NOTE: If rings (19) (20) (no reference code given in
spare parts catalogue) are damaged, replace the
pinions (4) (7).
Contents
34. Insert the coupler (5) into the pinion (7). Tighten
two guide studs up against the pinion (7) following
the method described in operation 4.
11.
36. Smear the thread of the PTO sensor (16) with
Loctite 577 (Sensor Sealing or equivalent).
Assemble and adjust the sensor:
- Tighten the sensor home, without forcing, until it
comes in contact with the pinion (7),
- Unscrew the sensor by 3/4 turn,
- Tighten the nut (17) moderately and connect the
connector.
37. Reassemble the control fork (25) with the pads (24)
held up by two points of miscible grease (Amber
Technical or equivalent).
38. Fit a new O'ring (23). Fit the pin (22) equipped with
a link (21).
39. Tighten the screw (26) smeared with Loctite 221.
Manually check correct operation of the fork and
coupler (5) in the 540 - 1000 rpm positions respec-
tively.
Final operations
40. Refit the left-hand ram.
41. Reinstall the driving pinion, the control fork
(LSPTO, if fitted) and top cover (see chapter 7).
42. Refit the lift cover (see chapter 6).
43. Adjust the LSPTO control (see chapter 7).
44. Top up the oil level of the real axle housing by
checking with a gauge located at the rear of the
centre housing.
correctly.
- mating faces (spool valve support, top cover,
PTO rear bearing, and lift cover)

Contents
F . Controls
Internal (Fig. 10)
(1) Lever
(2) Cable
(21) Link
Check
After adjusting the control cable, check that the
coupler (5) fits correctly with the 540 and 1000 rpm
pinions.
External (Fig. 11)

(2) Screw
(21) Link
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Contents
Tightening torque
G . Flange shaft
Screw (34): 100 - 130 Nm
Special points
- The flange shaft (31) makes it possible to inter-
change the end-fitting (32) (6 or 21 splines).
- This end-fitting is integral with the shaft (31) via pins
(33) and screws (34).
- When the power take-off is not in use, the coupling
end is masked (depending on option):
• either by a bayonet cap (29) held in place by special
spacers (27),
• or by a twist cap (30) (Fig. 12).
REMARK: To allow for the removal of the end-fitting,

introduce a measuring rod into one of the two holes
drilled into the housing unit (14). Lock by gently turning
the end-fitting. Take out the screws (34).
Fig. 12

Contents
Fig. 13
Contents
H . Shaft with reinforced sealing

Construction (Fig. 14)
The output shaft (13) receives drive from the upper line
of the power take-off and, via the different engaged
pinions, transmits it to the implement that needs to be
driven.
At the front, it is supported by a straight roller bearing

force fitted into the centre housing and at the rear by
two taper roller bearings (1) (2) and (3) (4) installed
opposite one another.
Taper roller bearing clearance is obtained via shim(s)

(6) placed between the rear bearing cup (4) and the
seal holder (8).
As with the other PTO versions, it supports the 540

and 1000 rpm driven pinions.
When operating in rice fields or in particularly damp

farming conditions, the rear bearing seal is reinforced
by a "cassette" seal (11).

Contents
Fig. 14
Contents
Removing and refitting the shaft and

housing unit
Removing the shaft (Fig. 14)
47. Take off the cap (9).
48. Using a wrench placed on the "M" flats, unscrew
and remove the support (12).
49. Use the control to move the coupler to engage the
1000 rpm pinion.
REMARK: Once engaged, the coupler holds the
pinion in place.
50. Take off the two diametrically opposed screws (10)
and replace them with two locally made "G" guide
studs of suitable length, their ends resting on the
pinion (1000 rpm).
REMARK: The guide studs should be kept slightly
under pressure over the pinion (1000 rpm) which,
in turn, transmits pressure to the other stacked
elements.
51. Remove the other two screws. Separate and lift
the cover (8) equipped with a sealing ring (11).
52. Disengage the shaft (13) and bearings (1) (2) and
(3) (4) from the 540 and 1000 rpm driven pinions.
REMARK: Pair up the cones and bearing cups in
case of reuse.
53. If necessary, extract the bearing cones from the
shaft.
Removing
54. Separate the housing unit (14) from the centre
housing.
55. Discard the O'ring (18).
Refitting the unit

defective parts.
NOTE: The bearing cones and cups should be lubri-
cated with clean transmission oil before fitting.
57. Fit an O'ring (18) onto the housing unit and slide it
onto the guide studs and into the bores of the
centre housing.
58. Temporarily tighten the two diametrically opposed
screws (10) in order to secure the housing unit.

Contents
Refitting the shaft (Fig. 14)

59. Slide the bearing cup (1) into the housing unit.
60. As required, insert the bearing cones (2) (3) up
against the shaft collar using a press and a suitable
fixture.
61. Introduce the shaft (13) into the 540 - 1000 rpm
driven pinions.
62. Position the rear bearing cup (4).
63. If necessary, carry out the shimming of bearings
(see later).
64. Replace the sealing ring (11) (see later).
65. Take off the two screws previously installed.
Smear the rear face of the housing unit (14) with
Loctite 510 or equivalent and refit the cover (8)
fitted with a sealing ring.
66. Fit two screws, their thread lightly smeared with
Loctite 542 or equivalent and tighten to a torque of Fig. 15
100 - 130 Nm.
67. Take off the guide studs and install two more
screws, following the previous instructions.
68. Refit the support and tighten it to 30 - 50 Nm.
69. Tighten the cap moderately.
Shimming the bearings

Preparing for shimming
70. Remove the cover (8), without Loctite, eliminating
the shims and sealing ring (11).
NOTE: By eliminating the shims, there is the risk of
creating excessive clearance. In this case, fit a
thickness of shims to reduce the clearance to
approximately 0.35 mm.
71. Position the dial gauge feeler pin on the end of the
shaft (Fig. 15).
72. Pull hard on the shaft, turning it to and fro from left
to right to correctly “seat” the cones in the bearing
cups.
75. Depending on the value read on the dial gauge,
prepare a thickness of shim(s) (6) in order to obtain
a final clearance of:
J1 = 0.05 to 0.15 mm (Fig. 15)
NOTE: If possible, shim to obtain minimum toler-
ance.
Contents
Replacing the sealing ring

REMINDER: The sealing ring (11) is also known as a
"cassette" seal.
Removal
76. Remove cap (9) and support (12).
77. Take out the two diametrically opposed screws
(10) and replace them with two guide studs
(Fig. 16).
78. Take off other two screws, separate and remove
the cover (8) (Fig. 16).
79. Drive off the seal from the cover.
Replacement
80. Clean the cover and check that it is free of dents or
burrs at the location of the seal. Fig. 16
81. Insert the new seal correctly turned with its
external face 9.25 mm from the rim of the cover (8)
(Fig. 16), using a locally made drift.
Refitting
82. Smear the rear face of the housing unit (14) with
Loctite 510 or equivalent and refit the cover (8)
after checking for the presence of shim(s) (6).
83. Insert the screws (10) and repeat operations 66
and 67.
Test
84. Start the engine. Activate the power take-off and
check the tightness of the rear bearing.
85. Refit and tighten the support as well as the cap,
then repeat operations 68 and 69.

Contents
Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
07E01 - GPA20 - GSPTO
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Disassembling the power take off (2WD version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Reassembling the power take off (2WD version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Disassembling the power take off (4WD version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
F . Reassembling the power take off (4WD version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
G . Assembling and adjusting the control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
A . General
Tractors can be fitted with GSPTO.
Unlike the independent PTO system where PTO
speed depends on the engine speed, GSPTO is driven
by the rear differential drive pinion and the PTO shaft
speed is proportional to the ground speed of the
tractor.
B . Operation
The drive pinion comprises a pinion (31) constantly
meshed with either the pinion (16) (2WD), or the bell
gear (33) (4WD). The sliding gear (10) allows to mesh
the shaft (8) in rotation with shaft (18) (2WD) or shaft
(32) (4WD). The pinion (3) fitted at the end of shaft (8)
drives the 540 rpm pinion of the rear PTO shaftline.
The movement of the sliding gear (10) is obtained by a
pad articulated on a pin fitted to the left in the lower
part of the rear axle housing and controlled by a link
and a cable operated by a lever in the cab.

Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
Parts list
2WD 4WD
(01) Plug z z
(02) Circlip z z
(03) Pinion z z
(04) Circlip z z
(05) Bearing z z
(06) Circlip z z
(07) Circlip z z
(08) Shaft z z
(09) Circlip z z
(10) Sliding gear z z
(11) Screws z z
(12) Cover z z
(13) Needle bearing z z
(14) Cup z
(15) Cone z
(16) Pinion z
(17) Circlip z
(18) 2WD shaft z
(19) Cone z
(20) Cup z
(21) Shim(s) z
(22) Spacer z
(23) Circlip z
(24) Plug z
(25) Double pin z z
(26) Double pin z z
(27) Sleeve z z
(28) Sleeve z z
(29) Shaft z z
(30) Circlip z z
(31) Pinion z z
(32) 4WD shaft z
(33) Bell gear z
Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
Overall view Overall view
Fig. 1 Fig. 2

Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
Exploded view Exploded view
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
C . Disassembling the power take off

(2WD version)
1. Chock the wheels of the tractor. Drain the rear axle
housing. Remove the lubricating pipe of the engine
clutch or Power Shuttle (depending on version)
that is fitted to the lower covers of the centre
housing and the gearbox.
3. Take off cover (12).
NOTE: Recover the spring (3) (Fig. 5).
4. Remove the retainer pipe (4) from the control link
(7) and the locking stud (2) (Fig. 5).
5. Disconnect the control cable (1) and remove the
link (7) (Fig. 6).
NOTE: The pad (1) turns free in the link pin (7) Fig. 6
(Fig. 5).
6. Remove the O'ring (5) (Fig. 5).
7. Remove the hook.
8. Extract plug (1) (Fig. 7).
10. Take off pinion (3) (Fig. 8).
Fig. 7
Fig. 5 Fig. 8

Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO

12. Take out shaft (8) with bearing (5) then remove
sleeve (10).
NOTE: If necessary, remove circlip (7).
13. Take off circlips (6) (9).
14. Extract bearing (5) using a press.
15. Extract plug (24).
16. Take off the circlip (23) and spacer (22).
17. Remove shims (21).
18. Remove cup (20).
19. Take out shaft (18) complete with bearing cone
(19).
20. Take off circlip (17) and hold pinion (16).
21. Remove pinion (16) and bearing cone (15).
22. Extract the cone (19) and take the circlip (17) off
the shaft (18). Fig. 9
NOTE: Match the cones and cups if they are to be
reused. Bearing (13) is force fitted in shaft (18).
23. Extract cup (14) using a suitable extractor.
NOTE: If pinion (31) is removed, it is necessary to Tractors with no creeper unit
remove the right-hand hydraulic cover.
24. Chock the wheels of the tractor. 30. Drive out the double pins (25) (26) from the
coupling sleeves (27) (28).
31. Slide the sleeves towards each other on the shaft
(29).
27. Position the axle stand.
32. Remove the shaft and sleeves assembly.
29. Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see
section 9).
NOTE: On 2WD tractors (without a GSPTO) the
pinion (31) is absent, but circlip (30) must be fitted.
Tractors with a creeper unit

35. Remove the fork, the sleeve assembly, the link
shaft and the coupler.
Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
D . Reassembling the power take off

(2WD version)
defective parts.
In case of servicing on the pinion (31)

39. Refit the pinion (31).
40. Refit the circlip (30).
41. Refit the fork, the sleeve assembly (28) (the long
offset between the pin and the pinion positioned
as shown in Fig. 10), the link shaft and the coupler.
Replace the pins. Adjust the fork (see section 5).
Fig. 10
42. Refit the pinion (31).
43. Refit the circlip (30).
44. Refit the assembly (link shaft and sleeves) then
position the coupler sleeves (27) (28) on the shaft
(29).
45. Fit the double pins (25) (26) on the coupling
sleeves.
NOTE: Turn the sleeve (28) as in operation 41.
Replace the pins. The long pin is fitted in sleeve
(27).

46. Insert cup (14) in abutment on the shoulder of the
housing.
47. Insert cone (19) on shaft (18) in abutment on the
shoulder, using a press and a suitable fixture, then
position circlip (17).

Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
48. Check for the presence of the needle bearing (13).

49. In order to turn the shaft to carry out J1 shimming,
do not fit pinion (16).
Position cone (15). Fit shaft (18) assembled with
the cone (19) and circlip (17).
50. Refit cup (20), spacer (22) and circlip (23).
NOTE: For correct shimming, make sure that the
spacer moves freely in the bore of the housing.
51. Carry out shimming of the shaft (18) in order to
obtain:
J1 = 0 to 0.10 mm.
52. Put a dial gauge feeler pin against the end of
spacer (22) (Fig. 11).
53. Through the opening of the cover (12), pull on the
shaft, turning it to the left and right alternately to
correctly seat the cones in their cups.
correct thickness of shims.
57. Take off the circlip (23) and spacer (22). Take out
shaft (18) assembled with the cone (19) and circlip
(17) while holding the cone (15). Refit the pinion
(16), the shaft (18) and cup (20).
58. Apply two dots of grease to shims (21) selected
during operation 56 and place them against the cup
(20).
59. Fit the spacer (22) and circlip (23).
Fig. 11
Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
60. Replace or clean the plug (24) and its mating face
on the housing.
61. Smear the corner of the plug housing with Loctite
542 and then insert the plug.
62. Place the sliding gear (10) on shaft (18).
NOTE: Turn the small shoulder E towards the shaft
(18) (Fig. 12).
63. Fit circlips (6) (9) on shaft (8).
64. Using a suitable fixture, insert bearing (5) using a
press, on shaft (8), in contact with circlip (6).
65. Check for the presence of circlip (7).
66. Fit the shaft assembly (8) in the housing (Fig. 13).
68. Place pinion (3).
69. Fit the circlip (2) (Fig. 14).
70. Check the movement of the sliding gear (10) Fig. 12
through the opening of the cover (12).
71. Replace or clean the plug (1) and its mating face on
the housing.
72. Smear the plug with Loctite 542, then insert it
slightly recessed from the face of the housing.
73. Fit the link (7) (fitted with a new O'ring (5)) by
placing pad (1) in the groove of the sliding gear (10)
(Fig. 5).
74. Clean and degrease the mating faces (cover and
housing).
75. Smear the mating face of the cover with a sealing
product (Masterjoint 510 or equivalent).
76. Screw two opposing guide studs into the housing.
77. Fit the retainer pipe (4), control link, locking stud (2)
and spring (3) (Fig. 5).
78. Refit the cover (12) and the lubricating pipe of the
engine clutch or Power Shuttle (depending on
version).
Fig. 13
Fig. 14

Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
79. Take out the guide studs. Tighten the screws to a

80. Reconnect the GSPTO control cable (1) (Fig. 6).
81. Adjust the control (see § G).
83. Refit the hook (for tractors fitted with an
auto-hitch, check correct operation). If adjustment
is necessary, see section 6.
84. Check GSPTO operation.
- the mating faces
- the cover beneath rear axle housing
E . Disassembling the power take off

(4WD version)
86. Remove the guard, the 4WD shaft and the lubri-
cating pipe of the engine clutch or Power Shuttle.
Disassemble shaft (8). Carry out operations 1 to
14.
NOTE: If servicing is required on the 4WD clutch
assembly, the cones and cups, the shaft and
needle bearing, see section 8.
If the pinion (31) is removed, it is necessary to
remove the right-hand hydraulic cover.
87. Raise the tractor using a jack. Position an axle
stand. Disassemble the wheel.

88. Drive out the double pins (25) (26) from the
coupling sleeves (27) (28).
(29).
90. Remove the assembly (shaft and sleeves).
91. Take off circlip (30) and remove the pinion (31).

92. Remove the fork, the sleeve assembly, the link
shaft and the coupler.
Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
F . Reassembling the power take off

(4WD version)
defective parts.
In case of servicing on the pinion (31)

95. Refit the pinion (31). Refit the circlip (30).
96. Refit the fork, the sleeve assembly, the link shaft
and the coupler. Fit the sleeve (28) with the long
offset between the pin and the 4WD pinion turned
as shown in Fig. 15. Replace the pins. Adjust the
fork (see section 5).
Fig. 15
Tractor with no creeper unit
97. Refit the pinion (31). Refit the circlip (30).
98. Refit the assembly (link shaft and sleeves) then
position the coupling sleeves (27) (28) on the shaft
(29).
99. Fit two new double pins (25) (26) on the coupling
sleeves.
NOTE: Fit the sleeve (28) with the long offset
between the pin and the 4WD pinion turned as
shown in Fig. 15. The long double pin is fitted on
the sleeve (27).

100.Refit the right-hand hydraulic cover (see section 9).
NOTE: If you have disassembled the 4WD clutch
assembly, the cones and cups, the shaft and roller
bearings, see section 8 for reassembly.
101.Place the sliding gear (10) on the shaft (32). Fig. 16
NOTE: Turn the small shoulder E towards the shaft
(32) (Fig. 16).
102.Refit shaft (8). Carry out operations 63 to 81.
103.Top up the oil level in the rear axle. Refit the hook
(if adjustment is necessary, see section 6). Check
correct operation of the GSPTO.

Contents
GPA20 - GSPTO
104.Check for the oil tightness of:

- the mating face of the cover under the rear axle
housing
- the right-hand hydraulic cover (if removed)
G . Assembling and adjusting the

control
105.Place lever L (Fig. 17) in GSPTO position (clutch
engaged) (Fig. 18).
106.Screw the clevis (1) flush with the threaded end of
the cable (6).
107.Fit the clevis (1) to lever L using the clip (7). Tighten
nut (2).
108.Adjust the sheath end (5) so that the nut (3) is flush Fig. 17
with the end of the threaded part.
109.Tighten nut (4) and check that the cable is not
constrained in any way.
110.Place the link (8) in “clutched” position “a”
(Fig. 19) and ensure that it is correctly locked.
111.Screw clevis (1) flush with the threaded part of
cable (6) (Fig. 19).
112.Fit clevis (1) to link (8) using clip (7). Tighten nut (2).
113.Adjust sheath end (5) using nut (4) while ensuring
that link (8) is still locked in position “a”.
114.Tighten nut (3). Check correct operation of the
control in “declutched” position “b” and check
that the cable is not constrained in any way when
in position “a”.
115.Check for correct operation of the instrument
panel indicator light.
Fig. 18
Fig. 19
Contents
Front axle
08 - Front axle
CONTENTS
08A01 - General
08E01 - GPA20 multidisc 4WD clutch
Contents
Front axle
Contents
General
08A01 - General
CONTENTS
A . General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Characteristics and dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
C . Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Contents
General
Contents
General
A . General description
The tractors may be equipped or not according to the
engine front axle model. The front axles mounted on
the 4WD tractors consist of:
- a centre housing containing the differential unit and
the differential lock system, as well as the transmis-
sion shafts,
- at each end, a hub assembly containing the epicyclic
final drive units.
The front axle is assembled to the front frame of the

tractor by means of a pivot which adapts to the uneve-
ness of the ground. Drive from the rear axle is trans-
mitted to the front axle through a fixed transmission
shaft in case of DANA front axles or via a universal
drive shaft for CARRARO front axles. Engagement is
ensured by an electrohydraulically controlled multidisc
clutch.
The differential unit is held by two half-bearings

mounted on a suitable support which allows to adjust
the bevel gear.
The bevel gear is supported by two bearings, and is
adjusted using shims.
The wheel hubs containing the epicyclic drive units are
held in place by two taper roller bearings and driven a
hydraulically controlled steering unit.

Contents
General

DANA AG 85 - 105CD front axle
(1) Axle housing
(2) Final drive units
(3) steering pivot
(4) Input shaft
(5) Drive pinion
(6) Differential
CARRARO 20.19 front axle

(1) Axle housing
(2) Final drive units
(3) Flange
(4) Drive pinion
(5) Differential
(6) Bearing
(7) Steering ram
Contents
General
Overall view
DANA AG 85 and 105CD front axle
4
B B
AA
1
3
BB
A A
6
MA-08-03294A
Fig. 1

Contents
General
Overall view
CARRARO 20.19 front axle
Fig. 2
Contents
General
Dimensions for DANA AG 105CD models

B . Characteristics and dimensions
A = 2020 E = M18 x 1.5
All values in the following tables are given in millime-
tres. B = Ø 220.8 F = 275
C = Ø 315 G = Ø 79.90
Dimensions for DANA AG 85 models D = 1800 H = Ø 95
A = 1869 E = M18 x 1.5
B = Ø 220.8 F = 275
C = Ø 315 G = Ø 79.90
D = 1669 H = Ø 95
C B
D
E
G H
MA-08-03297A
Fig. 3

Contents
General
Dimensions for CARRARO 20.19 models

A = 2045 F = 275 K = 136
B = Ø 320 G = 456 L = 134
C = Ø 220.8 H = 90 M = 347
D = 1800 I = 49 N = 481
E = M18 x 1.5 J = 215 O = 115
Fig. 4
Contents
General
CARRARO (Fig. 6)
C . Product identification
(1) Axle type
The front axles are identified by a plate fitted on them. (2) Serial number
(3) Carraro number
DANA (Fig. 5) (4) Customer code
(5) Total reduction ratio
(1) Axle type (6) Rotational direction
(2) Reduction ratio (7) Differential type
(3) Differential type (8) Differential oil type
(4) Serial number (9) Differential oil quantity
(5) Axle number (10) Epicyclic drive unit oil type
(11) Epicyclic drive unit oil quantity
MODEL 1
RATIO 2 DIFF 3
SERIAL N˚ 4
AXLE N˚ 5
MFG. BY DANA ITALIA S.p.a.
MADE IN COMO - ITALY
MA-08-03298A
Fig. 5
Fig. 6

Contents
General
Technical characteristics
DESCRIPTION VALUES
AG 85 AG 105CD 20.19
Drive unit with bevel gear 8 / 33 (1 / 4.125) 8 / 33 (1 / 4.125) 9 / 32 (1 / 3.55)
Epicyclic drive unit 1 / 4.6 1 / 4.6 1 / 6.0
Total reduction ratio 1 / 18.975 1 / 18.975 1 / 21.33
Unladen weight 260 Kg 270 Kg 320 Kg
Input rotational direction Counter-clockwise
Differential type Coupler lock, hydraulically controlled Multidisc lock
Max. inner / outer steering
55° / 39° 55° / 42°
lock angle
SAE 85W90
SAE 85W90
In compliance with
In compliance with standards
standards
Oil specifications API GL4 - GL5
API GL4 - GL5
MIL 2105
MIL 2105
and MIL 2105B
and MIL 2105D
Differential oil capacity 5.5 L 6.8 L 6L
Epicyclic drive unit oil
0.9 + 0.9 L 1.1 L 0.7 +0.7 L
capacity
POLYMER 400/L
Lubrication DIN = KHER1R
ISO-I-XMR-XM2
Contents
GPA20 multidisc 4WD clutch
08E01 - GPA20 multidisc 4WD clutch
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removing the clutch assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Disassembling the clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
E . Reassembling the clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
F . Refitting the clutch assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
G . Locally made tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Contents
Contents
A . General
The front axle clutch assembly is fitted in the lower
part of the rear axle housing. An inspection cover
located under the housing provides access to the
mechanism, which comprises:
- a shaft (25) turning on two taper roller bearings fitted
in the groove of the axle housing,
- a hydraulic clutch assembly integral with the rotating
shaft,
- a bell gear (15) centred on the shaft by a ring (43),
driving the clutch discs (36).
The helical bell gear (15) is constantly meshed to the

pinion (7) on the drive pinion.
The shaft is shimmed to obtain an operating clearance

between 0 and 0.1 mm using shims (20) positioned
between the cap (22) and the cup (18).
B . Operation
Declutching
The 4WD solenoid valve sends the 17 bar pressure
into the shaft (25) via a channel drilled in the shaft
housing, and the ring (11).
The cover (30) moves on the hub (40) and pulls the bell
(42) which compresses the Belleville washers (34) and
(35), releasing the discs (36). The bell gear (15) integral
with the ring (43) turns idle on the shaft.
Clutch
The pressure drop releases the Belleville washers,
which push the bell (42) so that it meshes with the bell
gear (15), which in turn drives the shaft (25). The oil
then returns to the housing via the solenoid valve.

Contents
Parts list
(1) Sleeve
(2) Double pin
(3) Shaft
(4) Double pin
(5) Sleeve
(6) Circlip
(7) Pinion
(8) Plug
(9) Needle bearing
(10) Screw
(11) Ring
(12) Sealing rings
(13) Cup
(14) Cone
(15) Bell gear
(16) Clutch assembly
(17) Cover
(18) Cup
(19) Cone
(20) Shim(s)
(21) O’ring
(22) Cap
(23) Circlip
(24) Seal
(25) 4WD drive shaft
(26) Seal
(27) Stop screw
(28) Flange
(29) O’ring
(30) Cover
(31) Circlip
(32) O’ring
(33) O’ring
(34) Belleville washer
(35) Belleville washer
(36) Disc
- A: 4-disc clutch
- B: 5-disc clutch
(37) Clutch plate
- A: 4-disc clutch
- B: 5-disc clutch
(38) Cover
(39) Circlip
(40) Hub
(41) Shim(s)
(42) Bell housing
(43) Ring
Contents
Overall view
Shim to obtain
0 to 0.1 mm clearance
A. 4-disc clutch B. 5-disc clutch
Fig. 1

Contents
Exploded view
Reinforced assembly
ch
clu t
is c
. 4-d
A
Fig. 2
Contents
C . Removing the clutch assembly

1. Chock the wheels of the tractor. Drain the rear axle
housing.
2. Disconnect the two front differential lock control
hoses (plug the pipe channels). Remove the guard
and the transmission shaft. Remove the engine
clutch or power shuttle (depending on the version)
lubricating pipe that is fitted to the lower centre
housing covers and the gearbox.
NOTE: On tractors fitted with GSPTO, recover the
spring (3), locking stud (2) and retainer pipe (1)
(Fig. 3).
On tractors fitted with a reinforced sealed
protector, remove the screw (27), flange (28) and
seal (26). Fig. 3
5. Protect the splined part of the shaft (25). Extract
the cap (22) with its seal (24) with locally made tool
(Fig. 4) (see § G). Remove seal (24).
7. Remove the shims (20) and the cup (18).
NOTE: On tractors fitted with GSPTO, place the
control in declutched position.
8. Extract the shaft assembly (25) and bearing cone
(19), holding the clutch assembly (16) and bell gear
(15).
9. Remove the clutch assembly (16) with the bell
gear (15) and cone (14).
10. Using a locally made tool (see § G), extract the ring
(11) (Fig. 5). This tool is mandatory for tractors with
GSPTO. If necessary, also remove the cup (13)
with a suitable extractor.
NOTE: When pinion (7) has been removed, it is Fig. 4
necessary to remove the right-hand hydraulic
cover (see chapter 9, depending on hydraulic
equipment).
Fig. 5

Contents

11. Drive out the double pins (2) (4) from the coupling
sleeves (1) (5).
(3) and remove the shaft - sleeve assembly.

14. See chapter 5.
D . Disassembling the clutch

16. Split bell gear (15) from the clutch assembly (16).
17. Take off circlip (31). Fig. 6
18. Take off cover (30).
19. Remove the O'rings (29) (32).
20. Using a suitable fixture and a press, compress the
Belleville washers (34) (35) (Fig. 6).
21. Take off circlip (39) and the shim(s) (41) (Fig. 6).
22. Remove the suitable fixture.
23. Remove cover (38), discs (36) and intermediate
plates (37).
24. Separate the hub (40) from the bell (42).
26. Remove the Belleville washers (34) (35).
Disassembling the shaft

27. Remove the two seals (12).
28. Extract the cone (19) using a press and a suitable
fixture.
29. Extract needle bearing (9). Take out plug (8). Fig. 7
Reassembling the shaft

NOTE: Check that the channel in the shaft is not
blocked.
30. Tighten the plug (8) smeared with Loctite 542 to a
torque of 10 Nm.
31. Fit the needle bearing (9) 2.5 mm short of the face
F (Fig. 7).
32. Fit the bearing cone (19) against the shoulder on
shaft (25).
Contents
E . Reassembling the clutch

defective parts. Check that the 17 bar channel in
the hub (40) is not blocked.
34. Position the Belleville washers (35) (34) in the bell
(42) (Fig. 8).
NOTE: Two types of Belleville washers with
different markings and different loading efforts can
be fitted:
- 3619147M1 marked 147
- 3619473M1 marked 473.
The clutch assembly is normal or reinforced
depending on the tractor types.
35. Lubricate and fit the O’ring (33) on the hub (40).
36. Position the hub (40) in the bell (42) thrust against Fig. 8
the Belleville washers.
37. Fit the discs (36), aligning the catches and interme-
diate plates (37), and fit the cover (38).

Contents
38. Adjusting J1 clearance (Fig. 9)

Using a press and suitable fixture (Fig. 6) apply a
load of 2000 daN to fully compress the Belleville
washers (35) (34).
Fit the circlip (39). Use a set of shims to increase
the distance X between the cover (38) and circlip
(39). Select the shim(s) (41) to obtain clearance
J1 = 0.9 to 1.1 mm.
40. Position the shim(s) chosen at operation 38
between the cover and circlip (splined shim on the
circlip side).
41. Refit the circlip.
42. Lubricate and fit the O’rings (32) (29) on the cover
(30) and refit the latter.
44. Fit the clutch assembly (16) on the bell gear (15). Fig. 9
NOTE: The ring (43) is force fitted in the bell gear
(15) and then rebored.
F . Refitting the clutch assembly

Tractor with no creeper unit
45. Refit the pinion (7) (if removed).
47. Refit the link shaft and coupling sleeves. Carry out
operations 11 and 12 in reverse order. Replace the
double pins.

48. Refit the pinion (7) (if removed).
50. See chapter 5. Fig. 10
52. Fit the cup (13) (if removed).
53. Fit the ring (11) with a locally made drift (see § G),
so that the ring is positioned 4 to 5 mm short of the
cup mating face (13) (Fig. 10). Move the ring until
one of its holes opens into the clutch supply
channel in the housing.
54. Fit the seal (24) in the cap (22).
Contents
55. In order to correctly “seat” the cones in their

bearing cups, to obtain clearance:
J2 = 0 to 0.10 mm, fit the cone (14), the shaft (25),
and the cup (18).
56. Protect the splines of the shaft.
57. Fit the bearing (22) and circlip (23).
58. Put a dial gauge feeler pin against the end of shaft
(25) (Fig. 11).
59. Pull the shaft, turning it alternately from right to left
to correctly seat the cones in the cups.
thickness of shim(s) (20) required to obtain J2.
63. Remove the circlip (23), cap (22), cup (18) and the
shaft (25).
Fig. 11
64. Fit the seal rings (12) in the shaft grooves (25) and
hook their ends. Ensure that they turn freely.
65. Fit the cone (14) into the bearing cup (13). Install 78. Smear the two sleeves of the 4WD transmission
the shaft (25) after positioning the clutch assembly shaft with “Anti Seize” grease or equivalent.
(16) and bell gear (15) in the housing. Refit the transmission shaft and guard, and recon-
66. Fit the cup (18) and shim(s) (20) (smeared with nect the two front differential lock hoses.
grease) selected at operation 62. Refit the lubricating pipe of the power shuttle or
67. Fit the O’ring (21) in the housing groove. engine clutch.
68. Fit the cap (22) and circlip (23), remove the spline 79. Top up the rear axle oil level and remove shims.
protection on the shaft. 80. Check clutch operation and GSPTO control adjust-
69. On tractors with reinforced sealing, grease and ment (if fitted).
position the seal (26), with the lip turned towards 81. Check for tightness:
the cap (22). Remove the protection. - the mating faces of the cover under the rear axle
70. Fit the flange (28), ensuring that operational clear- housing
ance remains between the flange and housing. - the right-hand hydraulic cover (if removed)
71. Tighten the screw (27) after coating it with Loctite - the hydraulic unions.
241.
72. Clean and degrease the mating face of the cover
(17) and housing.
73. Smear the mating face of the cover with a sealing
product (Loctite 510 or equivalent).
74. Screw two opposing guide studs into the housing.
75. On tractors fitted with GSPTO, check the position
of the lever (4). Fit the retainer pipe (1), locking stud
(2) and spring (3) (Fig. 3).
76. Refit the cover (17).
77. Remove the guide studs, and fit and tighten
screws (10) to a torque of 130 - 170 Nm.

Contents
G . Locally made tools

Cap extractor (Fig. 12)
Welded nut HM6 2 threaded rods M6x130
Ch 1 at 45°
Welded nut HM10
Welded nut HM10
Threaded rod M10x70 2 holes Ø 7 Fig. 12
Ring extractor (Fig. 13)

Washer MF 3 385 963 M01 Threaded rod M12 x 180
Ch 1 at 45°
Fig. 13
Ring fitting drift (Fig. 14)

Ch 2 at 45° Knurling Ch 1 at 45°
Fig. 14
Contents
Hydraulics
09 - Hydraulics
CONTENTS
09A01 - Description of circuit open centre 57 l/mn
09B01 - Right-hand cover – 57 l/min Open Centre
09C01 - Left-hand cover - 57 l/min Open Centre
09D01 - Trailer braking - Open centre
09E01 - Auxiliary spool valve
09F01 - Lift control spool valve - Open Centre
09H01 - 17 bar - 5 bar and 1.5 bar valves - Open centre
09I01 - Unassisted brake master cylinders
09I02 - Assisted brake master cylinders
09J01 - GBA20 Power Shuttle control unit
09K01 - 57 l/min Open Centre tests
Contents
Hydraulics
Contents
Description of circuit open centre 57 l/mn
09A01 - Description of circuit open centre 57 l/mn
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Low flow rate, low pressure circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Layout of main components of Power shuttle and Speedshift circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D . Layout of main components of Mechanical reverse shuttle Speedshift circuit . . . . 7
E . High flow rate, high pressure circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
F . Diagram of mechanical reverse shuttle Speedshift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
G . Diagram of Power shuttle Speedshift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Contents
Contents
A . General
The Open Centre hydraulic circuit is comprised of two
separate circuits.
These two circuits are supplied by a two-stage gear
pump (1) (Fig. 1) fitted on the internal face of the
right-hand hydraulic cover. The pump sucks transmis-
sion oil from the common tank formed by the centre
housing and the gearbox through a 150 micron
filter (1) (Fig. 2), also fitted on the right-hand cover.
One or two 15 micron main filter(s) (39) (depending on
option) and a clogging indicator (40) are fitted on the
low flow rate circuit upstream from the Orbitrol stee-
ring spool valve (Fig. 2).
The hydraulic pump is driven by the ring gear of the
PTO clutch unit (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
B . Low flow rate, low pressure

circuit
REMINDER : The first stage of the pump supplies the
hydrostatic steering where pressure can reach
170 bar.
Hydraulic flow
After supplying of the Orbitrol steering spool valve as
required, the oil is directed to the left-hand cover atta-
ched to the centre housing.
This cover performs several low pressure functions.
It ensures:
- operating pressure for the various transmission
components via a 17 bar valve (2) (Fig. 3) fitted
downstream from the Orbitrol unit; Fig. 2
- cooling and lubrication of the gearbox and connected
components;
- booster pressure for brake master cylinders (exclu-
ding MERITOR master cylinders)
Fig. 3

Contents
Transmission components
The 17 bar circuit supplies, in parallel, the various
transmission functions via flanged solenoid valves on
the clutch / reverse shuttle unit, on the Dynashift
control and in the main channel of the right-hand cover.
None of these functions has priority and they may be
activated simultaneously.
Some of the solenoid valves (4WD, power take-off,
Dynashift and reverse shuttle (proportional solenoid
valves)) are linked to the electronic control system of
the tractor.
The functions supplied by the low flow rate circuit are

as follows:
- the hydrostatic steering;
- the Hare / Tortoise range shifting (Hi / Lo);
Fig. 4
- the differential lock (front and rear);
- the 4WD clutch;
- the Speedshift;
- the clutch unit of the reverse shuttle;
- the power take-off system:
- clutch,
- brake,
- front PTO (depending on options).
Cooling and lubrication

When the various components of the transmission are
supplied, the left-hand cover directs oil towards the
radiator when it is hot, or directly towards to the
gearbox and PTO when it is cold.
The lubricating pressure is maintained by a valve (10)
calibrated to 1.5 bar and fitted on the front left-hand
side of the gearbox (Fig. 4).
Booster pressure for brake master cylin-

ders
REMINDER : Only unassisted master cylinders receive
booster pressure from the hose (1) connected
upstream to the 1.5 bar valve (10) (Fig. 4).
Contents
Legend
C . Layout of main components of Power shuttle and Speedshift
High pressure
Power shuttle and Speedshift circuit
Low pressure
Parts list (Fig. 5) Trumpet housing 1 23
(1) Front differential lock Suction
(2) Steering ram 2
Return
(3) Pressure connector
(4) Orbitrol steering unit Brakes
(5) Forward clutch (reverse shuttle) Steering
(6) Reverse clutch (reverse shuttle)
(7) Accumulator (assisted master cylinders) 25
(8) Speedshift unit
(9) Left-hand cover 4 24
(10) 1.5 bar valve
(11) Temperature switch
(12) Hare / Tortoise unit 5 27
(13) PTO clutch
(14) Pump suction pipe 6 28
(16) Restrictor
(17) Suction strainer (Reverse shuttle clutch lubrica-
8 7
ting pump)
(18) 4WD clutch
(19) Brake lubricating pipes 10 29
(20) Rear differential lock
(23) Oil cooler 30
12
(24) Brake master cylinders
(25) FTE valve 31
(26) Bleed connector 13
(27) Diagnostics connector (reverse shuttle lubrica-
32
tion) 14
(28) Proportional solenoid valves (reverse shuttle)
(30) Speedshift solenoid valve 33
16
(31) Gearbox control unit
(32) Accumulator 34
(33) 60 micron filter 17
(34) Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve 38
(35) Differential lock solenoid valve 3
(36) PTO solenoid valve
(37) PTO brake solenoid valve 39
9
(38) 4 WD solenoid valve
40
(39) 15 micron filters 11
(40) Clogging indicator
(43) Two-stage hydraulic pump 26 44
(44) 150 micron suction filter
(45) Left and right brakes 19 43
(47) PTO brake
45 19
18 20 47 45
MA-09-04047A
Fig. 5

Contents
Contents
D . Layout of main components of

Mechanical reverse shuttle
Speedshift circuit
Parts list (Fig. 6)
(15) Lift control valve
(21) Auxiliary spool valves
(22) Lift rams
(41) Trailer brake valve (spool valve)
(42) High pressure safety valve
(46) Trailer power take-off
(49) Valve 1,5 bar
(50) Pressure load clutch master cylinder 50
(61) Speedshift unit
(62) Speedshift valve
Legend 52
High pressure
Low pressure
Trumpet housing 30
Suction
Return
Brakes
Steering
15
41
49
22 21 46 22 42
MA-09-04048A
Fig. 6

Contents
(63) Front PTO solenoid valve

E . High flow rate, high pressure F . Diagram of mechanical reverse (64) Clutch release bearing
circuit shuttle Speedshift (65) Clutch master cylinder with hydraulic power
(66) No-return valve (clutch control)
Reminder (Fig. 7) (67) accumulator
The second stage of the pump supplies, in the Parts list
following order:
(1) Front differential lock
- the trailer brake spool valve, which is priority (if
(2) Steering ram
fitted);
(3) Pressure take-off (approximately 5 bar)
- the auxiliary spool valves;
(4) Orbitrol hydrostatic spool valve
- the lift control valve.
(5) Front clutch (power shuttle)
The oil not used by the trailer brake spool valve feeds (6) Rear clutch (power shuttle)
the auxiliary spool valves fitted to the rear of the lift
(8) Speedshift unit
cover.
(9) Gearbox
Starting at the auxiliary spool valves, a line supplies the
(10) 1.5 bar valve
lift control spool valve located on the left-hand side
(11) Temperature switch
cover.
(12) Hare / Tortoise unit
The excess flow rate from the spool valves returns to
(13) PTO clutch
the pump suction pipe via a restrictor (16) (Fig. 5)
without passing through the 150 micron filter. (14) Pump suction pipe
(15) Lift control spool valve
A safety valve, calibrated at 200 bar, is fitted in the deli-
very channel on the right-hand cover to protect the (16) Restrictor
high pressure circuit. (18) 4WD clutch
The hydraulic unit of the suspended front axle (if fitted) (19) Brake lubricating pipes
is also connected to the high pressure circuit. It (20) Rear differential lock
supplies the control ram via a valve fitted to the (21) Auxiliary spool valves
right-hand hydraulic cover. A pressure relief valve fitted (22) Lift rams
on the selector cover controls overpressure. (23) Oil cooler
(25) Tank (excluding MERITOR master cylinders)
(26) Connector to assist brake bleeding
(31) Clutch unit (reverse shuttle)
(32) Accumulator
(33) 60 micron filter
(34) Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve
(35) Differential lock solenoid valve
(37) PTO brake solenoid valve
(39) 15 micron filters
(43) Two-stage hydraulic pump
(45) Left and right brakes
(47) PTO brake
(48) Valve (reverse shuttle, reverse clutch, opening at
13 bar)
(49) 1,5 bar valve
(50) Left-hand hydraulic cover
Contents
Description of circuit : Mechanical reverse shuttle Speedshift
Fig. 7

Contents
reverse shuttle (Fig. 8) (63) Front PTO solenoid valve

G . Diagram of Power shuttle
Lubricate Speedshift
(5) To lubricate of front clutch
(6) To lubricate of rear clutch (Fig. 9)
(7) Lubricate pump Parts list
(17) Suction strainer
(27) diagnostic port (1) Front differential lock
(49) 1,5 bar valve (2) Steering ram
(3) Pressure take-off (approximately 5 bar)
(4) Orbitrol hydrostatic spool valve
(5) Front clutch (power shuttle)
(6) Rear clutch (power shuttle)
49 27
(8) Speedshift unit
(9) Gearbox
6
(10) 1.5 bar valve
1,5b (11) Temperature switch
5 (12) Hare / Tortoise unit
(13) PTO clutch
9,5cc (14) Pump suction pipe
7 (15) Lift control spool valve
250>75 (16) Restrictor
(18) 4WD clutch
17 (19) Brake lubricating pipes
(20) Rear differential lock
MA-09-05141A
(21) Auxiliary spool valves
Fig. 8 (22) Lift rams
(23) Oil cooler
(25) Tank (excluding MERITOR master cylinders)
(26) Connector to assist brake bleeding
(31) Clutch unit (reverse shuttle)
(32) Accumulator
(33) 60 micron filter
(35) Differential lock solenoid valve
(37) PTO brake solenoid valve
(39) 15 micron filters
(43) Two-stage hydraulic pump
(45) Left and right brakes
(47) PTO brake
(48) Valve (reverse shuttle, reverse clutch, opening at
13 bar)
(49) 1,5 bar valve
(50) Left-hand hydraulic cover
Contents
Description of circuit : Power shuttle and Speedshift
Fig. 9

Contents
Contents
Right-hand cover – 57 l/min Open Centre
09B01 - Right-hand cover – 57 l/min Open Centre
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Identification of channels and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
C . Removing and refitting the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
D . Disassembling and reassembling the high pressure valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
E . Disassembling and reassembling the cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
F . Removing and refitting the pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
G . Disassembling and reassembling the pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
H . Adjusting the engine speed sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.b 09B01.1

Contents
09B01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.b
Contents
A . General
The right-hand cover is fitted to the rear axle housing
and has two main functions:
- it supports numerous hydraulic system components
- it incorporates various suction and cooling channels
of the high and low flow circuits (high and low pres-
sure).
On its internal face, the cover contains:

- two-stage hydraulic pump and its drive pinion
- suction pipe
- inlet manifold
- left-hand cover transfer pipe.
On its external faces, the cover is fitted with:

- the four or five control solenoid valves of the low
pressure functions (depending on option).
NOTE: There is a diode in the solenoid of the PTO brake

solenoid valve.
The PTO clutch is controlled by a on/off solenoid valve.
- safety valve in the high pressure circuit

- valve for the suspended front axle (if fitted).
- trailer brake valve (if fitted) or a closing plate (depen-
ding on option)
- three “diagnostics” connectors
- strainer
- support and main 15 micron filter(s).
- filter switch
- engine speed sensor.

Contents
Parts list
(1) Cover
(2) Screw
(3) High pressure (high flow rate) valve
(4) Screw
(5) Low pressure 17 bar diagnostics connector
(7) On/off solenoid valve (PTO clutch)
(8) to (10)
Solenoid valves: PTO brake, front and rear diffe-
rential lock, 4WD
(13) Support
(14) Filters
(15) 15 micron filter elements
(16) Engine speed sensor
(17) Low flow rate diagnostics connector
(18) Strainer
(19) Filter switch
(20) High flow rate, high pressure diagnostics
connector
(21) Locating pins
(22) O’ring
(23) O’ring
(24) Seal
(25) Transfer pipe
(26) O’rings
(27) Nut
(28) Washer
(29) Pinion
(30) Key
(31) Screw
(32) Hydraulic pump
(33) Cotter pin
(37) Deflector
(38) Suction pipe
(39) Seal
(40) Inlet manifold
(41) O’rings
(42) Pipe
(43) Threaded end-piece
(44) Seal
Contents
External overall view
Fig. 1

Contents
Internal overall view
Fig. 2
Contents
Exploded view
Fig. 3

Contents
B . Identification of channels and

ports
On the cover (1) (Fig. 6)
A Channel to auxiliary spool valves
B Port to front and rear differential locks (if fitted)
C 17 bar pressure inlet from left-hand hydraulic
cover
D Low flow rate channel to main filters (15 microns)
and Orbitrol steering unit
E Port to 4WD clutch port (if fitted)
F Suction
G Oil outlet to pump via strainer
H Port for filter switch
I Continuity port towards auxiliary spool valves
J High pressure port, pump outlet Fig. 4
K Port to PTO brake
L Port to PTO clutch
On the solenoid valves
ON - OFF solenoid valves (8 to 11) (Fig. 4).
NOTE: Only the solenoid valve (8) (PTO brake) has a

diode (+/-).
A Supply ports to pressurised parts

P 17 bar low pressure inlet
R Port to return line
On the high pressure, low flow rate valve

(3) (Fig. 5)
P 200 bar high pressure inlet Fig. 5
R Port to return line
Contents
Low flow rate circuit Return
High flow rate circuit Suction
Fig. 6

Contents
9. If the tractor is fitted with a trailer braking mecha-

C . Removing and refitting the cover nism, remove the spool valve.
10. Disconnect and block:
Preliminary operations - the hose (1) to the auxiliary circuit
1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the left rear wheel. - the rear differential lock tube (2) and the hose (8)
2. Apply the parking brake. from the front differential lock control (if fitted)
3. Chock between the frame and the front axle - the 4WD clutch supply pipe (10) for tractors
(optional). fitted with this option
4. Partially bleed the rear axle housing. - the PTO brake supply pipe (3).
5. Take off the wheel concerned. Position an axle - the Orbitrol spool valve supply pipe (9) via the 15
stand. micron filter(s) (14)
- the 17 bar hydraulic cover supply pipe.
Removal (Fig. 7) 11. Disconnect the harness of the engine speed
sensor (16) and filter switch (19) (Fig. 7).
6. Disconnect the clogging indicator harness (12).
7. Remove the 15 micron filter(s) (14) and the support
(depending on option).
8. Remove the strainer (18) to access the partially
hidden screw (4).
1 2 3 16
19
18 10 9 14 8 12
Fig. 7
MA-09-00026A
Contents
12. Disconnect the solenoid valves, marking their

connections.
Note: The function of each solenoid valve is
moulded on the external face of the hydraulic
cover casing.
The cover is fitted with two different types of sole-
noid valves.
The solenoid valve (8) (Fig. 1) of the PTO brake has
a solenoid valve with a diode and is represented by
the following symbol (+/-).
13. Take out the screws (4) and remove the cover.
14. After removing the cover, if necessary remove
from the housing the transfer pipe (25) (Fig. 8),
ensuring hydraulic continuity with the pump mani-
fold.
Fig. 8
Refitting
15. Clean the mating faces of the housing and the
cover.
16. Check for the presence of the two locating pins (1)
and rivets at the ends of the channels on the cover
(Fig. 6 and Fig. 8).
17. Fit new seals:
- on the Hare / Tortoise channels (2) (Fig. 9)
- on the power take-off clutch channel (3) (Fig. 9).
18. Fit and position the suction pipe (38) (Fig. 10), with
its notch along the axis of the pin. Put in place seal
(39).
19. Screw two locally made guide pins into opposing
holes on the housing.
20. Fit the transfer tube (if removed), previously chec-
king that seals are in a good condition.
21. Smear the mating faces of the cover with a sealing Fig. 9
product (Loctite 510 or equivalent) taking care not
to block the hydraulic ports of the Hare / Tortoise
mechanism.
22. Refit the cover. Take out the guide studs. Fit and
tighten the screws (4) (Fig. 7) to a torque of 72 -96
Nm.
23. Reconnect (according to the markings made):
- solenoid valves
- filter switch
- engine speed sensor.
Fig. 10

Contents
24. Attach the electrical harnesses using a cable clip.

25. Reconnect the pipes and hose.
26. Refit the trailer braking spool valve (if fitted - see
chapter 9).
27. Check the condition of the strainer seal (18) and
lubricate it. Refit the strainer and tighten it an addi-
tional quarter turn after it contacts with the seal.
28. Refit the 15 micron filter(s) and the support.
Reconnect the clogging indicator.
Final operations
29. Lift the tractor. Refit the wheel.
Take out the stand and tighten the nuts
(see chapter 6).
Remove the chocks.
30. Top up the transmission oil level of the rear axle
and check it using the gauge located to the rear of
the centre housing.
31. Check the operation of the electrical circuits, the
low pressure switch, the solenoid valves, the filter
switch and the filter clogging indicator.
32. If the pump has been replaced, or if the disas-
sembly of one or several hydraulic component(s)
was necessary, check the hydraulic circuit by
carrying out the relevant tests (voir chapter 9).
33. Check the tightness of the cover mating face, the
strainer and the hydraulic unions.
Contents

the high pressure valve
Operation (Fig. 5)
If pressure "P" rises above 200 bar ± 5 bar, the spring
(4) is compressed, opening the valve (7) to allow oil to
pass into the housing via port R.
Preliminary operation
If necessary, take off the right-hand side rear wheel.
Position a safety stand.

34. Unscrew the plug (1). Recover the shims (2) and
take out the spring (4). Fig. 11
35. Remove the O’ring (5), extract the body (6) with
the valve (7) and the washer (8) from the right-hand
cover.
NOTE: The ball (9) is crimped in the body of the
valve.
Reassembly (Fig. 11)

36. Check that the valve (7) slides freely in the valve
body (6).
37. Place the washer (8), fit the valve body (6) with the
valve (7) into the cover. Position the O’ring (5).
38. Fit the spring (4), the shims (2) and tighten the plug
(1) to a torque of 50 - 60 Nm.
Final operation
Refit the wheel (if removed). Tighten nuts (see chapter
6).

Contents
On the external face (Fig. 1)

57. Refit the high pressure valve (3). See tightening
the cover torque in § D.
58. Refit the diagnostics connectors and the plate
Disassembly cited in operation 45, if it was removed.
39. Take off the cover (see § C). 59. Refit the plugs and hydraulic unions.
40. Place the cover in a vice fitted with plastic jaws. 60. Refit and adjust the engine speed sensor (see § H).
61. Refit the switch (19), having lightly smeared the
On the external face (Fig. 1) sensor thread with Loctite 542 or equivalent.
41. Mark the locations and types of solenoid valves (7) 62. Refit the solenoid valves according to the type and
to (11) and remove them. locations marked during disassembly.
42. Note the position of the switch (19) and remove it. REMARK: The flanged solenoid valves are not
43. Remove the engine speed sensor. screwed onto their support. They are only pushed
into their housing and held on the cover by a
44. Remove the hydraulic unions and plugs (depending flange.
on version).
Tightening torque
45. Remove the diagnostics connectors and if neces-
sary the plate replacing the brake spool valve Solenoid (7) nut: 1.7 -2.8 Nm.
(tractor with no trailer brake). IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the maximum tole-
46. Take off the high pressure valve (3). rance value.
63. Refit the cover (see § C).
On the internal face (Fig. 2)
47. Take out the screws (31) and remove the inlet
manifold (40), seal (24) and pipe (42). Remove
seals (41).
Removing the drive pinion

48. Unscrew nut (27). Take off washer (28), pinion (29)
and key (30).
49. Take off the pump (see § F).
Reassembly
50. Clean the cover mating faces.
51. Check that no channels (low and high flow rate) are
blocked. Check for the presence of the rivets ensu-
ring oil tightness at the end of each channel.
On the internal face (Fig. 2)

52. Refit the pump (see § F).
Refitting the drive pinion

53. Position the key (30). Fit the pinion (29) on the shaft
while ensuring that the key is correctly engaged.
Fit washer (28).
54. Smear the nut (27) with Loctite 242 or equivalent
and tighten to a torque of 50 - 60 Nm.
55. Replace the O'rings (41) on the pipe (42).
56. Refit the seal (24), the pipe and the inlet manifold
(40). Refit and tighten the screws (31) to 1.2 – 1.6
Nm.
Contents
F . Removing and refitting the pump

Removal (Fig. 12)
64. Remove and disassemble the cover (see § C and
E).
65. Take out the screws (2) and disengage and remove
the pump (32). Remove the O'rings (22) (23).
NOTE: The locating pins (21) are force fitted into the
cover.
Refitting
66. Clean the components, replace any found to be
defective. Check that none of the channels in the
cover are obstructed.
67. Fit the locating pins (21) (if necessary) to the cover Fig. 12
(Fig. 13).
68. On the cover, fit new O’rings (22) (23) in the
recesses of the high and low flow rate channels
(Fig. 13).
69. Inside the cover, apply a bead C of Loctite 574 or
equivalent around the four pump fixing screw
holes (Fig. 13).
70. Refit the pump on the locating pins (Fig. 12).
71. Lightly smear screws (2) with Loctite 221 or its
equivalent (Fig. 12) and tighten them to a torque of
10 -12 Nm.
72. Reassemble and refit the cover (see § E and C).
Fig. 13

Contents
Exploded view of the pump
Fig. 14
Contents
G . Disassembling and reassembling

the pump
73. Remove and disassemble the cover (see § C and
E).

74. Clamp the pump in a vice (Fig. 15).
75. Using paint, mark the positioning of: pump stages,
flange and plates.
76. Take out the screws (2) (4).
77. Remove the closing plate (1).
78. Remove the composite seal (3) and seal (38). Split
the low flow rate stage (37) from the flange (14).
79. Take out the stage and the pinion / bearings Fig. 15
assembly (7).
80. Remove the pinions (8) (9) from the bearing
assemblies (5) (11).
Pair the bearing assemblies.
NOTA: Each bearing is linked by a locating pin P
(Fig. 16).
81. Remove the composite seal (12) and seal (13).
82. Take off the flange (14), catchdog (15) and seal
(16).
83. Loosen and remove screws (36).
84. Take off the flange (35).
85. Remove the composite seal (33) and seal (34).
86. Split the high flow rate stage (32) from the flange
(21).
87. Take out the bearing / pinion assembly.
88. Remove the pinions (28) (29) from the bearing
assemblies (27) (31).
Pair the bearing assemblies. Fig. 16
89. Remove the composite seal (23).
90. Remove seal (22).
91. Remove circlip (19) and drive out the bush (20).
Fig. 17

Contents
Reassembly (Fig. 14)

defective parts.
IMPORTANT: During reassembly, the bush (20) and
the seals must be systematically replaced.
93. Insert the bush (20) in the flange (21) using a
suitable fixture and fit and correctly position the
circlip (19).
94. Fit the bearing assembly (27) (without recess),
centred by the pin (24), in the high flow rate stage
(32). Turn lubricating grooves G towards inlet port
O and groove R of the composite seal (23) towards
the flange (21) (Fig. 18).
NOTA: The pump comprises four bearing assem-
blies. The intermediary bearings (11) (31) possess
a recess (E) (Fig. 17) to allow oil to pass to the low
flow rate stage (37). Fig. 18
95. Place pinions (28) (29) of the high flow rate stage in
the bearing assembly (27).
REMARK: The high flow rate pinions are larger.
96. Position the composite seal (23) and seal (22)
(Fig. 20).
97. Assemble the high flow rate stage (23) on the
flange (21) according to the marks made during
disassembly.
98. Fit the bearing assembly (31) (with recess),
centred by the pin (30), in the high flow rate stage
(32). Turn lubricating grooves G and recess E
towards inlet port O, and groove R of the compo-
site seal (33) upwards (Fig. 19).
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
Contents
99. Position the composite seal (33) and seal (34).

Assemble the flange (35) on the high flow rate
stage (32) (Fig. 21) according to the marks made
during disassembly.
100.Centre the flange (35). Tighten the screws (36) to:
40 - 47 Nm.
101.Refit the catchdog (15) on the flat of the driving
pinion (28). Position the seal (16).
102.Assemble the flange (14) according to the marks
made before disassembly.
103.Fit the bearing assembly (11) (with recess),
centred by the pin (10), in the low flow rate stage
(37). Turn lubricating grooves G and recess E
towards inlet port O, and groove R of the compo-
site seal (12) towards the flange (Fig. 22).
104.Position the composite seal (12) and seal (13)
(Fig. 22). Fig. 21
105.Assemble the low flow rate stage (37) on the
flange (14) according to the marks made during
disassembly.
106.Place the pinions (8) (9) in the low flow rate stage
while ensuring that the flat of the drive pinion (9) is
correctly positioned in the catchdog (15).
107.Fit the bearing assembly (5) (without recess),
centred by the pin (6), in the low flow rate stage
(37). Turn lubricating grooves G towards inlet port
O and groove R of the composite seal (3) towards
the closing plate (1) (Fig. 23).
Fig. 22
Fig. 23

Contents
108.Position the composite seal (3) and seal (38)

(Fig. 24).
109.Centre the low flow rate stage (37) and assemble
the closing plate (1) according to the marks made
during disassembly.
110.Tighten screws (2) (4) to a torque of 40 - 47 Nm.
111.Manually check for the free rotation of the pump.
112.Reassemble and refit the cover (see § E and C).
H . Adjusting the engine speed

sensor
113.Fit the engine speed sensor (16), having lightly
smeared the threads with Loctite 577 or equivalent
(Fig. 25).
114.Screw the sensor fully home without forcing it until Fig. 24
it makes contact with the pump pinion (29). Then
unscrew it three quarters of a turn so as to obtain
a gap of approximately 1mm between the sensor
and the pump pinion.
Tighten the nut (1) to a torque of 5 - 7 Nm.
Fig. 25
Contents
Left-hand cover - 57 l/min Open Centre
09C01 - Left-hand cover - 57 l/min Open Centre
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removing - Refitting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Contents
Contents
A . General
The left-hand cover fitted to the centre housing acts as
a support to the lift spool valve.
On its external face, the cover is fitted with various

channels:
- low pressure to the right-hand cover
- cooler and lubrication, to the gearbox
- high pressure to lift control system.
On its internal face, a reducer (1) maintains a pressure

of approximately 5 bar to lubricate the braking mecha-
nism in the trumpet housings (Fig. 1).
A version without hydraulic lift is available. In this case,

a plate replaces the lift spool valve.
Fig. 1

Contents
B . Removing - Refitting
1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the front wheels.
Take off the rear wheel concerned. Position a
safety stand.
2. Partially bleed the rear axle housing.
3. Detach the fuel tank from the gearbox or, if neces-
sary, remove it after draining.
Removal (Fig. 2)
4. Mark and disconnect the harnesses:
- of the lift (1) and lower (2) solenoid valves,
- of the low pressure switch (17 bar) (12),
- of the temperature switch (7).
5. Mark, disconnect and block:
- the hose (15) from the steering spool valve (Orbi-
trol),
- the lubricating hose (14) to the cooler (hot oil),
- the hose (3) from the lift spool valve,
- the lift rams supply pipes (4),
- the lubricating pipe (13) to the gearbox (cold oil),
- the pipe (17 bar) (10) to the right-hand cover.
6. Disconnect the following controls:
- handbrake,
- GSPTO (8) (if fitted).
7. Disconnect the pipe (11) to the trumpet housing
lubrication (all types). Take out the screws (5).
Remove the support (6), support (9) (if mounted)
(Fig. 3) and the cover.
8. If necessary, remove the transfer pipe (1) (Fig. 4).
Fig. 2
Contents
Preparing for refitting

9. Clean the mating faces of the housing and the
cover.
10. Check that the O’rings of the transfer pipe (11) are
not damaged and refit it on the right-hand cover
(Fig. 4).
11. Lightly smear the mating face of the housing with
a sealing product (Loctite 510 or equivalent).
12. Screw two locally made guide studs “G” into
opposing holes on the housing (Fig. 4).
Refitting
13. Refit the cover.
14. Fit the handbrake control support (6) and the
proportional PTO support (9) (if fitted) (Fig. 3). Take
out the guide studs. Fit and tighten the screws (5) Fig. 3
15. Reconnect the pipes, hoses and harnesses
removed previously, according to their marks.
16. Attach the harnesses using one or more clip retai-
ners.
IMPORTANT : Check that they can move freely and
easily.
17. Use cables to connect the controls.
18. Check the control setting for:
- handbrake,
- GSPTO (if fitted).
Final operations
19. Attach or refit the fuel tank (see operation 2).
20. Refit the wheel. Remove the axle stand and trolley
jack. Tighten nuts (see chapter 6).
21. Top up the oil level in the rear axle and check it on Fig. 4
the gauge located at the rear of the centre housing.
23. Check the operation of the lifting system and the
oil tightness of the mating face, cover and
hydraulic unions.

Contents
Contents
Trailer braking - Open centre
09D01 - Trailer braking - Open centre
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removing and refitting the brake spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Operation, trailer brakes released and partial braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
D . Partial and maximum trailer braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
E . Version without trailer braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.b 09D01.1

Contents
09D01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.b
Contents
as to obtain progressive tractor / trailer braking that is

A . General proportional to the force applied to the pedal. The
trailer brake only operates if the two brake pedals are
5400 series tractors equipped with an open centre latched.
hydraulic circuit can be fitted with a trailer braking
mechanism comprised of:
- a valve unit (6) (Fig. 1) (spool valve) fitted on the
Identification of pipes, hoses and ports
right-hand side hydraulic cover, (Fig. 1)
- a pipe linking the spool valve to a connector (1) Legend
(Fig. 1) located at the rear of the tractor,
B : Supply to the trailer brake connector
- a pilot flow pipe connected to the master cylinders.
N : Continuity to spool valves (auxiliary and lift control
spool valves)
The valve receives its priority supply from the high P : Pressure
pressure circuit. The oil not used for braking the trailer R : Return to housing
is directed to the spool valves (auxiliary and lift control Y Pilot flow from tractor braking unit (master cylin-
spool valves). ders)
The valve regulates the flow rate and pressure to the
trailer brakes. It is controlled by the tractor braking
circuit pressure, generated by the master cylinders, so
Fig. 1

Contents
Description of the braking valve (Fig. 2)

Flow control valve (1) ensures control of the Qx flow
rate and adjusts the hydraulic flow, transmitting the
pressure to the trailer brakes (Fig. 5 - Fig. 6, Fig. 8 and
Fig. 9).
Control spool assembly (2) ensures the control of the

flow control valve and adjusts the pressure in the
trailer brakes
Non-return valve (3) stops the return of oil from brake

pipe B to port N (Fig. 5 to Fig. 10)
Pressure relief-valve (4) with loaded springs (8)

limits brake pressure
Pilot flow housing (5) with piston (6) and bleed screw
(7), controls the trailer brake valve via the tractor
braking system.
Contents
2
7
3 6
5
4
1
MA-09-05053A
Fig. 2

Contents
Removal (Fig. 3)
B . Removing and refitting the brake
spool valve 2. Disconnect and block:
- the hose pipe (2) of pilot flow housing (5)
Preliminary operation NOTE : If the removal of the valve does not
concern its replacement, do not disconnect the
1. Immobilise the tractor. Take off the wheel hose (2) (Fig. 3) in order to avoid draining the
concerned. Position a safety stand. system.
- the supply hose (1) from the auxiliary spool valve
and the pipe (4) from the trailer brake connector.
3. Take out the screws (3) and remove the valve (6).
Fig. 3
Contents
Refitting
4. Clean the mating faces of the hydraulic cover and
the valve.
5. Replace the O'rings (1) (2) (Fig. 4).
6. Refit the valve, place and tighten the screws (3) to
a torque of 21 -24 Nm.
7. Reconnect:
- the pipe (4) of the trailer brake connector and the
supply hose (1) from the auxiliary spool valve,
- the hose pipe (2) of the pilot flow housing.
8. If necessary, bleed the main brakes and the trailer
brake, and check the pressure in the trailer brake
mechanism (see chapter 9).
Final operation
9. Refit the wheel. Remove the safety stand. Tighten
the wheel nuts or screws (depending on assembly)
(see chapter 6).
Fig. 4

Contents
f R 2 f R 2 6 5
14
B B
Qx 3
Y Y
N N Qr
13
P 10 P 10
Qp
11 1 9 2 Qk 11 12 1 2
R R
c d e c d e
Y Y
B B
N N
a b a b
10
P P
1 9 1
MA-09-05115A MA-09-05116A
Partial trailer braking:

Trailer brakes released Fig. 5 start of the braking process Fig. 6
R 2
11 5 6
1
MA-09-05056A P N Fig. 7
Contents
C . Operation, trailer brakes released

and partial braking
Trailer brakes released (Fig. 5)
The control channel Y is not under pressure (no action
on brake pedals).
Port B (supply to the trailer brake connector) is linked

to return channel R via the drilled hole f of the control
spool (2).
Flow QP from the pump flows via port P to the flow
control valve (1).
Flow QP - QX is directed towards port N (continuity

towards auxiliary spool valve and lift spool valve).
Partial flow QX (approximately 0.6 l/min) from port P is
directed towards the diaphragm (11), the reducer (9),
the drilled hole (10) and the control spool (2) to join
channel R.
Consequently, the pressure drop produced by the

reducer (9) maintains the flow control valve (1) in open
position a, the position in which it does not ensure a
regulating function.
Partial trailer braking

Start of the braking process (Fig. 6)
The piston (6) of the pilot flow housing (5) is pressure
fed by the tractor braking system (action on the brake
pedals).
The pressure arrives via port Y, the control spool

assembly (2) is then pushed to the left, obstructing the
drilled hole f and cutting off the communication of port
B (towards the trailer brake connector) with the return
channel R, then the link with the drilled hole (10).
The control spool (2) moves from position c to position
e. The QX control flow is cut and the flow control valve
(1) moves to position b (regulating position).
A constant flow QK flows from port P to port B
(towards the trailer brake connector) via the diaphragm
(11), the drilled hole (12), the channel (13) and the
non-return valve (3). The diaphragm (11) has a surface
area calculated in relation to the constant flow rate QK.
The residual flow QR goes via the flow control valve (1)
and is directed to port N (continuity with the auxiliary
spool valve and the lift spool valve).
The channel of port B (towards the trailer brake

connector) is placed under pressure and acts upon the
surface (14) of the control spool (2) against the pres-
sure on piston (6) by the tractor braking system.

Contents
14 R 2 6 5 f R 2 15 8 4 5
Pb Pb
Py Py
B B
3 Qx Qx
N Y N Y
P P
Qp Qp
1 2 1 2
R R
c d e c d e
Y Y
B B
N N
a b a b
P P
1 1
MA-09-05117A MA-09-05118A
Maximum trailer braking:

Partial trailer braking Fig. 8 limited braking pressure Fig. 9
R 2 15 8
1
MA-09-05057A P N Fig. 10
Contents
D . Partial and maximum trailer

braking
Partial trailer braking (Fig. 8)
The pressure Pb in the trailer braking line (pressure
acting on the active surface (14) of control spool (2)) is
in balance with pressure Py (coming from the tractor
braking system) which acts upon piston (6) of the pilot
flow housing (5).
The channel from port B (to the trailer brake connector)

is cut off from the return port R. Consequently, the oil
is trapped in the trailer braking unit. When the pres-
sures are balanced, the control spool (2) is in position
d.
Fig. 11
The flow control valve (1) then moves to position a, an
open position in which it does not ensure a regulating
function. when required by port N (Fig. 11) without causing
significant effect on the trailer brake system, which
has priority on the high flow rate hydraulic circuit.
As when the trailer brakes are released, the flow Qp -
Qx is directed to port N (continuity with the auxiliary
spool valve and the lift spool valve) and the control flow
Qx is directed to return channel R by the control spool
(2).
Maximum trailer braking (Fig. 9)

Limited braking pressure
The flow control valve (1) and the control spool (2) are
in the same switching positions (a and d) as for partial
braking.
The flow rates Qp and Qx are the same as for partial

braking. The maximum allowable braking pressure is
reached (Pb = 150 bar). An increase in the trailer
braking pressure cannot take place, even if the tractor
braking pressure continues to increase.
The pressure relief valve (4) is then pushed to the left.
The springs (8) (15) pre-loaded with the maximum

admissible braking pressure (Pb = 150 bar) for the
trailer, are compressed.
If, due to external conditions, the trailer braking pres-

sure Pb continues to rise, the control spool (2) momen-
tarily opens the communication f between port B
(supply to the trailer brake connector) and the return
channel R.
In all operating positions of the trailer braking valve, the

auxiliary spool valve and the lift spool valve are used

Contents
E . Version without trailer braking

- For this tractor version, the braking valve (spool
valve) is replaced by a cover plate (3) (Fig. 12).
- As with the trailer braking version, the oil tightness

between components is ensured by O’rings (1) (2).
- A test connector (4) also allows to check the high

pressure of the pump.
Fig. 12
Contents
Auxiliary spool valve
09E01 - Auxiliary spool valve
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Layout of channels and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
C . Operating and adjusting the flow divider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
D . Removing and refitting spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
E . 3-position spool valve, SA / DA with spring loaded return to neutral . . . . . . . . . . 14
F . 3-position spool valve, SA / DA with automatic return to neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
G . 3-position SA / DA spool valve with non-return valve and automatic return . . . . 18
H . 4-position DA spool valve, with automatic return to neutral and floating position 20
I . Fitting and adjusting a control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.b 09E01.1

Contents
09E01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.b
Contents
A . General
The Rexroth SM12 auxiliary spool valves are fitted on
the high flow rate circuit. They are fed by oil coming
from the trailer braking valve or the closing plate fitted
in its place (depending on version).
When the spool valves are not activated, the oil is

available for the lift control valve fitted downstream.
The auxiliary spool valves are mounted on a support
which is itself fitted to the rear of the lift cover.
Quick-disconnect couplings are fitted directly on the
spool valve body. To obtain sufficient distance
between couplings, the spool valves are fitted with
blocks serving as spacers. These blocks are also used
to let the oil flow to the next spool.
Characteristics
Functions: Double acting; Single and double acting
(convertible)
These functions are also recognised via the abbrevia-
tions SA and DA.
Positions : Three; Four with one in floating position.
Return to neutral: By spring or by an automatic
system.
Zero leak: With or without.
Each spool valve is activated by a lever in the cab and

it has three phases of travel:
- 35% reduced flow rate;
- 45% progressive increase of flow rate and pressure;
- 20% full flow rate.
The progressive increase of flow rate and pressure

ensures uniform operation of the implements.
This characteristic also allows two spool valves to be
activated simultaneously, the total flow rate being
shared. The flow rate to each quick-disconnect
coupling is proportional to the position of the control
lever.
The spool valve placed against the flow divider is spool
valve No. 1.

Contents
Available sets of spool valves (Fig. 1)

Set A - 2 spool valves
• Spool valve 1 and 2: 3-position, SA / DA with spring 2 1
loaded return to neutral 2 1
Set B - 2 spool valves and flow divider

• Spool valve 1: 3-position, SA / DA with automatic
return to neutral
• Spool valve 2: 4-position, DA with automatic return
to neutral
A B
Set C - 2 spool valves and flow divider

• Spool valve 1: 3-position, SA / DA with automatic 3 2 1
2 1
return to neutral
• Spool valve 2: 3-position, SA / DA and zero leakage
Set D - 3 spool valves and flow divider

• Spool valve 1: 3-position, SA / DA with spring loaded
return to neutral
• Spool valve 2: 3-position, SA / DA with automatic C D
return to neutral and zero leakage
to neutral
4 3 2 1
3 2 1
Set E - 3 spool valves and flow divider

• Spool valve 1: 3-position, SA / DA with automatic
return to neutral
• Spool valve 2 and 3: 4-position, DA with automatic
return to neutral
E MA-09-05032A
F
Set F - 4 spool valves and flow divider Fig. 1
• Spool valve 1: 3-position, SA / DA with spring loaded
return to neutral
• Spool valve 2 and 3: 3-position, SA / DA with auto-
matic return to neutral and zero leakage
to neutral
Contents

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 2)

(1) Inlet unit with flow control valve
(2) Plates with seals
(3) Excess flow rate pipe
(4) Adjustment knob (flow divider)
(5) Single / double acting (SA / DA) change-over
screw
(6) Spool valves (all versions)
(7) Intermediate block (excess flow rate)
(8) Set (2, 3 or 4 spool valves)
(9) Intermediate block
(10) Support
(11) End plate (connection with lift control valve)
(12) Screw
(13) Plug and seal (provisional return)
(14) Screw
(15) Cap and seal (filling)
(16) Plug and seal (provisional return)
(17) Studs and nuts
(18) Pin
(19) Stirrup
(20) Pin
(21) Support (control cable)
(22) Screw
Contents
Exploded view
3
7
8 2
10
8 2 17
6 4
1
11 3 1
17 6
8
22
3
5
7
2
21
6
20 4
3
2 19 10
18 2
6
17
1 17 9
10 3 1
2 1
4
2 6
1 6
2 7
11 11
6 4
2
17
6
16
13
15
12
14
MA-09-04057A
Fig. 2

Contents
B . Layout of channels and ports

Legend (Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5)
A-B Outlets or returns going to or coming from
hydraulic slave device
N Oil connection to lift control valve
P Pressure (HP)
QX Outlet port for excess flow rate
R Return
X Flow rate regulated to 1st spool valve
Vr Outlet port to lift control valve
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Contents
Diagram
A A A
VR N P
B R B B
9
3 3
Q-X
Q-X
X
P
N P
VR R
11 6 6 7 6 1
MA-09-05036A
Fig. 5

Contents
C . Operating and adjusting the flow

divider F
ile
ut
Function of the flow divider ˚
0
30
4
For operations requiring low oil flow rate, the flow
divider allows to vary supply to the hydraulic slave
device via a knob (4) used to adjust flow rate between
“maximum stop” and “minimum stop” (Fig. 6). It is
fitted at the inlet of the auxiliary spool valve assembly. Ouverture Fermeture
It is supplied by oil from the high flow rate circuit
maxi
passing through the trailer braking valve or the closing
plate (depending on version).
X P
Operation (Fig. 6)
The oil coming from port (P) is directed to port (X) and Qx
b a
supplies the first spool valve. The flow is regulated
F
according to the position of the knob (4).
Simultaneously, the pressure in channel (P) allows oil
to pass through drilled hole (a) and restrictor (b).
The piston (1) is then moved to the right, allowing oil to
be directed towards port (Qx). The intermediate
block (7) receives the excess flow rate via the pipe (3)
(Fig. 7).
1 4
MA-09-05038A
P
Fig. 6
50 Nm
3
P
7
MA-09-05039A
Fig. 7
Contents
Adjustment (Fig. 8)
1. Remove the stop screw (6), the locknut (1) and the 7 5 3 2
washer (2).
2. Unscrew and remove the knob (4).
3. Without forcing the screw (3), tighten it until the
valve (7) abuts against its seat.
4. Place the knob (4) in contact with the sleeve (5).
5. Unscrew the knob two full turns.
6. Fit and tighten the stop screw (6) to a torque of
20 Nm. 1
7. Turn the knob to its closed position (Fig. 6).
4
8. Fit washer (2) and tighten the locknut (1) to a
6
MA-09-05037A Fig. 8

Contents
D . Removing and refitting spool

valves
Auxiliary spool valves can be removed and refitted
directly on the tractor by removing each unit and
leaving only the main support fitted to the lift cover (Fig. 3).
9. Remove unit(s) close to the auxiliary spool valves
which might obstruct access to them.
(Example: hydraulic valve for automatic hook).
10. Disconnect:
- the supply hose (3) from the right-hand hydraulic
cover (Fig. 9);
- the outlet hose (2) to the lift control spool valve
(Fig. 9).
11. Separate the control cables of the supports and
spool valves.
Removal
12. Remove the locknuts (1) located at the end of the
spool valve set (Fig. 9).
13. Release and remove each hydraulic component
after visually noting its position.
IMPORTANT: Do not discard or lose plates and seals.
NOTE: The spool valves are fitted either side of the
main support.
14. If necessary (Fig. 10):
- Remove quick-disconnect couplings (A) and (B).
- Remove pins (1) and screws (2). Separate the
cable support (3) from the spool valve.
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Contents
Refitting
Refitting operations are not difficult. They therefore
require carrying out the removal operations in reverse
order.
However, during refitting it is necessary to ensure that:
- parts to be assembled are not dirty, corroded,
dented, etc.
- seals are oiled.
The locknuts fitted at the end of the spool valve set
should be tightened to a torque of 30 - 33 Nm.
Final operations
15. Check the correct operation of each spool valve on
the two, three or four positions (depending on
model).
16. Check the pressure on quick-disconnect couplings
(see Hydraulic tests, section 9).

Contents
E . 3-position spool valve, SA / DA

with spring loaded return to neutral
Operation (Fig. 11)
Oil from the high flow rate circuit passes through the
trailer braking valve (3) (if fitted) or closing plate fitted
to the right-hand hydraulic cover and supplies the
various spool valves via the continuity channel (N).
The spool valves are fitted in series in priority over the
linkage.
QX
P X
N P
7 3
MA-09-05043A Fig. 11
Contents
Neutral position (Fig. 12) Single / double acting change-over

Oil is not available from outlets (A) or (B). Oil is directed (Fig. 12)
via the continuity channel (N) to the lift control valve
To obtain the single acting position, unscrew the
and passes directly to the suction manifold of the
valve (4). The outlet (A) then opens into the
pump when the linkage is in neutral position.
channel (R), and the outlet (B) supplies the hydraulic
Channels (N) and (P) are linked in the intermediate slave device.
block (7) (Fig. 7) to supply the subsequent spool
To obtain the double acting position, screw in the
valves.
valve (4).
Inlet - outlet position (Fig. 12)

When the spool (2) is moved upwards or downwards,
the continuity channel is cut, the pressure increases
and raises the valve (1).
The oil is then directed to the internal channels via
grooves located on the spool. Depending on the spool
position, outlets (A) or (B) are supplied.
Simultaneously, the oil returning from the ram is
directed depending on the position of the spool, to
outlets (A) or (B) to reach the return channel (R).
Fig. 12

Contents
F . 3-position spool valve, SA / DA

with automatic return to neutral
Operation
Neutral position
The operating principle of the 3-position single or
double acting spool valve with automatic return to
neutral, is the same as for the previous 3-position SA /
DA spool valve with spring loaded return to neutral.
Inlet - outlet position (Fig. 13)

Operation is identical to the 3-position SA / DA spool
valve with spring loaded return to neutral, with auto-
matic return to neutral as an added feature.
A system placed in the unit (1) locks when the
spool (2) is activated.
The spool returns automatically when the pressure
reaches 150 - 170 bar.
The pressure passes through bores machined in the
spool. It then releases a system comprised of balls and
springs allowing the automatic return of the spool to
neutral.
The unit (1) is joined to channel (R).
NOTE: A residual pressure in the unit (greater
than 2 bar) may cause undue return of the spool to
neutral.
Contents
Fig. 13

Contents
G . 3-position SA / DA spool valve

with non-return valve and auto-
matic return
The operation of this spool valve is identical to those
explained previously.
Operation of the non-return valve (Fig. 14)

When the spool (2) is moved upwards, the oil coming
from channels (N) and (P) is directed to outlet (B) by
lifting the non-return valve (3) which supplies the slave
device.
In the neutral position, the non-return valve ensures

the oil tightness of the circuit.
When the spool is moved upwards, the oil coming
from the channels (N) and (P) lifts the valve (1). It is
then directed to an internal channel via grooves
machined on the spool, and supplies the slave device
via the outlet (A).
The movement of the spool shifts the pushrod (4). This
raises the ball, causing a drop in pressure on the slave
device side, which allows the valve (3) to rise from its
seat and oil to flow through to the channel (R).
IMPORTANT: During disassembly of the spool (2), it is
essential to first disassemble the non-return valve (3)
and pushrod (4).
Contents
Fig. 14

Contents
H . 4-position DA spool valve, with

automatic return to neutral and floa-
ting position
Operation (Fig. 15)
When the spool (2) is moved upwards or downwards,
the same positions are obtained as in the previous
spool valves.
The 4-position DA spool valve with automatic return to
neutral and floating position has an added feature: a
floating position (F) when the spool has moved its
maximum distance out of the automatic return to
neutral position (Fig. 16).
In this position (F), the outlet channels (A) and (B) open
into the return channel (R). The oil then circulates N A
freely.
R P
N B
MA-09-05046A
Fig. 15
Contents
N N
VR
MA-09-05047A B
Fig. 16

Contents
I . Fitting and adjusting a control

cable
Cab side
Special points
• The pins (2) should be fitted with the threads slightly
smeared with loctite 241 or equivalent. (Fig. 17).
• The figures in the dark circles 1 to 3 show the
assembly order of the levels which control the spool
valves.
• The fitting of a fourth control level is provided for on
the cab consol. It must be placed to the left of lever
1 (viewed from the driver’s seat)
• The friction washers (1) should be smeared with
molybdenum disulphide grease before fitting.
• The nuts (3) must be tightened so oas to obtain a
slight resistence for the levers during operation.
On base plate (6) and levers ()

NOTE: Depending on the type of spool valve, the
clevis (4) may be fitted on link "A" or "B".
Fitting A : Normal spool valves
Fitting B : Spool valves with floating position.
17. Pass the cable through the flange (9) located at the
rear right of the cab and then through the yoke (8).
NOTE: The hole in yoke (8) is eccentric (Fig. 17). To
lift a control for a spool valve with floating position,
the hole must be at the top as to correctly align the
cable and its fastenning.
18. Scew the clevis (4) flush with the threaded part of
the cable (7) and fit it on link "A" or "B" of lever
concerned. Fit the clip (5).
19. Tighten the nut on the clevis and check that the
Fig. 17
cable is not constrained in any way.
Contents
Spool valve side (Fig. 19)

Special points (Fig. 18)
• If a stirrup (4) needs to be replaced, remove and
replace it without turning the spool (2) of the spool
valve.
• When assembling, the pins (3) should be lightly
smeared with molybdenum disulfide or AS767
grease or equivalent.
20. Screw the clevis (1) to the threaded part of the

cable (2).
21. Attach the clevis to the stirrup (4) using the
hook (3). Tighten nut.
22. Adjust the stop (5) with the nut (6).
23. Tighten nut (7) and check that the cable is not
constrained in any way. Fig. 18
Check
24. Start the tractor engine. Using the relevant
lever (2) (Fig. 17), check that the three or four posi-
tions of the spool valve (depending on model)
engage correctly.
In case of faulty operation, separate the spool
valve control and check the movement of the
spool. If it operates correctly, check the cable
adjustment again.
Fig. 19

Contents
Contents
Lift control spool valve - Open Centre
09F01 - Lift control spool valve - Open Centre
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Layout of components and identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Neutral position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
D . Lifting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
E . Lowering position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
F . Shock valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
G . Removing and refitting the spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Contents
Contents
A . General
The BOSCH ELC (EHR5) lift control spool valve is fitted
to 5400 tractors equipped with an open centre
hydraulic system.
It is fitted to the left-hand hydraulic cover of the centre
housing (Fig. 1).
It regulates the flow rate of oil to and from the lift rams,
according to the signals that it receives from the elec-
tronic linkage calculator (ELC).
It comprises a series of spools and valves, most of
which cannot be repaired as separate parts.
Fig. 1

Contents
Identification of ports:
B . Layout of components and iden- N Continuity channel
tification of ports P: Pressure
R, R1 Return to housing
Layout of components
V Port to lift rams
The BOSCH ELC (EHR5) hydraulic spool valve
comprises two parts:
Electric part
(7) Lowering solenoid valve
Hydraulic part
(8) Lifting solenoid valve
(1) Non-return valve
(2) Lifting spool valve
(3) Lowering spool vlave
(4) Flow rate control spool
(5) Shock valve (200 to 210 bar)
(6) Flow control spool spring
(9) Lifting spool spring
(10) Lowering spool spring
(11) Restrictor
(12) Lift control spool valve
Fig. 2
Contents
Determining the hydraulic or electric cause

of a problem
To determine whether a problem is due to a hydraulic
or electric cause, operate the push-buttons at the end
of the solenoid valves (Fig. 3). This allows to manually
control solenoid valve movement.
Fig. 3

Contents
C . Neutral position
When the engine is stopped (Fig. 4):
- the lift control spool valve (12) is in neutral position;
- the lifting and lowering solenoid valve spools (2) and
(3) are held in position by their respective springs;
- the flow rate control spool (4) is held down by its
own spring.
Contents
13
2
P
12
MA-09-05022A
Fig. 4

Contents
When the engine is running (Fig. 5):

The hydraulic pump supplies the lift control spool
valve (12) via the trailer braking spool valve (13) (if
fitted) and the auxiliary spool valves.
The pressure arriving from the port (P) moves the flow
rate control spool (4) upwards, thus allowing the oil to
flow into the continuity channel (N) and the hydraulic
pump via the transfer pipe.
NOTE: The continuity channel (N) connects the oil
flowing in the Open Centre system and also controls
the hydraulic flow of brake lubricant via a restrictor and
a valve.
Legend (Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Fig. 7, Fig. 9)

High pressure
Return
Suction
Contents
13
4 N
P
12
MA-09-05023A
Fig. 5

Contents
D . Lifting position
The solenoid valve (8) is activated to lift the drawbars
(Fig. 6). The lifting spool (2) is moved downwards, thus
directing the main flow to the non-return valve (1). As
soon as the pressure acting on the valve exceeds the
pressure in the rams, the valve opens and the flow
enters the port (V) to raise the hitch.
When the hitch is in the required position, the tractor
electronic system stops the supply to the solenoid
valve (8).
As a result:
- the non-return valve closes;
- the lifting spool valve is positioned on the return
channel R1;
- the flow rate control spool (4) is fixed in raised posi-
tion, allowing the oil to flow again in the continuity
channel N.
Contents
13
1 2 8 4
P N
R1
MA-09-05024A
Fig. 6

Contents
E . Lowering position
The solenoid valve (7) is activated to lower the draw-
bars (Fig. 7).
The lowering spool (3) is moved downwards. Its posi-
tion allows oil to return from the rams via the port (V)
to the return R1.
NOTE: The lowering phase has no effect on the flow
rate control spool (4). The continuity flow rate N is thus
directed to the pump via the transfer pipe.
Contents
13
4
N
P
R1
MA-09-05027A
Fig. 7

Contents
F . Shock valve
Location
The shock valve (5) is housed at the front bottom of
the left-hand hydraulic cover, (Fig. 8).
Function
It directs oil from the rams to the return in case of over-
pressure in the circuit (Fig. 9).
Example: Hitch bounces when transporting an imple-
ment.
Characteristics
The shock valve is calibrated at 200 to 210 bar.
Fig. 8
Contents
13
N
P
MA-09-05028A
Fig. 9

Contents
G . Removing and refitting the spool

valve
1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the front wheels.
Take off the rear wheel concerned.
2. Position a safety stand.
3. Detach the fuel tank from the gearbox or, if neces-
sary, remove it after draining.
Removal
4. Identify then disconnect the wiring harnesses from
the lifting (8) and lowering (7) solenoid valves
(Fig. 10).
NOTE: The lowering solenoid valve is turned Fig. 10
towards the front of the tractor.
5. Mark, disconnect and block (Fig. 11):
- the hose (1) from the auxiliary spool valves;
- the supply or return pipe (2) from the lift rams.
6. Extract the screws (1) and remove the lift control
spool valve (12) without losing the O’rings (2) and
(3) (Fig. 12).
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
Contents
Preparing for refitting

7. Clean the mating faces of the cover and lift control
spool valve.
8. Replace the O’rings (if necessary).
Refitting
9. Refit the spool valve.
10. Fit and tighten the screws to a torque of 36 -
46 Nm.
11. Reconnect:
- the pipes and hoses (see operation 5);
- the solenoid valve harnesses (see operation 4).
12. Attach the harnesses using one or more clip
retainers, if necessary.
Final operations
13. Attach or refit the fuel tank (see operation 3).
14. Refit the wheel. Remove the safety stand and
trolley jack (see chapter 6).
16. Check the operation of the lift control system and
the oil tightness of the seals and unions.

Contents
Contents
17 bar - 5 bar and 1.5 bar valves - Open centre
09H01 - 17 bar - 5 bar and 1.5 bar valves - Open centre
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Description of the 17 bar low pressure valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C . Removing - refitting and disassembling - reassembling the 17 bar valve . . . . . . . . 7
D . Adjusting the 17 bar valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
E . Operation of the cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
F . Assembling the 5 bar valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
G . Description of the 1.5 bar lubricating valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
H . Removing - refitting and disassembling - reassembling the 1.5 bar valve . . . . . . . 11

Contents
Contents
A . General
The 17 bar valve (2) (Fig. 1) is screwed onto the
left-hand hydraulic cover. It performs the following
functions:
- it supplies oil and maintains pressure in the 17 bar
low pressure circuit
- it supplies the cooling system (5 bar) and lubricating
system (1.5 bar).
Parts list
(2) 17 bar valve
(3) O’ring
(4) Plug
(5) Spring
(6) Ball
(7) Spool
(8) Shim(s)
(9) Spring
(10) O’ring
(11) Seal
(12) Plug
(13) Valve sleeve
Fig. 1

Contents
Identification of ports (Fig. 2)

G Brake master cylinder booster (excluding Meritor
type)
O Valve supply via the steering spool valve return
(Orbitrol)
P Outlet to low pressure parts
R1 Return (1.5 bar valve)
BV Lubrication to 1.5 bar valve (cold oil)
RR Lubrication - cooling system return
VR Lubrication to cooling system
PDF Lubricating line to rear PTO
Fig. 2
Contents
B . Description of the 17 bar low

pressure valve
Supply (Fig. 3)
As soon as the engine is started, the return oil from the
steering unit (Orbitrol) enters port O and exits by port
P of the left-hand cover; then it is directed towards the
low pressure circuit of the right-hand hydraulic cover in
order to supply:
- power shuttle (if fitted)
- speedshift unit
- changing between Hare / Tortoise range
- 4WD clutch
- front and rear differential locks
- rear PTO brake and clutch
Fig. 3
- front power take off (if fitted).

Contents
Operation (Fig. 4)
A back pressure is generated in the low pressure
circuit, forcing the ball (6) from its seating and thereby
compressing the spring (5). The oil passes into the rear
of the spool (7), creating a pressure which progressi-
vely moves it downwards by compressing the spring
(9) which thrusts against the shims (8).
When one of the low pressure functions is activated,

the momentary drop in pressure returns the ball (6) to
its seating through the action of the spring (5). The oil
contained in the chamber at the front of the plug (4)
flows through a drain port located at the end of the
spool (7).
Leaks return to the housing via port R in the cover
(Fig. 5).
Fig. 4
Identification of components and ports
(Fig. 5)
(1) 17 bar low pressure switch
(2) Plug (provision for outlet).
O Valve supply via the steering spool valve return 1
P Outlet to low pressure parts of the right-hand P
hydraulic cover
R Return port
O
Legend
17 bar low pressure
MA-09-06065A
Fig. 5
Contents
C . Removing - refitting and disas-

sembling - reassembling the 17 bar
valve
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the left-hand
hydraulic cover to carry out work on the valve.
Removal
1. Remove any parts around the valve that may
obstruct work.
2. Remove and separate the valve (2) from the
left-hand hydraulic cover (Fig. 1).
Refitting
3. Check the condition of the O'ring (10) and replace Fig. 6
if necessary.
4. Screw the valve back onto the cover and tighten to
40 - 55 Nm.
NOTE: The valve comprises several hydraulic parts
(spool, springs and ball) which cannot be replaced
separately.

6. Tighten the hexagonal head of the valve in a vice
with protective jaws.
7. Gradually unscrew the plug (12) and discard the
O'ring (11).
8. Recover:
- spring (9),
- shim(s) (8).
9. Gradually unscrew the plug (4) and discard the
O'ring (3).
10. Recover:
- spring (5)
- ball (6).
11. Remove the spool (7) by carefully tapping the shaft
(13) against a wooden shim.

Contents
Reassembly
IMPORTANT: The hydraulic parts must be reassembled
on a clean work surface clear of filings and dirt.
12. Check:
- the condition of the springs and O’rings
- the absence of scratches or seizing on the
moving parts of the valve
- the sliding of the spool in its sleeve
- the cleanliness of the ports.
Conclusion
If the valve is defective, replace it. If not, reassemble it
by carrying out the disassembly operations in reverse
order.
D . Adjusting the 17 bar valve

It is not necessary to remove the left-hand hydraulic
cover to adjust the valve.
When the valve is removed, it can be adjusted inser-
ting shims (8) between the spool (7) and the spring (9).
Contents
E . Operation of the cooling system

The pressure acting on the back of the spool (7)
pushes it towards the bottom of the valve, pressing in
the spring (9) (Fig. 4). It then allows oil to pas to port VR 1
(Fig. 7) and the cooler. When it leaves the cooler, the
oil is directed to the transmission lubricating system 2
via the 1.5 bar valve.
3
5 bar valve
When the oil is cold, the 5 bar valve (1) (2) (3) (Fig. 7)
opens partially. It then allows some oil to pass directly
to port BV of the left-hand cover (Fig. 7), and to supply
the transmission lubricating system, without really
BV
entering the cooler.
Legend
17 bar low pressure
Return to the housing via the cover
VR
MA-09-06067A
Fig. 7

Contents
F . Assembling the 5 bar valve

NOTA: It is not necessary to remove the left-hand
hydraulic cover to carry out work on the valve.
13. Remove the pipe and union.

14. Place the valve (1), spring (2) and threaded ring (3)
in the cover (Fig. 8).
15. Compress the spring, tightening the threaded bush
until it reaches a “hard point” (Fig. 8 - the bush has
reached the cover shoulder).
16. After assembly, check that free movement of the
valve and the compression of the spring, entering
a screwdriver through the port provided for
screwing in the temperature switch, located on the
lower part of the cover.
Fig. 8
G . Description of the 1.5 bar lubrica-

ting valve
Location
The 1.5 bar valve (1) is hidden behind the fuel tank, and
is located at the front left-hand side of the gearbox
(Fig. 9).
Operation
It controls the oil coming from the cooling circuit, and
maintains a lubricating pressure of approximately 1.5
bar in the circuit, due to the valve setting. If the pres-
sure exceeds 1.5 bar, the spring (8) compresses, the
valve (2) moves and oil flows to the return R1 (Fig. 10).
REMINDER : For identification of pipes and hoses (see Fig. 9

§ A).
NOTE 1: When the requirements of the low pressure

circuit are met, oil is channelled towards the booster
port of the brake master cylinders in order to ensure a
constant oil level.
NOTE 2: Considering the available hydraulic options,
other assemblies can be carried out on the union (2)
(Fig. 9). Example: Front PTO - Meritor brake master
cylinders)
Fig. 10
Contents
H . Removing - refitting and disas-

sembling - reassembling the 1.5 bar
valve
Removal (Fig. 11)
17. Remove the part(s) that may obstruct work on the
valve (1).
18. Mark and disconnect the pipes (5) (6), hoses (7) (8)
and unions (2) (3) (4).
19. Remove the housing valve from the gearbox.
Refitting
20. Replace the O’rings if necessary.
21. Refit the valve, unions, hoses and pipes.
22. Replace any part(s) removed at operation 17. Fig. 11
Disassembly
23. Take off circlip (5). Remove the bush (2), spring (3)
and valve (4) from the valve body (6).
Reassembly
NOTE (Fig. 12): The valve (1) consists of several
hydraulic parts (valve, spring) listed in the spare parts
catalogue.
24. Check that the hydraulic parts are clean.

25. Reassemble the valve, carrying out operation 23 in
reverse order.
26. Manually check the free movement of the valve.
Fig. 12

Contents
Contents
Unassisted brake master cylinders
09I01 - Unassisted brake master cylinders
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Layout of hydraulic lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Practical servicing advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Single circuit master cylinders (without trailer brake) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Double circuit master cylinders (with trailer brake) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
F . Adjusting brake pedals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
G . Bleeding the main brake circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
H . Bleeding the trailer brake circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Contents
Contents
A . General
The brake master cylinders are attached to the pedal

console and are housed to the right of the front firewall
in the cab (Fig. 1 - Option described: single circuit).
They act on the tractor main brake located in the centre
housing.
Depending on user requirements, the master cylinders
can be activated separately or in coupled mode via a
pedal locking mechanism (1) (Fig. 2).
The master cylinders have different characteristics

depending on the option fitted on the tractor:
• Tractor without trailer brake
Single circuit master cylinders assembly Fig. 1
• Tractor with trailer brake
Double circuit master cylinders assembly
The master cylinders are kept at a constant level by a

residual oil flow coming from hose (1) (Fig. 3). This
hose is connected to the lubricating and booster circuit
by a distribution block located at the front left-hand
side of the gearbox (Fig. 3).
Fig. 2
Fig. 3

Contents
B . Layout of hydraulic lines

Hydraulic lines with single circuit master
cylinders
Parts list (Fig. 4)
(2) Booster tank
(3) Main brake left- and right-hand supply lines
(4) Pressure balancing junction line
(10) Connector to assist bleeding
(11) Inlet port (booster oil)
Contents
Fig. 4

Contents
Hydraulic lines with double circuit master

cylinders (trailer brake)
Parts list (Fig. 5)
(1) Braking spool valve control line
(2) Booster tank
(4) Pressure balancing junction line
(6) Trailer braking spool valve
(7) Trailer brake quick-disconnect coupling
(11) Inlet port (booster oil)
Contents
Fig. 5

Contents
C . Practical servicing advice

Repair kits
Repair kits for brake master cylinders are listed in the
spare parts catalogue.
Disassembly
If it is necessary to disassemble the master cylinders,
carry out the operation on a clean workbench free of
dirt and corrosion.
Carefully clean all components.
Replace any components found to be scratched or
distorted.
After disassembling or replacing

After disassembling or replacing the brake master
cylinders:
- bleed the main brake circuit and trailer brake circuit
(if fitted);
- check, if necessary, pedal adjustment and the oper-
ation of the brake coupled mode locking device.
Contents
D . Single circuit master cylinders

(without trailer brake)
Operation
Pedals uncoupled (Fig. 7)
The effort applied to a pedal is transmitted by the
rod (5) to the piston (4) which moves in the bore of the
active master cylinder. The valve (1) closes the supply
port. The balancing valve (3) is opened by the piston (4)
and valve ball (2). Oil under pressure is directed to the
main brake ports (C) and the pressure balancing
junction (D).
Via the balancing junction, the pressure closes the
valve (3) of the passive master cylinder .
Pedals coupled Fig. 6

• Braking and pressure balancing
The effort applied to the two pedals is transmitted by
the rods (5) to the pistons (4) which move in the Legend (Fig. 7)
bores of the two master cylinders. The two
valves (1) close the supply ports. The two balancing B Master cylinder level kept constant by the lubri-
valves (3) are opened by the pistons (4) and valve cating and booster circuit (Fig. 3)
balls (2). Pressure balancing is ensured in the two C Supply to main brake
master cylinders by the balancing junction (D). D Pressure balancing junction
Oil under pressure is also directed to the ports (C)
and (C’) of the main brake circuit.
B C D
1 2 3 4 5
MA-09-05066A
Fig. 7

Contents
E . Double circuit master cylinders

(with trailer brake)
Operation
The effort applied to a pedal is transmitted by the
rod (5) to the piston (4) which moves in the bore of the
active master cylinder. The valve (1) closes the supply
port. The balancing valve (3) is opened by the piston (4)
and valve ball (2). Oil under pressure is directed to the
main brake ports (C) and the pressure balancing
junction (D).
Via the balancing junction, the pressure closes the
valve (3) of the passive master cylinder .
The pressure acting on the piston (4) also makes the
piston (6) move, closing the valve (F). Fig. 8
The oil contained in the chamber (E) is channelled by
connecting pipes to the chamber (E’) and to the
port (B’) via the open valve (F’) of the passive master
cylinder. Legend (Fig. 9)
The valve (F) and piston (6) assembly quickly reaches A Trailer brake spool valve control (double circuit)
the stop at the base of the active master cylinder. B Master cylinder level kept constant by the lubri-
In this position only the tractor brake is activated; trailer cating and booster circuit (Fig. 3)
brake is not activated. C Supply to main brake
D Pressure balancing junction
A Trailer brake pressure chamber (double circuit)
F valve (double circuit)
A B C D 3 2
E F 6 1 4 5
MA-09-05068A
Fig. 9
Contents
Pedals coupled
• Braking and pressure balancing
The effort applied to the two pedals is transmitted by
the rods (5) to the pistons (4) which move in the
bores of the two master cylinders. The two
valves (1) close the supply ports. The two balancing
valves (3) are opened by the pistons (4) and valve
balls (2). Pressure balancing is ensured in the two
master cylinders by the balancing junction (D).
Oil under pressure is also directed to the ports (C)
and (C’) of the main brake circuit.
• Trailer braking
The continuous movement of the pistons (4) and (6)
closes the valves (F) et (F’). The pressurised
chambers (E) and (E’) supply the trailer brake control
valve via ports (A) and (A’).

Contents
F . Adjusting brake pedals

Preparing for adjusting
1. If the pins (5) and (6) are removed, smear them
lightly with molybdenum disulfide or AS767 grease
or equivalent (Fig. 10).
2. Screw the locknut (8) and clevis (1) onto the
rod (2).
3. Fit the return spring (3).
Adjustment
4. Adjust clevis (1) to obtain distance X = 115 ± 0.5
mm (Fig. 10) between the support (4) and attach-
ment pin.
Lock the locknut.
5. Carry out the same procedure on the second clevis
and ensure that the coupled mode locking device (1)
(Fig. 11) operates smoothly.
6. Check pedal for correct operation. Ensure they are
at the same height when not activated and that
they return freely to their initial position.
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Contents
G . Bleeding the main brake circuit

Installation
NOTE: A male quick connector (3) is fitted as standard
on the 5 bar line of the left-hand hydraulic cover
(Fig. 13). It facilitates the bleeding of the pressurised
brake system.
7. Join the connector (3) to the connector (10) with a

locally made hose (2) fitted at each end with a
female connector ref.3582045M1 (Fig. 13).
8. Connect a transparent pipe to the right- and
left-hand bleed screws (1) of the centre housing
(Fig. 12).
9. Immerse the ends of the two pipes into a container
partially filled with clean transmission oil.
10. Using soft pliers, pinch the return hose shut (1)
without flattening it excessively (Fig. 13).
IMPORTANT: Some hoses may be difficult to pinch
shut due to their rigid sheath. Consequently, it will
be necessary to disconnect the hose from
union (10) and temporarily replace it with a plug.
Legend (Fig. 13)

D Movement of pressurised fluid through brake
master cylinders during bleeding
Fig. 13
Fig. 12

Contents
Bleeding procedure
11. Run the engine at approximately 1300 rpm and
heat the oil to operating temperature.
12. Open the two bleed screws by one turn and wait
5 minutes.
• Pedals coupled:
Fully press down and slowly release the pedals 8
times until the oil flows free of air bubbles.
• Pedals uncoupled:
Fully press down and slowly release each pedal
8 times until the oil flows free of air bubbles.
• Pedals coupled:
13. First close the left-hand bleed screw and then the
right-hand bleed screw.
14. Remove:
- the hose (2) used at operation 7 (Fig. 13);
- the pliers clamping the hose (1) (see remark at
operation 10).
Check
15. Press very hard (approximately 60 to 80 kg) on
each pedal to correctly position the brake pistons.
16. Check the load strength of each pedal. Coupled
pedals should not travel more than 120 mm for the
force stated above.
17. Stop the engine.
In case of operating problems

If a there is a problem when operating the brakes, carry
out the bleed sequence a second time.
If the problem remains, check tightness of:
- circuit;
- master cylinders;
- piston seals.
Contents
H . Bleeding the trailer brake circuit

If the tractor is fitted with trailer braking, it is strongly
recommended to simultaneously bleed the main brake
and trailer brake circuits.
To carry out this bleeding procedure, use the same
equipment and methods as described in paragraph G
for the bleeding of the main brake circuit, but respect
the following additional points:
• Open (Fig. 14):
- the two bleed screws (1) of the main brake;
- the trailer brake screw (2).
• When the bleeding is complete, tighten in the following
order (Fig. 14):
- the left-hand brake bleed screw (1);
- the right-hand brake bleed screw (1);
- the trailer brake bleed screw (2).
• Check the trailer braking pressure on the quick
disconnect coupling located at the rear of the tractor
(see chapter 9). If this pressure is not correct, elimi-
nate any air leaks in the circuit and repeat the
bleeding procedure.
• Carry out a road test.
Fig. 14

Contents
Contents
Assisted brake master cylinders
09I02 - Assisted brake master cylinders
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Layout of hydraulic lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C . Practical servicing advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
D . Brake master cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
E . FTE valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
F . Adjusting brake pedals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
G . Bleeding the main brake circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
H . Bleeding the trailer brake circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Contents
Contents
A . General
The MERITOR brake master cylinders are attached to

the pedal console and are housed to the right of the
front firewall in the cab (Fig. 1).
They act on the tractor main brake located in the centre
housing.
Depending on user requirements, the master cylinders
can be activated separately or in coupled mode via a
pedal locking mechanism (1) (Fig. 2).
The master cylinder characteristics are similar whether

the requested option includes trailer brake or not.
However, if the trailer brake option has been selected,
a FTE valve (14) is added to the circuit to perform this
function (Fig. 1). Fig. 1
Fig. 2

Contents
The accumulator (1) fitted upstream of the master

cylinders (5) (Fig. 3 and Fig. 4) is supplied by the low
pressure circuit (17 bar).
It allows a faster responsiveness of the assistance
mechanism.
It also maintains the pressure in the master cylinders
via the non-return valve (2) in the line (4) when the
engine has been stopped (Fig. 3).
Fig. 3
Contents
(2) Non-return valve (Fig. 4)

B . Layout of hydraulic lines - Manufacturer ....................Parker
NOTE: When reassembling the non-return valve, turn
Characteristics the arrow engraved on its body so that it points in the
(1) Accumulator (Fig. 4) direction of fluid flow.
- Manufacturer ................... Olaer
- Type ................................. 1/20 (3) Main accumulator for Speedshift unit (Fig. 4)
- Capacity ........................... 1 litre
- Gas................................... Nitrogen (4) To brake hydraulic power assistance (Fig. 4)
- Inflation pressure ............. 9 ± 1 bar
NOTE: The pressure should be checked every
6 months, with the engine stopped.
17 bar low pressure
Gas
Fig. 4

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 5)

(12) Main brake bleed lines
(13) 17 bar low pressure supply line
Contents
Fig. 5

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 6)

(7) Trailer brake quick-disconnect coupling
(12) Main brake bleed lines
(13) 17 bar low pressure supply line
(14) Trailer brake FTE valve
(15) Trailer brake supply line
Contents
Fig. 6

Contents
C . Practical servicing advice

NOTE: The spare parts catalogue does not include any
spare parts to repair MERITOR master cylinders or the
FTE valve.
In case of incorrect operation, systematically replace
the faulty assembly.
Special points after replacement

After replacing the brake master cylinders or FTE
valve:
- bleed the main brake circuit and trailer brake circuit
(if fitted);
- check, if necessary, pedal adjustment and the oper-
ation of the brake coupled mode locking device.
Contents
D . Brake master cylinders

Operation (Fig. 1 and Fig. 8)
The force applied to the brake pedal is transmitted by
rod (2) and moves the spool (3) in the bore of the
piston (4).
The oil under pressure coming from the port (A) enters
the bores (10) and the groove (12).
The piston (4) is then pushed to the left, compressing
the master cylinder oil (8) which is then directed
through port (D) to the brake or FTE valve (if fitted).
The screw (7) guides the piston (4) along its move-
ment axis.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should this screw (7)
be removed.
Fig. 7
When the brake pedal is released, the spool (3) tries to
return to its initial position. The oil under pressure thus
no longer reaches piston (4) and it therefore likewise
returns to its rest position.
The valve (6) allows the pressure between master
cylinder (8) and the tank (5) to be balanced only once
the piston has returned.
The port (9) allows oil flow in order to maintain a
constant level in the master cylinder.
The oil under pressure (17 bar) in chamber B also
tends to fill tank (5) by passing through the bore (11).
Port C removes any excess oil and directs it to the
tank.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should the master

cylinders be disassembled: they should be systemati-
cally replaced.

Contents
Parts list (Fig. 8)

(1) Master cylinder assembly
(2) Rod
(3) Spool
(4) Piston
(5) Braking circuit supply tank
(6) Pressure balancing valve
(7) Piston guide screw
(8) Master cylinder capacity
(9) Port
(10) Port
(11) Bore
(12) Groove
A Supply
B Chamber in piston (4)
C To return to housing
D To main brake or FTE valve (if fitted)
7 9 11 1 12
D C A
8 6 4 5 10 B 3 2
MA-09-05081A Fig. 8
Contents
Parts list (Fig. 9)

E . FTE valve
(1) Spool
Operation (2) Ball
(3) Plunger
The FTE valve (14) (Fig. 9) is an essential component of (4) Spring
the trailer braking system.
It performs a logical "AND" function, i.e. it allows oil to A To trailer braking valve
flow to the braking valve only when both brake pedals B From right-hand master cylinder
are activated at the same time.
C From left-hand master cylinder
If only one brake pedal is pressed, the trailer braking D To right-hand tractor brake
valve is not activated.
E To left-hand tractor brake
NOTE: The FTE valve cannot be adjusted.
Fig. 9

Contents

When force is applied to only one brake pedal, the oil
under pressure coming from the master cylinders to B C
the port (B) moves the spool (1) and presses the
ball (2) against the spool to block the connection (D)
and (A). Therefore, there is only one possible way for
oil to flow from (B) to (D).
Pedals coupled (Fig. 11)

D E
When force is applied to both pedals simultaneously,
the spools (1) are thrust against each other and
compress spring (4). The plunger (3) then forces the
balls (2) apart lifting them from their seats in the spool. A
In this way all the ports are directly connected, i.e.
there is a braking pressure supplied to tractor 1 2 4 3
MA-09-05082A
brakes (D) and (E) and to the braking valve (A).
Fig. 10
B C
D E
A
1 4 3 2
MA-09-05083A
Fig. 11
Contents
F . Adjusting brake pedals

Preparing for adjustment (Fig. 12)
1. If the pins (5) and (6) are removed, smear them
lightly with molybdenum disulfide or AS767 grease
or equivalent.
2. Screw the locknut (8) and clevis (1) onto the
rod (2).
3. Fit the return spring (3).
Adjustment
4. Adjust clevis (1) to obtain distance
X = 135 ±0.5 mm (Fig. 12) between the
support (4) and attachment pin.
Lock the locknut.
5. Carry out the same procedure on the second clevis
and ensure that thethe coupled mode locking
device (1) (Fig. 13) operates smoothly.
6. Check pedal for correct operation. Ensure they are
at the same height when not activated and that
they return freely to their initial position.
Fig. 12
Fig. 13

Contents
G . Bleeding the main brake circuit

Right-hand hydraulic cover
A male connector (3) fitted as standard on the booster
and lubricating line (5 bar) of the right-hand hydraulic
cover (Fig. 14), must be used to facilitate the bleeding
under pressure of the brake circuit.
Brake master cylinders

Two types of bleed connector (10) and (11) can be
present on the brake master cylinders (Fig. 14).
Fig. 14
Contents
Installation
7. Locally make a hose (2) for couplers as follows:
- one end must be fitted with a female connector
suitable for attachment to the male connector of
the brake master cylinders;
- the other end must be fitted with a female
connector suitable for attachment to the male
connector (3) of the right-hand hydraulic
connector (Fig. 14).
8. Connect a transparent pipe to the right- and
left-hand bleed screws (1) (Fig. 15) of the centre
housing.
9. Dip the ends of the two pipes into the oil filling pipe
of the housings.
NOTE: Check that the PTO is switched off and take
care not to insert the transparent pipes deep into the
oil filling pipe. Fig. 15
10. Locate the return hose (1) of the brake master
cylinders and pinch it shut without flattening it
excessively (Fig. 16).
NOTE: Some hoses may be difficult to pinch shut due
to their rigid sheath. Consequently, it is recommended
to disconnect the hose from union (10) or (11) (Fig. 14)
and temporarily screw a plug in its place.
Fig. 16

Contents
Bleeding procedure
11. Run the engine at approximately 1300 rpm and
heat the oil to operating temperature.
12. Open the two bleed screws by one turn and wait
5 minutes.
• Pedals coupled:
• Pedals uncoupled:
Fully press down and slowly release each pedal
8 times until the oil flows free of air bubbles.
• Pedals coupled:
13. First close the left-hand bleed screw and then the
right-hand bleed screw.
14. Press very hard (approximately 60 to 80 kg) on
each pedal to correctly position the brake pistons.
15. Check the load strength of each pedal. Coupled
pedals should not travel more than 120 mm for the
force stated above.
16. Stop the engine.
17. Remove:
- the connector and hose assembly (2) (Fig. 14);
- the pliers clamping the hose (1) (see remark at
operation 10).
In case of operating problems

If a there is a problem when operating the brakes, carry
out the bleed sequence a second time.
If the problem remains, check tightness of:
- circuit;
- master cylinders;
- piston seals.
Contents
H . Bleeding the trailer brake circuit

If the tractor is fitted with an FTE valve (14) (Fig. 17), it
is strongly recommended to simultaneously bleed the
main brake and trailer brake circuits.
To carry out this bleeding procedure, use the same
equipment and methods as described in paragraph G
for the bleeding of the main brake circuit while
complying with the following additional points:
• Open (Fig. 18):
- the two screws (1) of the main brakes;
- the trailer brake screw (2).
• When the bleeding is complete, tighten in the
following order (Fig. 18):
- the left-hand brake bleed screw (1);
- the right-hand brake bleed screw (1); Fig. 17
- the trailer brake bleed screw (2).
• Check the trailer braking pressure on the quick
disconnect coupling located at the rear of the tractor
(see chapter 9).
If this pressure is not correct, eliminate any air leaks
in the circuit and repeat the bleeding procedure.
• Carry out a road test.
Fig. 18

Contents
Contents
GBA20 Power Shuttle control unit
09J01 - GBA20 Power Shuttle control unit
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Presentation of control unit and hydraulic lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Power Shuttle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
D . Speedshift control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
E . Explanation of Speedshift ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
F . Removing - Refitting the control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Contents
Contents
A . General
The unit (1) fixed to the right-hand side and front of the
gearbox (Fig. 1) carries out two hydraulic functions
quite separate to the input unit.
It controls:
- the Power Shuttle,
- Speedshift.
The channels and ducts machined in the unit allow oil
under pressure to be directed to the reverse shuttle
proportional solenoid valves and the Speedshift sole-
noid valve EV2.
All solenoid valves are controlled respectively by the
tractor electronic system.
A 60 micron filter element (8) (Fig. 1) is located under
the right-hand hydraulic cover, upstream of the control
unit. This additional filter supplies clean oil to the spool
of each solenoid valve.
Fig. 1

Contents
B . Presentation of control unit and

hydraulic lines
Parts list (Fig. 2)
(1) Control unit
(2) Return to reverse clutch housing
(3) Return to forward clutch housing
(4) Reverse shuttle: 17 bar supply line to forward
clutch
(5) Reverse shuttle: 17 bar supply line to reverse
clutch
(6) Accumulator (Nitrogen)
(7) Main 17 bar supply line
(8) 60 micron filter element
(10) Speedshift: to internal reverse clutch line (17 bar)
C . Power Shuttle control

Identification of ports on control unit
(Fig. 3).
(1) Control unit
(2) Return to reverse clutch housing
(3) Return to forward clutch housing
(4) Outlet pressure to forward clutch
(5) Outlet pressure to reverse clutch
(7) Control unit main supply (17 bar)
(11) Forward solenoid valve
(12) Reverse solenoid valve
(13) Control unit pressure connector
(14) Reverse clutch pressure connector
Fig. 2
(15) Forward clutch pressure connector
Contents
Fig. 3

Contents
Proportional solenoid valve

Removal (Fig. 4)
1. Remove flange (1).
2. Drive off the solenoid valve (11) or (12) by gently
applying pressure with a screwdriver between the
valve and the unit.
Refitting
3. Check the condition and cleanliness of the O’rings
fitted on the solenoid valve.
4. Position and manually drive the solenoid valve into
its housing, beyond the resistance point (O’rings
squeezing).
5. Position the flange.
Tighten the screw from 8 to 11 Nm.
Fig. 4
Identification of ports on a proportional

solenoid valve (Fig. 5)
A: Clutch supply ports
B: Clutch return ports
P: 17 bar pressure
Electrical connection (Fig. 5)

C: Solenoid supply
Fig. 5
Contents
D . Speedshift control
Identification of ports on control unit
(Fig. 7 and Fig. 8)
(1) Control unit
(9) Outlet pressure to forward clutch
(10) Outlet pressure to reverse clutch
(16) Forward clutch pressure connector
(17) Reverse clutch pressure connector
Characteristics of the solenoid valve

(Fig. 9) Fig. 6
Solenoid valve Characteristics
EV2 (3 x 2) solenoid valve 3 ports
2 positions
Identification of ports (Fig. 9)

A To port F
B Non-return valve
F Port to Speedshift pistons
P 17 bar pressure
R Return
Remark
The EV2 solenoid valve removal and refitting proce-
dure is identical to that of a proportional solenoid valve.
Fig. 7
16
17
MA-09-04082A
Fig. 8

Contents
Fig. 9
Contents
E . Explanation of Speedshift ratios

NOTE: For design operation and mechanical explana-
tion of ratios, see chapter 5.
Ratio C (Fig. 10)

Ratio C is obtained by switching on the EV2 solenoid
valve. The oil flows to the Speedshift pistons via sole-
noid valve EV2.
Ratio D (Fig. 11)

Ratio D is obtained by switching off EV2. The solenoid
valve is at rest. The two pistons are connected to the
Speedshift
housing.
Fig. 10
Speedshift
Fig. 11

Contents
F . Removing - Refitting the control

unit
If you work on the 17 bar hydraulic circuit
immediately after stopping the engine,
drop the pressure stored in the accumu-
lator or wait a while before working on the
circuit.
Removal
6. Mark and disconnect the connector on solenoid
valve EV2 of the Speedshift (Fig. 9) as well as
those of the proportional solenoid valves (12) (11)
of the power shuttle forward and reverse clutches
(Fig. 3).
7. Disconnect and remove pipes (2), (3), (4), (5), and
(7) (Fig. 12).
Note: To prevent oil flowing from the gearbox, it is
advised to disconnect the return pipes (2) and (3) at
their higher connections.
8. Unscrew the support (1) from the gearbox.
Remove the “support and unit” assembly by grad-
ually unscrewing the union (10) (Speedshift clutch
supply) (Fig. 12).
Refitting
9. Refit the “support and unit” assembly.
Tighten:
- the screws fixing the support to the gearbox to
50 - 70 Nm,
- the screws fixing the unit to the support to
25 - 35 Nm. Fig. 12
10. Reconnect the pipes and connectors.
Reminder
Final operations
If it was necessary to replace the control unit or propor-
tional solenoid valves, test: 11. Carry out a road test of the hydraulic functions
- the 17 bar pressure of the unit, affected by the repair work.
- the pressure of the Speedshift clutches; 12. Check the oil tightness of the hydraulic unions.
- the pressure of the reverse shuttle forward and
reverse clutches.
Important: When pressurised, the reverse shuttle
clutches must be calibrated using Wintest.
Contents
57 l/min Open Centre tests
09K01 - 57 l/min Open Centre tests
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . High flow rate circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Low flow rate circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 09K01.1

Contents
09K01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Contents
A . General
The open centre hydraulic circuit comprises two
circuits: the low flow rate circuit and the high flow rate
circuit.
Before starting the checks, run the engine at 2000 rpm
to raise the oil temperature to 60 °C (132 °F) minimum.
To make the rise in temperature easier, connect a
flowmeter to one of the auxiliary spool valves other
than the one supplied by the flow rate divider (if fitted)
and limit the flow through the flowmeter.
As soon as the oil temperature exceeds 60 °C (132 °F),
release the lever of the auxiliary spool valve and open
the flowmeter valve to the maximum.
To carry out the tests indicated in this section, the use

of the following equipment, available in the AGCO
network, is recommended:
- MF 3001: Pressure gauge kit;
- MF 3016: 4 - 160 l/min (0.9 - 36 Gal/min) turbine
flowmeter kit, or standard MF 3003 flowmeter;
- MF 3017: Pipe assembly for MF 3016 flowmeter;
- 3582045M1: Female diagnostics coupler.
If the above is not available, use equivalent equip-

ment.
IMPORTANT: In all cases, ensure the direction of oil flow

is correct in order to avoid any damage to the flowm-
eter.
Also choose pressure gauges, pipes and unions of
sufficient capacity and strength for the tests to be
carried out.

Contents
B . High flow rate circuit

Safety valve test
- Connect a pressure gauge with a coupler
ref. 3582045M1 to the diagnostics connector (1)
(Fig. 1).
This diagnostics connector is located:
- either on the trailer braking valve (if fitted);
- or on the closing plate (2) fitted to the right-hand
hydraulic cover.
- Run the engine at 2200 rpm.
- Activate an auxiliary spool valve to open the valve.
- Check P1 = 195 ± 5 bar.
If pressure P1 is not correct, adjust the safety valve
using shim(s) (see chapter 9).
- At 1000 rpm, the pressure should not drop.
Fig. 1
Contents
Checking the flow rate of the pump (Fig. 2)

- Connect a flowmeter to the quick-disconnect
coupling of an auxiliary spool valve other than the
one supplied by the flow divider.
Connect the return directly to the housing via the
transmission filler port.
- Connect a suitable pressure gauge to the diagnostics
connector (1) (Fig. 1).
IMPORTANT: Check that the flowmeter load valve is
open fully.
- Activate the spool valve.
- Adjust the flowmeter load valve to obtain P1.
NOTE: Do not consider the value of the pressure
gauge fitted to the flowmeter. Look at the separate
pressure gauge connected to the diagnostics
- Check Q1.
Engine speed P1 Q1
(rpm) (bar) (l/min)
1000 0 30,0 ± 2
1000 100 28,0 ± 2
2200 0 55,5 ± 2
2200 100 52,2 ± 2
Fig. 2

Contents
Testing the flow divider (if fitted)

- Connect a flowmeter to a quick-disconnect coupling
on auxiliary spool valve no.1 located by flow
divider "D" (Fig. 3).
IMPORTANT: Check that the flowmeter load valve is
open fully.
- Activate the spool valve.
- Adjust the flowmeter load valve to obtain P1.
- Check the flow rate of the divider by turning the
adjusting knob shown (Fig. 3).
- Check Q2.
Engine speed P1 Q2
(rpm) (bar) (l/min)
2200 0 to 150 0 to 53
pressure gauge connected to the diagnostics
Checking kick-out pressure on an auxiliary

spool valve fitted with automatic return to
neutral
- Connect a flowmeter to the relevant spool valve
(no.3 for example) (Fig. 4).
connector (1) (Fig. 1). Fig. 3
- Activate the spool valve in automatic return position.
Release the lever and gradually shut the flowmeter
load valve until the lever returns to neutral position.
- Check the kick-out pressure:
P1 = 150 - 170 bar.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the spool valve is in the

automatic return position and not in the floating posi-
tion.

pressure gauge connected to connector (1) (Fig. 1).
Contents
High flow rate
Fig. 4

Contents
Checking the pressure and flow rate of the

trailer brake
Pressure
- Connect a pressure gauge to the trailer brake
- Latch the brake pedals and apply a progressive force.
The pressure read should increase gradually until it
reaches P2 = 130 - 150 bar maximum (Fig. 4).
Flow rate
- Connect a pressure gauge to the trailer brake
- Activate the latched brake pedals.
- Check Q6 = 24 - 31 l/min (Fig. 4).
Checking the lift control shock valve (1)

(Fig. 6)
- Disconnect the supply hose pipes on the rams and
connect them to a hand calibrating pump.
- With the engine stopped and the lift control valve in
neutral position, inject pressure into the circuit.
- Check the valve opening pressure:
P3 = 200 - 210 bar (Fig. 4).
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Contents
C . Low flow rate circuit

The low flow rate circuit supplies:
- the steering spool valve;
- the Power Shuttle;
- the Speedshift and its control;
- the power shuttle hydraulic control block;
- the Hare / Tortoise unit located at the rear right-hand
side of the gearbox;
- the 4WD unit located in the lower part of the centre
housing;
- the front and rear differential locks;
- the PTO clutch located at the front of the centre
housing;
- the PTO brake located in the top cover at the back of
the centre housing.
An additional function ensures the lubrication of
mechanical components and maintains the oil level in
the brake master cylinders (except Meritor).

Contents
Checking the flow rate of the pump
CAUTION : When carrying out tests, the rear

axle must not be placed on chocks with the front
axle (4WD) engaged.
- Connect a flowmeter between the 15 micron filter(s)

(1) outlet located to the front right-hand side of the
rear axle, and the supply pipe (2) to the Orbitrol spool
valve (Fig. 7).
IMPORTANT: Check that the flowmeter load valve
remains fully open throughout the test.
- Also connect a pressure gauge to the low pressure
diagnostics connector (1) screwed to the top of the
right-hand hydraulic cover, at the front (Fig. 8).
Fig. 7
- CheckQ3.
Engine P4 Q3 Correct
speed (bar) (l/min) position
(rpm)
1000 18 ± 1 16,0 ± 1 steering at
neutral
2200 18 ± 1 32,7 ± 2 steering at
neutral
Fig. 8
Contents
Checking for leaks at clutch and slave NOTE: When all clutch and slave devices are acti-
devices vated, the low pressure P4 should remain at 18 ± 1
bar.
To adjust reference flow rate Q4:
The leaks in the single control systems can be
- all low pressure functions should be at neutral;
detected according to the values in the table.
- the front axle should be engaged (clutch not
supplied, indicator light on);
NOTE: For the differential lock function, an additional
- the range lever should be in Tortoise position (icon);
test is necessary to determine the difference
- the reverse shuttle control should be in neutral posi-
between the front and rear.
tion (letter N on instrument panel);
Checking method
- Speedshift should be in D range;
- Disconnect and block one of the piston supplies.
- the differential lock should be disengaged (indicator
light on); - Check if the leak persists.
- the power take-off should be disengaged (indicator
light out).
Check (Fig. 9 or Fig. 10)

The flowmeter can be connected:
- either to the cooler outlet (Fig. 9);
- or where the pipe joins the hoses on the right-hand
side of the tractor (Fig. 10).
- The flowmeter should be connect using locally made
unions.
- Connect the flowmeter as is convenient (see
previous remark).
IMPORTANT: Check that the flowmeter load valve
remains fully open throughout the test.
- Connect a pressure gauge set to approximately 30
bar to the low pressure connector (1) (Fig. 8).
- Note the Q4 reference flow rate at 1000 rpm.
- Activate each function separately and note the Q5
flow rate.
- The difference Q4 - Q5 represents the leak
detected.
The value read should not exceed the values indi-
cated in the “Identifying leaks at clutch and slave
devices” table below.
Examples of the test on the clutch and PTO.

• Example 1
Q4 = 15 l/min Q5 = 14.5 l/min
leak detected = 0.5 l/min
Conclusion: Test OK
• Example 2
Q4 = 15 l/min Q5 = 13 l/min
leak detected = 2 l/min
Conclusion: Leak exceeds allowable value
- Before checking the following function and to avoid

misreading the Q5 flow rate, bring the control of that
element back to the neutral position or to the above
neutral positions.

Contents
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Contents
Control unit Speedshift

Power shuttle
Forward Reverse
clutch clutch
Reference flow
rate
Q4
Measured flow rate

Q5
Detected leak
(l/min)
Q4 - Q5
Maximum
allowable leak 1,5 1,5 2
(l/min)
Pressure
18 ± 1
P4 (bar)
Hare range Power Power Differential 4WD clutch Front power

take-off take-off lock (front axle) take-off
clutch brake
Front Rear optional
Reference flow
rate
Q4
Measured flow rate

Q5
Detected leak
(l/min) Q4-Q5
Maximum
allowable leak 0,5 1,5 2 0,5 0,5 1,5 1,5
(l/min)
Pressure
18 ± 1
P4 (bar)
Identifying leaks at clutch and slave devices

Contents
Supply to the steering spool valve

- Connect a pressure gauge fitted with a coupler
ref. 3582045M1 to the diagnostics connector (1) of
the right-hand hydraulic cover (Fig. 11).
- Turn the steering to full lock and check that:
P5 = 170 bar at 1000 rpm and at 2200 rpm.
Supply to the steering ram

Test (Fig. 12)
- Connect a pressure gauge by-pass to each hose pipe
of the steering ram.
- With steering at neutral, check that P6 = 18 bar.
- Turn the steering wheel.
Pressure P6 should be:
- between 18 and 170 bar at the ram supply side ;
- 18 bar in the return line.
Steering circuit leak test

- Turn the steering on full lock and apply a torque of
4 Nm to the axis of the steering wheel. The wheel
must not turn more than 2 rpm.
If the wheel turns more than 2 rpm, disconnect the
pipes that supply the rams, block the two ports and
then apply the same torque (4 Nm) to the steering
wheel. If it turns less than 2 rpm, there is a leak at
the level of the ram.
Fig. 11
Contents
Fig. 12

Contents
Checking the supply pressure of the Power

Shuttle control unit
- Connect a pressure gauge with a capacity of
aapproximately 30 bar to the diagnostics
connector (1) of the control unit located at the front
right of the gearbox (Fig. 13).
- Check P7.
Engine speed P7
(rpm) (bar)
1000 18 ± 1
2200 18 ± 1
Fig. 13
Contents
Checking the (forward and reverse) clutch

pressure of the Power Shuttle
CAUTION: To keep the tractor stationary,

ensure that the gear lever is in neutral.
- The diagnostics connectors (1) (forward) and (2)

(reverse) of the Power Shuttle clutches are on the
control unit fitted to the front right of the gearbox
(Fig. 14).
- The control lever of the Power Shuttle is located to
the left beneath the steering wheel:
- lever upwards: forward position (the letter F is
displayed on the instrument panel);
- lever downwards: reverse position (the letter R is
displayed on the instrument panel);
Test (Fig. 14)

- Connect a pressure gauge with a capacity of approx-
imately 30 bar to each diagnostics connector (1) and
(2).
- Activate the lever to select the direction (forward /
reverse) and the neutral position.
- Check P8 and P9.
Position Forward clutch

Reverse clutch (2)
of (1)
P9 (bar)
lever P8 (bar)
Forward 18 ± 1 0
Neutral or
declutche 0 0
d
Reverse 0 18 ± 1
Fig. 14

Contents
Checking the lubricating pressure of the

Power Shuttle clutches (forward and
reverse)
- These clutches are lubricated by a gear pump that is
independent from that used for the conventional
lubricating circuit.
- This pump has two additional spools which act as
valves and are fitted in the front cover of the Power
Shuttle. They thus lubricate the reverse position (see
chapter 5).
- The test is carried out with the assistance of another
operator seated at the tractor controls.
Check
- Connect a pressure gauge with a capacity of approx- Fig. 15
imately 11 bar to the diagnostics connector (1)
located at the front right of the gearbox (Fig. 15).
- Check P10 as indicated in the table.
Position of Engine P10 (bar)

lever speed
Pedal Pedal
(rpm)
engaged disengaged
Forward 1000 0,5 ± 0,1 1,5 ± 0,1
ratio
(letter F) 2200 0,9 ± 0,1 2,0 ± 0,1
1000 1,5 ± 0,1 1,5 ± 0,1
Neutral
2200 2,0 ± 0,1 2,0 ± 0,1
Reverse ratio 1000 0,4 ± 0,1 1,5 ± 0,1

(letter R) 2200 0,8 ± 0,1 2,0 ± 0,1
Contents
Checking the pressure on the Speedshift

supply line

- Connect a pressure gauge with a capacity of
approximately 30 bar to the low pressure diagnostics
connector (1) screwed into the upper part of the
right-hand hydraulic cover (Fig. 16).
- Measure the pressure:
P4 = 18 bar ± 1 bar
Fig. 16

Contents
Checking the dry clutch pressure
CAUTION: The pressure can reach 30 bar

when the pedal is pressed down; it is therefore
necessary to connect the pressure gauge after
starting the engine.
- Connect a pressure gauge with a capacity of 30 bar

fitted with a coupler ref. 3582045M1 to the diagnos-
tics connector (1) located on the right-hand side of
the gearbox (Fig. 16).
- Measure the pressure:
P8 = 1.5 bar maximum clutch engaged
P8 = 13-15 bar clutch disengaged: new disc
P8 = 18-20 bar clutch disengaged: worn disc
Fig. 17
Contents
Electrical equipment
10 - Electrical equipment
CONTENTS
10A01 - Fuse box
10A02 - GBA20 electronic equipment
Contents
Electrical equipment
Contents
Fuse box and relays
10A01 - Fuse box and relays
CONTENTS
A . Fuse box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Relays - Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C . Relays - North America. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Relays - Germany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Contents
Fuse box and relays
Contents
Fuse box and relays
A . Fuse box
Ref. Amperage Description

F1 30 A Accessories electrical socket
F2 7.5 A Linkage, EHRB, AUTO 5
F3 10 A Pneumatic seat
F4 10 A Front PTO, mechanical reverse shuttle + reversing light, EEM, Thermostart
F5 30 A Fuel booster pump (4 cylinders)
F6 10 A Instrument panel, PTO, Hare / Tortoise, Creeper unit
F7 NA
F8 7.5 A Starting relay
F9 10 A Cab relay
F10 25 A Wiper timer
F11 15 A Radio, front and rear wipers
F12 10 A Speedshift, 4WD, differential lock
F13 25 A Front work headlights - Europe and NAO
F14 30 A EEM Electronic injection
F15 15 A Thermostart
F16 25 A Rear work headlights - Europe and NAO
F17 30 A
F18 7.5 A Alternator charge
F19 7.5 A Horn
Reversing lights (mechanical reverse shuttle), road and dim beam lights on
F20 10 A
handrails, electrical socket
F21 10 A Direction indicator light unit
F22 5A Stop lights
F23 7.5 A Power shuttle, Linkage, AUTO 5
F24 NA EEM Electronic injection
Front right-hand and rear left-hand sidelights, instrument panel backlighting,
F25 10 A
registration plate
F26 7.5 A Front left-hand and rear right-hand sidelights
F27 15 A Flashing beacon
F28 20 A Warning light
F29 25 A Fender and handrail work headlights
F30 15 A Stop lights
F31 15 A Road lights
F32 10 A Dim beam

Contents
Fuse box and relays
1 17
2 13 18 29
3 19
4 20
14 30
5 21
6 22
7 23
8 24
15 31
9 25
10 26
11 16 27 32
12 28
MA-10-03409A
Fig. 1
Contents
Fuse box and relays
B . Relays - Europe
Without electronic injection
Connector reference Description Layout

CAB-36 Ground authorisation Left-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-37 Front work headlights Left-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-38 Rear work headlights Left-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-39 Air conditioning compressor Left-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-40 Stop lights Left-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-41 Speedshift Left-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-62 Differential lock Gear lever support
CAB-65 4-wheel drive Gear lever support
CAB-71 Cab relay Right-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-72 Right-hand side of instrument panel
reversing lights
CAB-76 Wiper timer relay Right-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-77 Direction indicator light unit Right-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-78 Air conditioning ventilation relay Right-hand side of instrument panel
CAB41
CAB76
CAB39
CAB71
CAB37
CAB40 CAB72
CAB65
CAB38
CAB77 CAB62
CAB36
CAB78
MA-10-03407A
Fig. 2

Contents
Fuse box and relays
With electronic injection
Connector Description Layout

CAB-28 Injection pump relay Left-hand side of instrument panel
CAB-29 Thermostart relay Left-hand side of instrument panel
reversing lights
CAB28
CAB41
CAB76
CAB39
CAB29 CAB71
CAB37
CAB40 CAB72
CAB65
CAB38
CAB77 CAB62
CAB36
CAB78
MA-10-03408A
Fig. 3
Contents
Fuse box and relays
C . Relays - North America

Connector reference Description Layout

reversing lights
CAB-131 Indicator lights Gear lever support
CAB41
CAB76
CAB39
CAB71
CAB37
CAB40 CAB72 CAB131 CAB65
CAB38 CAB132
CAB77 CAB62
CAB36 CAB133
CAB78 CAB134
MA-10-03405A
Fig. 4

Contents
Fuse box and relays

reversing lights
CAB28
CAB41
CAB76
CAB39
CAB29 CAB71
CAB37
CAB38 CAB132
CAB77 CAB62
CAB36 CAB133
CAB78 CAB134
MA-10-03406A
Fig. 5
Contents
Fuse box and relays
D . Relays - Germany

reversing lights
CAB-140 Handrail road lights Gear lever support
CAB41
CAB76
CAB39
CAB71
CAB37
CAB38 CAB141
CAB77 CAB62
CAB36
CAB78
MA-10-03403A
Fig. 6

Contents
Fuse box and relays

reversing lights
CAB28
CAB41
CAB76
CAB39
CAB29 CAB71
CAB37
CAB38 CAB141
CAB77 CAB62
CAB36
CAB78
MA-10-03404A
Fig. 7
Contents
GBA20 electronic equipment
10A02 - GBA20 electronic equipment
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Cab equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C . Engine equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
D . Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
E . Bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
F . Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
G . Calculator supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Contents
Contents
In general, the components or connectors are named

A . General in order to indicate the corresponding elements of the
tractor:
Description CA## Automatic air conditioning
The harnesses fitted on the tractor allow data to be CAB## Cab
exchanged and power to be supplied to the electrical ENG## Engine
and electronic systems. LIG## Lighting
The tractor is fitted with 3 different types of power R## Roof
supply:
TR## Transmission and linkage
• +12V Battery (Permanent)
CDX# External controls
• +12V APC (Ignition key ON)
• +12V ACC (Accessories)
Most harnesses have a maximum of six different wire
colours:
- Black: Ground
- Brown: +12V Permanent
- Red: +12V APC and Accessories
- White: Information
- Yellow: CAN High
- Green: CAN Low
The CAN network wires (yellow and green) are
twisted together.
- Components with only one connector are identified

CAB18
by the connector name:
9 10
2 1
6 5
3 4
CAB16: Clutch pedal progressivity sensor (Fig. 1).

7 8
8 7
- Harnesses performing the same funtions have the

1 2
5 6
1 2 3
10 9
4 3
same colour on the diagram (Fig. 1): CAB11 CAB11 3 2 1 CAB18 1 CAB14
CAB11.1/CAB17.1 N
R
1 1
• FAI90: Cab Power Shuttle option harness (pink) 2 2 CAB11.2/CAB18.1 B
S1.1/CAB14.1
CAB11.3/CAB18.3 B S1.1/CAB18.2 R
3 3
4 4
CAB11.5/S2.1 B
5 5
• FAI102: Platform Power Shuttle option harness 6
7
6
7
CAB11.6/CAB17.3 B
CAB11.7/CAB13.1 B
CAB11.8/S1.1 R S1
8 8
(pink) 9 9
R
10 10
CAB17.2/S1.1
- All wires can be identified by the pins of the outgoing FAI102 FAI90
3
and incoming connectors of the harness: 2

1
FAI89
B
N
CAB9.35/CAB11.6 B
CAB9.16/CAB11.5 B
B
CAB9.2/CAB11.9 R
CAB11.2/CAB18.1: The wire connects pin 2 of the

CAB17
CAB11.8/S6.1 R
CAB9.19/CAB11.7
CAB9.34/CAB11.3
CAB9.41/CAB11.4
4 3 2 1
CAB11 connector to pin 1 of the CAB18 connector

- The detail of pins allocation for each connector is CAB12 CAB12
shown on the harness side 1

2
3
4
- The wire colour is indicated: CAB11.2/CAB18.1 B,

the wire is white
Fig. 1
List of colours: MA-10-01005A
- N: Black
- M: Brown
- R: Red
- B: White
- J: Yellow
- V: Green
- The splices inside the harnesses are indicated by a
dot and the letter S (S1).

Contents
Layout
1 or 2 Deutsch connectors (31-way) are connected on
+12V
the front wall of the cab (according to model) Fig. 2.
All these connectors belong to the engine harness.
ENG2 is dedicated to information relating to the elec- ENG1
tronic injection (only present on the relevant models).
ENG36
MA-10-01004A Fig. 2
The fuses of the electrical or electronic board (Fig. 3)
are indicated by a grey mark on their locations on the
fuse box (CAB35). CAB35
FAI2
CAB35
6A - 6B
CAB35.6B/S17.1
1
MA-10-01006A
CAB84
10A
Fig. 3
Contents
B . Cab equipment
Instrument panel ........................................................ 7
Cab and instrument panel backlighting ...................... 8
Instrument panel and platform console backlighting .....9
Standard roof ventilation .......................................... 10
High visibility roof ventilation ................................... 11
Standard roof extreme cold ventilation .................... 12
High visibility roof extreme cold ventilation ............. 13
Manual air conditioning for standard roof................. 14
Manual air conditioning for high visibility roof .......... 15
Radio - Europe.......................................................... 16
Radio - Germany....................................................... 17
Radio - North America .............................................. 18
Windscreen wiper for standard front windscreen.... 19
Windscreen wiper for opening front windscreen..... 20
Rear windscreen wiper ............................................ 21
Cab accessories electrical socket ............................ 22
Platform accessories electrical socket ..................... 23
Cab internal roof light ............................................... 24
Pneumatic seat ........................................................ 25
Horn ......................................................................... 26

Contents
Contents
Instrument panel
FAI 84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries

except US)
CAB35 Fuse box
3 Start switch 49
49 X2 instrument panel
28A
12A
28B
12B
32A
16A
11A
11B
27A
27B
32B
16B
26A
10A
26B
10B
31A
25A
15A
25B
9A
9B
31B
15B
24A
24B
8A
8B
23A
23B
7A
7B
F6-10A
22A
22B
6A
6B
21A
21B
5A
5B
30A
14A
20A
20B
14A
30B
4A
4B
19A
19B
3A
3B
29A
13A
18A
18B
2A
2B
29B
13B
17A
17B
1A
1B
CAB35
CAB46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CAB46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N
CAB109.1/CAB48.7
R
FAI84
CAB35.6B/CAB46.5
3 1 CAB109
6A - 6B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R
1
CAB84 10A
CAB35 MA-10-03265A
Fig. 4

Contents
Cab and instrument panel backlighting
CAB02 CAB05
FAI 73 Linkage harness
FAI 74 Cab console harness SWITCH UP/DOWN

except US) 49 25
24
25
24
25 14
DOWN
NEUTRAL
UP OFF
NEUTRAL
ON
23 23 13 1
FAI 94 Standard roof harness - EU 22

21
22
21 1 2 3 4 5 6
20 20
FAI 101 Handrail road lights control harness 19

18
17
19
18
17
16 16
FAI 109 Handrail work headlights control harness
LED
15 15
14 14
13 13
CAB 02 Linkage console 12

11
12
11
10
CAB47.12/S12.1 B S12
CAB02 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CAB05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10
CAB 05 UP/DOWN switch 9

8
9
8 14 6
FAI73
CAB35 8 1 2 3 10
10
13 5
7 7 16
12
9
4
2
15 8 1
6 6 11 3
CAB 35 Fuse box

7
5 5 S3.1/CAB02.12 N S3 CAB05.7/S3.1 N
7 4 5 6
B
4 4 9
3 3 +12V S4.1/CAB02.13 R S4 CAB05.8/S4.1 R
CAB35.26B/S12.1
F26-7.5A
CAB 42 Light switch F25-10A
2
1
2
1
N
R
CAB47 CAB47
CAB 44 Front work headlights switch
CAB07.3/S4.1
CAB07.2/S3.1
CAB 45 Rear work headlights switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CAB42 CAB35
CAB 63 4WD switch 1 CAB108
CAB07 1 2 3 4 5
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A 1 2
CAB 64 Differential switch CAB07 1 2 3 4 5
CAB126 1 2 3
3
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
CAB 144Handrail lights switch
N
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 26A -26B
CAB126.3/CAB124.1
6 5 4
+3 +6 3 2 1
8 8
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N FAI84 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CAB 147Additional headlights switch 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
7
6
5
7
6
5
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
25A - 25B
7.5A 3 2 1 6 5 4
1 2 CAB33.6/CAB07.3 R
4 4
R6 Manual air conditioning unit 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
3
2
3
2
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
10A
CAB35.25B/S25.1 B S25 S25.1/CAB33.6 B
6
5
6
5
CAB33.6/CAB126.2 R
1 1 8 1 2 3 4 4
-7 2 5
R7 Rear windscreen wiper switch 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
CAB42 CAB42
3
2
1
3
2
1
FAI74 CAB124/CAB07.2 N
7 4 5 6 CAB111 CAB124 1
R51 Flashing beacon switch 1 CAB33 CAB33
36 Laser radio
49 X2 instrument panel +8 1 +3
S7.1/R51.8 B
C8
C7
C8
C7
10
C6 C6
9
8 8
R51.7/R42.1 N
R51 7 7 C5 C5
6
C4 C4 CAB63 CAB63
6 6
1 2 C3 C3
5 5
8 1 2 3
5
4 4 C2 C2 1 1
+8 3
2 2
3 3
FAI94 C1 C1
4
2 2 B8 B8 3 3
-7 2 7 4 5 6 4 4
7
1 1 B7 B7
R51 R51
B6 B6 5
6
5
6
CAB63
B5 B5 CAB111.1/CAB63.7 N
R42 1 B4 B4 7 7
CAB63.8/S25.1 B
B3 B3 8 8
S7 R52.B2/S7.1 B R52.B2/S25.1 B 9 9 -7 2
B2 B2
B1 B1 10 10
A8 A8
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A7 A7
A6 A6
A5 A5
A4 A4
10
S7.1/R7.8 B A3 A3
9
8 8
R7.7/R49.1 N A2 A2
+8 1 +3 4 6 7 7
6
A1 A1 CAB64 CAB64
6 6
R7 5 5 R52 R52 1 1
5
4 4 8 1 2 3 2 2
1 2
CAB144
1
3 3
4
3 3
2 2 4 4
7
1 1 7 4 5 6 5
6
5
6
CAB64
-7 R7 R7 CAB111.1/CAB64.7 N
2 1 7 7
1 2 S25.1/CAB64.8 B 8 8
R49 1 CAB111.1/CAB64.9 N
3 9 9
S25.1/CAB64.10 B 10 10
3
CAB144
+8 1 +3 CAB50.3/CAB144.8 B CAB50.3/S25.1 B
8 8 3 3
CAB50.2/CAB144.7 N CAB50.2/CAB111.1 N
7 7 2 2
6 6 1 1
1 2 5 5
4 4 CAB50 CAB50
6
36 3
2
3
2
FAI101 CAB44 CAB44
5
2
-7 2 1 1 1 1 +8 1 +3
8 2 2
4
7 CAB144
R8.6/S7.1 B 3 3
6 4 4
CAB44
7
5 5 5 1 2
4 8 1 2 3
2 4 6 8 6 6
3 CAB44.7/CAB109.1 N 7 7
2 7 4 5 6 CAB44.8/S25.1 B 8 8
1 3 5 7 -7 2
1
6 5 4 3 2 1
R8
3 2 1 6 5 4
CAB147
6 6
CAB89.1/CAB147.8 B
+8 1 +3 8 8 5 5
CAB89.4/CAB147.7 N CAB111.1/CAB89.4 N
7 7 4 4
6 6 3 3
6
5 5 2 2
S25.1/CAB89.1 B CAB45 CAB45
1 2 4 4 1 1
5
2
3 3 +8 1 +3
1 1
2 2 FAI109 CAB89 CAB89 2 2
4
1 1 3
-7 2
4
3
4 CAB45
7
1 2
CAB147 5 5
4 6 6
CAB45.7/CAB109.1 N 7
R6 3
2
R6.1/S7.1 B
8 1 2 3 CAB45.8/S25.1 B 8
7
8 -7 2
1
7 4 5 6
R6
3 4 CAB147
1 2
CAB109 1
MA-10-03275A
Fig. 5
Contents
Instrument panel and platform console

backlighting
FAI 73 Linkage / cab interior harness CAB02

SWITCH ATC LED
LED
CAB05
R2
VITESSE DESCENTE LED
FAI 85 Platform instrument panel harness - NAO CAB47

25 14
75R LED
1N4001
SWITCH UP/DOWN
49 MAX 4K7 MIN
FAI 101 Handrail road lights harness 25

24
23
25
24
23 13 1
INTERMIX POS/EFFORT
150R
560R
75R
1N4001
DOWN
NEUTRAL
UP OFF
NEUTRAL
ON
22 22
FAI 109 Additional headlights harness 21
20
21
20 POSITION 4K7
75R
EFFORT
R1 560R
19 19 1 2 3 4 5 6
CAB 02 Linkage console 18

17
16
18
17
16
POSITION HAUTE
15 15
CAB 05 UP/DOWN switch
75R
14 14
MAX 4K7 MIN LED
13 13
CAB47.12/S12.1 B S12 15R
12 12
CAB 35 Fuse box 11

10
11
10
9 9 CAB02 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CAB05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CAB 42 Light switch CAB35

8
7
6
8
7
6
FAI73
8 1 2 3 10
5 5 14 6

10
B
13 5
4 4 16
12
9
4
2
15 8 1
S3.1/CAB02.12 N S3 CAB05.7/S3.1 N
3 3 11 3
CAB35.26B/S12.1
7
F26-7.5A 2 2 +12V 7 4 5 6 9
CAB 45 Rear work headlights switch F25-10A

1 1
CAB47
S4.1/CAB02.13 R S4 CAB05.8/S4.1 R
N
R
CAB 63 4WD switch
CAB07.3/S4.1
CAB07.2/S3.1
CAB 64 Differential switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CAB 144Handrail lights switch 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
1 CAB108 CAB07 1 2 3 4 5
CAB 147Additional headlights switch 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
CAB42
CAB35
CAB07 1 2 3 4 5
26A - 26B
CAB 139Flashing beacon switch 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
+3 +6
CAB42
8 8
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 7 7.5A
49 X2 instrument panel 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
1 2
6
5
4
6
5
4
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
25A - 25B
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B CAB35.25B/S25.1 B S25 S25.1/CAB07.3 B
3 3
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 2 2
10A CAB07.2/CAB109.1 N
1 1 8 1 2 3
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A -7 2 5
CAB42
7 4 5 6 CAB111
CAB139
CAB139
+8 1 +3
S25.1/CAB139.8 B
10
9
8 8
CAB139.7/CAB111.1 N
7 7
6
1 2
6
5
6
5
CAB63 CAB63
8 1 2 3
5
1
4
3
4
3
FAI85 2
1
2
+8 3
4
2 2 3 3
-7 2 7 4 5 6
7
1 1 4 4
5 5
CAB139 6 6
CAB111.1/CAB63.7 N
7 7
CAB63.8/S25.1 B
8 8
9 9 -7 2
10 10
CAB63
10
9
CAB64
6
CAB64
1 1
5
2 2 +8 3 +10
4
3 3
CAB144 4 4
7
5 5
2 1 6 6
1 2 CAB111.1/CAB64.7 N
7 7
S25.1/CAB64.8 B
3 8 8
CAB111.1/CAB64.9 N
9 9
S25.1/CAB64.10 B -7 2 -9
3 10 10
CAB144 CAB50
CAB64
+8 1 +3 CAB50.3/CAB144.8 B CAB50.3/S25.1 B
8 8 3 3
CAB50.2/CAB144.7 N CAB50.2/CAB111.1 N
7 7 2 2
6 6 1 1
1 2 5 5
4 4 CAB50
6
3 3 FAI101
2 2 CAB44 CAB44
5
2
-7 2 1 1
1 1 +8 1 +3
2 2
1
CAB144
4
3 3
7
4 4
5 5 1 2
8 1 2 3
6 6
CAB44.7/CAB109.1 N
CAB147 7 4 5 6 CAB44.8/S25.1 B
7
8
7
8
-7 2
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB44
3 2 1 6 5 4
CAB147
6 6
CAB89.1/CAB147.8 B
+8 1 +3 8 8 5 5
CAB89.4/CAB147.7 N CAB111.1/CAB89.4 N
7 7 4 4
6 6 3 3
6
1 2
5 5 2 2
S25.1/CAB89.1 B CAB45
CAB45
4 4 1 1
5
2
3 3 FAI109 1 1
+8 1 +3
2 2 CAB89 CAB89
2 2
4
1 1 3 3
-7 2
4 4
7
1 2
CAB147 5 5
6 6
CAB45.7/CAB109.1 N
7 7
8 1 2 3 CAB45.8/S25.1 B -7 2
8 8
CAB45
7 4 5 6
MA-10-03447A
CAB109 1
Fig. 6

Contents
Standard roof ventilation

except US)
FAI 94 Standard roof harness
CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB78 Air conditioning relay
CAB 79 Maximum fuse holder 3
R6 Manual air conditioning +12V

29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
3 Start switch
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
CAB109 1 CAB111 1
CAB35
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
CAB108 1
N
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
R52.A8/CAB109.1
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
CAB87 1
F9-10A CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R
4
1
3
3
N
R52.C1/CAB111.1
R6 R6
M
1 1
CAB79.1/CAB108.1
2 2 C8 C8
N
R
3 3 R52.C8/R6.3 R C7 C7
9B - 9A
CAB78.1/CAB111.1
4 4 C6 C6
S5.1/R52.C8
C5 C5
C4
R
C4
C3 C3
CAB35.9A/CAB78.3
R6 10A
C2 C2
C1 C1 FAI84
B8 B8 CAB35
B7 B7
FAI94 B6 B6
B5 B5
B4 S5 S5.1/CAB78.4 R
B4
R52.C1/R10.1 N B3 B3 CAB79.2/CAB78.2 M
R52.A8/R10.1 N B2 B2
1 2
B1 B1
A8 A8 3 1
R10 2 1 CAB79 4 3 2 1 CAB78
R
A7 A7
A6 A6
R52.A1/S5.1
4
A5 A5 2 1 CAB79 4 3 2 1 CAB78
A4 A4
A3 A3
A2 A2
R52.A1/R6.2 R A1 A1 86 30
R52 R52
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
85 87
CAB79 CAB78
MA-10-03266A
Fig. 7
Contents
High visibility roof ventilation
FAI 78 High visibility roof harness

except US)
CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB78 Air conditioning relay
CAB 79 Maximum fuse holder 3
R6 Manual air conditioning
3 Start switch 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A +12V
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
CAB109 1 CAB111 1
CAB35
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
CAB108 1
N
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
R52.A8/CAB109.1
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
CAB87 1
F9-10A CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R
7 6 5
4 3 2 1
R6 R6
N
R52.C1/CAB111.1
1 1
M
2 2
3 3
CAB79.1/CAB108.1
4 4 C8
N
C8
R
5 5 C7 C7
FAI84 9B - 9A
CAB78.1/CAB111.1
6 6 C6 C6
S5.1/R52.C8
R52.C8/R6.7 R C5
7 7 C5
R
C4 C4
C3 C3
CAB35.9A/CAB78.3
R6 10A
C2 C2
C1 C1
B8 B8 CAB35
B7 B7
FAI78 B6 B6
B5 B5
B4 S5 S5.1/CAB78.4 R
B4
R52.C1/R10.1 N B3 B3 CAB79.2/CAB78.2 M
R52.A8/R10.1 N B2 B2
1 2
B1 B1
R10 A8 A8 3 1
2 1 CAB79 4 3 2 1 CAB78
R
A7 A7
A6 A6
R52.A1/S5.1
2 1 CAB79 4 4 3 2 1 CAB78
A5 A5
R6.5/R48.1 N A4 A4
1 A3
A3
A2 A2
R48 R52.A1/R6.2 R
A1 A1 86 30
R52 R52
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
MA-10-03267A 85 87
CAB79
Fig. 8

Contents
Standard roof extreme cold ventilation

except US)
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A 3
CAB 35 Fuse box
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
CAB 79 Maximum fuse holder 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
+12V
R6 Manual air conditioning CAB35
R 33 Heating accelerator pump 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
3 Start switch 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B

CAB109 1 CAB111 1
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
CAB108 1
F9-10A
N
4
R52.A8/CAB109.1
1
3
3
1
CAB87 1
R6 R6
CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R
1 1
2 2
R52.C8/R6.3 R
3 3
N
4 4
R52.C1/CAB111.1
M
R
R6
CAB79.1/CAB108.1
R52.A1/R6.2
C8 C8
N
R
FAI94 C7 C7
9B - 9A
CAB78.1/CAB111.1
C6 C6
S5.1/R52.C8
R34 1 2 C5 C5
FAI84
R
C4 C4
C3 C3
R52.C1/R10.1 N
CAB35.9A/CAB78.3
R34 1 2 10A
1 C2 C2
R52.A8/R10.1 N
R6.3/R34.1 R C1 C1
B8 B8 CAB35
R10 B7 B7
B6 B6
B5 B5
B4 B4
S5 S5.1/CAB78.4 R
B3 B3 CAB79.2/CAB78.2 M
B2 B2
R34.2/R33.2 R 2
B1 B1
A8 A8 3 1
4 3 2 1 CAB78
2 1 CAB79
R
A7 A7
A6 A6
R52.A1/S5.1
4
R33 2 1 CAB79 4 3 2 1 CAB78
R52.A1/R6.2
A5 A5
A4 A4
A3 A3
A2 A2
A1 A1 86 30
R52 R52
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
2 2
1 1
85 87
N
R33 R33 CAB79

R33.1/R49.1
1 R49
MA-10-03410A
Fig. 9
Contents
High visibility roof extreme cold ventila-

tion

29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
except US)
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
CAB 35 Fuse box 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
+12V
CAB 79 Maximum fuse holder CAB35
R6 Manual air conditioning 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
R 33 Heating accelerator pump 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B

CAB109 1 CAB111 1
3 Start switch 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
CAB108 1
F9-10A
N
3
R52.A8/CAB109.1
R6 R6
CAB87 1
1 1
R52.A1/R6.2 R CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
N
6 6
R52.C8/R6.7 R
R52.C1/CAB111.1
7 7
M
R6
CAB79.1/CAB108.1
C8 C8
N
R
FAI78 C7 C7
9B - 9A
CAB78.1/CAB111.1
C6 C6
S5.1/R52.C8
R34 1 2 C5 C5
FAI84
R
C4 C4
R52.C1/R10.1 N
1 C3 C3
1 2 R52.A8/R10.1 N
CAB35.9A/CAB78.3
R34 10A
C2 C2
R10 C1 C1
R6.2/R34.1 R
B8 B8 CAB35
B7 B7
R6.5/R48.1 N
1 B6 B6
B5 B5
R48 S5 S5.1/CAB78.4 R
B4 B4
B3 B3 CAB79.2/CAB78.2 M
B2 B2
R34.2/R33.2 R 2
B1 B1
A8 A8 3 1
2 1 CAB79 4 3 2 1 CAB78
R
A7 A7
A6 A6
R52.A1/S5.1
4
R33 A5 A5 2 1 CAB79 4 3 2 1 CAB78
A4 A4
A3 A3
A2 A2
A1 A1 86 30
R52 R52
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
2 2
1 1
85 87
R33 R33
N
CAB79
R33.1/R49.1
1 R49 MA-10-03411A
Fig. 10

Contents
Manual air conditioning for standard roof
FAI 82 Engine harness

FAI 84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries 3
except US)
4
CAB 35 Fuse box
3
1
3
1
C8 C8
C7 C7
CAB 78 Maximum fuse holder R52.C7/R6.4 B C6 C6
+12V
4 4
ENG 15 Air conditioning condensor pressure switch R52.C8/R6.3 R C5 C5
3 3
R52.A1/R6.2 R C4 C4
2 2
B
ENG 16 Air conditioning compressor 1 1 C3 C3
C2 C2
R6 Manual air conditioning
S5.1/R52.C8
R6 R6 C1 C1 CAB87 1 CAB108 1 CAB111 1 CAB109 1
R6 B8
3 Start switch FAI94 B8
B7
B7
R
B6 B6
CAB35.9B/CAB87.1
R52.C1/R10.1 N B5 B5
R52.A8/R10.1 N B4 B4
1
B3 B3
R10 B2 B2
CAB35 B1 R52.C1/CAB111.1 N
B1 R52.A8/CAB109.1 N
A8 A8
A7 A7
N
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
A6 A6
A5 9B - 9A
CAB79.1/CAB108.1
A5
CAB39.2/CAB111.1
CAB39.3/CAB108.1 M
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
A4 A4
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A3 A3 B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1
A2 A2
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
10A
A1 A1
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
R52 R52 CAB35

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
R
R
CAB35.9A/CAB78.3
F9-10A
R52.A1/S5.1
31 31
30 30
29 29
28 28 FAI84
27 27
26 26
25 25
24 CAB79.2/CAB78.2 M
24
1 23 S5 S5.1/CAB78.4 R CAB78.1/CAB111.1 N
1 23
22 R52.C7/CAB39.1 B
22
21 ENG1.4/CAB39.5 B
ENG16 ENG16 21
20 20 2 5
19 19
18 18 2 1 CAB79 3 1 4 3 2 1 CAB78 2 4 1 5 4 3 2 1 CAB39
17 17
B
ENG16 16 16 2 1 CAB79 4 4 3 2 1 CAB78 3 5 4 3 2 1 CAB39
ENG15.2/ENG16.1
15 15
14 14
13 13 30
12 12
FAI82
11 11 85 87a 86
10 10 86 30
9 9
8 8
87
7 7
ENG15 6 6
MANO-CONTACT
5 5
2 2 4 4 85 87
ENG1.4/ENG15.1 B CAB78
N.C.
1 1 3 3
2 2
ENG15 1 1
ENG1 ENG1
2 1 1 2
31 20
30 8 21 20 31
19 9 21 8 30
18 2 10 9 19
7 10 2 18
29 3 22
ENG15 28
17
16
6
1
5
4
11
12
23
22
23
11
3
4
1
7
6
17
29
28 MA-10-03412A
12 5 16
15 13 13 15
27 14 24 24 14 27
26 25 25 26
Fig. 11
Contents
Manual air conditioning for high visibility

roof
FAI 78 High visibility roof harness 3

FAI 82 Engine harness
4 3
6
2
5
1
except US) R52.C8/R6.7 R C8 C8
C7
CAB 35 Fuse box 7 7 C7
C6
+12V
6 6 C6
CAB 78 Maximum fuse holder 5 5
R6.5/R48.1 N C5 C5
C4 C4
4 4
ENG 15 Air conditioning condensor pressure switch 3 3 C3 C3
R52.A1/R6.2 R C2 C2
ENG 16 Air conditioning compressor R6 2 2
R52.C7/R6.1 B C1 CAB87 1
1 1 C1 CAB108 1 CAB111 1 CAB109 1
R6 Manual air conditioning B8 B8
B
R6 R6 FAI94 B7 B7
R
3 Start switch B6 B6
S5.1/R52.C8
R52.C1/R10.1 N
CAB35.9B/CAB87.1
B5 B5
1 R52.A8/R10.1 N B4 B4
R10 B3 B3
B2 B2
CAB35 1 R52.C1/CAB111.1 N
B1 B1
R52.A8/CAB109.1 N
R48 A8 A8
A7 A7
M
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A A6 A6
A5 9B - 9A
A5
CAB79.1/CAB108.1
N
CAB39.3/CAB108.1 M
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A4 A4
CAB39.2/CAB111.1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A3 A3 B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1
A2 A2
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
10A
A1 A1
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
R52 R52 CAB35

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
R
R
CAB35.9A/CAB78.3
F9-10A
R52.A1/S5.1
31 31
30 30
29 29
28 28 FAI84
27 27
26 26
25 25
CAB79.2/CAB78.2 M
24 24
1 S5 S5.1/CAB78.4 R CAB78.1/CAB111.1 N
1 23 23
R52.C7/CAB39.1 B
22 22
ENG16 ENG16 ENG1.4/CAB39.5 B
21 21
20 20 2 5
19 19
18 18 2 1 CAB79 3 1 4 3 2 1 CAB78 2 4 1 5 4 3 2 1 CAB39
17 17
B
16 16 2 1 CAB79 4
4 3 2 1 CAB78 3 5 4 3 2 1 CAB39
ENG16
ENG15.2/ENG16.1
15 15
14 14
13 13 30
12 12
FAI82
11 11 85 86
87a
10 10 86 30
9 9
87
8 8
7 7
6 6
MANO-CONTACT
5 5
2 2 4 4 85 87
ENG1.4/ENG15.1 B CAB78
N.C.
1 1 3 3
2 2
ENG15 ENG15 1 1
ENG1 ENG1
2 1 1 2
31 20
30 8 21 20 31
19 9 21 8 30
18 2 10 9 19
7 10 2 18
29 3 22
ENG15 28
17
16
6
1
5
4
11
12
23
22
23
11
3
4
1
7
6
17
29
28
MA-10-03413A
12 5 16
15 13 13 15
27 14 24 24 14 27
26 25 25 26
Fig. 12

Contents
Radio - Europe
FAI 16 Battery circuit-breaker harness

except US)
FAI 94 Standard roof harness - EU 1 R49
CAB 35 Fuse box

CAB 42 Light switch R8
1
CAB 71 Cab relay 2 36
1 3
R52.B3/R8.4 R
3 Start switch CAB109
4
5
6
20 Circuit breaker R52 R52
S3.1/R8.7
R8.8/R49.1
M
N
7
8
36 Laser radio A1 A1
A2
A2 2 4 6 8
37 Loudspeaker A3
A4
A3
A4 1 3 5 7
CAB35 A5 A5
R52.A5/S3.1 M S3
47 Battery CAB71 86 30
A6 A6
CAB71.4/CAB35.11A R
4 4 A7 A7 R9
CAB71.3/CAB35.9A R
3 3 11A - 11B A8 A8
CAB71.2/CAB108.1 M
2 2 B1 B1 1
CAB71.1/CAB109.1 N
1 1 B2 B2 2
R52.B3/CAB35.11B R B3 B3 3
CAB71 CAB71 15A
B4 B4 4
85 87 B5 B5 5
9A - 9B
6
B6 B6
FAI94
1
B7 B7 7
B8 B8 8
2
10A
4
C1 C1
C2 C2
3
2 4 6 8
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
C3 C3
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
C4 C4 3
1 5 7
+12V FAI84
C5
C6
C5
C6
CAB108 C7 C7
C8 C8
1
R9.1/R45.1 B
1
R45
3
CAB87
CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R
1
R9.2/R20.1 N
1
R20
37
F- 5A
1 1 R52.A5/CAB105.1 M
R41.1/R9.7 B
CAB105 CAB105 1
1
R41
1 CAB35
C26
FAI16 R22.1/R9.8 N
1
20 R22
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
37
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
+ +12V - 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
MA-10-03414A
47
F9-10A F11-15A
Fig. 13
Contents
Radio - Germany
FAI 16 Battery circuit-breaker harness

FAI 22 Radio harness
FAI 75 Standard roof harness - US
FAI 84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries 2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
except US) 36
1 R49
ALIM
CAB 35 Fuse box 1
1 1
CAB 42 Light switch CAB109 2

3
2
3
4 4
CAB 71 Cab relay R52 R52 FAI75 5 5
6 6
3 Start switch A1 A1
7
8
7
8
A2 A2
20 Battery circuit breaker A3 A3

ALIM
F003_PLUS_PERMANENT_RADIO 1MM_MARRON
A4 A4
R52.A5/S3.1 M S3
A5
36 Laser radio CAB35 A5
F001_PLUS_ACC_RADIO 1MM_ROUGE
86 30
A6 A6
CAB71.4/CAB35.11A R A7 A7
4 4
37 Loudspeaker CAB71
3 3
CAB71.3/CAB35.9A R
CAB71.2/CAB108.1 M
A8 A8
B1
2 2 B1
F004_MASSE 1_4MM_NOIR
CAB71.1/CAB109.1 N 11A - 11B
47 Battery 1 1
R52.B3/CAB35.11B R
B2
B3
B2
B3
R52.B3/R8.3 R
HP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 4 6 8
CAB71 CAB71 B4 B4
85 87 15A B5 1 3
B5 HP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 7
B6 B6
FAI22
1
9A - 9B
F007_HP_GAUCHE 0_6MM_BLANC
B7 B7
F008_HP_GAUCHE 0_6MM_NOIR
F006_HP_DROIT 0_6MM_BLANC
B8 B8
F006_HP_DROIT 0_6MM_NOIR
4
C1 C1
10A C2
C2
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
C3
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
C3
C4 C4
C5 C5
+12V C6 C6
C7 C7
C8 R8.8/R49.1 N
CAB108 C8 4
3
S3.1/R8.2 M
1 2
1
R8
1 2 3 4
R9 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
FAI84 CAB35
3
CAB87
CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
1
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
F9-10A
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
F11-15A R9.1/R45.1 B
R9.2/R20.1 N
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A R41.1/R9.3 B

F- 5A
R22.1/R9.4 N
R52.A5/CAB105.1 M
1 1 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
CAB105 CAB105 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A

1
C26
FAI16 R41
20 1
1
R45
+ +12V - R22
1
1
37 R20 37
47 MA-10-03415A
Fig. 14

Contents
Radio - North America
FAI 16 Circuit-breaker harness

FAI 83 Cab instrument panel harness - US
CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB 42 Light switch 1
1 R49
CAB 71 Cab relay CAB109
3 Start switch R8
20 Battery circuit breaker R52 R52

S3.1/R8.2 M
1
2
A1 A1
36 Laser radio A2 A2 R8.8/R49.1 N
3
4 36
A3 A3
CAB35
37 Loudspeaker 86 30
R52.A5/CAB105.1 M
A4
A5
A4
A5
R52.A5/S3.1 M S3
A6
47 Battery CAB71
4
3
4
3
CAB71.4/CAB35.11A R
CAB71.3/CAB35.9A R
11A - 11B
A6
A7 A7
1 2 3 4
CAB71.2/CAB108.1 M A8 A8
2 2 B1
CAB71.1/CAB109.1 N B1
1 1
B2 B2
R52.B3/CAB35.11B R R52.B3/R8.3 R
85 87 B3 B3
CAB71 CAB71
9A - 9B B4 B4 R9
B5 B5
1
1
B6 B6
B7
2
B7
3
B8
2
B8
4
4
C1 C1
C2
3
C2
C3 C3
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
C4 C4 FAI75
1 2 3 4
+12V C5 C5
FAI83 C6 C6
C7 C7
CAB108
C8 C8
1
HP DROITE
R9.1/R45.1 B
1
3
R45
CAB87
1 CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R
R9.2/R20.1 N
1
R20
37
F- 5A
1 1
CAB105 CAB105 HP GAUCHE

1 R41.1/R9.3 B
1
1 R41
C26 CAB35
FAI 16
20
R22.1/R9.4 N
1
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
R22
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
37
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
+12V
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
MA-10-03416A
47
F9-10A F11-15A
Fig. 15
Contents
Windscreen wiper for standard front

windscreen

except US)
FAI 91 Cab lighting harness (all countries except US)
5 CAB145
1
FAI 103 Top windscreen wiper - Instrument panel
2 4 1 CAB111
harness CAB76
CAB 35 Fuse box 3 FAI119
CAB31 CAB31 CAB145
CAB 71 Cab relay CAB76.5/CAB31.1 B 1 1 1 1
CAB76 F2 ESSUIE GLACE VI B
2 2 2 2
CAB 76 Windscreen wiper timer relay 85
1 1
CAB35.10B/CAB31.3
CAB31.4/CAB90.1
R
B
3 3
F1 PLUS 12V APC R
3 3
2 2 4 4 4 4
CAB 90 Windscreen wiper control unit 87 87a
30
3
4
3
4
CAB76.3/CAB31.5
CAB31.6/CAB111.1
B
N
5
6
5
6
F3 REMISE A ZERO
F4 MASSE
B
N CAB145
3 4
CAB 145Front windscreen wiper motor 86
5 5
CAB76 1 2
2 1 6 5 4
LIG 3 Windscreen washer pump 3
6 5 4 3 2 1
3 Start switch
CAB76.2/CAB109.1 N
1
FAI84 CAB35 CAB109
11B - 11A
CAB71
15A
CAB76.1/CAB90.13 B
CAB31.2/CAB90.11 B
CAB76.3/CAB90.12 B
R
CAB76.4/CAB35.10B R 10B - 10A 86 30
CAB90.3/CAB76.4
CAB71CAB71
11 12 13
25A CAB71.1/CAB109.1 N
6
1 1
CAB71.2/CAB108.1 M
2 2
5
CAB71.3/CAB35.9A R
3 3
9B - 9A CAB71.4/CAB35.11A R
4 4
4
CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R
10
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB90 2
10A
9
3 1 85 87
1
8
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB90
CAB87 1 CAB108 1
4
(4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
3
I O
J klaxon
+12V CAB35
II
lave vitre
F11-15A
28A
28B
12A
12B
32A
16A
56b 56a L (10) H
(5) (6) (2) F10-25A
11A
11B
27A
27B
32B
16B
26A
10A
26B
10B
F9-10A
31A
15A
25A
25B
9A
9B
31B
15B
24A
24B
8A
8B
23A
23B
7A
7B
CAB90
22A
22B
6A
6B
LIG3
21A
21B
5A
30A
5B
14A
LIG1 LIG1
1 1 FAI91
20A
20B
14A
30B
4A
4B
2 2 LIG3 LIG3
3 3
19A
19B
LIG3.1/LIG2.1 N
3A
3B
4 4 1 1
CAB90.2/LIG1.5 B LIG1.5/LIG3.2 B
29A
13A
5 5 2 2
18A
18B
2A
2B
6 6
29B
13B
7 7
17A
17B
1A
7
1B
5 6 7
1
6
5
2
4
4
1 2 3
3
2
1
MA-10-03445A
1
LIG2
Fig. 16

Contents
Windscreen wiper for opening front

windscreen

except US)
5
1
FAI 103 Top windscreen wiper - Instrument panel FAI103 FAI104
2 4 1 CAB111
CAB146
harness CAB76
FAI 104 Top windsscreen wiper - Roof harness 3
CAB31 CAB31 CAB145 CAB145 CAB146
CAB 35 Fuse box CAB76 CAB76
CAB76.5/CAB31.1 B 1 1 1 1 CAB145.1/CAB146.1 R
1 1
2 2 CAB31.2/CAB145.2 B CAB145.2/CAB146.2 B
2 2 2 2
CAB 71 Cab relay 85
1 1
CAB35.10B/CAB31.3 R
CAB31.4/CAB90.1 B
3 3
CAB31.3/CAB145.1 R
3 3 CAB145.3/CAB146.4
CAB145.4/CAB146.4
B
N
3 3
2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4
CAB76.3/CAB31.5 B CAB31.5/CAB145.3 B
CAB 76 Windscreen wiper timer relay 87 87a
30
3
4
3
4
CAB31.6/CAB111.1 N
5
6
5
6
CAB31.6/CAB145.4 N CAB146
3 4
CAB 90 Windscreen wiper control unit 86
5 5 3 4 4 3
1 2
2 1 6 5 4 1 2 2 1
CAB 146Front windscreen wiper motor 3
6 5 4 3 2 1
LIG 3 Windscreen washer pump

3 Start switch CAB76.2/CAB109.1 N
1
CAB35 CAB109
11B - 11A
CAB71
15A
CAB76.1/CAB90.13 B FAI84
CAB31.2/CAB90.11 B
CAB76.3/CAB90.12 B
R
CAB76.4/CAB35.10B R 10B - 10A 86 30
CAB90.3/CAB76.4
CAB71 CAB71
11 12 13
25A CAB71.1/CAB109.1 N
6
1 1
CAB71.2/CAB108.1 M 2 2
5
CAB71.3/CAB35.9A R
3 3
9B - 9A CAB71.4/CAB35.11A R
4 4
4
CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R
10
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB90 2
10A
9
3 1 85 87
1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB90
8
CAB87 1 CAB108 1
4
(4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
3
I O
J klaxon +12V CAB35
II
lave vitre
F11-15A
28A
12A
28B
12B
L (10)
32A
16A
56b 56a H
(5) (6) (2) F10-25A
11A
11B
27A
27B
32B
16B
26A
10A
26B
10B
F9-10A
31A
25A
15B 15A
25B
9A
9B
31B
24A
24B
8A
8B
23A
23B
7A
7B
CAB90
22A
22B
6A
6B
LIG3
21A
21B
FAI91
5A
5B
30A
LIG1 LIG1
14A 14A
20A
20B
1 1
30B
4A
4B
2 2 LIG3 LIG3
3 3
19A
19B
LIG3.1/LIG2.1 N
3A
3B
4 4 1 1
CAB90.2/LIG1.5 B LIG1.5/LIG3.2 B
29A
13A
5 5 2 2
18A
18B
2A
2B
6 6
29B
13B
7 7
17A
17B
1A
7
1B
5 6 7
1
6
5
2
4
4
1 2 3
3
2
1
MA-10-03417A
1
LIG2
Fig. 17
Contents
Rear windscreen wiper

except US) CAB35
FAI 94 Standard roof harness - EU
CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB 71 Cab relay 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
R7 Rear windscreen wiper switch

R21 Rear windscreen wiper motor 3
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
3 Start switch 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
F9-10A
CAB87
CAB35B.9B/CAB87.1 R 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
1 F11-15A
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
R52 R52
FAI94 R7
FAI84 R7 R7
9A - 9B
A1 A1
R7.1/R7.6 B
A2 A2 1 1
+8 1 +3 4 6
A3 A3 2 2
A4 A4 3 3
11A - 11B
A5 A5 4 4
R52.A6/CAB35.11B R R52.A6/S9.1 R S9 S9.1/R7.5 R 5 5
A6 A6 1 2
A7 A7 6 6
R7.7/R49.1 N
A8 A8 7 7
CAB35 B1 B1 8 8
B2 B2 -7
B3 B3 8 1 2 3
B4 B4
CAB71 B5
B5 7 4 5 6
B6
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
B6
B7 B7
86 B8 B8
CAB71 CAB71 30
C1 C1
CAB71.1/CAB109.1 N C2
1 1 C2
CAB71.2/CAB108.1 M
2 2 C3 C3
CAB71.3/CAB35.9A R
3 3 C4 C4
CAB71.4/CAB35.11A R
4 4 C5 C5 3 4 R21
C6 C6
85 87 C7 1 2
2 C7
C8 C8
3 1 R21.4/R49.1 N
4 4
R21.3/R7.2 B
3 3
R7.6/R21.2 B
4 2 2
S9.1/R21.1 R
1 1
R21 R21
CAB109 1 CAB108 1
R49 1
+12V
MA-10-03418A
Fig. 18

Contents
Cab accessories electrical socket
FAI 71 Cab interior electrical socket harness - EEC

standard
FAI 74 Cab console harness
except US) Fil-6 ORANGE
1
CAB 35 Fuse box
6
3 Start switch
63 Cab internal socket FAI71 EP1 Fil-8 ORANGE
1
FAI74 63
8
CAB129 CAB129
CAB35.1B/CAB34.4 M CAB34.4/S2.1 M S2 S2.1/CAB129.1 M Fil-1 ORANGE
4 4 1 1
3 3 2 2
2 CAB129.3/S2.1 M Fil-2 ORANGE
3 2 3 4 3 3 1
4 1 CAB124.1/CAB129.4 N Fil-3 N
1 4 4
CAB129.5/CAB124.1 N 5 5 2
2 1
CAB34 CAB34
1 2
6 6
EP2 Fil-9 N
6 5 4 1
3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 9
6 6
5 5
CAB35.20B/CAB33.4 R C33.4/CAB129.6 R Fil-7 N
4 4 1
3 3
2 2 7
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB124 1
1 1
3 2 1 6 5 4
Fil-4 N
CAB33 CAB33 1
FAI84
FAI84
Fil-5 R
1
CAB35
CAB35
+12V 5
1B - 1A
CAB35
CAB35
CAB108.1/CAB35.1A M
1
30A CAB108
28A
12A
28B
12B
32A
16A
11A
11B
27A
27B
20B - 20A
32B
16B
26A
10A
26B
10B
10A
31A
25A
15A
25B
9A
9B
31B
15B
24A
24B
8A
8B
22B - 22A
F22-5A
23A
23B
7A
7B
3 3
22A
22B
6A
5A
6B
21A
21B
F20-10A
5A
5B
30A
14A
20A
20B
14A
30B
4A
4B
CAB35.22A/CAB85.1 R
1
19A
19B
3A
3B
CAB85 F1-30A
29A
13A
18A
18B
2A
2B
29B
13B
17A
17B
1A
1B
MA-10-03280A
Fig. 19
Contents
Platform accessories electrical socket
FAI 71 CEE electrical socket harness

FAI 117 X2 Platform instrument panel harness - EU
CAB 35 Fuse box
3 Start switch
63 Cab internal socket Fil-6 ORANGE
1
FAI71 EP1 Fil-8 ORANGE 63

1
8
CAB129 CAB129
S29/S31 S29.1/CAB129.1 M Fil-1 ORANGE
1 1
2 2
S29.1/CAB129.3 M Fil-2 ORANGE
3 3 1
CAB129.4/CAB111.1 N Fil-3 N
4 4
CAB129.5/CAB111.1 N 2
5 5
6 6
EP2 Fil-9 N
6 5 4
1
3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 9
FAI86
M
S29.1/CAB35.1B
Fil-7 N
1
7
CAB111 1
R
Fil-4 N
CAB129.6/CAB35.20B
Fil-5 R
1
5
CAB35
1B - 1A
+12V
CAB35
CAB108.1/CAB35.1A M
1
30A CAB108
28A
12A
28B
12B
32A
16A
11A
11B
27A
27B
20B - 20A
32B
16B
26A
10A
26B
10B
10A
31A
25A
15A
25B
9A
9B
31B
15B
24A
24B
8A
8B
22B - 22A
F22-5A
23A
23B
7A
7B
3
22A
22B
6A
5A
6B
21A
21B
F20-10A
5A
5B
30A
14A
20A
20B
14A
30B
4A
4B
CAB35.22A/CAB85.1 R
1
19A
19B
3A
3B
CAB85 F1-30A
29A
13A
18A
18B
2A
2B
29B
13B
MA-10-03448A
17A
17B
1A
1B
Fig. 20

Contents
Cab internal roof light
FAI 16 Circuit-breaker harness

except US)
R24 Door switch
20 Battery circuit breaker
47 Battery
R47.1/R49.1 N
48 Roof light 1 48
R47
R52 R52
A1 A1
FAI84 FAI94
1 A2 A2
A3 A3
F- 5A
A4 A4
R52.A5/CAB105.1 M R52.A5/S3.1 M S3 S3.1/R46.1 M
1 1 A5 A5 1
A6 A6
A7
R46
CAB105 CAB105 A7
FAI 16 A8 A8
B1 B1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
B2 B2
B3 B3
B4 B4 R24.2/R11.1 B
B5 B5 1
B6 B6
R11
B7 B7
B8 B8
C1 C1
C2 C2
C3 C3
C4 C4
C5 C5
C26 C6 1
C6
1 C7 C7
R49
C8 C8
R24.1/R42.1 N
1
R42
20
1 2
2 1 R24
R24
+12V
+CAB -CAB
MA-10-03419A
47
Fig. 21
Contents
Pneumatic seat

except US)
CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB 123Seat with pneumatic suspension
3 Start switch
CAB35
4 3 3 4
2 1 1 2 CAB123
4 4 FAI74
3A - 3B 3 3
CAB123 CAB123
2 2
S15.1/CAB35.3B R S15 S15.1/CAB34.1 R 1 1 CAB34.1/CAB123.1 R
1 1
CAB123.2/CAB124.1 N 2
2
10A CAB34 CAB34
2
CAB124 1
FAI84
CAB35
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
CAB88.1/CAB35.3A R
1
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
CAB88 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
MA-10-03276A
F3-10A
Fig. 22

Contents
Horn
FAI 82 Perkins engine mechanical injection harness CAB71

CAB 35 Fuse box 86 30
CAB 71 Windscreen wiper timer relay
CAB 76 Cab relay
CAB71.3/CAB35.9A R
22 Wiper control unit
85 87
55Horn
28A
12A
28B
12B
32A
16A
19B - 19A
11A
11B
27A
27B
32B
16B
FAI83 CAB71 1 2 3 4 F11
N CAB109
26A
10A
26B
10B
F10
CAB71.1/CAB109.1 N 7.5A
31A
1
25A
15B 15A
25B
9A
9B
11B - 11A F9
31B
24A
24B
8A
8B
CAB71.4/CAB35.11A R
23A
23B
7A
7B
CAB108 15A
22A
B
22B
6A
6B
CAB71.2/CAB108.1 M 10B - 10A
1
CAB90.7/CAB35.19B
21A
21B
5A
5B
30A
14A 14A
20A
20B
30B
4A
4B
25A
CAB87 9B - 9A
19A
19B
3A
3B
29A
13A
CAB35.9B/CAB87.1 R
1
18A
18B
2A
2B
29B
13B
10A
17A
17B
1A
1B
1
CAB35 F19
2
CAB76.4/CAB35.10B R 22
4
5
CAB90.3/CAB76.4 R
3
4
5
CAB76 3
2
1 CAB90
CAB76 1 1
56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
2 2
3 3
4 4
ENG1 ENG1 5 5 O
I J klaxon
6 6
1 1 7
7 II
2 2 8 lave vitre
8
3 3 9
9
4 4 FAI83 10
10
5 5 11 56b 56a L H
11
6 6 12
ENG1.7/CAB35.19A B 12
7 7 13
13
8 8
9 9 CAB90
55 10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
ENG7.1/ENG1.7 B
14 14
15 15 22
16 16
17 17
18 18
1 ENG8 1 ENG7 19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
ENG8.1/ENG27.1 N
23 23
24 24
FAI82 25 25
26 26
27 27
28 28
29 29
ENG27 30 30
N 31 31
1
MA-10-03446A
Fig. 23
Contents
C . Engine equipment
Air filter vacuum sensor ........................................... 29
Engine oil pressure sensor....................................... 30
Coolant Temperature ............................................... 31
Perkins 4-cylinder engine pre-heater........................ 32
Perkins 4-cylinder engine booster pump.................. 33
Perkins 6-cylinder engine thermostart ..................... 34
Cummins engine power relay .................................. 35
Fuel gauge ............................................................... 36
Battery charge and engine start ............................... 37

Contents
Contents
Air filter vacuum sensor
FAI 82 Perkins engine mechanical injection harness

24 Air filter vacuum sensor
49
31 31
31 20
30 30 20 31
21 8 30
30
19
8
9
21
29 29 9 19
10 2 18
29
18
7
2
3
10
22
28 28 22 3 7 29
11 1 17
28
17
6
1 11
23
27 27 23 4 6 28
4 12 5 16
16 5 12 26 26 13 15
15 13 24 14 27
27 14 24 25 25 25 26
26 25
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20 FAI 82
19 19
18 18 ENG1.8/ENG6.1 B
17 17
CAB46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16 16
15 15
14 14
CAB46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13 13
1
12 12
FAI 83 11 11 1
ENG6
10 10
9 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ENG1.8/CAB46.1 B
8 8 24
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
ENG1 ENG1
1 ENG5
1
ENG27.1/ENG5.1 N
MA-10-03420A
1 ENG27
Fig. 24

Contents
Engine oil pressure sensor

23 Oil pressure sensor
4949
20 31 31 20
21 8 30 30 8 21
9 19 19 9
10 2 18 18 2 10
22 3 7 29 29 7 3 22
11 1 17 17 1 11
23 4 6 28 28 6 4 23
12 5 16 16 5 12
13 15 15 13
24 14 27 14 24
27
25 26 26 25
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ENG1 ENG1
23
23 CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 1
FAI82
FAI 82 2 2 FAI83
FAI 83
ENG20 3 3
4 4 25 14
ENG1.5/ENG20.1 B ENG1.5/CAB47.5 B
1 5 5
6 6 13 1
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
28 28
MA-10-03279A 29 29
30 30
31 31
Fig. 25
Contents
Coolant Temperature

28 Coolant Temperature
31 20 31
20
30 8 21 21 8 30
19 9 9 19
18 2 10 10 2 18
29 7 3 22 22 3 7 29
17 1 11 11 1 17
28 6 4 23 23 4 6 28
16 5 12 12 5 16
15 13 13 15
27 14 24 24 14 27
26 25 25 26
28
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB48
ENG11 FAI82 FAI83
ENG1 ENG1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB48
ENG1.1/ENG11.1 B ENG1.1/CAB48.5 B
1 1 1
2 2
3 3
1
4 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25 25
26 26
MA-10-03268A 27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
Fig. 26

Contents
Perkins 4-cylinder engine pre-heater
FAI82 Perkins engine mechanical injection harness

FAI84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries
except US) 3
ENG12 Preheater relay
ENG31 Preheater spark plug
1
3 Start switch ENG31 ENG12
ENG12
5 Cab interior CAB80
21 In line fuse 31 31
30 30
25 Starter motor 86 30
29 29
5
47 Battery 3
ENG27 28 28
ENG12.2/ENG27.1 N 27 27
2 1 26 26
1 25 25
85 87
24 24
FAI84
ENG12 23 23
22 22 CAB80.1/S26.1 B
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
31 20 16 16
30 8 21 20 31
19 9
15 15 21 8 30
2 18 2 10 14 14 9 19
29 7 3 22 10 2 18
5 13 13
3 28
17
6
1 11
23 12 12
22 3 7 29
4 11 1 17
16 5 12 11 11 23 4 6 28
1 15 13
24 10 10
12
13
5
15
16
27 14
26 25 9 9 24 14 27
25 26
8 8
7 7
6 6
ENG12.3/ENG31.1 B 5 5
1 4 4
3 3 ENG1.3/S26.1 B
ENG1.2/ENG12.1 B ENG1.2/S26.1 B
FAI82 2 2
ENG31 ENG26.1/ENG12.5 M 1 1
ENG1 ENG1
ENG23
ENG24.1/ENG25.1 M ENG26.1/ENG23.1 M 5
1 1 1
ENG24 ENG26
BAT 1 +BAT 1 ENG25 1 21

S26
47 25
+12V
MA-10-03286A
Fig. 27
Contents
Perkins 4-cylinder engine booster pump
FAI82 Perkins engine mechanical injection harness

except US)
ENG12 Preheater relay
ENG31 Preheater spark plug
2 1
ENG27
ENG21.2/ENG27.1 N
1 2 2
S1.1/ENG1.9 R S1 S1.1/ENG21.1 R
1 1
ENG21 ENG21
20 31
21 8 30
9 19
FAI82 22
10
3
2
7
18
29 ENG21
11 1 17
23 4 6 28
12 5 16
13 15
24 14 27
25 26
ENG1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
ENG1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
CAB35 30
31
8
20
21
19 9
18 2 10
29 7 3 22
28
17
6
1
4
11
23
CAB35
16 5 12
15 13
5A - 5B 27 14 24
FAI84 26 25
ENG1.9/S10.1 R
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
30A
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
6A - 6B
3A
3B
19A
19B
F5-30A
14A 14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
30A
10A
5A
5B
21A
21B
F6-10A
6A
6B
22A
22B
3
23B
7A
7B
23A
24B
8A
8B
24A
15B 15A
31B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
1
10A
10B
26A
26B
CAB84
16B
32B
27A
27B
11A
11B
16A
32A
12A
12B
28A
28B
MA-10-03449A
Fig. 28

Contents
Perkins 6-cylinder engine thermostart
FAI 81 Perkins EEM engine harness

except US) CAB35
FAI 93 EEM option adapter harness
CAB 29 Thermostart relay
CAB 35 Fuse box ENG35
+12V
ENG 35 Perkins EEM unit
ENG 37 Thermostart 1
3 Start switch
1 7 8 14
15 28
29 42
43 56
3
57 63 64 70
ENG35
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
M
M
N
N
S8.1/ENG35.57
ENG35.56/S8.1
ENG35.69/S9.1
ENG35.68/S9.1
CAB29
CAB35.24A/CAB106.1 M
CAB35.4A/CAB82.1 R
30
5 85
87a
86
87
2 4 1
S9 S8
3 CAB35
ENG27
ENG27.1/S9.1 N
1
4A-4B
CAB29 1 2 3 4 5
CAB29 1 2 3 4 5 15A-15B
1
CAB30
CAB30.1/CAB29.3 R 24A-24B
CAB29.5/CAB27.2 R
M
S4.1/CAB29.2
FAI93
CAB35.15A/CAB27.2 B
CAB27.3/CAB35.4B R
ENG36 CAB36
ENG36.A/ENG35.70 R ENG36.A/S3.1 R S3
A A
B B S4
C C
D D FAI84
E E
ENG36.F/S8.1 M ENG36.F/S4.1 M
F F
R
G G
H H
S3.1/CAB27.3
ENG36.J/ENG35.43 B ENG36.J/CAB29.1 B
1
J J
4
3
6
K K
L L
5
2
5
2
FAI81 M M
4
N N
6
P P CAB27 CAB27
R R
S S 1 1
T T 2 2
S12.1/ENG36.W B U U 3 3
V V 4 4
S12.1/ENG37.1 B S12 ENG36.W/S2.1 B S2 CAB27.5/S2.1 B 5 CAB35.15B/CAB27.5 B
1 W W 5
S2.1/ENG36.X B S4.1/CAB27.6 M 6 CAB35.24B/CAB27.6 M
X X 6
S12.1/ENG36.X B
ENG37
H S R P
X J
W K T N
G B E D
V L U M
F A C F A C
V L
U M G B
E D
W K
T N
X H J
S P
ENG37 R
MA-10-03284A
Fig. 29
Contents
Cummins engine power relay

except US)
FAI115 Cummins engine mechanical injection 3
harness ENG27
1
3 Start switch
5 Cab interior 60 61
1
21 In line fuse CAB80

ENG38.1/ENG27.1 N
25 Starter motor 31 31
ENG38
47 Battery 30 30
29 29
60 Grid Heater 1 28 28
27 27
61 Grid Heater relay 26 26
25 25
24 24
23 23
22 22 CAB80.1/S26.1 B
21 21
20 20
19 19
1 ENG12 1 ENG37 1 ENG39 18 18
17 17
16 16
31 20 15 15 20 31
30 8 21 21 8 30
19 14 14
9 9 19
FAI84
29
18
7
2
3
10
22
13 13 22
10
3
2
7
18
29
17 1 11 12 12 11 1 17
28 6 4 23 23 4 6 28
16 5 12 11 11 12 5 16
15 13 13 15
27 14 24
10 10 24 14 27
1 ENG31 26 25 9 9 25 26
8 8
7 7
6 6
ENG12.1/ENG31.1 B 5 5
4 4
ENG1.3/S26.1 B S26
3 3
ENG1.2/ENG39.1 B 2 ENG1.2/S26.1 B
2
1 1
BAT
47 ENG26.1/ENG37.1 M ENG1 ENG1
1 FAI115
+12V
ENG24.1/ENG25.1 M
ENG23
1 1 1 S1.1/ENG23.1 M S1 ENG26.1/S1.1 M
+_BAT 1 ENG25 1
ENG24 ENG26
25
21
5
MA-10-03421A
Fig. 30

Contents
Fuel gauge

except US)
62 X2 fuel gauge
CAB47.23/ENG1.22 B
FAI84
31 20
30 8 21
19 9
18 2 10
29 7 3 22
17 1 11
28 6 4 23
16 5 12
15 13 25 14
27 14 24
26 25
13 1
ENG1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 25 24 23 22 212120 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB47
ENG1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB47
20 31 49
21 8 30
9 19
10 2 18
22 3 7 29
11 1 17
23 4 6 28
12 5 16
13 15
24 14 27
25 26
FAI81
B
ENG34.1/ENG27.1 N
ENG29.1/ENG1.22
ENG27 1 ENG34 1 ENG29 1
62
MA-10-03422A
Fig. 31
Contents
Battery charge and engine start

except US)
CAB 01 EHRB linkage calculator
CAB 35 Fuse box
46 Alternator CAB35
47 Battery 7 7 FAI84
6 6
49 X2 instrument panel 5 5 18B - 18A
4 4
3 CAB35.18B/CAB46.3 B
3
2 2
1 1
CAB46 CAB46
B
ENG1.6/CAB35.18B
CAB35
28A
12A
28B
12B
ENG1 ENG1
32A
16A
11A
11B
27A
27B
1 1
32B
16B
FAI81 2 2
26A
10A
26B
10B
3 3
4 4
31A
25A
15A
25B
9A
9B
5 5
ENG1.6/ENG14.1 B 6 6
31B
15B
1
24A
24B
8A
8B
7 7
ENG14 8 8
23A
23B
7A
7B
9 9
22A
22B
10 10
6A
6B
11 11
21A
21B
12 12
5A
5B
30A
14A
13 13
20A
20B
14A
30B
4A
4B
14 14
1 15 15
19A
19B
3A
3B
16 16
ENG13
29A
13A
17 17
18A
18B
2A
2B
18 18
46
29B
13B
ENG1.6/ENG14.1 M
19 19
17A
17B
1A
1B
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
20 31
25 25 F18-7.5A
31 20
21
9
8
19
30
26 26 30
19
8
9
21
10 2 18
22
11
3
1
7
17
29 27 27 29
18
7
2
3
10
22
17 1 11
23
12
4
5
6
16
28
28 28 28 6
5
4
12
23
13 15 16
+12V 24
25
14
26
27 29 29 27
15
26
14
13
24
30 30 25
31 31
1
ENG26
MA-10-03423A
47
Fig. 32

Contents
Contents
D . Transmission
30 kph Speedshift .................................................... 41
40 kph Speedshift .................................................... 42
4 Wheel drive ........................................................... 43
Differential lock (without Auto 5) ............................. 44
Rear PTO (without Auto 5) ....................................... 45
Platform rear PTO (without Auto 5).......................... 46
Load sensing PTO (without Auto 5) ......................... 47
Platform load sensing PTO (without Auto 5)............ 48
Proportional PTO (without Auto 5) ........................... 49
Platform proportional PTO (without Auto 5)............. 50
Hare / Tortoise (without Auto 5)............................... 51
Creeper unit ............................................................. 52
Safety (without Auto 5) ............................................ 53
Mechanical reverse shuttle ...................................... 54
Mechanical reverse shuttle with reversing lights..... 55
Mechanical reverse shuttle - platform reversing
lights .................................................................... 56
Parking brake............................................................ 57
Platform parking brake ............................................. 58
Front PTO (4-cylinder version).................................. 59
Front PTO (6-cylinder version).................................. 60

Contents
Contents
30 kph Speedshift

FAI 88 Power Shuttle GBA20 transmission - 57 l/min
hydraulics harness
1
FAI 105 30 kph Speedshift shunt
TR1
CAB 35 Fuse box 49
CAB 41 Speedshift relay
CAB 66 Speedshift switch TR21 TR21
1 2
TR18 Speedshift solenoid valve A1 A1
TR18
A2 A2
3 Start switch A3 A3
A4 A4 TR18.2/TR1.1 N
49 X2 instrument panel A5
A6
A5
A6
TR21.B6/TR18.1 B
2
1
A7 A7
TR18
A8 A8
B1 B1
B2 B2
B3
B4
B3
B4
FAI88
B5 B5
CAB68.3/TR21.B6 B
B6 B6
B7 B7
B8 B8
C1 C1
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 C2 C2 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 C3 C3 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 C4 C4
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
***
C5 C5 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
C6 C6
30
C7 C7
C8 C8
85 87a 86
CAB47.11/CAB41.5 B
5
CAB47.10/CAB41.4 B
4
3 87
CAB41
2
CAB66.2/CAB41.1 B
1
25 14
CAB41
13 1 FAI83 FAI105 5
CAB68 CAB68
CAB41.5/CAB68.1 B
CAB68.2/CAB68.3 B
1 1
CAB41.4/CAB68.2 B
2 4 1
2 2
F12 - 10A 3 3
3
2 1
1 2
3 CAB111.1/CAB41.2 N
3
1
FAI83
CAB111
F6 - 10A
CAB35
CAB35.12B/S28.1 R S28 S28.1/CAB41.3 R
CAB66 CAB66
CAB35.6B/S17.1 R S17 CAB66.1/S17.1 R
1 1
2 2
CAB35
1 2
12A - 12B
CAB85.1/CAB35.12A R
1
3
CAB85 10A
FAI83
6A - 6B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R
1 MA-10-03269A
CAB84 10A
Fig. 33

Contents
40 kph Speedshift

hydraulics harness 1
FAI 106 40 kph Speedshift shunt TR1
CAB 35 Fuse box 49

CAB 41 Speedshift relay
CAB 66 Speedshift switch TR21 TR21
1 2
TR18 Speedshift solenoid valve A1 A1

A2
TR18
A2
3 Start switch A3
A4
A3
A4
TR18.2/TR1.1 N
A5 2
49 X2 instrument panel A5
A6 A6
TR21.B6/TR18.1 B
1
A7 A7
A8 A8 TR18
B1 B1
B2 B2
B3 B3
B4 B4
B5
FAI88
B5
CAB68.3/TR21.B6 B B6
B6
B7 B7
B8 B8
C1 C1
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 C2
C2 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
C3 C3 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 C4 C4
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C5 ***
C5 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
C6 C6
30
C7 C7
C8 C8
85 87a 86
CAB47.11/CAB41.5 B
5
CAB47.10/CAB41.4 B
4
3 87
2
CAB66.2/CAB41.1 B 1
25 14
FAI106 CAB41
13 1
5
CAB68 CAB68
CAB41.5/CAB68.1 B
CAB68.1/CAB68.3 B
1 1
CAB41.4/CAB68.2 B
2 4 1
2 2
F12 - 10A
FAI83 3 3
CAB35
3 CAB41
2 1
1 2
3 CAB111.1/CAB41.2 N
3
1 FAI83
CAB111
F6 - 10A
CAB35.12B/S28.1 R S28 S28.1/CAB41.3 R
CAB66
CAB66 CAB66
CAB35.6B/S17.1 R S17 CAB66.1/S17.1 R
1 1
2 2
CAB35
12A - 12B 1 2
3 1
CAB85.1/CAB35.12A R
10A
CAB85
FAI83
MA-10-03270A
6A - 6B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R
1
10A
CAB84
Fig. 34
Contents
4 Wheel drive

hydraulics harness 1
CAB 63 4WD switch TR1
CAB 65 4WD relay 49 1 2

CAB 73 Right-hand brake pedal
CAB 74 Left-hand brake pedal TR21 TR21
FAI 88
CAB 35 Fuse box A1 A1

TR10
A2 A2
TR10 4WD solenoid valve A3
A4
A3
A4
A5 TR10.2/TR1.1 N
2
3 Start switch A5
A6 A6 TR21.A6/TR10.1 B
1
A7 A7
49 X2 instrument panel A8 A8
B1
TR10
B1
B2 B2
B3 B3
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 B4 B4
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 B5 B5
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1 B6 B6
B7 B7
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
B8 B8
C1 C1
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 C2
C2
C3 C3
C4 *** CAB65
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 C4
C5 C5
30
C6 C6
C7 C7
C8 C8 85 86
87a
CAB65.5/CAB47.15 B
5
CAB65.4/TR21.A6 B
4
CAB65.3/S28.1 R
3 87
CAB65.2/CAB109.1 N
2
S3.1/CAB65.1 B
1
25 14
CAB65
13 1 5
2 4 1
1
1 1 1 1 FAI 83 CAB109
F12-10A CAB102 CAB102 CAB101 CAB101 3
CAB35
CAB101.1/S3.1 B S3
S14.1/CAB102.1 B
CAB35.12B/S28.1 R S28
FAI 83
CAB35.6B/S17.1 R S17
S14 S14.1/CAB73.2 B
F6-10A
S14.1/CAB74.2 B
F22-5A CAB35.22B/CAB74.1 R CAB74.1/CAB73.1 R CAB63

FAI 83
F21-10A 10
1 2 1 2
9 +8 3
CAB74 1 2 CAB73 1 2
8
7
6
5
CAB74 CAB73 4
S3.1/CAB63.3 B 3
CAB63.2/S17.1 R 2
-7 2
1
CAB63
FAI 83
CAB35
12A - 12B
8 1 2 3 10
3 CAB85.1/CAB35.12A R
1
CAB85 10A 7 4 5 6 9
22A - 22B
5A
21A - 21B
CAB35.21A/CAB85.1 R
10A
6A - 6B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R MA-10-03424A
1
CAB84 10A
Fig. 35

Contents
Differential lock (without Auto 5)

FAI 83 X2 instrument panel harness 2 3 CAB 62
1 1 1 CAB109
FAI 88 X2 OC 57 litre transport harness
49 CAB91 CAB93
CAB 05 Linkage switch CAB92 CAB94

5 4
CAB 35 Fuse box 1 1

3 2
1
1 5 4
CAB 55 Right-hand brake pedal switch

5
CAB 56 Left-hand brake pedal switch
B
2 4 1
B
CAB101.1/S3.1
CAB93.1/S14.1
CAB 62 Differential lock relay
S2.1/CAB94.1
5 4 3 2 1 CAB62
3
CAB 64 Differential lock switch
TR 6 Differential lock solenoid valve CAB62.2/CAB109.1 N
S2 CAB62.1/S2.1 B
CAB62.3/S28.1 R
FAI 83 8 1 2 3 10
7 4 5 6 9
CAB 64
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB47
CAB64
CAB64.1/CAB62.4 B
1
25 14 S1.1/CAB47.18 B S1 S1.1/CAB64.2 B
2
CAB64.3/S17.1 R
3
13 1 4
5
6
7
Retro-Eclairage 8
9
10
TR21 TR21
A1 A1
TR21.A2/S1.1 B TR21.A2/TR6.1 B
A2 A2
A3 A3
A4 A4
A5 A5
A6 A6
CAB 35 A7 A7
CAB 35 A8 A8
F12-10A B1 B1
B2 B2
B3 B3
B4 B4
B5 B5
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
28A
11A 12A
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
28B
11B 12B
FAI 83
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
B6 B6
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
32B 32A
16B 16A
6A - 6B B7 B7
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R B8 B8
27A
CAB35.6B/S17.1 R S17
27B
+12V 1
C1 C1
CAB84 C2 C2
10A
26A
10A
26B
10B
S14 C3 C3
C4 C4
C5 C5
31B 31A
24A 25A
15B 15A
25B
FAI 88
9A
9B
C6 C6
C7 C7
12A - 12B C8 C8
24B
8A
8B
CAB85.1/CAB35.12A R CAB35.12B/S28.1 R S28

F22-5A
23A
22B 23B
7A
7B
10A
F21-10A +12V 1
22A
6A
6B
CAB85 22A - 22B

CAB35.22B/CAB74.1 R
21A
21B
5A
30B 30A
5B
14A 14A
F6-10A
5A TR 6
20A
20B
CAB74.1/CAB73.1 R
4A
4B
21A - 21B
CAB35.21A/CAB85.1 R
19A
19B
3A
3B
29B 29A
13B 13A
10A
B
18A
18B
2A
2B
TR6
S14.1/CAB73.2
S14.1/CAB74.2
17A
17B
1A
1B
1
TR6.2/TR1.1 N 2
SWITCH UP/DOWN
CAB 05 1 2
1 2 1 2
2 1 CAB73 2 1 CAB74
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL 2 1 CAB73 2 1 CAB74

DOWN UP OFF ON
1 TR1
1 2 3 4 5 6
CAB 73 CAB 74
8 1 2 3 10
B
R
7 4 5 6 9 LED
S14.1/CAB102.1
S17.1/CAB56.1
CAB05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FAI 73
MA-10-03425A
CAB56 1 CAB55 1
Fig. 36
Contents
Rear PTO (without Auto 5)
FAI 74 Cab console harness CAB32.4/CAB122.1 B

1
51
3
FAI 83 Cab instrument panel harness - US CAB122
FAI 87 GBA20 transmission mechanical reverse

shuttle - 57 l/min hydraulics harness 49
TR14
CAB 35 Fuse box 1
TR3 Rear PTO speed sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1
CAB51
TR5 Engine speed sensor

7
TR11 Rear PTO solenoid valve 6
5
TR21.B5/TR14.5 B
4
51
TR12 Rear PTO brake solenoid valve 3
2
1
CAB32.3/CAB121.1 B
1
3
CAB121
TR14 X2 PTO module TR14
3 Start switch
25 14
49 X2 instrument panel 13 1 1
50 X2 PTO switch CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1

CAB52
CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
51 X2 PTO lever switch CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TR5
6 5 4
CAB32 CAB32
3 2 1 TR5
6 5 4 1 1
3 2 1 FAI 74 TR21.B4/TR5.1 B
2 2 1
TR5.2/TR1.1 N
CAB47.4/CAB32.3 B 3 2
3
CAB47.9/CAB32.4 B 4
4
5 5
6 6
2 1
S4.1/CAB52.1 B
S4.1/CAB51.1 B
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 TR21
FAI 83 B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1
TR21 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A1 A1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1 A2 A2 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
A3 A3
A4 A4 TR3
A5 A5
2 1
A6 A6
A7 A7
A8 A8
B1 B1 TR3
B2 B2 TR21.B3/TR3.1 B
TR21.B3/CAB48.6 B B3 1
B3 TR3.2/TR1.1 N
TR21.B4/CAB48.1 B B4 2
B4
TR21.B5/S4.1 B
CAB35 B5 B5
B6
B6
B7 B7
B8 B8
C1 C1
C2
FAI 87
C2
C3 C3
C4 C4
C5 C5
C6 C6
1
C7 C7
C8 C8
TR1
TR11
F6 - 10A FAI 83
TR11.2/TR1.1 N
2
TR14.3/TR11.1 B 1
TR11
1 2
TR21.A7/CAB60.1 B
1
50
CAB60 3
S4
TR12
1 2
TR12.2/TR1.1 N
3 CAB35 TR21.A7/TR12.1 B
2
1
3 S4.1/CAB59.1 B
1
PTO BRAKE TR12
CAB59
FAI 83
6A - 6B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6a R CAB35.6B/S17.1 R S17 CAB61.1/S17.1 R
1 1 PTO ON/OFF
10A
CAB84 CAB61
MA-10-03281A
Fig. 37

Contents
Platform rear PTO (without Auto 5)

1
51
FAI 87 MECA OC 57 litre transport harness CAB122
CAB 35 Fuse box

49
TR3 Rear PTO speed sensor
TR14
1
TR11 Rear PTO solenoid valve 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CAB51
TR12 Rear PTO brake solenoid valve

7
TR14 X2 PTO module 6
5
TR21.B5/TR14.5 B
4
3 Start switch 3
2
1
1
51
49 X2 instrument panel TR14

CAB121
50 X2 PTO switch
25 14
51 X2 PTO lever switch

13 1 1
CAB52
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TR5
FAI 86
TR5
TR21.B4/TR5.1 B
1
TR5.2/TR1.1 N
CAB47.4/CAB121.1 B 2
CAB47.9/CAB122.1 B
2 1
S4.1/CAB52.1 B
S4.1/CAB51.1 B
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 TR21 TR21
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 A1
A1
A3 A3
A4 A4 TR3
A5 A5
2 1
A6 A6
A7 A7
A8 A8
B1 B1 TR3
B2 B2 TR21.B3/TR3.1 B
TR21.B3/CAB48.6 B B3 1
B3 TR3.2/TR1.1 N
TR21.B4/CAB48.1 B B4 2
B4
TR21.B5/S4.1 B
CAB35 B5 B5
B6
B6
B7 B7
B8 B8
C1 C1
C2 C2
C3 C3
C4 C4
C5 C5
C6 C6 FAI 87 1
C7 C7
C8 C8 TR1
TR11
F6 - 10A FAI 83
TR11.2/TR1.1 N
2
TR14.3/TR11.1 B 1
TR11
1 2
TR21.A7/CAB60.1 B
1
CAB60
50
S4
TR12
1 2
TR12.2/TR1.1 N
3 TR21.A7/TR12.1 B
2
1
S4.1/CAB59.1 B
1
PTO BRAKE TR12
CAB59
FAI 83
CAB35
6A - 6B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R CAB35.6B/S17.1 R S17 CAB61.1/S17.1 R
1 1 PTO ON/OFF
CAB84 10A CAB61 MA-10-03453A
Fig. 38
Contents
Load sensing PTO (without Auto 5)

CAB32.4/CAB122.1 B
1
51
FAI 83 Cab instrument panel harness - US CAB122

shuttle - 57 l/min hydraulics harness 49 FAI 74
CAB 35 Fuse box TR14

1
TR3 Rear PTO speed sensor 1 2 3 4

CAB51
5 6 7
1
6
5
TR21.B5/TR14.5 B
4
2
CAB32.3/CAB121.1 B 1
51
1
TR14 X2 PTO module TR14

CAB121
3 Start switch
25 14
49 X2 instrument panel FAI 74

13 1
1
50 X2 PTO switch CAB52
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
51 X2 PTO lever switch CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
53 X2 LSPTO switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TR5
6 5 4
CAB32 CAB32
3 2 1 TR5
3 2 1
6 5 4 1 1 TR21.B4/TR5.1 B 1
2 2 TR5.2/TR1.1 N
CAB47.4/CAB32.3 B 2
3 3
CAB47.9/CAB32.4 B 4
4
CAB47.17/CAB53.1 B 5 5
6 6
2 1
S4.1/CAB52.1 B
S4.1/CAB51.1 B
CAB53
FAI 83
53 1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 A1
CAB54 A1
1 A3 A3
A4 A4 TR3
A5 A5
A6 A6
A7 A7
A8 A8
B1 B1 TR3
B2 B2 TR21.B3/TR3.1 B
TR21.B3/CAB48.6 B B3 1
B3 TR3.2/TR1.1 N
TR21.B4/CAB48.1 B B4 2
B4
CAB54.1/S17.1 R TR21.B5/S4.1 B
CAB35 B5 B5
B6
B6
B7
B8 B8
C1 C1 2 1
C2 C2
C3 C3
C4 C4
C5 C5
C6 C6 FAI 87 1
C7 C7
C8 C8
TR1
FAI 83 TR11
F6 - 10A
TR11.2/TR1.1 N
2
TR14.3/TR11.1 B 1
TR11
1 2
TR21.A7/CAB60.1 B
1
50
CAB60
S4
TR12
1 2
3 CAB35
TR12.2/TR1.1 N
TR21.A7/TR12.1 B
2
1
S4.1/CAB59.1 B
1 PTO BRAKE
TR12
CAB59
FAI 83
6A - 6B
1 1 PTO ON/OFF
CAB84 10A CAB61 MA-10-03426A
Fig. 39

Contents
Platform load sensing PTO (without Auto

5)
CAB47.9/CAB122.1 B
1
51
FAI 85 Platform instrument panel harness - NAO CAB122
FAI 87 MECA OC 57 litre transport harness

49
CAB 35 Fuse box
TR14
TR3 Rear PTO speed sensor 1
TR5 Engine speed sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1
CAB51
TR11 Rear PTO solenoid valve

7
5
TR21.B5/TR14.5 B
4
TR14 X2 PTO module 3

2
CAB47.4/CAB121.1 B
1
51
1
CAB121
3 Start switch TR14
49 X2 instrument panel 25 14
50 X2 PTO switch 13 1
1
51 X2 PTO lever switch 1

CAB52
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
53 X2 LSPTO switch CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TR5
TR5
TR21.B4/TR5.1 B
1
TR5.2/TR1.1 N
2
CAB47.17/CAB53.1 B
2 1
S4.1/CAB52.1 B
S4.1/CAB51.1 B
FAI 85
53 CAB53
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 A1
CAB54 A1
1 A3 A3
A4 A4 TR3
A5 A5
A6 A6
A7 A7
A8 A8
B1 B1 TR3
B2 B2 TR21.B3/TR3.1 B
TR21.B3/CAB48.6 B B3 1
B3 TR3.2/TR1.1 N
TR21.B4/CAB48.1 B B4 2
B4
CAB54.1/S17.1 R TR21.B5/S4.1 B
CAB35 B5 B5
B6
B6
B7
B8 B8
C1 C1 2 1
C2 C2
C3 C3
C4 C4
C5 C5
C6 C6 FAI 87 1
C7 C7
C8 C8 TR1
FAI 85 TR11
F6 - 10A
TR11.2/TR1.1 N
2
TR14.3/TR11.1 B 1
TR11
1 2
TR21.A7/CAB60.1 B 1
50
CAB60
S4
TR12
1 2
3 TR12.2/TR1.1 N
2
CAB35 TR21.A7/TR12.1 B
1
S4.1/CAB59.1 B
1 TR12
PTO BRAKE
CAB59
FAI 85
6A - 6B
1 1 PTO ON/OFF
CAB84 CAB61
MA-10-03452A
10A
Fig. 40
Contents
Proportional PTO
(without Auto 5)
CAB32.4/CAB122.1 B
1
51
FAI 07 GSPTO harness CAB122

49 FAI 74
TR14
FAI 87 GBA20 transmission mechanical reverse 1
shuttle - 57 l/min hydraulics harness 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CAB51
1
FAI 111 Proportional PTO switch harness
CAB 35 Fuse box 7
6
5
TR21.B5/TR14.5 B
4
51
TR3 Rear PTO speed sensor 3
2
CAB32.3/CAB121.1 B
1
1
TR5 Engine speed sensor TR14

CAB121
TR11 Rear PTO solenoid valve

25 14
TR12 Rear PTO brake solenoid valve 13 1

1
3 Start switch S4.1/CAB52.1 B
CAB52
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
S4.1/CAB51.1 B
49 X2 instrument panel CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
50 X2 PTO switch
FAI 74
51 X2 PTO lever switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3
6
2
5
1
4
6
3
5
2
4
1 TR5
CAB32 CAB32
CAB32.1/CAB46.6 B CAB32.1/CAB127.2 B
1 1
2 2 TR5
CAB47.4/CAB32.3 B
3 3 TR21.B4/TR5.1 B
CAB47.9/CAB32.4 B 1
4 4 TR5.2/TR1.1 N
5 5 2
6 6
FAI 83
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 TR21 TR21 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 2 1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 A1 A1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1 A2 A2
A3 A3 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
A4 A4
A5 A5
A6 A6
A7 A7
A8 A8
B1 B1
B2 B2
TR21.B3/CAB48.6 B B3 B3
TR21.B4/CAB48.1 B B4 B4
S4 TR21.B5/S4.1 B B5
B6
B5
B6
TR3
CAB35 B7 B7 2 1
B8 B8
C1 C1
C2 C2
TR3
C3 C3
C4 C4 TR21.B3/TR3.1 B
1
C5 C5 TR3.2/TR1.1 N
2
C6 C6
C7 C7
C8 C8
TR21.A7/CAB60.1 B 2 2
1 CAB127.1/CAB124.1 N
CAB60
50 1 1 1
CAB124 CAB127 CAB127

1 1
2
2
1
FAI 87
TR1
FAI 111
TR11
CAB127.2/GS1.1 B
CAB127.1/GS2.1 B
S4.1/CAB59.1 B
1
PTO BRAKE
TR11.2/TR1.1 N
CAB59 2
F6 - 10A
51 TR14.3/TR11.1 B 1
TR11
GS1
1 1 2
GS2
1
1 PTO ON/OFF
PTO1
TR12
PTO1.1/PTO4.1 B 1 2
3 TR12.2/TR1.1 N
TR21.A7/TR12.1 B
2
1
51
FAI 07 TR12
PTO4
FAI 83 CAB35 1
PTO3
PTO2.1/PTO3.1 R 1
CAB61 PTO2
6A - 6B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R CAB35.6B/S17.1 R S17 CAB61.1/S17.1 R 1 1
1
CAB84 10A MA-10-03427A
Fig. 41

Contents
Platform proportional PTO (without

Auto 5)
1 51
FAI 07 GSPTO harness CAB122
FAI 85 X2 Platform instrument panel harness - NAO

49 FAI 74
TR14
FAI 111 GSPTO switch harness 1
CAB 35 Fuse box 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1
CAB51
TR3 Rear PTO speed sensor

7
TR5 Engine speed sensor 6
5
TR21.B5/TR14.5 B
4

2
51
1
1
CAB121
TR12 Rear PTO brake solenoid valve TR14
FAI 74
3 Start switch 25 14
1
50 X2 PTO switch S4.1/CAB52.1 B

1
CAB52
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S4.1/CAB51.1 B
51 X2 PTO lever switch CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FAI 85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TR5
CAB47.9/CAB122.1 B
TR5
CAB47.4/CAB121.1 B TR21.B4/TR5.1 B 1
CAB127.2/CAB46.6 B TR5.2/TR1.1 N 2
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 TR21 TR21 2 1

A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 A1 A1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1 A2 A2
A3 A3 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
A4 A4
A5 A5
A6 A6
A7 A7
A8 A8
B1 B1
B2 B2
TR21.B3/CAB48.6 B B3
B3
B4
S4 TR21.B5/S4.1 B
B5
B6
B5
B6
TR3
CAB35 B7 B7 2 1
B8 B8
C1 C1
C2 C2 TR3
C3 C3
C4 TR21.B3/TR3.1 B
C4 1
C5 TR3.2/TR1.1 N
C5 2
C6 C6
C7 C7
C8 C8
TR21.A7/CAB60.1 B 2 2
1 CAB127.1/CAB111.1 N
1 1 1
CAB60
50 CAB111
1
CAB127 CAB127
1
2
2
1
FAI 87
TR1
FAI 111
TR11
CAB127.2/GS1.1 B
CAB127.1/GS2.1 B
S4.1/CAB59.1 B
1
PTO BRAKE
TR11.2/TR1.1 N
CAB59 2
TR14.3/TR11.1 B 1
F6 - 10A 51
TR11
GS1
1 1 2
GS2
1
1 PTO ON/OFF
PTO1
TR12
PTO1.1/PTO4.1 B 1 2
3 TR12.2/TR1.1 N
TR21.A7/TR12.1 B
2
51 1
TR12
PTO4
CAB35 FAI 07
1
FAI 83
PTO3
PTO2.1/PTO3.1 R
1
6A - 6B CAB61 PTO2
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R CAB35.6B/S17.1 R S17 CAB61.1/S17.1 R 1 1
1
10A
MA-10-03454A
CAB84
Fig. 42
Contents
Hare / Tortoise (without Auto 5)

TR16 TR14
shuttle - 57 l/min hydraulics harness
CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB 67 Hi/Lo Switch 49
TR13 Hi/Lo solenoid valve

TR14 X2 PTO module
TR13 Hi/Lo switch
3 Start switch
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TR16 1 2 TR14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
25 14 TR16 1 2 TR14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13 1
B
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB47
S2.1/TR14.2
TR21 TR21
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB47
A1 A1 FAI87
FAI83 A2 A2
A3 A3 TR16.2/TR14.4 B
A4
3 A4 TR21.A5/S2.1 B S2
TR21.A5/CAB47.1 B A5 A5
A6 A6
B
A7 A7
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 A8 A8
TR21.C2/TR16.1
S2.1/TR13.1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 B1 B1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1 B2 B2
B3 B3 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
B4 B4
B5 B5
TR13.2/TR1.1 N
CAB84 1 B6 B6
6A - 6B B7 B7
B8 B8 2 1 TR13
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R CAB35.6B/TR17.1 R S17 C1
C1
C2 C2
2 1 TR13
C3
TR21.C2/CAB67.2 B
10A C3 TR1 1
C4
CAB67.1/S17.1 R
C4
C5 C5
C6 C6 TR13
CAB35 2 1
C7 C7
C8 C8
28A
12A
28B
12B
32A
16A
11A
11B
27A
27B
32B
16B
26A
10A
26B
10B
2 1 CAB67
31A
9A
9B
25A
15A
25B
31B
15B
2 1 CAB67
2 1
24A
8A
8B
24B
23A
7A
7B
23B
F6-10A
CAB67
22A
22B
6A
6B
21A
21B
5A
5B
30A
14A
20A
20B
4A
4B
14A
30B
19A
19B
3A
3B
MA-10-03428A
29A
13A
2A
2B
18A
18B
29B
13B
1A
1B
17A
17B
Fig. 43

Contents
Creeper unit

CAB 35 Fuse box
3 Start switch
57 Creeper switch
49
5
3
4
2
1
25 14
CAB84 CAB84
13 1
R
1 1
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
17A
17B
1A
1B
FAI83
13B
29B
6B - 6A
18A
B
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
S17 CAB35.6B/S17.1 R
19A
19B
3A
3B
R
CAB47.16/CAB57.1
14A
30B
10A
20A
20B
4A
4B
S17.1/CAB58.1
14A
30A
21A
21B
5A
5B
22A
22B
6A
6B
CAB35
23B
23A
7A
7B
F6-10A
24B
24A
8A
8B
15B
31B
1 CAB57 1 CAB58
15A
25A
25B
31A
9A
9B
10A
26A
CAB58
10B
26B
CAB57 1
1
16B
32B
27A
27B
11A
11B
16A
32A
12A
28A
12B
28B
MA-10-03282A
57
Fig. 44
Contents
Safety (without Auto 5)

shuttle - 57 l/min hydraulics harness TR8
49 TR26
CAB 35 Fuse box TR8
S1.1/TR8.1 B
TR7 HP filter clogging indicator 1
TR8 Hydraulic filter vacuum switch 2 3

TR9 Low pressure switch
TR15 Temperature switch
TR26 Sealed relay 5 4
3 Start switch 1
5 4 3 2 1 TR26
25 14 1 2
5
13 1 TR15
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
2 4 1
TR7.2/TR15.2 B
2
T˚
TR1
1
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 3 TR26.2/TR1.1 N
1
TR15
analog.
B
B
R
TR21.A3/CAB47.22
TR21.A4/CAB47.19
S6.1/TR26.3
TR21 TR21
FAI83 A1 A1
A2 A2 S1
S1.1/TR21.A3 B
A3 A3
TR21.A4/TR26.4 B
A4 A4
F12 - 10A A5 A5
A6 A6
A7 A7
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
A8 A8 1 2
CAB35
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
B1 B1
B2 B2
B3 B3 TR7
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6
FAI87
2
B7 B7 TR7.1/S1.1 B
1
B8 B8
C1 C1 TR7
C2 C2
C3 C3
S6.1/TR21.C4 R S6
C4 C4
C5 C5
C6 C6
C7 C7
C8 C8
1 2
TR9
TR9.2/TR26.1 B
2
TR21.C4/S28.1 R TR9.1/S6.1 R
1
TR9
3
S28
FAI83
CAB35
12A - 12B
CAB85.1/CAB35.12A R S28.1/CAB35.12B R
1 MA-10-03278A
10A
CAB85
Fig. 45

Contents

TR2 Ground speed sensor
49
TR5
TR5
TR21.B4/TR5.1 B
1
2
2 1
CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TR1
TR5.2/TR1.1 N
TR2.2/TR1.1 N 1
FAI 83
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
TR21 TR21 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
2 1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A1
A2
A1
A2
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 FAI 87 TR2
A3 A3
A4 A4
A5 A5 TR2
A6 A6
TR21.B2/TR2.1 B 1
A7 A7
A8 A8 2
B1 B1
B2
B3 B3
B4
B5 B5
B6 B6
B7 B7
B8 B8
C1 C1
C2 C2
C3 C3
C4 C4
C5 C5
C6 C6 MA-10-03429A
C7 C7
C8 C8
Fig. 46
Contents
Mechanical reverse shuttle with reversing

lights
FAI 74 Cab console harness CAB35

CAB35 FAI 84 3
except US)
49 F21-10A
FAI 87 GBA20 transmission mechanical reverse 20B - 20A
shuttle - 57 l/min hydraulics harness F20-10A

10A
FAI 91 Lighting harness - Europe 21B - 21A

CAB35.21A/CAB85.1 R
1
FAI 112 Mechanical reverse shuttle reversing lights 10A CAB85
harness F4-10A
4B - 4A
CAB35 Fuse box CAB35.4A/CAB82.1 R

1
10A CAB82
CAB72 Reversing lights relay
TR2 Ground speed sensor
CAB111
TR29 Reverse position sensor CAB111.1/CAB72.2 N
1
LIG13 Reversing light

5
38 Trailer connector - Europe FAI 84 2 4 1 CAB72

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13 1
CAB72.5/LIG1.3 B
5 85 87a 86
CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 4
CAB35.20B/CAB33.4 R CAB35.4B/CAB72.3 R
3
CAB72.2/S11.1 B
CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 87
1
6 5 4 CAB72
B
3 2 1
CAB47.13/S11.1
CAB33 1 2 3 4 5 6
FAI 84
CAB33 1 2 3 4 5 6
CAB47.25/CAB22.1 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 2 1 LIG2 1
B
B
R
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 6 5 4
TR21.B2/CAB48.2
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 S11
CAB33.4/CAB129.6
TR21.B4/CAB48.1
CAB22.2/S11.1 B
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
N
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1 1 FAI 74 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
LIG13.2/LIG2.1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
3 2 1
2
6 5 4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LIG1.3/S1.1 B
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 TR21 CAB22 1 2
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB129 2
S1 S1.1/LIG13.1 B
1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 TR21 CAB22 1 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB129-A
LIG13
1
FAI 112 1 2
6 5 4
2 TR29.2/CAB22.2 B LIG13
3 2 1
2 1
FAI 91
TR5 38
CAB129.6/TR29.1 R
TR5 CAB129-A.6/CAB129.6 R
TR21.B4/TR5.1 B
1
2
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB129 LIG4.1/S1.1 B
FAI 87 1
LIG4
TR1 4 3 2 1 TR29 3 2 1
TR5.2/TR1.1 N 4 3 2 1
TR2.2/TR1.1 N 1 6 5 4
4 3 2 1 TR29
TR2 TR29
TR2
TR21.B2/TR2.1 B
1
2
2 1 MA-10-03430A
Fig. 47

Contents
Mechanical reverse shuttle - platform

reversing lights

except US)
FAI 87 GBA20 transmission mechanical reverse CAB35
CAB35 FAI 86
FAI 91 Lighting harness - Europe 3
F21-10A
49 20B - 20A
FAI 112 Mechanical reverse shuttle reversing lights F20-10A
harness 10A
21B - 21A
CAB35.21A/CAB85.1 R
CAB35 Fuse box 10A
1
CAB85
CAB72 Reversing lights relay F4-10A

4B - 4A
CAB35.4A/CAB82.1 R
TR2 Ground speed sensor 10A
1
CAB82

TR29 Reverse position sensor
LIG13 Reversing light CAB111
CAB111.1/CAB72.1 N
1
3 Start switch
38 Trailer connector - Europe 25 14
5
49 X2 instrument panel FAI 86 2 4 1 CAB72

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13 1
3 30
CAB72.5/LIG1.3 B
5 85 87a 86
CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 4
CAB35.20B/CAB129.1 R CAB35.4B/CAB72.3 R
3
CAB72.2/S11.1 B
2 87
CAB48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1
CAB72
B
FAI 86
CAB47.13/S11.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LIG2 1
B
B
S11
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
TR21.B2/CAB48.2 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
TR21.B4/CAB48.1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
N
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1 1
CAB22.2/S11.1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
LIG13.2/LIG2.1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
3 2 1
2
6 5 4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LIG1.3/S1.1 B
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 TR21 CAB22 1 2
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB129 2
S1 S1.1/LIG13.1 B
1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 TR21 CAB22 1 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB129
LIG13
1
FAI 112 1 2
6 5 4
2 TR29.2/CAB22.2 B LIG13
3 2 1
2 1
FAI 91
TR5
CAB129.6/TR29.1 R 38
TR5 CAB129-A.6/CAB129.6 R
TR21.B4/TR5.1 B
1
2
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB129
FAI 87 LIG4.1/S1.1 B
1
LIG4
TR1 4 3 2 1 TR29 3 2 1
TR5.2/TR1.1 N 4 3 2 1
TR2.2/TR1.1 N 1 6 5 4
4 3 2 1 TR29
TR2 TR29
TR2
TR21.B2/TR2.1 B
1
2
2 1
MA-10-03451A
Fig. 48
Contents
Parking brake

FAI 84 X2 instrument panel harness - Europe
CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB 120Parking brake switch
6 5 4
3 2 1
TR 28 Gearbox neutral switch
3 2 1 5 4
6
3 Start switch
41 Parking brake buzzer CAB120
6 6
49 X2 instrument panel 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5 5 FAI74
4 4
3 3 CAB120
2 2
CAB33.1/CAB46.7 B CAB120.1/CAB124.1 N
7 7 1 1 1 1
CAB33.1/CAB69.1 B CAB33.1/CAB120.2 B
6 6 2 2
5 5 CAB33 CAB33
4 4 CAB120
3 3
2 2
1 1 1 2
FAI84
CAB46 CAB46
CAB124
41
CAB69
1 1
2 TR28
2 1
FAI87
TR27 TR27 TR28 TR28

CAB70 CAB35.6B/TR27.1 R TR27.1/TR28.1 R
1 1 1 1
TR27.2/CAB70.1 B TR27.2/TR28.2 B 2
1 2 2 2
CAB35
1 2
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
3
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
CAB84 6A - 6B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R
1
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B MA-10-03431A
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
F6-10A
Fig. 49

Contents
Platform parking brake

CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB 120Parking brake switch
TR 28 Gearbox neutral switch
3 Start switch
41 Parking brake buzzer CAB120
49 X2 instrument panel 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CAB120 CAB120
7 7 1 1
6 6 2 2
5 5
N
4 4
3 3
CAB120.1/CAB109.1
1 2
2 2
B
1 1
B
FAI86
CAB69.1/CAB46.7
CAB46 CAB46
CAB120.2/CAB69.1
1
CAB109
41 CAB69
1 1
2 TR28
2 1
FAI87
TR27 TR27 TR28 TR28

CAB70 CAB35.6B/TR27.1 R TR27.1/TR28.1 R
1 1 1 1
TR27.2/CAB70.1 B TR27.2/TR28.2 B
1 2 2 2 2
CAB35
1 2
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
3
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
CAB84 6A - 6B
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R
1
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
10A
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
MA-10-03450A
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
F6-10A
Fig. 50
Contents
Front PTO (4-cylinder version)

ENG 2 X2 Front PTO solenoid valve
CAB 35 X2 fuse box
CAB 112Front PTO switch
3 Start switch
52 X2 front PTO brake
31 31
30 30
CAB112 31 20
29 29 21
20
9
8
31
19
30
30 8 21 28 28 22
10 2
7
18
29
19 3
9
18 2 10 27 27 23
11
4
1
6
17
28
29 7 3 22
17 1 11 26 26 12
13
5
15
16
6 23
28
16 5
4
12 25 25 24
25
14
26
27
27
15
14
13
24 24 24
26 25
23 23
1 3 9 22
22
8 21
21
7 20
20
6 19
19
5 18
18
4 ENG1.30/CAB112.3 B 17
17
3 CAB112.2/CAB35.4B R 16 16 FAI82
2 2 ENG1.31/CAB112.1 B 15
15
1 14
14
13 13 52
CAB112 8 1 2 3 12 12
11 11
10 10
7 4 5 6
9 9
8 8
7 7
CAB35 6 6
ENG1.31/ENG35.1 B
1
5 5
4 4 ENG35
3 3
2 2
1 1 ENG36.1/ENG27.1 N
1
ENG1 ENG1
ENG36
FAI83
ENG27
F4 - 10A
ENG2
ENG2.2/ENG27.1 N
2
ENG1.30/ENG2.1 B
1
ENG2
3 CAB35 1 2
4A - 4B
CAB35.4A/CAB82.1 R
1
10A
CAB82
MA-10-03283A
Fig. 51

Contents
Front PTO (6-cylinder version)
FAI 81 X2 6-cylinder engine harness

ENG 2 X2 Front PTO solenoid valve 31 31
30 30
CAB 35 X2 fuse box 29 29 21
20
9
8
31
19
30
31 20
28 28 10 2 18
CAB 112Front PTO switch 30
18
19
8
2
9
21
10 27 27
22
11
3
1
7
17
29
23 4 6 28
3 Start switch 29
28
17
7
6
1
3
4
11
22
23
26 26 12
13
5
15
16
16 5 12 25 25 24 14 27
CAB12 15 13
24 24
25 26
27 14 24
9
26 25 23 23
1 3 22 22
8
7 21 21
6 20 20
5 19 19
4 18 18
ENG1.30/CAB112.3 B 17 17
3
CAB112.2/CAB35.4B R 16 16
2
2 1 15 15
14 14
13 13
CAB112 8 1 2 3 12 12
11 11
7 4 5 6
10 10 FAI81
9 9
8 8
CAB35 7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
ENG1 ENG1
ENG27
F4 - 10A
FAI83
ENG2
ENG2.2/ENG27.1 N
2
ENG1.30/ENG2.1 B
1
ENG2
1 2
3 CAB35
4A - 4B
CAB35.4A/CAB82.1 R
1
MA-10-03285A
CAB82 10A
Fig. 52
Contents
E . Bulb types
Road lights - Europe

Lighting Bulb(s) Type
Road lights and dim lights H4
12V / 60W/55W
Sidelights and front direction indicator lights Direction indicator 12V / 21W
light
Position light 12V / 5W
Sidelights / stop lights and rear direction indicator lights Direction indicator 12V / 21W
light
Position / Stop light 12V / 21W/5W
Flashing beacon(s) Flashing beacon H1

12V / 55W
Reversing light Direction indicator 12V / 21W

light

Contents
Work headlights - Europe models

Lighting Description Bulb(s) Type
Two front roof lights (single, double or Xenon bulb) Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
Double bulb H3 12V / 55W
Xenon bulb Xenon GDL D2S /
35W
Four front roof lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
35W
Two rear roof lights Double bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
35W
Handrail lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W

Fender lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
Footstep lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
Contents
Road lights - North America

Lighting Bulb(s) Description
Road lights and dim lights Headlight H4
12V / 60W/55W
Sidelights and front direction indicator lights Direction indicator light 12V / 21W
Position light 12V / 5W
Sidelights / Rear stop and direction indicator lights with Direction indicator light 12V / 21W
fender extension (North America)
Fender extension 12V / 21W
Position / Stop light 12V / 21W/5W
Roof front direction indicator lights Direction indicator light 12V / 21W
Roof rear direction indicator lights Direction indicator light 12V / 21W
Flashing beacon(s) Flashing beacon H1

12V / 55W

Contents
Work headlights - North America

Two front roof lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
35W
Two rear roof lights Double bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
35W
Handrail lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W

Fender lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
Footstep lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
Contents
Work headlights - High Visibility model

Two front roof lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W
Two rear roof lights Single bulb Work headlight H3 12V / 55W

Contents
Contents
Work headlights on handrails - Slim Line roof -

F . Lighting Europe................................................................ 100
Road lights and dim lights - Europe.......................... 69 Work headlights on handrails - standard and high visibi-
lity roof - North America......................................... 101
Handrail road lights and dim lights ........................... 70
Stop lights.............................................................. 102
Standard roof side lights - Europe ............................ 71
Slim Line roof side lights - Europe ........................... 72
Platform side lights - Europe .................................... 73
Standard and high visibility roof side lights - North
America .................................................................... 74
Platform side lights - North America ........................ 75
Standard roof number plate lighting......................... 76
Standard roof number plate lighting......................... 76
Slim line roof number plate lighting ......................... 78
Platform number plate lighting................................. 79
Standard roof flashing beacon.................................. 80
Slim Line roof flashing beacon ................................. 81
Platform flashing beacon.......................................... 82
Standard roof direction indicator and warning lights -
Europe...................................................................... 83
High visibility roof direction indicator and warning lights
- Europe and Germany ............................................. 84
Slim line roof direction indicator and warning lights -
Europe...................................................................... 85
Platform indicator and warning lights - Europe ........ 86
Standard roof direction indicator and warning lights -
North America .......................................................... 87
High visibility roof direction indicator and warning lights
- North America ........................................................ 88
Platform indicator and warning lights - North
America ................................................................ 89
Trailer connector - Europe ........................................ 90
Trailer connector - North America ............................ 91
Standard and high visibility work headlights - Europe........ 92
Slim Line roof work headlights - Europe .................. 93
Platform work headlights - Europe........................... 94
Standard and high visibility roof work headlights - North
America .................................................................... 95
Slim Line roof work headlights - North America ...... 96
Platform work headlights - North America ............... 97
Work headlights on handrails - standard roof - Europe ...... 98
Work headlights on handrails – High Visibility roof -
Europe.................................................................. 99

Contents
Contents
Road lights and dim lights - Europe

CAB 35 Fuse box 21
20
8
31 31 20
30 30 8 21
9 19
CAB 42 Light switch 22
10
11
3
2
1
7
18
17
29 29
18
19
7
2
9
3
10
22
17 1 11
23 4 6 28
24
13
5
14
15
16
27
28
16
6
15
5
4
13
12
23
27 14 24
25 26
49 X2 instrument panel ENG1 ENG1 26 25
1 1
G D 2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10 CAB49 1 2 3 4 5 6
11 11
ENG10 1 2 3 ENG9 1 2 3 12 12
13 13 CAB49 1 2 3 4 5 6
ENG10 1 2 3 ENG9 1 2 3 14 14 FAI83
1 ENG27 FAI82 15 15
ENG9.2/ENG10.2 B 16 16
ENG27.1/ENG10.1 N
ENG9.3/ENG10.3 B 17 17
ENG1.18/ENG9.2 B CAB49.2/ENG1.18 B
18 18
ENG1.19/ENG.3 B CAB49.5/ENG1.19 B
ENG9.1/ENG27.1 N 19 19
28A
12A
28B
12B
B
20 20
32A
16A
21 21
CAB49.1/CAB35.32A
11A
11B
27A
27B
22 22
32B
16B
F32
B
23 23
26A
10A
26B
10B
24 24
CAB35.31B/CAB49.4
25 25 CAB35
31A
25A
15A
25B
49
9A
9B
26 26
27 27
31B
15B
24A
32A - 32B
24B
F31
8A
8B
28 28
29 29
23A
23B
7A
7B
30 30
31 31 10A
22A
22B
6A
6B
21A
21B
5A
5B
30A
14A
31A - 31B
20A
20B
14A
30B
4A
4B
CAB35.31A/CAB90.6 B
19A
19B
3A
3B
15A
29A
13A
18A
18B
2A
2B
29B
13B
17A
17B
1A
1B
CAB90.5/CAB35.32B B
CAB90
CAB90 (4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
13 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
25 14 13
12 12
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 11
11
10 10
13 1 9 9
FAI83 8 8 I O
J klaxon
7 7
CAB35.31B/CAB47.1 B 6
6 II
5 5
CAB42.6/CAB90.4 B 4 lave vitre
4
3 3
2 2
1 1
56b 56a L (10) H
CAB90 (5) (6) (2)
CAB42
CAB42
+3 +6 8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
1 2 4 4
3 3
2 2
M
1 1
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N
-7 2 5
CAB42.5/CAB108.1
CAB42
MA-10-03432A
+12V
CAB108 1 CAB111 1
Fig. 53

Contents
Handrail road lights and dim lights

CAB144 CAB140 CAB141
FAI34 Handrail lighting harness
FAI75 Standard roof harness - US
3
FAI 82 Perkins engine mechanical injection harness 85
30
86 85
30
86
+8 1 +3 87a 87a
FAI 84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries 87 87
G D
except US) 1 2
CAB 35 Fuse box

CAB 42 Light switch -7 2
5
CAB 90 Windscreen wiper control unit 8 1 2 3
CAB144 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAB140 1 2 3 4 5
2 4 1
CAB141 1 2 3 4 5
5
ENG27 1 ENG10 1 2 3 CROISEMENT
ENG9 1 2 3 ENG1 ENG1 7 4 5 6
MASSE
FAI 140 Handrail road lights relay CAB141 1 2 3 4 5
ROUTE
3
CAB144 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAB140 1 2 3 4 5 3
1
4
1
ENG10 1 2 3 ENG9 1 2 3 2 2
FAI 141 Handrail road lights relay 3 3
CAB144.3/CAB140.1 B
CAB144.3/CAB141.1 B
2
4
N
ENG27.1/ENG10.1 N ENG9.2/ENG10.2 B 4 CAB141.2/CAB140.2 N
1
FAI 144 Handrail road lights switch 5
CAB140.2/CAB50.2 N
ENG9.3/ENG10.3 B 5
CAB50.1/CAB144.2
CAB49.4/CAB141.3 B
CAB50.2/CAB144.7
6 6
ENG9.1/ENG27.1 N
CAB49.1/CAB140.3 B
CAB49.2/CAB140.4 B
CAB49.3/CAB140.5 B
7 CAB49.5/CAB141.4 B
7
3 Start switch CAB49.6/CAV141.5 B
ENG1.19/ENG9.3 B
8
20 31 8 31 20
FAI101
ENG1.18/ENG9.2 B
21 8 30 30 8 21
9 19 9 9 19 9
10 2 18
29 10 10 18 2 10
22 3 7 29 7 3 22 CAB85 1
FAI82 23
11
4
1
6
17
28 11 11
28
17
6
1
4
11
23
12 5
15
16
12 12 16 5 12
13
15 13
24 14 27
13 13 27 14 24
25 26
14 14 26 25
15 15 2 1
6 5 4
16 16 F32-10A F31-15A
CAB50 1 2 3 CAB49 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1
17 17 3
18 18 1 2
19 19 CAB50 1 2 3 CAB49 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1
3 5 4
20 6
28A
28B
20
12A
12B
32A
16A
21 21 CAB49.1/CAB35.32A B
R
22
11A
11B
27A
27B
22
32B
16B
23 23
CAB35.21A/CAB85.1
CAB49.2/ENG1.18 B
24 CAB35
26A
26B
24
10A
10B
B
25 CAB49.5/ENG1.19 B
25
CAB35.31B/CAB49.4
31A
26
25A
15A
25B
9A
9B
26
27 32B - 32A
27
31B
15B
24A
28
24B
8A
8B
28
29 29 FAI84
23A
30 10A
23B
7A
7B
30
G D 31
B
31 31B - 31A
22A
22B
6A
6B
CAB90.5/CAB35.32B
21A
21B
5A
5B
30A
14A
15A
20A
20B
21B - 21A
14A
30B
4A
4B
H4 1 2 3 H4 1 2 3
19A
19B
FAI34
3A
3B
1 2 10A
29A
13A
H4 1 2 3 1 2 H4 1 2 3
18A
18B
2A
2B
3 20B - 20A
3
S_1 H4.3/S1.1 N S1 H4.3/S1.1 N
29B
13B
B
B
CAB35.20B/CAB50.1 R
B
B
N
17A
17B
1A
1B
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
R19.4/H4.1
R19.5/H4.2
R12.4/H4.1
R12.5/H4.2
R37.1/S1.1
R38.1/S1.1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 10A
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 F21-10A
N
6 1 6 1
F20-10A
5 2 5 2
CAB35.31A/CAB90.6 B
CAB50.2/CAB111.1
4 3 4 3
1 R12 1 2 3 4 5 6 R38 1 R19 1 2 3 4 5 6 C8 C8

R37
C7 C7
C6 C6 CAB90 CAB90
R37 1 R12 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 1
R38 1 R19 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 1
(4) (3) (8) (9) (12) (1) (11) (13) (7)
5 2 C5 C5
5 2
1 1 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
4 3 4 3
C4 C4
B
B
2 2
C3 C3
3 3
S11.1/R19.5
C2 C2
S10.1/R19.4
4 4
C1 C1
5 5
FAI75 B8 B8
6 6 O
B7 B7 I J klaxon
S11.1/R12.5 B S11 R52.B6/S11.1 B R52.B6/CAB49.6 B 7 7
B6 B6
S10.1/R12.4 B S10 R52.B5/S10.1 B B5 B5
R52.B5/CAB49.3 B 8 8
II
CAB90
9 9
B4 B4 lave vitre
N
10 10
B3 B3
11 11
B2 B2
R37.1/R10.1
12 12
B1 B1
R52.A8/CAB109.1 N 13 13 56b 56a L (10) H
A8 A8
A7 A7 (5) (6) (2)
R10.1/R38.1 N R52.C1/R10.1 N
13
A6 A6
7
A5 A5
12
6
B
R52.A8/R10.1 N
N
A4 A4
11
5
CAB42.6/CAB90.4
A3 A3
R52.C1/CAB111.1
4
A2 A2
A1 A1
10
3
2
8 1 2 3
9
R52 R52
1
7 4 5 6
1 R10
+3 +6 8 8
7 7
6 6
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N
5 5
M
1 2
4 4
3 3
CAB42.5/CAB108.1
2 2
-7 2 5 1 1
CAB42 CAB42
MA-10-03277A
+12V
CAB42 1 CAB108 1 CAB111 1 CAB109
Fig. 54
Contents
Standard roof side lights - Europe

A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1
17A
17B
1A
1B
FAI 61 Simplified handrail harness - Europe
13B
29B
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
S1 R38.1/S1.1 N
1 1
except US)
3A
3B
19A
19B
C8 C8
FAI 91 Cab lighting harness (all countries except US) R38 R38
14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
C7 C7
14A
C6
30A
C6 CAB109 1
S1.1/H1.3
5A
5B
21A
21B
C5 C5
R10.1/R38.1
CAB 35 Fuse box D 2 1 C4
6A
6B
22A
22B
1 2 C4
C3
CAB 42 Light switch
N
3 C3
23B
7A
7B
23A
3 C2 C2
H1 Front right- and left-hand side lights
R52.A8/CAB109.1
C1 C1
24B
3 3
8A
8B
24A
15B
31B
FAI61 R19 R19 B8
LIG4 Rear right-hand side lights 2 2 B8
R52.C4/S12.1
15A
25A
25B
B7
9A
9B
31A
1 1 B7
LIG5 Rear left-hand side lights 1 1 B6
B6
10A
10B
26A
26B
2 2 B5
H1 H1 R19.3/H1.2 B R52.A4/R19.3 B B5
3 3
16B
32B
B4 B4
27A
27B
11A
11B
B3
AV B3
16A
32A
B2
12A
12B
28A
28B
B2
R52.C1/R10.1 N B1
B1
1 R52.A8/R10.1 N A8
A8
R37.1/R10.1 N A7 F26-7.5A
A7 F25-10A
A6 A6
R10 FAI94 A5
A5
A4 A4 CAB35
S1.1/H1.3 N S1 R37.1/S1.1 N A3
3 3 1 1 A3
B
2 2 A2 25B- 25A
A2
B
R37 R37 A1
R52.C4/S8.1
1 1 A1
R52.A4/S25.1
H1 H1 10A
R52 R52
R12.3/H1_.2
G R12 R12
26B- 26A
38 1 1 1
2 2
S8.1/R12.3 B S8 7.5A
LIG10 3 3 FAI84
S12.1/LIG1.7 B S12
1 2 2 1 LIG1.1/S25.1 B S25 CAB35.25B/S25.1 B
B
1 3
CAB35.26B/S12.1 B
3
LIG10.1/S6.1
LIG7
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
1 2 3
2
3 4
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
LIG7.1/S3.1
3
4 3
4
2 1 1 2
D
5 6
8 1 2 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
7
7
N
N
7 4 5 6
4 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
CAB42.7/CAB111.1
3 3
R52.C1/CAB111.1
S6.1/LIG11.2 B S6 LIG1.7/S6.1 B
2 2 7 7
1 1 6 6 CAB42
5 5
N FAI91 4 4
LIG11 LIG11 +3 +6
3 3
2 2
S3 LIG1.1/S3.1 B
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
AR 1 1
B
LIG1 LIG1 1 2
4 3 3 4
2 1 1 2 S3.1/LIG12.2
1 -7 2 5
+12V CAB108
4 4
3 3 1
2 2
1 1
G LIG12 LIG12
LIG2
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 N
1 MA-10-03287A
Fig. 55

Contents
Slim Line roof side lights - Europe
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness

C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
FAI 77 Flat roof harness (Slim Line) A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
FAI 84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries S1 R38.1/S1.1 N 1 1 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
18A
18B
2A
2B
except US)
13A
29A
R38 R38
3A
3B
19A
19B
FAI 91 Cab lighting harness (all countries except US) C8 C8
14A 14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
C7 C7
FAI 110 Flat roof ground harness (Slim Line) 6 1
6
5
1
2
C6
30A
S1.1/H1.3
5 2
4 3 C6
5A
5B
21A
21B
4 3
CAB 35 Fuse box 2 1

1 2 C5 C5
D C4
6A
6B
22A
22B
3 C4
CAB 42 Light switch 3 R19 R19 C3 C3
23B
7A
7B
23A
C2 C2
H1 Front right- and left-hand side lights FAI34 1 R55.3/R38.1 N
1 C1 C1
24B
8A
8B
24A
3 3 2
15B 15A
31B
2 B8
LIG4 Rear right-hand side lights 2 2
R19.3/H1.2 B
3 3
R52.A4/R19.3 B B8
B7
25A
25B
B7
9A
9B
31A
LIG5 Rear left-hand side lights 1 1 4 4 B6
B6
5 5
10A
10B
26A
26B
B5 B5
H1 H1 6
B
6 B4
16B
32B
B4
27A
27B
11A
11B
R55 R55 B3
AV B3
R52.C4/S12.1
16A
32A
B2
FAI110
12A
12B
28A
28B
B2
1 1 B1
B1
2 2 A8
CAB149.1/R55.3 N A8
2 1 1 3 3
G 1 2
3
CAB149.1/R55.4 N
4 4 A7
A6
A7
A6
F25-10A F26-7.5A
3
A5 A5
CAB149
3 4 4 3
A4 A4
S1_.1/H1_.3 N S1_R37.1/S1_.1 N 1 2 A3
CAB35
2 1
3 3 A3
A2 25B - 25A
2 2 R55.4/R37.1 N A2
1 1 A1
B
1 1 A1
B
R37 R37
R52.A4/S25.1
H1 H1 R52 R52 10A
R12.3/H1_.2
26B - 26A
R12 R12 FAI77
1 1
38 2 2 FAI84
R52.C4/R12.3 B 7.5A
1 3 3
4 4 S12.1/LIG1.7 B S12
LIG10 5 5 LIG1.1/S25.1 B S25 CAB35.25B/S25.1 B
6 6 CAB35.26B/S12.1 B
B
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
LIG10.1/S6.1
6 1
6 1
1 5 2
5
4
2
3
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
B
4 3
LIG7 8 1 2 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
LIG7.1/S3.1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 4 5 6
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
CAB42.7/CAB111.1
S6 LIG1.7/S6.1 B
4 3 3 4 7 7
D 2 1 1 2 6
5
6
5
CAB42
S3 LIG1.1/S3.1 B
4 4
3 3 +3 +6
4 4
3 3 2 2
S6.1/LIG11.2 B
FAI91
2 2 1 1
N
1 1 1 2
LIG1 LIG1
LIG11 LIG11
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
1 CAB111 -7 2 5
+12V CAB108
AR
B
1
G
S3.1/LIG12.2
4 3 3 4
2 1 1 2
4 4
3 3 LIG2
2 2
1 1 1
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 N
MA-10-03292A
LIG12 LIG12
Fig. 56
Contents
Platform side lights - Europe
FAI 86 Platform instrument panel harness - EU

FAI 92 Platform lighting harness - EU
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B 29A
FAI 98 Platform handrail harness
18A
18B
3 4 CAB109 1
2A
2B
4 3
13A
CAB 35 Fuse box 2 1 2 1 1 2
3A
3B
19A
19B
1 2
CAB 42 Light switch D 3
14A 14A
30B 30A
4A
4B
20A
20B
38 Trailer connector - EU 3 CAB136
5A
5B
21A
21B
S1.1/H1.3 N S1
3 3 1 1
CAB136.2/H1.2 B
6A
6B
22A
22B
2 2 2 2
1 1 3 3
23B
7A
7B
23A
CAB136.4/S1.1 N CAB136.4/CAB109.1 N
4 4
H1 H1
24B
8A
8B
24A
15B 15A
31B 31A
CAB136
25A
25B
9A
9B
AV
10A
10B
26A
26B
4 3 3 4
CAB136.2/S25.1
16B
32B 32A
2 1
1 2
27A
27B
11A
11B
2 1 1 2
16A
G 3 FAI98
12A
12B
28A
28B
3
CAB137
S1_.1/H1_.3 B S1 F26-7.5A
3 3 1 1 F25-10A
CAB137.2/H1_.2 B
2 2 2 2
1 1 3 3
B
CAB137.4/S1_.1 B
4 4 FAI86
CAB35
H1 H1
CAB137.2/S12.1
25B- 25A
CAB137
S25 CAB35.25B/S25.1 B
10A
B
38 26B- 26A
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A
N
1 S12 CAB35.26B/S12.1 B
CAB137.4/CAB111.1
LIG7
7.5A
B
LIG7.1/S3.1
S12.1/LIG1.7
B
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
LIG10.1/S6.1 B
1
1 CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N
1 2 3
LIG1.1/S25.1
2
3
4
LIG10
4
5
5 6 7
8 1 2 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
6
7
FAI92 7 4 5 6
3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
4 3
D 2 1 1 2
S6 LIG1.7/S6.1 B 7 7
6 6 CAB42
5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 +3 +6
2 S6.1/LIG11.2 B
2 2 2
1 1 S3 LIG1.1/S3.1 B
1 1
LIG11 LIG11 1 2
N
LIG1 LIG1
B
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
AR 1 CAB111
S3.1/LIG12.2
CAB108 -7 2 5
+12V
4 3 3 4 1
G 2 1 1 2
4 4
3 3
2 2
LIG2
1 1
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 B MA-10-03460A
1
LIG12 LIG12
Fig. 57

Contents
Standard and high visibility roof side lights

- North America A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
S1 R38.1/S1.1 N 1 1 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness R38 R38
3A
3B
19A
19B
N
C8 C8
14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
C7
FAI 83 Cab instrument panel harness - US 6 1 C7
R10.1/R38.1
6 1
5 2
C6
14A
C6
30A
S1.1/H1.3
5 2
4 3
5A
5B
21A
21B
FAI 95 Cab lighting harness - US 2 1
4 3
C5 C5 CAB109 1
1 2 C4
CAB 35 Fuse box D C4
6A
6B
22A
22B
3 C3
3
R19 R19 C3
23B
CAB 42 Light switch C2
7A
7B
23A
FAI34 C2
N
1 1 C1 C1
H1 Front right- and left-hand side lights
24B
8A
8B
24A
3 3 2 2
15B
31B
B8
R52.A8/CAB109.1
R19.3/H1.2 B R52.A4/R19.3 B B8
2 2 3 3
B
LIG4 Rear right-hand side lights B7
15A
25A
25B
B7
9A
9B
31A
1 1 4 4 B6
B6
LIG5 Rear left-hand side lights
R52.C4/S12.1
5 5
10A
10B
26A
26B
B5 B5
H1 H1 6 6 B4
16B
32B
B4
27A
27B
11A
11B
B3 B3
AV
16A
32A
B2 B2
12A
12B
28A
28B
R52.C1/R10.1 N B1 B1
1
2
R52.A8/R10.1 N
G 1 2
3
1
R10.1/R37.1 N
A8 A8
A7
3
A7 F25-10A F26-7.5A
R10 A6 A6
A5 A5
A4 A4
S1_.1/H1_.3 N S1_R37.1/S1_.1 N A3 CAB35
3 3 A3
B
A2 25B - 25A
2 2 A2
1 1 A1
B
1 1
R52.C4/S2.1
A1
B
R37 R37
R52.A4/S25.1
H1 H1 R52 R52
10A
R12.3/H1_.2
26B - 26A
R12 R12 FAI78
42 1
1 1
LIG10 2 2 S2 FAI83 7.5A
S2.1/R12.3 B
3 3
4 4 S12.1/LIG1.7 B S12
5 5 LIG1.1/S25.1 B S25 CAB35.25B/S25.1 B
B
1 6 6 CAB35.26B/S12.1 B
LIG10.1/S6.1
LIG7
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
B
6 1
6 1
3 4 5 2
5 2
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
LIG7.1/S3.1
4 3 4 3
4 3
1 2
D 2 1
8 1 2 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N
R52.C1/CAB111.1 N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 4 5 6
4 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
3 3
2 2 S6.1/LIG11.2 B S6 LIG1.7/S6.1 B
7 7
1 1 6 6 CAB42
5 5
FAI95 4 4
N
LIG11 LIG11 +3 +6
3 3
S3 LIG1.1/S3.1 B 2 2
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
AR B 1 1
G LIG1 LIG1
1 2
4 3 3 4
S3.1/LIG12.2
2 1 1 2
1 CAB111 -7 2 5
+12V CAB108
4 4
3 3 1
2 2
1 1
LIG12 LIG12
LIG2
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 N 1 MA-10-03293A
Fig. 58
Contents
Platform side lights - North America
FAI 85 Platform instrument panel harness - NAO

FAI 97 Platform lighting harness - NAO
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
18A
18B
3 4 CAB109 1
2A
2B
4 3
13A
29A
CAB 35 Fuse box 2 1 2 1 1 2
3A
3B
19A
19B
1 2
CAB 42 Light switch D 3
14A 14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
42 Trailer connector - NAO 3 CAB136
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
S1.1/H1.3 N S1
3 3 1 1
CAB136.2/H1.2 B
6A
6B
22A
22B
2 2 2 2
1 1 3 3
23B
7A
7B
23A
CAB136.4/S1.1 N CAB136.4/CAB109.1 N
4 4
24B
H1 H1
8A
8B
24A
15B 15A
31B
CAB136
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
AV
10A
10B
26A
26B
4 3 3 4
CAB136.2/S25.1
16B
32B
2 1
1 2
27A
27B
11A
11B
2 1 1 2
FAI98
16A
32A
G 3
12A
12B
28A
28B
3
CAB137
S1_.1/H1 .3 B S1
3 3 1 1 F25-10A F26-7.5A
CAB137.2/H1 .2 B
2 2 2 2
1 1 3 3 FAI85
B
CAB137.4/S1_.1 B
4 4 CAB35
H1 H1
CAB137.2/S12.1
25B - 25A
CAB137
S25 CAB35.25B/S25.1 B
10A
B
26B - 26A
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A
N
1 S12 CAB35.26B/S12.1 B
CAB137.4/CAB111.1
LIG7
7.5A
B
LIG7.1/S3.1
S12.1/LIG1.7
B
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
LIG10.1/S6.1 B
1
1 CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N
1 2 3
LIG1.1/S25.1
2
3
42
4
LIG10
4
5
5 6 7
8 1 2 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
6
7
FAI97
7 4 5 6
4 3 3 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
D 2 1 1 2
S6 LIG1.7/S6.1 B
7 7
6 6 CAB42
5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 +3 +6
S6.1/LIG11.2 B
2 2 2 2
1 1 S3 LIG1.1/S3.1 B
1 1
LIG11 LIG11 1 2
N
LIG1 LIG1
B
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
AR
S3.1/LIG12.2
CAB108 1 CAB111 -7 2 5
+12V
4 3 3 4 1
G 2 1 1 2
4 4
3 3
2 2
LIG2
1 1
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 B MA-10-03461A
1
LIG12 LIG12
Fig. 59

Contents
Standard roof number plate lighting
FAI 18 Number plate lighting harness

except US)
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
CAB 35 Fuse box B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1 58
CAB 42 Light switch C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
R34B.1/29.2 N
1
58 Number plate lighting
R52 R52 R34B
A1 A1
A2 A2
A3 A3
A4 A4
R42 1
A5 A5 1 1 R34A.1/R29.1 B
A6 1
A6
A7 A7 2
2 FAI18
R29 R29 R34A
A8 A8
B1 B1 R42.1/R29.1 N
1 1
B2 B2 S8 S8.1/R29.2 B
2 2
B3 B3
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6 FAI94
R33B.1/29.2 N 58
B7 B7 1
B8 B8
C1 C1 R33B
C2 CAB35
C2
C3 C3
R52.C4/S8.1 B
C4 C4
C5 F26 - 7.5A
C5
28A
12A
28B
12B
C6
32A
16A
C6 R29.1/R33A.1 B
11A
11B
27A
27B
1
32B
16B
C7 C7 F25 - 10A
26A
10A
26B
10B
C8 C8
31A
25A
15B 15A
25B
9A
9B
R33A
31B
24A
24B
8A
8B
23A
23B
7A
7B
22A
22B
6A
6B
21A
CAB35
21B
5A
5B
30A
14A 14A
20A
20B
30B
4A
4B
19A
19B
3A
3B
29A
13A
26B - 26A
18A
18B
2A
2B
29B
13B
17A
17B
1A
1B
R52.C4/S12.1 B S12 CAB35.26B/S12.1 B
7.5A
25B - 25A 8 1 2 3 CAB42

FAI84
7 4 5 6 CAB42
10A +3 +6
1 1
2 2
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
3 3
4 4 1 2
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
5 5
6 6
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N 7 7
8 8 -7 2 5
CAB108 1
CAB42
1 CAB111
+12V
MA-10-03288A
Fig. 60
Contents
Number plate lighting for high visibility

roof A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
S1 R38.1/S1.1 N C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
1 1
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
3A
3B
19A
19B
R38 R38
FAI 84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries C8
N
C8
14A 14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
N
C7
except US) C7
C6
S1.1/H1.3
CAB109
30A
C6 1
5A
5B
21A
21B
6 1
R10.1/R38.1
6 1
CAB 35 Fuse box 1 2

2 1
5
4
2
3
5 2 C5 C5
C4
6A
6B
22A
22B
4 3
C4
CAB 42 Light switch 3 C3
N
C3
23B
3
7A
7B
23A
FAI34 C2
R35 HV roof number plate lighting 6 6 C2
R52.A8/CAB109.1
C1 C1
24B
3 3 5 5
8A
8B
24A
15B 15A
31B
R36 HV roof number plate lighting 2 2 4 4 B8 B8
R52.C4/S12.1
R19.3/H1.2 B R52.A4/R19.3 B B7
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
1 1 3 3 B7
B6 B6
2 2
10A
10B
26A
26B
H1 H1 B5 B5
1 1
D
16B
32B
B4 B4
27A
27B
11A
11B
B3
AV R19 R19 B3
16A
32A
B2
12A
12B
28A
28B
B2
R52.C1/R10.1 N B1
B1
R52.A8/R10.1 N A8
1 A8
R37.1/R10.1 N A7 F26-7.5A
1 2
2 1
A7 F25-10A
R10 A6 A6
3 FAI78 A5
3 A5
A4 A4 CAB35
3 3 S1.1/H1.3 N S1_R37.1/S1_.1 N A3
1 1 A3
B
25B - 25A
2 2 A2 A2
B
1 1 R37 R37 A1
R52.C4/S8.1
A1
R52.A4/S25.1
H1 H1 10A
G R52 R52
R12.3/H1_.2
26B - 26A
6 6
38 LIG10 5 5
4 4
1 S8.1/R12.3 B S8
3 3 FAI84 7.5A
2 2 S12.1/LIG1.7 B S12
1 1
LIG7
6
5 2
1
6 1 LIG1.1/S25.1 B S25 CAB35.25B/S25.1 B
5 2
4 3
R12 R12
B
1 4 3 CAB35.26B/S12.1 B
LIG10.1/S6.1
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
1 2 3
2
3 4
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
3
4 3
LIG7.1/S3.1
4
2 1 1 2
5 6 7
8 1 2 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
6
7
7 4 5 6
4 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB42
3 3
S6.1/LIG11.2 B S6 LIG1.7/S6.1 B
2 2 7 7
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N
R52.C1/CAB111.1 N
1 1 6 6 CAB42
5 5
D FAI91 4 4
N
LIG11 LIG11 +3 +6
3 3
2 2
S3 LIG1.1/S3.1 B
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
AR 1 1
B
LIG1 LIG1 1 2
4 3 3 4
S3.1/LIG12.2
2 1 1 2
CAB108 1 CAB111 -7 2 5
+12V
4 4
3 3 1
2 2
1 1
G LIG12 LIG12
LIG2
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 N
1
MA-10-03289A
Fig. 61

Contents
Slim line roof number plate lighting
FAI 37 Lighting harness - Europe

except US)
FAI 114 Flat roof number plate lighting harness (Slim LIG22
LIG22
Line)
LIG12-A.4/LIG22.1 N
1
CAB 35 Fuse box LIG12-A.2/LIG22.2 B
2
CAB 42 Light switch
LIG12A Rear left-hand side light
LIG22 Number plate lighting 2 1
3 4 4 3 FAI114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 2 1 1 2
7 6 5 4 2 1
FAI37
LIG12A
LIG12 LIG12
4
LIG1 LIG12.4/LIG12-A.4 N
1 1 3
S25 LIG.1/S25.1 B LIG1.1/S3.1 B S3 S3.1/LIG12.2 B 2
1 1 2 2 LIG12.2/LIG12-A.2 B
2 2 3 3 1
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 N
3 3 4 4
LIG12-A
4 4
5 5
6 6 3 4
7 7 1
LIG2
1 2
LIG1
FAI84
CAB42
CAB35
CAB35 CAB42
+3 +6
25B - 25A 1 1
2 2
CAB35.25B/S25.1 B CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
28A
12A
28B
12B
10A 3 3
32A
16A
11A
11B
4 4
27A
27B
1 2 F25-10A
32B
16B
CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
5 5
26A
10A
26B
10B
6 6
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N
31A
25A
15A
7 7
25B
9A
9B
8 8 -7 2 5
31B
15B
24A
24B
8A
8B
23A
CAB42
23B
7A
7B
8 1 2 3
22A
22B
6A
6B
CAB111 1
21A
21B
5A
5B
30A
14A
7 4 5 6
20A
20B
14A
30B
4A
4B
19A
19B
3A
3B
29A
13A
18A
18B
2A
2B
29B
13B
17A
17B
1A
1B
CAB108 1
+12V
MA-10-03290A
Fig. 62
Contents
Platform number plate lighting

FAI 92 Platform lighting harness - EU
CAB 35 Fuse box
+12V
CAB 42 Light switch CAB111 1
LIG 16 Number plate lighting
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N
CAB42
CAB108 1
+3 +6 8 8
7 7 CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M
6 6
1 2 5 5 25A - 25B
4 4
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B CAB35.25B/S25.1 B S25
3 3
2 2
-7 2 5 FAI86
1 1 10A
B
CAB42 CAB42
CAB35
LIG1.1/S25.1
8 1 2 3
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
7 4 5 6
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
F25-10A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LIG1
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A CAB35
B
LIG1.1/S3.1
2
2
1
1
FAI92
S3.1/LIG16.2 B LIG2 S3
2 2
1 1
LIG2.1/LIG16.1 N
1
LIG16 LIG16
LIG16 MA-10-03455A
Fig. 63

Contents
Standard roof flashing beacon

except US)
CAB 35 Fuse box
R23 Left-hand flashing beacon
R39 Right-hand flashing beacon 1 R42
R51 Flashing beacon switch

R51 8 1 2 3
7 4 5 6
R39
+8 1 +3 8 8
R51.7/R42.1 N
7 7
6 6
5 5
1 2 4 4
S13.1/R51.3 B S13 R39.1/S13.1 B
3 3 1
CAB35
F28-20A 2 2
-7 2 1 1 R39
R51 R51
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
9A 10A 11A 12A

17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
10B 11B 12B

F27-15A
32B 32A
16B 16A
31B 31A
15B 15A
9B
R52 R52
8A
8B
FAI94
7A
7B
A1 A1
A2 A2
6A
6B
A3 A3
30B 30A
5A
5B
14A 14A
FAI84 A4 A4
4A
4B
A5 A5 R23
2A 3A
3B
A6 A6
29B 29A
13B 13A
2B A7 A7
1A A8 A8
1B
B1 B1
B2 B2
R23.1/S13.1 B
CAB35 B3 B3 1
B4 B4
R23
B5 B5
27A - 27B
B6 B6
R52.B7/CAB35.27B M R51.2/R52.B7 B
B7 B7
B8 B8
15A C1 C1
C2 C2
28A - 28B
C3 C3
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1 M C4 C4
C5 C5
20A C6 C6
C7 C7
C8 C8
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
CAB106 1
+12V
MA-10-03433A
Fig. 64
Contents
Slim Line roof flashing beacon
FAI 77 Flat roof harness (Slim Line)

except US) 3 4 4 3
1 2 2 1
FAI 110 Flat roof ground harness (Slim Line)
CAB 35 Fuse box FAI110 R53 59
R55 R55
R53.1/S18.1 N
59 Left-hand flashing beacon CAB149 R55.1/CAB149.1 N 1
1
1
R55.2/CAB149.1 N
59 Right-hand flashing beacon 1 2 2
3 3
R51 Flashing beacon switch 4 4
R39.1/S13.1 B
N
1
S18.1/R55.1 N S18
R55.2/S17.1
R39
R51
+8 1 +3 8 8
R51.7/S17.1 N S17
FAI77
7 7
6 6
1 2
5 5
4 4
S13.1/R51.3 B S13
3 3
2 2
-7 2 1 1
R51 R51
59
R54
8 1 2 3
R54.1/S18.1 N
1
7 4 5 6 R52 R52
A1 A1
A2 A2
A3 A3 R23.1/S13.1 B
A4 1
A4
A5 A5
R23
A6 A6
A7 A7
A8 A8
B1 B1
FAI84
B2 B2
CAB35 B3
B3
B4 B4 CAB35
B5 B5
27A - 27B F28-20A
B6 B6
R52.B7/CAB35.27B M R51.2/R52.B7 B
B7 B7 F27-15A
B8 B8
15A
C1 C1
28A - 28B
C2 C2
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1 M C3 C3
C4 C4 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
20A C5
C5
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
C6 C6
C7 C7
C8 C8
CAB106 1 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
+12V
MA-10-03291A
Fig. 65

Contents
Platform flashing beacon
FAI 79 Platform flashing beacon harness

CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB 139Flashing beacon switch
59 Flashing beacon
+8 1 +3
CAB35
+12V
17A
17B
1A
1B
1 2
13B
29B
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
3A
3B
19A
19B
14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
CAB106 1
-7 2
14A
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
M
6A
6B
22A
22B
CAB139
23B
7A
7B
23A
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1
24B
8A
8B
24A
15B
31B
8 1 2 3 CAB139 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
15A
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
7 4 5 6
10A
10B
26A
26B
CAB139 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F27-20A
16B
32B
27A
27B
11A
11B
16A
32A
F28-15A
N
12A
12B
28A
28B
28A - 28B
CAB139.3/CAB138.1
CAB139.7/CAB111.1
20A
FAI85
27A - 27B
CAB139.2/CAB35.27B M CAB111
1
15A
CAB35
R44
2 1 1 2
1
CAB138.2/R44.1 N 2 2 CAB138.2/CAB109.1 N
1 1
R43
FAI79 CAB138 CAB138
CAB138.1/R43.1 B
1
1 CAB109
59
MA-10-03456A
Fig. 66
Contents
Standard roof direction indicator and

warning lights - Europe
FAI 61 Simplified handrail harness 49

FAI 84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries CAB35
except US)
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B 13A
29B 29A
18A
18B
2A
2B
FAI 94 Standard roof harness EU
3A
3B
19A
19B
CAB77
14A 14A
30B 30A
4A
4B
20A
20B
F21-10A
CAB 35 Fuse box C C2 C3
5A
5B
21A
21B
F22-5A
CAB 43 Warning switch
6A
6B
22A
22B 23B
G
7A
7B
23A
CAB 90 Windscreen wiper control unit
24B
8A
8B
24A 25A
15B 15A
31B 31A
CAB 91 Flashing light unit
25B
9A
9B
31 49 49a
10A
10B
26A
26B
3 Start switch
25 14
16B 16A
32B 32A
F28-20A
27A
27B
11A 12A
11B 12B
13 1
28A
28B
CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CAB47.2/CAB77.2 B
CAB77.3/CAB47.14 B 3 2 1
B
6 5 4
CAB77.4/S13.1
R38 R38
S1_ R38.1/S1.1 N
1 1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
S13
N
2 1 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
1 2
6
2 1
N
1 2
S1_.1/H1_.1
3
3 FAI61
5
2
R10.1/R38.1
B
3
B
3 C8 C8
CAB47.6/S6.1
CAB47.8/S27.1
4
C7 C7
S13.1/CAB43.2
R19 R19 C6
3 3 C6
7
R
D 2
1
2
R19.2/H1_.1 B
1 1 C5
C4
C5
C4
1 2
CAB77.6/S24.1
2
3 C3 C3
3 R52.C2/R12.2 B
H1 H1 C2 C2
C1 C1 CAB43 +8 3 6
B8 B8
1 1
B7 B7 CAB35 2 2
AV 2 1
1 2 R52.C1/R10.1 N
B6
B5
B6
B5
CAB43.3/S22.1 B
3 3 1
R52.A8/R10.1 N 4 4
1 B4 B4 CAB43.5/CAB35.28B M
5 5
3 B3 B3 28A - 28B S24 S24.1/CAB43.6 R
6 6 -7 2 5
3 R10 B2 B2
CAB98 7 7
B1 B1 CAB97
R12 R12 8 8
A8 A8 S22.1/CAB97.1 B S22 CAB43.8/S22.1 B
3 3 20A 1
G 2 2
R12.2/H1.1 B
1 1 FAI94 A7
A6
A7 1
CAB43
2 2 A6
1 1
A5 A5
3 3
H1 H1
A4
A3
A4 22A - 22B CAB43
A3 CAB35.21B/CAB100.1 R S24.1/CAB99.1 R
N
R52.A2/R19.2 B
N
A2 A2 1 1
2 1
1 2 A1 A1
N
B
R37.1/R10.1
S1.1/H1.1
5A
B
3 R52 R52 CAB100 CAB99
CAB111.1/CAB43.7
S6.1/R52.A2
3
R52.C2/S27.1
21A - 21B CAB96 CAB95
R37 R37 S22.1/CAB95.1 B
S6 1 1
S1 R37.1/S1.1 B
1 1
10A
CAB96.1/S6.1 B
S27
CAB98.1/S27.1 B
B
1 CAB90
CAB90.10/S13.1
LIG9
R
N
B
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1
CAB35.22A/CAB85.1
R52.A8/CAB109.1
R52.C1/CAB111.1
B
S27.1/LIG1.6
1
FAI84
CAB90
B
LIG6 1
1
2 2
LIG9.1/S5.1
3 3
4 3 3 4
4 4
5 5
2 1 1 2
6 6
7 7
1
1 2 3
S27.1/CAB90.8 B 8
8
2
CAB90.9/S6.1 B 9
4 4 9
3
3 3 CAB109.1/CAB77.1 N 10 10
4
56
D 11 11 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
5
2 2
5 6 7
S5.1/LIG11.1 B S5 LIG1.2/S5.1 B 12
6
1 1 12
13
7
13
LIG11 LIG11
CAB90 I O
klaxon
J
1 CAB106 1 CAB85
N
7 7 II
B
6 lave vitre
6
5
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
3 4 5
LIG6.1/S2.1
4 3
4 4
8
49
1
1
AR
8
3 3 56b 56a L H
2 1 1 2 LIG1.2/S6.1 B
FAI91
2
9
2 2
1 +12V
10
10
3
1
3
LIG1 LIG1
4
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 N
4 4
11
11 12 13
5
5
3 3
G
13 12
2 2
6
S2.1/LIG12.1 B S2 LIG1.6/S2.1 B
1 1
7
LIG12 LIG12
1 CAB111 1 CAB109
MA-10-03434A
1
LIG2
Fig. 67

Contents
High visibility roof direction indicator and

warning lights - Europe and Germany
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness 49

FAI 78 High visibility roof harness CAB35
17A
17B
1A
1B
except US)
13B 13A
29B 29A
18A
18B
2A
2B
3A
3B
19A
19B
CAB77
14A 14A
30B 30A
4A
4B
20A
20B
F21-10A
CAB 35 Fuse box C C2 C3
5A
5B
21A
21B
F22-5A
6A
6B
22A
22B 23B
G
7A
7B
23A
24B
8A
8B
24A 25A
15B 15A
31B 31A
25B
9A
9B
31 49 49a
10A
10B
26A
26B
16B 16A
32B 32A
F28-20A
27A
27B
11A 12A
11B 12B
13 1
28A
28B
CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CAB47.2/CAB77.2 B
CAB77.3/CAB47.14 B 3 2 1
B
6 5 4
CAB77.4/S13.1
R38 R38
S1_ R38.1/S1.1 N
1 1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
N
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
S13
N
6 1 6 1
S1_.1/H1_.1
2
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
5
6
1 5 2
2 1 2
R10.1/R38.1
4 3
4 3
5
2
B
B
3 C8
FAI34 C8
CAB47.6/S6.1
CAB47.8/S27.1
4
C7 C7
S13.1/CAB43.2
6 6
3 3 5 5 C6 C6
7
R
D 2 2
R19.2/H1_.1 B
4 4 C5
C4
C5
C4
1 1 3 3
CAB77.6/S24.1
2 2 C3 C3
R52.C2/R12.2 B
H1 H1 1 1 C2 C2
C1 C1 CAB43
+8 3 6
R19 R19 B8 B8
1 1
B7
B6
B7 CAB35 2 2
B6 CAB43.3/S22.1 B
AV 2 1
1 2 R52.C1/R10.1 N B5 B5
3
4
3
4
1
R52.A8/R10.1 N B4 B4 CAB43.5/CAB35.28B M
1 5 5
3 B3 B3 28A - 28B S24 S24.1/CAB43.6 R
6 6 -7 2 5
3 R10 B2 B2 7 7
B1 B1 CAB98 CAB97
6 6 8 8
A8 A8 S22.1/CAB97.1 B S22 CAB43.8/S22.1 B
3 3 5 5 20A 1
G 2 2
R12.2/H1.1 B
4 4 FAI78 A7
A6
A7 1
CAB43
1 1 3 3 A6
A5 A5
2 2
H1 H1 1 1 A4
A3
A4 22A - 22B CAB43
A3 CAB35.21B/CAB100.1 R S24.1/CAB99.1 R
R52.A2/R19.2 B 1
R12 R12 A2 A2 1
A1 A1
N
B
5A CAB100 CAB99
B
N
R52 R52
CAB111.1/CAB43.7
S6.1/R52.A2
R10.1/R37.1
R52.C2/S27.1
S1.1/H1.1
6 1
6 1
5 2
5 2 21A - 21B CAB96 CAB95
4 3
4 3
1 S22.1/CAB95.1 B
S6 1
10A
R37 R37
S1 R37.1/S1.1 B
1 1
CAB96.1/S6.1 B
S27
CAB98.1/S27.1 B
B
1 CAB90
CAB90.10/S13.1
LIG9
R
N
B
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1
CAB35.22A/CAB85.1
R52.A8/CAB109.1
R52.C1/CAB111.1
B
S27.1/LIG1.6
1
FAI84
CAB90
B
LIG6
1 1
2 2
LIG9.1/S5.1
3 3
4 3 3 4
4 4
1 2 5 5
2 1 6 6
7 7
1
1 2 3
S27.1/CAB90.8 B
8 8
2
CAB90.9/S6.1 B
4 4 9 9
3
3 3 CAB109.1/CAB77.1 N 10 10
4
56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C

D 11 11
5
2 2
5 6 7
S5.1/LIG11.1 B S5 LIG1.2/S5.1 B
6
1 1 12 12
7
13 13
LIG11 LIG11
CAB90 I O
klaxon
J
1 CAB106 1 CAB85
N
7 7 II
B
6 lave vitre
6
5
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
3 4 5
LIG6.1/S2.1
4 3
AR 4 4 3
1
1
8
1 2 3 3 56b 56a L H
2 1 LIG1.2/S6.1 B +12V
FAI91
2
9
2 2
1
10
10
3
1
3
LIG1 LIG1
4
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 N
4 4
11
11 12 13
5
5
3 3
G
13 12
2 2
6
S2.1/LIG12.1 B S2 LIG1.6/S2.1 B
1 1
7
LIG12 LIG12
1 CAB111 1 CAB109
MA-10-03435A
LIG2
Fig. 68
Contents
Slim line roof direction indicator and

warning lights - Europe
CAB35
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness 49
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
3A
3B
19A
19B
except US)
14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
F21-10A
14A
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
F22-5A
CAB77
6A
6B
22A
22B
FAI 110 Slim Line roof ground harness
23B
7A
7B
23A
C C2 C3
CAB 35 Fuse box
24B
8A
8B
24A
15B
31B
15A
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
G
10A
10B
26A
26B
16B
32B
F28-20A
27A
27B
11A
11B
16A
32A
31 49 49a
12A
12B
28A
28B
CAB 91 Flashing light unit 25 14
3 Start switch 13 1
49 X2 instrument panel CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4
CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1
R38 R38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CAB47
S1_ R38.1/S1.1 N
1 1
CAB47.2/CAB77.2 B
CAB77.3/CAB47.14 B 3 2 1
B
6 5 4
CAB77.4/S13.1
N
1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
6 1 6
N
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
S1_.1/H1_.1
2 1
1 2
FAI34 5 2 5
4
2
3
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
R55.3/R38.1
4 3
3
3
6 6 S13
3 3 5 5 FAI77 C8 C8
D
6
2 2 4 4 C7 C7
R19.2/H1_.1 B
1 1 3 3 C6 C6
5
2
B
2 2 C5 C5
B
H1 H1 1 1 C4 C4
CAB47.6/S6.1
CAB47.8/S27.1
1
C3 C3
4
S13.1/CAB43.2
R19 R19 C2 C2
7
R
C1 C1
B8 B8
CAB77.6/S24.1
B7 B7
R52.A2/R19.2
R55.4/CAB149.1 N B6 B6
AV 4 4
B
R55.3/CAB149.1 N B5 B5 CAB43
1 3 3 +8 3 6
B4 B4
2 2
CAB35
R52.C2/R12.2
B3 B3 1 1
R10 1 1 2 2
FAI110 B2
B1
B2
B1
CAB43.3/S22.1 B
3 3 1
R55 R55 4
A8 A8 4
CAB43.5/CAB35.28B M
A7 A7 5 5
28A - 28B S24 S24.1/CAB43.6 R
A6 A6 6 6 -7 2 5
3 4 3
4 A5 A5 7 7
CAB98 CAB97
A4 A4 8 8
1 2 2 1 S22.1/CAB97.1 B S22 CAB43.8/S22.1 B
3 3 A3 A3 20A 1 1
G 2 2
R12.2/H1.1 B A2 A2
CAB43
1 1 A1 A1
H1 H1 6 6 R52 R52 22A - 22B CAB43
B
5 5 CAB35.21B/CAB100.1 R S24.1/CAB99.1 R
4 4 1 1
S6.1/R52.A2
B
3 3
N
2 1
1 2 2 2 5A CAB100 CAB99
R52.C2/S27.1
CAB111.1/CAB43.7
1 1
N
3
3 R12 R12
R55.4/R37.1
N
21A - 21B CAB96 CAB95

S22.1/CAB95.1 B
S1.1/H1.1
S6 1 1
6 1
6 1
5 2
10A
5 2
4 3
4 3
R37 R37 CAB96.1/S6.1 B

S1 R37.1/S1.1 B 1 1
S27
CAB98.1/S27.1 B
B
1 CAB90
CAB90.10/S13.1
LIG9
R
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1
CAB35.22A/CAB85.1
B
S27.1/LIG1.6
1
FAI84
CAB90
B
LIG6 1 1
2 2
LIG9.1/S5.1
3 3
4 3 3 4
4 4
1 2 5 5
2 1 6
6
7 7
1
1 2 3
S27.1/CAB90.8 B 8
8
2
CAB90.9/S6.1 B 9
4 4 9
3
3 3 CAB109.1/CAB77.1 N 10 10
4
D 11 11 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C

5
2 2
5 6 7
S5.1/LIG11.1 B S5 LIG1.2/S5.1 B 12
6
1 1 12
13
7
13
LIG11 LIG11
CAB90 I O
klaxon
J
1 CAB106 1 CAB85
N
7 7 II
B
lave vitre
6 6
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
3 4 5 5
LIG6.1/S2.1
4 3
AR 4 4 3
1
1
8
3 3 56b 56a L H
2 1 1 2 LIG1.2/S6.1 B
FAI91
2
9
2 2 +12V
10
10
3
1 1
3
4
LIG1 LIG1
4
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 N
4 4
11
11 12 13
5
5
3 3
G
13 12
2 2
6
S2.1/LIG12.1 B S2 LIG1.6/S2.1 B
1 1
7
LIG12 LIG12
1 CAB111 1 CAB109 MA-10-03436A
LIG2
Fig. 69

Contents
Platform indicator and warning lights -

Europe
FAI 86 X2 platform instrument panel harness - EU 49

CAB35
FAI 92 X2 platform lighting harness - EU
17A
17B
1A
1B
CAB 35 Fuse box
13B 13A
29B 29A
18A
18B
2A
2B
CAB 43 Warning switch CAB77
3A
3B
19A
19B
14A 14A
30B 30A
F21-10A
4A
4B
20A
20B
C C2 C3
5A
5B
21A
21B
CAB 90 Windscreen wiper control unit F22-5A
G
6A
6B
22A
22B 23B
3 Start switch
7A
7B
23A
38 Trailer connector - Europe 31 49 49a
24B
8A
8B
24A 25A
15B 15A
31B 31A
25 14
25B
9A
9B
13 1
10A
10B
26A
26B
16B 16A
32B 32A
F28-20A
CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6
27A
27B
11A 12A
11B 12B
6 5 4
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1
28A
28B
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CAB77.3/CAB47.14 B
3 2 1
CAB47.2/CAB77.2 B
6 5 4
B
B
CAB47.8/S27.1
CAB47.6/S6.1
R
B
CAB109.1/CAB77.1
CAB77.6/S24.1
CAB77.4/S13.1
6
2 1
1 2
FAI98
5
2
3
3
CAB136 CAB136
4
S1_.1/H1.3 N S1 S6.1/CAB136.1 B
3 3 1 1
7
D 2
1
2
1
CAB136.1/H1_.1 B
CAB136.4/S1_.1 N
2
3
4
2
3
4
CAB136.4/CAB109.1 N
CAB35
H1 H1
CAB43 +8 3 6
1 1
S13 S13.1/CAB43.2 B
2 2
S22 CAB43.3/S22.1 B 3 3 1
AV 2 1
1 2
3 28A - 28B
CAB43.5/CAB35.28B M
4
5
4
5
6 6 -7 2 5
3 7 7
R
CAB137 CAB137 CAB98 CAB97 CAB43.8/S22.1 B
8 8
S1.1/H1.3 N S1 CAB137.1/S27.1 B S22.1/CAB97.1 B
S24.1/CAB43.6
3 3 1 1 20A 1 1
G 2
1
2
1
CAB137.1/H1.1 B
CAB137.4/S1.1 B
2
3
4
2
3
4
CAB137.4/CAB111.1 N
CAB43
H1 H1 22A - 22B CAB43

S24.1/CAB99.1 R S24
1 1
5A CAB100 CAB99
21A - 21B CAB96 CAB95

CAB35.21B/CAB100.1 R S22.1/CAB95.1 B
1 1
10A
38
CAB111.1/CAB43.7 N
LIG9.1/S5.1 B
1
LIG9
CAB90
B
B
M
CAB98.1/S27.1
CAB96.1/S6.1
B
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1
CAB35.22A/CAB85.1
CAB90.10/S13.1
LIG6.1/S2.1 B
1 FAI86
LIG6
CAB90
1 1
2 2
4 3 3 4
3 3
1 2 4 4
2 1 5
5
6 6
7
FAI92 7
1
1 2 3
S27 S27.1/CAB90.8 B 8
4 4 8
2
S6 CAB90.9/S6.1 B 9
3 3 9
3
D 2 2 10 10
4
S5.1/LIG11.1 B S5 11 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C

5
1 1 11
5 6 7
12
6
12
LIG11 LIG11 13
7
13
CAB90 I O
J klaxon
1 CAB85
N
7 1 CAB106 II
S2 LIG1.6/S2.1 B 7
6 S27.1/LIG1.6 B lave vitre
3 3 4 6
4
AR 5
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
5
4
2 1 1 2 4
3
1
1
8
3 3 56b 56a L H
LIG1.2/S5.1 B LIG1.2/S6.1 B
9
2 +12V
2
9
2
1
10
10
3
1
3
4
4 LIG1 LIG1
4
4
3 3
G
11
11 12 13
5
N
5
2 2
S2.1/LIG12.1 B
13 12
1 1
6
LIG12.4/LIG2.1
7
LIG12 LIG12
1 CAB111 1 CAB109
MA-10-03457A
LIG2
Fig. 70
Contents
Standard roof direction indicator and

warning lights - North America
CAB35
FAI 75 Standard roof harness - US 49 CAB77 CAB90
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
FAI 95 Cab lighting harness - US
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
3A
3B
19A
19B
CAB 35 Fuse box
14A 14A
30B
F21-10A
4A
4B
20A
20B
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
F22-5A
CAB 43 Warning switch F6-10A 5
6A
6B
22A
22B
F7-30A 1
2 4
23B
7A
7B
23A
56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
CAB130
24B
8A
8B
24A 25A
3
15B 15A
31B
C3 C 49a
25B
9A
9B
31A
I O
F27-15A J klaxon
10A
10B
26A
26B
T CAB130
3 Start switch
16B
32B
II 1 1 86
27A
27B
11A 12A
11B
F28-20A lave vitre
2 2 30
16A
32A
25 14 3 3
12B
28A
28B
87a 87
56b 56a L H
4
5
4
5 85
13 1 CAB130
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
CAB90 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3
4
6
8 9 10 11 12 13
5
2
5
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6 CAB90 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4
1
3
6
2 4 1
CAB90.10/CAB35.21B R 13 12 11 10 9 8
CAB77.2/CAB47.2 M
CAB77.3/CAB47.14 B 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3
CAB131
CAB35
CAB131
86
28B - 28A 1 1
S18.1/CAB35.28B M 2 2 30
S18
3 3 87a 87
4 4
20A 85
5 5
27B - 27A
CAB131
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
S5_.1/R18.2 B S5 CAB35.27A/CAB43.5 R
2 2
D R48.1/R18.1 N
N
1 1
V
R
15A
CAB77.1/S20.1
V
M
CAB77.4/S13.1
R18 R18
CAB47.8/S29.1
5
N
22B - 22A
R
CAB131.5/S13.1
CAB47.6/S28.1
N
AV
CAB131.2/S20.1
2 4 1
M
CAB130.1/S28.1
CAB131.4/S27.1
1
CAB130.2/S20.1
2 1
CAB131.3/LIG1.2
5A
M
M
R
2 1
CAB130.5/S6_.1
CAB132
M
R48 21B - 21A 3
CAB90.8/S27.1
CAB90.9/ S6_.1
CAB131.1/S6_.1
M
CAB85.1/CAB35.22A
C8 C8
S6.1/R13.2 B S6 R52.C2/S61 B
CAB77.6/S24.1
2 2 C7 C7
10A
G 1 1
R48.1/R13.1 N C6
C5
C6
C5 7B - 7A
CAB132
86
R13 R13 C4 C4 1 1
R52.C3/S29.1 R S29 2 2
C3 C3 30
R52.C2/S29.1 R 3 3 87a
C2 C2
M
R52.C1/R10.1 N 30A S13 S13.1/CAB132.4 V 87
C1 C1 4 4
2 1
2
FAI75 B8 B8 6B - 6A
CAB35.7A/CAB132.5 R 5 5 85
1
B7 B7
CAB132.3/S28.1
B6 B6 CAB132
B5 B5
10A
B4 B4
R
R52.A3/R32.2 B 1
R
2 2 B3 B3
D R32.1/R42.1 N
CAB132.1/S27.1
1 1 B2 B2
R10
CAB132.5/CAB133.5
B1 B1 R52.A8/S20.1 N S20
R32 R32 R52.A8/R10.1 N
V
A8 A8
A7 A7 CAB132.2/S20.1 N
CAB133.4/S13.1
CAB133
AR
A6 A6
MASSE A5 A5
2 1 1
2 1 A4 A4
R52.A3/S28.1 M
A3 A3
R52.A2/S5_.1 B R52.A2/S28.1 M
R42 A2 A2
S28 CAB133
A1 A1
86
R52.C3/R26.2 B 1 1
2 2 R52 R52
G 1 1
R26.1/R42.1 N
CAB133.3/S29.1 R
2 2
30
R
3 3 87a 87
R26 R26 4 4
V
CAB135.1/S29.1
N
5 5 85
CAB134.5/S13.1
FAI83
CAB133.1/S6_.1
CAB133.2/S21.1
CAB133
2 1
2 1
B
CAB98 CAB97
R52.A8/S21.1
S24 CAB98.1/S24.1 R CAB97.1/S27.1 R 2 4 1
1 1
42 S27
M
3
1 LIG9.1/S5.1 B CAB134
CAB106.1/S18.1
LIG9 CAB96 CAB95
N
S24.1/CAB96.1 M CAB95.1/S6_.1 M
R
1 1
CAB109.1/S20.1
CAB134
LIG6.1/S2.1 B
CAB84.1/ CAB35.6B
1 CAB134.1/S27.1 R 86
1 1
CAB134.2/S21.1 N
2 2
5 6 7
LIG6 30
1
3 3 87a 87
4 3 3 4 S6_ CAB134.4/S6_.1 M
2
CAB100 CAB99 4 4
3
1 2 CAB100.1/S24.1 R 5 5 85
4
2 1
4
1 1
M
5
CAB134
1 2 3
6
R
CAB43.6/CAB99.1
7
4 4
CAB135.5/S27.1
3 3
D 2 2 S5.1/LIG11.1 B S5
1 1 5
LIG11 LIG11 7 7 1
CAB134.3/LIG1.6 R 2 4
6 6
S21
5 5
4 4
CAB111.1/S21.1 N
3 CAB135
N
3 3
LIG1.2/S5.1 B
4 3 3 4 2 2
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
1 1
B
2 1 1 2 CAB43.3/CAB43.8 R CAB43.2/S13.1 V
LIG1 LIG1 S23 CAB43.7/S23.1 N CAB135
LIG1.6/S2.1
86
1 1
8 1 2 3 CAB135.2/S21.1 N
4 4 2 2 30
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB43
3 3 3 3 87a 87
G 2 2
S2.1/LIG12.1 B S2 N 1 CAB84 1 CAB85 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB43
7 4 5 6 4
5
4
5 85
1 1
CAB110.1/S23.1
N
CAB135
LIG12 LIG12
FAI95
LIG12.4/LIG2.1
1 CAB106 3 +8 3 6
+12V
1
CAB43
CAB110 1 CAB109 1 CAB111
1 1
-7 2 5 MA-10-03437A
LIG2
Fig. 71

Contents
High visibility roof direction indicator and

warning lights - North America
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness CAB35

49
FAI 78 High visibility roof harness CAB77 CAB90
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
FAI 95 Cab lighting harness - US
3A
3B
19A
19B
14A 14A
30B
F21-10A
4A
4B
20A
20B
CAB 35 Fuse box
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
F22-5A 5
F6-10A
6A
6B
22A
22B
F7-30A 2 4 1
23B
7A
7B
23A
56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
24B
8A
8B
24A 25A
15B 15A
31B
C3 C 49a
25B
9A
9B
31A
CAB 91 Flashing light unit F27-15A
I O
J klaxon CAB130
10A
10B
26A
26B
T
16B
32B
II 1 1
27A
27B
11A 12A
11B
3 Start switch F28-20A lave vitre
2 2
16A
32A
3 3
12B
28A
28B
25 14
4 4
49 X2 instrument panel 56b 56a L H 5 5

31 49
13 1
CAB130
CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1
CAB47 CAB90
3
4
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5
5
2
5
2
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6 CAB90 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
2 4 1
4
1
3
6
13 12 11 10 9 8
CAB77.2/CAB47.2 M CAB90.10/CAB35.21B R
CAB77.3/CAB47.14 B 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3
CAB131
CAB35
CAB131
R38 R38 28B - 28A 1 1
86
R10.1/R38.1 N S18 S18.1/CAB35.28B M 2 2 30

1 1
3 3 87a 87
4 4
20A 85
5 5
27B - 27A
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
6 1 6 1 CAB131
N
CAB35.27A/CAB43.5 R
S1.1/R38.1
5 2 5 2
CAB130.2/S20.1
V
4 3
R
4 3
2 1 15A
1 2
CAB77.1/S20.1
V
M
CAB77.4/S13.1
CAB47.8/S29.1
5
N
22B - 22A
3
R
CAB131.5/S13.1
M
R19 R19
CAB47.6/S28.1
CAB131.2/S20.1
3 2 4 1
CAB131.4/S27.1
CAB130.1/S28.1
1 1
H1.1/R19.2 B
CAB131.3/LIG1.2
5A
M
M
R
2 2
CAB130.5/S6_.1
3 3
M
H1.3/S1.1 N S1 21B - 21A 3 CAB132
CAB90.8/S27.1
CAB90.9/ S6_.1
CAB131.1/S6_.1
3 3 4 4
M
D
CAB85.1/CAB35.22A
2 2 5 5 C8 C8
1 1 6 6 C7 C7
CAB77.6/S24.1
C6 C6 10A
H1 H1 C5 C5 CAB132
C4 C4 7B - 7A 86
1 1
FAI34 R52.C2/R12.2 B
C3
C2
C3
C2
R52.C2/S29.1 R S29 2 2 30 87a
R52.C1/R10.1 N 3 3
M
87
C1 C1 30A S13 S13.1/CAB132.4 V
4 4
B8 B8 CAB35.7A/CAB132.5 R 5 5 85
CAB132.3/S28.1
B7 B7 6B - 6A
B6 B6 CAB132
H1_.3/S1_.1 N S1 R12 R12
3 3 FAI78 B5 B5
G 2 2 1 1 B4 B4
R
H1_.1/R12.2 B 1 B3 B3 10A
1 1 2 2
R
3 3 R10 B2 B2
CAB132.1/S27.1
H1 H1 B1 B1
CAB132.5/CAB133.5
4 4 R52.A8/R10.1 N R52.A8/S20.1 N
5 5 A8 A8 S20
V
6 6 A7 A7
A6 A6 CAB132.2/S20.1 N
CAB133
CAB133.4/S13.1
2 1 A5 A5
1 2
B
A4 A4
3 1 A3 A3
S1_.1/R37.1
6 1 6
R52.A2/R19.2 B S28
3 5 2
5 2 A2 A2 R52.A2/S28.1 M
4 3 A1 A1 CAB133
4 3
86
R52 R52 1 1
2 2 30
87a
CAB133.3/S29.1 R
R
3 3 87
R37 R37
4 4
V
CAB135.1/S29.1
N
R10.1/R37.1 N 5 5 85
1 1
CAB134.5/S13.1
FAI83
CAB133.1/S6_.1
CAB133.2/S21.1
CAB133
M
CAB106.1/S18.1
5
B
CAB98 CAB97
R52.A8/S21.1
42 S24 CAB98.1/S24.1 R
1 1 CAB97.1/S27.1 R 2 4 1
LIG9.1/S5.1 B S27
1
3
LIG9 CAB134
CAB96 CAB95
N
LIG6.1/S2.1 B S24.1/CAB96.1 M CAB95.1/S6_.1 M
1
R
1 1
CAB109.1/S20.1
CAB134
LIG6
CAB84.1/ CAB35.6B
CAB134.1/S27.1 R 86
1 1
1 CAB134.2/S21.1 N
1 2 2 30
87a
3 3 87
4 3 3 4 2
2 S6_ CAB134.4/S6_.1 M
CAB100 CAB99 4 4
85
1 2 5 5
2 1 CAB100.1/S24.1 R 1
1
CAB43.6/CAB99.1 M
LIG14 LIG14 CAB134
R
LIG14.1/CAB130.3 M
4 4 1 1
LIG14.1/LIG11.3 B LIG14.2/CAB135.3 R
CAB135.5/S27.1
3 3 2 2
D 2 2 S5.1/LIG11.1 B S5
1 1 5
LIG11 LIG11 7 7 CAB134.3/LIG1.6 R 2 4 1
6 6
S21
5 5
4 4 CAB111.1/S21.1 N
3
N
3 3
LIG1.2/S5.1 B
4 3 3 4 2 2
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
1 1
B
2 1 1 2 FAI95 LIG1 LIG1 S23 CAB43.7/S23.1 N

CAB43.3/CAB43.8 R CAB43.2/S13.1 V
CAB135 CAB135
LIG1.6/S2.1
1 1
8 1 2 3 CAB135.2/S21.1 N
2 2
4 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB43
LIG14.2/LIG12.3 B 3 3
1
5 6 7
3 3
G 7 4 5 6 4 4
2
2 2 S2.1/LIG12.1 B S2 1 CAB84 1 CAB85 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB43

3
5 5
1 1
4
CAB110.1/S23.1
N
4
5
LIG12 LIG12
6
1 2
LIG12.4/LIG2.1
+8 3 6
1 CAB106
1
+12V
1 CAB110 1 CAB109 1 CAB111
MA-10-03438A
1
-7 2 5
LIG2 3 CAB43
Fig. 72
Contents
Platform indicator and warning lights -

North America
FAI 85 Platform instrument panel harness - US CAB35

FAI 97 Platform lighting harness - US 49 CAB77 CAB90
FAI 98 Handrail platform lighting harness (all coun-
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
18A
18B
tries except US)
2A
2B
13A
29A
3A
3B
19A
19B
CAB 35 Fuse box
14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
F21-10A
14A
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
CAB 43 Warning switch F6-10A F22-5A
6A
6B
22A
22B
F7-30A
23B
7A
7B
23A
CAB 90 Windscreen wiper control unit 56 30 Sx Dx 31b 53b 53 J 53C
24B
8A
8B
24A
15B
31B
C3 C 49a
15A
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
I O
J klaxon
10A
10B
26A
26B
T
16B
32B
II
3 Start switch
27A
27B
11A
11B
F28-20A lave vitre
16A
32A
25 14
12A
12B
28A
28B
42 Trailer connector - NAO 13 1
31 49
56b 56a L H
49 X2 instrument panel CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6 CAB90 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3
4
6
8 9 10 11 12 13
5
2
5
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 CAB77 1 2 3 4 5 6 CAB90 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4
1
3
6
2 4 1
B
B
CAB77.3/CAB47.14 B 13 12 11 10 9 8
CAB77.2/CAB47.2 B CAB131
CAB90.8/S27.1
CAB90.9/S6.1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3
B
3 1
CAB35.22A/CAB85.1 R
CAB90.10/CAB35.21B
CAB85
CAB131
S6 CAB131.1/S6.1 B 86
1 1
CAB35 2 2 30
CAB84.1/CAB35.6A R 3 3 87a 87
1 S27 CAB131.4/S27.1 B
4 4
CAB131.5/S13.1 B
5 5 85
CAB84
28A - 28B
CAB131
N
20A
B
CAB131.2/CAB111.1
22A - 22B 5
CAB131.3/LIG1.2
4 3 3 4
2 1
1 2 2 4 1
2 1 1 2
5A
3
3
S29.1/CAB47.8
CAB47.6/S30.1
B
B
21A - 21B 3 CAB132
CAB136
H1.1/CAB136.1 B CAB136.1/S30.1 B
3 3 1 1
D 2 2 S1.1/H1.3 N S1
2
3
2
3
10A
CAB132
1 1 CAB136.4/S1.1 N 7A - 7B
CAB136.4/CAB109.1 N CAB132.1/S27.1 B
4 4 86
1 1
H1 H1
2 2 30
B
CAB136 S30.1/CAB132.3 B
3 3 87a 87
30A CAB132.4/S13.1 B
4 4
CAB77.6/S24.1
CAB35.7B/CAB132.5 R
6A - 6B 5 5 85
B
2 1
FAI98 4 3 3 4 CAB132
1 2
N
S27.1/CAB97.1
2 1 1 2
3 10A
CAB132.2/CAB111.1
R
B
3 S30
CAB132.5/CAB133.5
S6.1/CAB95.1
CAB137
M
H1_.1/CAB137.1 B S29.1/CAB137.1 B
3 3 1 1
CAB35.28B/CAB43.5
G 2
1
2
1
S1_.1/H1_.1 N S1_
2
3
2
3 CAB133
CAB137.4/S1_.1 N CAB137.4/CAB111.1 N
4 4
H1 H1
CAB137 FAI85
CAB133
CAB133.1/S6.1 B 86
1 1
2 2
S29 CAB133.3/S29.1 B 30
3 3 87a 87
CAB133.4/S13.1 B
4 4
5 5 85
42 CAB133
N
5
N
M
CAB133.2/CAB111.1
CAB77.1/CAB109.1
1
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1
1 CAB98 CAB97 2 4
CAB98.1/S24.1 B
1 1
LIG6 3
CAB134
1
CAB96 CAB95
LIG9
S24.1/CAB96.1 B
1 1
B
CAB134
CAB134.1/S27.1 B 1 1
86
LIG6.1/S2.1
B
2 2 30
3 3
LIG9.1/S5.1
87a 87
CAB133.4/S13.1 B 4 4
CAB100 CAB99
3 4 1 1 CAB134.5/S13.1 B 5 5
4 3 S24 CAB100.1/S24.1 B 85
1 1
N
B
2
1 2
B
2 1 2 CAB134
CAB43.6/CAB99.1
CAB134.2/CAB111.1
5
CAB134.3/LIG1.6
CAB77.4/S13.1 B S13
4 4 S29.1/LIG14.2 B
2 2
3 3 LIG14.1/LIG11.3 B S30.1/LIG14.1 B 2 4 1
D 2 2
1 1
1 1 LIG14 LIG14
CAB43.3/CAB43.8 R 3
LIG11 LIG11 FAI97
B
B
N
S5.1/LIG11.1
CAB43.2/S13.1
7 7
S2 LIG1.6/S2.1 B
LIG11.4/LIG2.1
6 6
4 3 3 4
5 5
2 1 1 2 4 4
3 3
S5 LIG1.2/S5.1 B
2 2
1 1 8 1 2 3
N
4 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB43
LIG14.2/LIG12.3 B LIG1 LIG1
CAB43.7/CAB109.1
3 3
G 2 2
S2.1/LIG12.1 B 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB43
7 4 5 6
1 1
N
LIG12 LIG12
1 CAB106 +8 3 6
LIG12.4/LIG2.1
5 6 7
1
2
3
+12V MA-10-03439A
4
1
4
5
1 2 3
CAB109 1 1 CAB111
6
7
1
-7 2 5
LIG2 CAB43
Fig. 73

Contents
Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a
Fig. 74
F30-15A
F28-20A
F26-7.5A
F25-10A
F21-10A
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A

17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
6
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B

7
10A02.90
1
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A

F4-10A FEUX
Contents
4
2
MA-10-03462A
Trailer connector - Europe
Trailer connector - North America
1
7
2
6
3
5
4
F21-10A
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
3A
3B
19A
19B
14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
F7-30A RELAIS
14A
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
F25-10A
6A
6B
22A
22B
23B
7A
7B
23A
F26-7.5A
24B
8A
8B
24A
15B
31B
15A
25A
25B
9A
31A
9B
F28-20A
MA-10-03463A
10A
10B
26A
26B
16B
32B
27A
27B
11A
11B
16A
32A
12A
12B
28A
28B
Fig. 75

Contents
Standard and high visibility work headli-

ghts - Europe
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A

FAI 94 Standard roof harness - EU F25-10A
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
FAI 84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
F26-7.5A
8 1 2 3
1
except US) 2
1
F13-25A F16-25A
7 4 5 6
2
CAB 35 Fuse box 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
CAB44
CAB44
CAB 36 Ground authorisation relay R17 R17
R48.1/R17.1 N
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1 1
+8 1 +3
1 1 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A S8 CAB44.2/S8.1 M
CAB 37 Front work headlights relay 2 2
S4.1/R17.2 B 2
3
2
3
CAB108 1 CAB106 1 4 4 1 2
CAB 38 Rear work headlights relay 1 1 5 5
6 6
M
+12V
D 2
CAB 42 Light switch 2 8 1 2 3 7 7
CAB42.5/CAB108.1
8 8 -7 2
7 4 5 6
M
M
R16 R16 CAB44
R48.1/R16.1 N CAB_42CAB42
CAB35.16B/CAB106.1
1 1 8 1 2 3
S8.1/CAB35.13B
CAB42
CAB 45 Rear work headlights switch 2 2
R16.2/S4.1 B S4
1 1 7 4 5 6
+3 +6 2 2
AV 1 1 3
4
3
4
CAB45
2 2 1 2
CAB45
5 5
+8 1 +3
6 6 1 1
7 7 S9.1/CAB35.16A M S9 CAB45.2/S9.1 M
R15 R15 -7 2 5
2 2
8 8 3 3
R48.1/R15.1 N
1 1 4 4 1 2
R15.2/S4.1 B
2 2 5 5
6 6
7 7
-7 2
B
1 8 8
1
CAB35
N
B
M
B
G
R52.B1/S4.1
2
B
N
2 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 CAB45
CAB44.7/CAB109.1
CAB37.1/CAB44.3
M
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A
CAB37.3/S8.1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
CAB38.1/CAB45.3
CAB45.7/CAB109.1
N
R14 R14
CAB38.3/S9.1
13A-13B
R48.1/R14.1 N
CAB36.2/CAB36.3
1 1
2 R14.2/S4.1 B
2
25A
C8
C8 30
C7 16A-16B
C7
C6
C6 CAB36
1 C5
C5 85 87a 86
C4 25A 1
B
C4 1
R10 C3 2
C3 2
CAB36.1/CAB35.26B
C2
C2 25A - 25B 3 3 87
R52.C1/R10.1 N C1 4 4
C1
N
B8 5 5
B8
B7 10A
CAB42.7/CAB111.1
B7
1 B6
B6 CAB36
B5
B5 5
26A - 26B
N
R48 B4
B4
B3 2 4 1
FAI94 B3
CAB36.3/CAB109.1
B2
B2
B1 7.5A
B1 3
R52.A8/R10.1 N A8
A8
1 A7
A7 CAB36
A6
A6
R42 A5
A5
A4
A4 FAI84
A3
A3
R31 A2
A2
R31
A1 CAB37.5/R52.B1 B
R42.1/R31.1 N A1
1
1 S1.1/R31.2 B
2
2 R52 R52
1 1
CAB37.2/CAB36.5 N
2 CAB38.5/R52.B8 B
B
2
D
CAB38.2/CAB37.2 N
R52.B8/S1.1
N
R30 R30 5
5 4 3 2 1 CAB38
R52.A8/CAB109.1
5 4 3 2 1 CAB37
R52.C1/CAB111.1
1 R30.1/R42.1 N
1
2 S1.1/R30.2 B 2 4 1
2 5 4 3 2 1 CAB37 5 4 3 2 1 CAB38
AR 1 1
3
2
2
30 30
R28 R28
85 87a 86 85 86
R28.1/R42.1 N 87a
1 1
S1.1/R28.2 B
2 2
87 87
1 1
G 2 2
R27 R27
CAB37 CAB38
1 R27.1/R42.1 N
1
2 S1.1/R27.2 B S1
2
1 CAB109 1 CAB111
1 1
2
2
MA-10-03440A
Fig. 76
Contents
Slim Line roof work headlights - Europe

FAI 77 Flat roof harness (Slim Line) 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
F25-10A
FAI 110 Slim Line roof ground harness 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
F26-7.5A
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
8 1 2 3
CAB 35 Fuse box 7 4 5 6
F13-25A F16-25A
CAB 36 Ground authorisation relay 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
CAB44
CAB 37 Front work headlights relay 1 1
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
CAB44
+8 1 +3
2
2 1 1
CAB 38 Rear work headlights relay D 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A S8 CAB44.2/S8.1 M
2 2
3 3
R16 R16
CAB 42 Light switch 1 1
CAB108 1 CAB106 1 4
5
4
5
1 2
R16.2/S4.1 B S4 6 6
M
CAB 44 Front work headlights switch 2 2
8 1 2 3 +12V
7 7
CAB42.5/CAB108.1
8 8 -7 2
M
CAB 45 Rear work headlights switch AV
7 4 5 6
CAB44
CAB35.16B/CAB106.1
M
1 1 8 1 2 3
CAB42 CAB42
S8.1/CAB35.13B
2
G 2
+3 +6
1
2
1
2
7 4 5 6
3 3 CAB35.13A/CAB106.1 M
R14 R14 CAB45
1 2
4 4 CAB45
1 1 5 5 +8 1 +3
R14.2/S4.1 B
2 2 6 6 1 1
S9.1/CAB35.16A M S9 CAB45.2/S9.1 M
-7 2 5 7 7 2 2
8 8 3 3
4 4 1 2
CAB42 5 5
N
N
6 6
7 7
-7 2
S18.1/R14.1
S18.1/R16.1
B
8 8
N
B
M
CAB35
B
R52.B1/S4.1
N
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 CAB45
CAB44.7/CAB109.1
CAB37.1/CAB44.3
M
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
CAB37.3/S8.1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
CAB38.1/CAB45.3
CAB45.7/CAB109.1
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A
N
CAB38.3/S9.1
CAB36.2/CAB36.3
13A - 13B
C8
C8 30
FAI110 C7 25A
C7
R55 R55 C6
C6 16A - 16B CAB36 CAB36
C5
R55.1/CAB149.1 N S18.1/R55.1 N S18 C5 85 87a 86
1 1 C4
C4 1 1
2 2 C3 2
1 C3 2
B
3 3 C2 25A
C2 3 3 87
C1
CAB36.1/CAB35.26B
4 4 C1 4 4
25A - 25B
N
CAB149 B8 5
B8 5
B7
B7
CAB42.7/CAB111.1
3 4 B6
4 3 B6
B5 10A 5
B5
N
2 1 1 2 B4
B4
B3
B3 26A - 26B 2 4 1
CAB36.3/CAB109.1
FAI77 B2
B2
B1
B1 3
A8
A8 7.5A
A7
A7 CAB36
A6
A6
A5
A5
A4
A4 FAI84
A3
A3
A2
A2
A1 CAB37.5/R52.B1 B
A1
R52.C1/R42.1 N
R52.A8/R42.1 N R52
1 R52
R42
CAB37.2/CAB36.5 N
N
N
CAB38.5/R52.B8 B
B
CAB38.2/CAB37.2 N
R30.1/S18.1
R27.1/S18.1
N
R52.B8/S1.1
N
5
R52.A8/CAB109.1
5 4 3 2 1 CAB37 5 4 3 2 1 CAB38
R52.C1/CAB111.1
2 4 1
5 4 3 2 1 CAB37 5 4 3 2 1 CAB38
3
D
R30 R30 30 30
1 1
S1.1/R30.2 B
2 2 85 87a 86 85 87a 86
1 1 87 87
AR 2 2
G
R27 R27
CAB37 CAB38
1 1
2 S1.1/R27.2 B S1
2
1 CAB109 1 CAB111
1 1
2
2 MA-10-03441A
Fig. 77

Contents
Platform work headlights - Europe
FAI 86 Platform instrument panel harness - EU

FAI 92 Platform lighting harness - EU CAB37
FAI 98 Platform handrail harness CAB37

CAB 35 Fuse box CAB37.1/CAB44.3
CAB38.2/CAB37.2
B
N
1 1 86
1 CAB109 2 2
CAB 36 Ground authorisation relay H2
CAB37.3/S8.1 M 3 3 30
1 2 4 4 87a 87
CAB 37 Front work headlights relay 3

FAI98 CAB136 CAB136 5 5
85
1 1 CAB37
CAB 38 Rear work headlights relay CAB136.3/H2.2 B
2 2
CAB37.5/CAB136.3 B
5
2 2 3 3 2 4 1
CAB136.4/S1.1 N
CAB 42 Light switch 1 1 H2.1/S1.1 N S1 4 4
CAB136.4/CAB109.1 N
H2 H2 3
CAB 44 Front work headlights switch 4 3 3 4 CAB36
CAB45 Rear work headlights switch 2 1 1 2

CAB36
H2 Front work headlights CAB36.2/CAB36.3 N

1
2
1
2
86
3 3
LIG 15 Rear work headlights CAB137 CAB137
CAB36.3/CAB109.1 N
CAB37.2/CAB36.5 N
4 4
30
87a 87
5 5
H2
1 1 5 85
2 2 CAB36
CAB136.3/H2.2 B CAB37.5/CAB137.3 B FAI86
2 2 3 3 2 4 1
H2.1/S1.1 N S_1 CAB137.4/S1.1 N CAB137.4/CAB111.1 N
1 1 4 4
H2 H2 3
4 3 3 4
CAB44 CAB44 CAB44
2 1 1 2
1 2 +8 1 +3
1 1
CAB111 1 S8 CAB44.2/S8.1 M
3 2 2
3 3
4 4
5 1 2
5
6 6
CAB44.7/CAB109.1 N
7 7
8 8
26A - 26B -7 2
CAB36.1/CAB35.26B B
8 1 2 3
7.5A
25A - 25B 7 4 5 6
CAB42
+12V CAB108
10A
CAB42 CAB42
1 1 1 +3 +6
2 2
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B 3 3
4 4
13A - 13B CAB42.5/CAB108.1 M 5 1 2
5
S8.1/CAB35.13B M 6 6
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N 7 7
CAB106 25A 8 8
CAB35.13A/CAB106.1 M -7 2 5
1
CAB35.16B/CAB106.1 M
16B - 16A 8 1 2 3
S9.1/CAB35.16A M
7 4 5 6
F25-10A 25A
CAB35 F26-7.5A CAB45
CAB45 CAB45
+8 1 +3
CAB35 1 1
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A CAB45.2/S9.1 M
2 2
CAB38.1/CAB45.3 B
3 3
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 4 4 1 2
5 5
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A 6 6
CAB45.7/CAB109.1 N
7 7
F13-25A 8 8 -7 2
F16-25A
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A 8 1 2 3
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 7 4 5 6
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A CAB38
CAB38
S9
86
1 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 2
FAI92 CAB38.3/S9.1 M
3
30
LIG15 3 87a 87
1
4 4
2
CAB38.5/LIG1.5 B
5 5 85
7 7
6 6 5 CAB38
LIG1.5/LIG15.2 B
2 2 5 5
LIG15.1/LIG2.1 N 2 4 1
1 1 4 4
3 3
LIG15 LIG15 2 2 3
LIG2 1 1 1
LIG1 LIG1
MA-10-03458A
Fig. 78
Contents
Standard and high visibility roof work

headlights - North America
FAI 75 Standard roof harness - US 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
F28-20A
FAI 83 Instrument panel harness - NAO 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
8 1 2 3
CAB 35 Fuse box 1 1

7 4 5 6
2 2 F13-25A F16-25A
CAB 36 Ground authorisation relay 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
CAB44
CAB 37 Front work headlights relay R17 R17 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
+12V CAB44
+8 1 +3
R48.1/R17.1 N 1 1
1
CAB 38 Rear work headlights relay 2
1
2
S4.1/R17.2 B 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A S8 CAB44.2/S8.1 M
2
3
2
3
CAB 43 Warning switch 1 1
4
5
4
5
1 2
CAB106 1 6 6
CAB 44 Front work headlights switch D 2 2
8 1 2 3 7 7
8 8 -7 2
M
CAB 45 Rear work headlights switch R16 R16
7 4 5 6
CAB44
S8.1/CAB35.13B
R48.1/R16.1 N
1 1 CAB43 CAB43 CAB43 8 1 2 3
R16.2/S4.1 B S4
2 2
1 1 7 4 5 6
+8 3 6 2 2
AV 1 1
3 3 CAB45
2 4 4 CAB45
2
5 5 +8 1 +3
1 1 1
M
6 6 S9.1/CAB35.16A M S9 CAB45.2/S9.1 M
2 2
M
R15 R15 7 7
CAB35.13A/CAB106.1
8 8 3 3
R48.1/R15.1 N
CAB35.16B/CAB106.1
1 1 -7 2 5 4 4 1 2
R15.2/S4.1 B
2 2 CAB35 5 5
6 6
7 7
-7 2
B
1 1 8 8
N
B
M
G
R52.B1/S4.1
2
B
N
2 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
13A - 13B CAB45
CAB44.7/CAB109.1
CAB37.1/CAB44.3
M
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
CAB37.3/S8.1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
CAB38.1/CAB45.3
CAB45.7/CAB109.1
N
CAB38.3/S9.1
R14 R14 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
R48.1/R14.1 N 25A
CAB36.2/CAB36.3
1 1
2 R14.2/S4.1 B 16A - 16B
2
C8 C8
30
C7 C7 25A
R
C6 C6
C5 CAB36
28A - 28B
CAB43.6/CAB36.1
1 C5 85 86
87a
C4 C4 1 1
R10 C3
C3 2 2
C2 C2 20A 3 3 87
R52.C1/R10.1 N C1 C1 4 4
B8 B8 5 5
B7 B7
1 B6 B6 CAB36
B5 CAB43.5/CAB35.28B M 5
B5
R48
N
B4 B4
B3 B3 2 4 1
FAI75
CAB36.3/CAB109.1
B2 B2
B1 B1
3
R52.A8/R10.1 N A8 A8
1 A7 A7
A6
CAB36
R42 A6
A5 A5
A4 A4
A3
FAI83
A3
R31 A2 A2
R31
A1 A1 CAB37.5/R52.B1 B
1 R42.1/R31.1 N
1
2 S1.1/R31.2 B
2 R52 R52
1 1
CAB37.2/CAB36.4 N
2 CAB38.5/R52.B8 B
B
2
D
CAB38.2/CAB37.2 N
R52.B8/S1.1
N
R30 R30 5
5 4 3 2 1 CAB38
R52.A8/CAB109.1
5 4 3 2 1 CAB37
R52.C1/CAB111.1
R30.1/R42.1 N
1 1
S1.1/R30.2 B 2 4 1
2 2 5 4 3 2 1 CAB38
5 4 3 2 1 CAB37
AR 1 1
3
2
2
30 30
R28 R28
85 87a 86 85 86
R28.1/R42.1 N 87a
1 1
S1.1/R28.2 B
2 2
87 87
1 1
G 2 2
R27 R27
CAB37 CAB38
1 R27.1/R42.1 N
1
2 S1.1/R27.2 B S1
2
1 CAB109 1 CAB111
1 1
2
2 MA-10-03442A
Fig. 79

Contents
Slim Line roof work headlights - North

America
FAI 77 Flat roof harness (Slim Line) 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
F28-20A
FAI 83 Instrument panel harness - NAO 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
8 1 2 3
FAI 110 Slim Line roof ground harness 7 4 5 6

F13-25A F16-25A
CAB44
CAB 36 Ground authorisation relay 1 1
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
+12V CAB44 CAB44
+8 1 +3
2 1 1
CAB 37 Front work headlights relay 2 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A S8 CAB44.2/S8.1 M
2 2
3
3
CAB 38 Rear work headlights relay R16 R16 4
5
4
5
1 2
1 1 CAB106 1 6
R16.2/S4.1 B S4 6
CAB 43 Warning switch 2 2 8 1 2 3 7 7
8 8 -7 2
M
CAB 44 Front work headlights switch 7 4 5 6
AV
S8.1/CAB35.13B
CAB_43CAB43
CAB 45 Rear work headlights switch CAB43
8 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 7 4 5 6
2
2 2
2 +8 3 6
3 3
4 4
CAB45
CAB45
R14 R14 5 5
+8 1 +3
1 6 6 1 1
M
1 1 S9.1/CAB35.16A M S9 CAB45.2/S9.1 M
7 7 2 2
M
R14.2/S4.1 B
2 2 8 8
CAB35.13A/CAB106.1
3 3
CAB35.16B/CAB106.1
-7 2 5 4 4 1 2
5 5
6 6
N
N
7 7
CAB35 8 8 -7 2
N
B
S18.1/R16.1
S18.1/R14.1
B
N
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 CAB45
R52.B1/S4.1
13A - 13B
CAB44.7/CAB109.1
CAB37.1/CAB44.3
M
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
CAB37.3/S8.1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
CAB38.1/CAB45.3
CAB45.7/CAB109.1
N
CAB38.3/S9.1
25A
CAB36.2/CAB36.3
16A - 16B
C8
C8 30
C7
C7 25A
R
C6
C6
C5 28A - 28B CAB36 CAB36
CAB43.6/CAB36.1
C5 85 87a 86
C4
FAI110 C4 1 1
C3
C3 2 2
R55 R55 C2
C2 20A 3 3 87
R55.1/CAB149.1 N S18.1/R55.1 N S18 C1
1 1 C1 4 4
B8
2 2 B8 5 5
1 B7
3 3 B7
B6
4 4 B6
CAB149 B5 CAB43.5/CAB35.28B M 5
B5
N
B4
B4
B3
B3 2 4 1
CAB36.3/CAB109.1
B2
B2
B1
B1 3
A8
A8
A7
A7 CAB36
A6
FAI77 A6
A5
A5
A4
A4 FAI83
A3
A3
R52.C1/R42.1 N A2
A2
R52.A8/R42.1 N A1 CAB37.5/R52.B1 B
1 A1
R42 R52 R52
CAB37.2/CAB36.4 N
N
N
B
CAB38.5/R52.B8 B
R27.1/S18.1
R30.1/S18.1
R52.B8/S1.1
CAB38.2/CAB37.2 N
N
5
R52.A8/CAB109.1
5 4 3 2 1 CAB37 5 4 3 2 1 CAB38
R52.C1/CAB111.1
2 4 1
5 4 3 2 1 CAB37 5 4 3 2 1 CAB38
R30 R30
30 30
1 1
S1.1/R30.2 B
2 2
85 87a 86 85 86
87a
1
AR 2
1
87 87
2
R27 R27
CAB37 CAB38
1 1
S1.1/R27.2 B S1
2 2
1 CAB109 1 CAB111
1 1
2
2
MA-10-03443A
Fig. 80
Contents
Platform work headlights - North America
FAI 85 NAO Platform instrument panel harness

CAB37
FAI 97 Platform lighting harness - NAO
FAI 98 Platform handrail harness CAB37.1/CAB44.3 B
CAB37
1 1
CAB 35 Fuse box H2
1 CAB109 CAB38.2/CAB37.2 N
2
3
2
3
86
CAB37.3/S8.1 M 30
CAB 36 Ground authorisation relay 1 2

CAB136 CAB136
4
5
4
5
87a 87
3 85
CAB 37 Front work headlights relay 1 1 5
CAB37
2 2
CAB136.3/H2.2 B CAB37.5/CAB136.3 B
CAB 38 Rear work headlights relay 2
1
2
1 H2.1/S1.1 N S1 CAB136.4/S1.1 N
3
4
3
4
CAB136.4/CAB109.1 N 2 4 1
CAB 43 Warning switch H2 H2

3 4
3
CAB36
4 3
CAB 44 Front work headlights switch 2 1 1 2
CAB36
CAB45 Rear work headlights switch FAI98 CAB36.1/CAB43.6
CAB36.2/CAB36.3
B
N
1 1 86
2 2
H2 Front work headlights CAB36.3/CAB109.1 N
CAB37.2/CAB36.4 N
3
4
3 30
CAB137 CAB137 4 87a 87
LIG 15 Rear work headlights H2

1 1 5
5 5
85
2 2 CAB36
CAB136.3/H2.2 B CAB37.5/CAB137.3 B FAI85
2 2 3 3 2 4 1
H2.1/S1.1 N S_1 CAB137.4/S1.1 N CAB137.4/CAB111.1 N
1 1 4 4
H2 H2
3
4 3 3 4
CAB44 CAB44 CAB44
2 1 1 2
1 2 +8 1 +3
1 1
CAB111 1 S8 CAB44.2/S8.1 M
3 2 2
3 3
4 4
5 1 2
5
6 6
CAB44.7/CAB109.1 N
7 7
8 8
-7 2
8 1 2 3
7 4 5 6
CAB43
CAB43
CAB35
1 1 +8 3 6
+12V 13A - 13B

2
3
4
2
3
4
S8.1/CAB35.13B M CAB35.28B/CAB43.5 M
5 5 1
25A 6 6
7 7
CAB35.13A/CAB106.1 M 16B - 16A
CAB106 8 8
-7 2 5
1 CAB35.16B/CAB106.1 M S9.1/CAB35.16A M
CAB43
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1 M 25A
8 1 2 3
28A - 28B
7 4 5 6
20A
CAB45
CAB45 CAB45
CAB35 F28-20A +8 1 +3
1 1
CAB45.2/S9.1 M
2 2
CAB38.1/CAB45.3 B
3 3
4 4 1 2
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
5 5
6 6
CAB45.7/CAB109.1 N
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B 7 7
8 8 -7 2
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
F13-25A 8 1 2 3
F16-25A
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A 7 4 5 6

CAB38
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A

CAB38
S9
1 86
1
2 2
CAB38.3/S9.1 M 3 30
3 87a 87
4 4
CAB38.5/LIG1.5 B
FAI97 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 85
LIG15 5 CAB38
1
2 4 1
7 7
6 6
LIG1.5/LIG15.2 B
2 2 5 5 3
LIG15.1/LIG2.1 N
1 1 4 4
3 3
LIG15 LIG15 2 2
LIG2 1 1 1
LIG1 LIG1 MA-10-03459A
Fig. 81

Contents
Work headlights on handrails - standard

roof - Europe
FAI 61 Simplified handrail harness - Europe

+12V
FAI 84 Instrument panel harness - EU
F29-25A
FAI 109 Handrail headlights control harness
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
CAB108 1 CAB106 1
18A
18B
2A
2B
CAB 35 Fuse box
13A
29A
M
CAB42
3A
3B
19A
19B
CAB 36 Ground authorisation relay
M
CAB42.5/CAB108.1
14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
CAB35.29A/CAB106.1
CAB 42 Light switch
14A
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
CAB36.2/CAB36.3 N
CAB35 CAB37
CAB 147Additional headlights switch
6A
6B
22A
22B
8 8 CAB37.2/CAB36.5 N
+3 +6 7 7 1
23B
2
7A
7B
23A
6 6 5
CAB 148Additional headlights relay F25-10A 5 5 5 4 3 2 1 CAB36 3
24B
2 4 1 4
8A
8B
24A
1 2 4 4
15B
31B
3 3 5
F26-7.5A 29A - 29B 5 4 3 2 1 CAB36
15A
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
2 2 3
-7 2 5 1 1
N
10A
10B
26A
26B
B
25A
CAB38.2/CAB37.2
CAB42 CAB42
16B
32B
27A
27B
11A
11B
CAB36.1/CAB35.26B
25A - 25B
16A
32A
30
12A
12B
28A
28B
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
8 1 2 3 85 86
87a
7 4 5 6
10A 87
26A - 26B
7.5A CAB38
CAB36 1
2
CAB36 2
2
1 H2.1/S1.1 N S1 R38.1/S1.1 N 3
1
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N 4
D R38 R38 5
B
H2 H2
N
1 1
N
R19.1/H2.2
FAI61
CAB38.2/CAB89.3
H2.1/H3.2 B
H3.1/S1.1
R19 R19 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
FAI84
1 1 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
N
2 2
3 3
C8 C8 CAB35.29B/CAB89.2 M
B
2 2 1 2 2 1
C7
C7 S31.1/R52.C6 B S31 S31.1/CAB89.5 B
1 1 R52.C6/S12.1 B C6
C6
S12.1/R19.1
3 R52.C5/S1.1 B
S12.1/R52.C5 B C5
C5
H3 H3 3
C4
C4 3 2 1
R10.1/R38.1
C3 C3 6 5 4
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB89
C2 C2
C1 C1 6 5 4
B8
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB89
B8 3 2 1
B7 B7
R52.C1/R10.1 N B6 B6
B5 B5
N
R52.A8/R10.1 N
M
M
N
N
B
1 B4 B4
B3
CAB36.3/CAB109.1
B3
CAB89.5/CAB148.5
CAB89.4/CAB147.7
CAB89.3/CAB148.2
CAB89.2/CAB148.3
CAB89.2/CAB147.2
S12
R10 B2 B2
B1 B1
FAI109
FAI94 A8
N
A8
A7 A7
A6
R37.1/R10.1
A6
A5 A5
B
A4 A4 CAB111.1/CAB89.4 N
A3 A3
R12.1/S12.1
A2
N
2 2 A2
H2.1/S1.1 N S1 R37.1/S1.1 N A1
1 1 R37 R37 A1
R52.C1/CAB111.1
B
5 CAB147.3/CAB148.1 B
N
H2 H2 1 1 R52 R52
6
2 4 1
R12.1/H2.2
H3.1/S1.1
5 4 3 2 1 CAB148 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB147
5
2
FAI61
R52.A8/CAB109.1
B
4
3
5 4 3 2 1 CAB148
7
R12 R12 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB147
H2.2/H3.2
1 1
2 2
3 3 CAB147
30
+8 1 +3
85 86
1 2 2 1 87a
2 2 3 87 1 2
1 1 3
H3 H3
-7 2
1 CAB109 1 CAB111
MA-10-03271A
CAB148
Fig. 82
Contents
Work headlights on handrails – High Visi-

bility roof - Europe
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness

FAI 59 High visibility roof harness +12V
FAI 84 Instrument panel harness - EU

FAI 109 Handrail headlights control harness F29-25A
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
CAB108 1 CAB106 1
18A
18B
CAB 35 Fuse box
2A
2B
13A
29A
M
3A
3B
19A
19B
M
CAB42.5/CAB108.1
14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
CAB 42 Light switch
CAB35.29A/CAB106.1
14A
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
CAB42 CAB36.2/CAB36.3 N
CAB37
6A
6B
22A
22B
8 8 CAB37.2/CAB36.5 N
+3 +6 7 7 1
23B
CAB 148Additional headlights relay 2
7A
7B
23A
6 6 5
F25-10A 5 5 CAB35 5 4 3 2 1 CAB36 3
24B
2 4 1 4
8A
8B
24A
1 2 4 4
15B
31B
3 3 5
F26-7.5A 29A -29B 5 4 3 2 1 CAB36
15A
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
2 2 3
-7 2 5 1 1
N
10A
10B
26A
26B
B
25A
CAB38.2/CAB37.2
CAB42 CAB42
16B
32B
27A
27B
11A
11B
CAB36.1/CAB35.26B
25A - 25B
16A
32A
30
12A
12B
28A
28B
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
8 1 2 3 85 86
87a
7 4 5 6
10A 87
26A - 26B
7.5A CAB38
1
2
2 2
H2.1/S1.1 N CAB36 3
1 1
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N 4
D H2 H2 S1 R38.1/S1.1 N 1 1 5
N
R38 R38
CAB38.2/CAB89.3
H2.2/H3.2 B
R19.1/H2.2
N
6 1 6 1
H3.1/S1.1
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
5 2
5 2
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
4 3
R10.1/R38.1
4 3
FAI84
6 6
5 5
2 2
FAI34 4 4
3 C7 C7
1 3 S31.1/R52.C6 B S31 S31.1/CAB89.5 B
1 C6 C6
2 2 R52.C5/S1.1 B
1 C5 C5
H3 H3 1
B
B
C4 C4 3 2 1
R19 R19 C3 C3 5 4
B
6
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB89
R52.C5/S8.1
R52.C6/S8.1
C2 C2
C1 C1
S8.1/R19.1
6 5 4
B8 B8
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB89
3 2 1
B7 B7
B6 B6
R52.C1/R10.1 N B5 B5
M
M
N
N
B
B4 B4
1 R52.A8/R10.1 N
B3 B3
CAB36.3/CAB109.1
CAB89.5/CAB148.5
CAB89.4/CAB147.7
CAB89.3/CAB148.2
CAB89.2/CAB148.3
CAB89.2/CAB147.2
B2 B2
R10 B1 B1
A8
N
A8
A7 A7
R10.1/R37.1
A6 A6
A5
A4
A5
A4
FAI109
CAB111.1/CAB89.4 N
S8 A3 A3
A2 A2
N
2 2
1 1 H2_.1/S1_.1 N A1 A1
S1_ R37.1/S1_.1 N
FAI59
R52.C1/CAB111.1
1 1
R52 R52 5 CAB147.3/CAB148.1 B
H2 H2
R37 R37
6
2 4 1
5 4 3 2 1 CAB148 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB147
5
2
B
B
B
R52.A8/CAB109.1
G
1
N
4
3
S8.1/R12.1
R12.1/H2_.2
7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB147
H2_.2/H3_.2
5 4 3 2 1 CAB148
1
H3_.1/S1_.1
6 6 1
5 2 5 2
4 3
4 3
CAB147
30
+8 1 +3
6 6
5 5 85 87a 86
4 4
2 2 3 3 87 1 2
1 1 2 2
1 1
H3 H3
R12 R12 -7 2
1 CAB109 1 CAB111
CAB148
MA-10-03272A
Fig. 83

Contents
Work headlights on handrails - Slim Line

roof - Europe
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness +12V

FAI 84 Instrument panel harness - EU F29-25A
17A
17B
1A
1B
13B
29B
CAB108 1 CAB106 1
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
M
3A
3B
19A
19B
FAI 110 Flat roof ground harness (Slim Line)
M
CAB42.5/CAB108.1
14A
30B
4A
4B
20A
20B
CAB 35 Fuse box
CAB35.29A/CAB106.1
14A
30A
5A
5B
21A
21B
CAB42 CAB36.2/CAB36.3 N
CAB37
6A
6B
22A
22B
8 8 CAB37.2/CAB36.5 N
7 7 1
+3 +6
CAB 42 Light switch
23B
2
7A
7B
23A
6 6 5
F25-10A 5 5 CAB35 5 4 3 2 1 CAB36 3
24B
2 4 1 4
8A
8B
24A
1 2 4 4
15B
31B
3 3 5
F26-7.5A 29A - 29B 5 4 3 2 1 CAB36
15A
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
2 2 3
CAB 148Additional headlights relay -7 2 5 1 1
N
10A
10B
26A
26B
B
CAB42 CAB42 25A
CAB38.2/CAB37.2
16B
32B
27A
27B
11A
11B
CAB36.1/CAB35.26B
25A - 25B
16A
32A
30
12A
12B
28A
28B
CAB42.3/CAB35.25A B
8 1 2 3 85 86
87a
7 4 5 6
10A
87
26A - 26B
7.5A CAB38
1
2 2 CAB36 2
1 H2.1/S1.1 N 3
1
CAB42.7/CAB111.1 N 4
D H2 H2 S1 R38.1/S1.1 N 1 1 5
N
R38 R38
CAB38.2/CAB89.3
H2.2/H3.2 B
R19.1/H2.2
N
6 1
H3.1/S1.1
6 1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
5 2
5 2 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
4 3
4 3 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
FAI84
6 6
FAI34 5 5
C8 CAB35.29B/CAB89.2 M
4 4 C8
2 2 C7
3 3 C7 S31.1/R52.C6 B S31 S31.1/CAB89.5 B
1 1 C6
2 2 C6 R52.C5/S1.1 B
1 1 C5 C5
H3 H3
B
C4 C4 3 2 1
B
R19 R19 C3 C3 CAB89 6 5 4
6 5 4 3 2 1
S8.1/R19.1
R52.C5/S8.1
C2 C2
R52.C6/S8.1
C1 C1 6 5 4
B8 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB89
B8 3 2 1
B7 B7
B6 B6
R52.C1/R10.1 N B5 B5
M
M
N
N
B
R52.A8/R10.1 N B4 B4
1 B3
CAB36.3/CAB109.1
B3
CAB89.5/CAB148.5
CAB89.4/CAB147.7
CAB89.3/CAB148.2
CAB89.2/CAB148.3
CAB89.2/CAB147.2
B2 B2
R10 S8
B1 B1
A8 A8
A7 A7
A6 A6
A5
2
1
2
1 H2_.1/S1_.1 N
A5
A4 A4 CAB111.1/CAB89.4 N
FAI109
S1_ R37.1/S1_.1 N 1 1 A3
A3
A2
N
A2
N
H2 H2
R37 R37 A1 A1
R52.C1/CAB111.1
R55.3/R38.1
CAB147.3/CAB148.1 B
B
5
N R52 R52
B
6
B
2 4 1
H2_.2/H3_.2
5 4 3 2 1 CAB148 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB147
5
2
6 1
R12.1/H2_.2
H3_.1/S1_.1
6 1
R52.A8/CAB109.1
5 2
S8.1/R12.1
5 2
4
4 3 3
4 3
FAI77 5 4 3 2 1 CAB148
7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB147
6 6
5 5 CAB147
N
4 4 30
+8 1 +3
2 2 3 3
R55.4/R37.1
1 1 2 2 85 87a 86
1 1
H3 H3 87 1 2
R12 R12
-7 2
3 4 4 3
1 2 2 1
1 CAB109 1 CAB111
CAB148
R55 R55
FAI110
1 1
2 2
R55.3/CAB149.1 N
1 3 3
R55.4/CAB149.1 N
4 4
MA-10-03273A
CAB149
Fig. 84
Contents
Work headlights on handrails - standard

and high visibility roof - North America
FAI 34 Handrail lighting harness 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
FAI 75 Standard roof harness - US +12V F29-25A

17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
F28-20A
FAI 83 Instrument panel harness - NAO CAB108 1 CAB106 1 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
M
CAB35.29A/CAB106.1
CAB 36 Ground authorisation relay 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A

M
CAB35.28A/CAB106.1
CAB37
+8 3 6 8 8
CAB 148Additional headlights relay 7 7
CAB37.2/CAB36.4 N 1
6 6 2
1 5 5 3
4 4 4
3 3
CAB35 5
2 2 CAB36.2/CAB36.3 N
-7 2 5 29A - 29B
1 1
5
CAB42 CAB42
CAB43
N
2 4 1 5 4 3 2 1 CAB36
25A
CAB38.2/CAB37.2
N
3 5 4 3 2 1 CAB36
CAB36.3/CAB109.1
8 1 2 3
28A- 28B
7 4 5 6
20A 30
85 87a 86
CAB43.5/CAB35.28B M
CAB43.6/CAB36.1 R CAB38
87
2 2 1
1 1 H3_.1/S1.1 N S1_R38.1/S1.1 N 2
1 1
3
H3 H3 R38 R38 4
5
B
D
N
H2_.2/H3_.2
H2_.1/S1.1
N
R10.1/R38.1
FAI34
CAB38.2/CAB89.3
6 6
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
CAB36
5 5 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
4 4 B8 B7 B6B5B4B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
3 3 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1
2 2
2 2 R16.1/H2_.2 B
1 1
1 1
R16 R16
B
H2 H2 C7 C7 S31.1/R52.C6 B S31 S31.CAB89.5 B
R52.C6/S12.1 B
C6 C6
S12.1/R19.1
S12.1/R52.C5 B R52.C5/S31.1 B 3 2 1
6 1
C5 C5
6 1
5 2 C4 C4 6 5 4
5 2
4 3
4 3
C3 C3
6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB89
C2 C2
R52.C1/R10.1 N
C1 C1 FAI83 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB89 6 5 4
1 B8 B8
3 2 1
R52.A8/R10.1 N B7 B7
R10 B6 B6
N
B5 B5
B4 B4
6
FAI109
R37.1/R10.1
B3 B3 CAB111.1/CAB89.4 N
S12
B2 B2
5
2
CAB89.5/CAB148.5 B CAB89.4/CAB147.7 N
B1 B1 CAB89.2/CAB148.3 M
4
A8 A8 CAB89.3/CAB148.2 N CAB89.2/CAB147.2 M
A7 A7
7
CAB147.3/CAB148.1 B
2 2
H3.1/S1.1 N S1 R37.1/S1.1 N
FAI75 A6 A6 5
1 1 1 1 A5 A5
2 4 1
A4 A4 5 4 3 2 1 CAB148 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB147
H3 H3
N
A3 A3
R37 R37 A2 A2 3
5 4 3 2 1 CAB148 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB147
R52.C1/CAB111.1
B
B
A1 A1
N
R12.1/S12.1
R52 R52
H2.2/H3.2
H2.1/S1.1
N
FAI34 30
6 6
R52.A8/CAB109.1
5 5 +8 1 +3
4 4 85 86
87a
3 3
2 2
2 2 R12.1/H2.2 B
1 1 87 1 2
1 1
R12 R12
H2 H2
-7 2
6 1
6 1
5 2
5 2
4 3
4 3
CAB148 CAB147
1 CAB109 1 CAB111
MA-10-03274A
Fig. 85

Contents
Stop lights

except US)
FAI 91 Cab lighting harness (all countries except US) F22-5A CAB35 F30-15A
CAB 35 Fuse box

CAB 40 Brake relay 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
CAB 73 Right-hand stop switch +12V 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
CAB 74 Left-hand stop switch 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
LIG 11 Rear right-hand light

LIG 12 Rear left-hand light 13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
3 Start switch 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
38 Trailer connector - Europe 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
1 CAB106
1
5 6 7
2
1 CAB111
3
4
4
CAB40 1 LIG2
1 2 3
5
LIG11
6
CAB35 LIG1 LIG1
7
LIG11
1 1
30A - 30B 2 2 1 1
85 3 3 2 2
CAB40.5/CAB35.30A B LIG1.4/CAB35.30B B LIG1.4/S4.1 B S4 S4.1/LIG11.3 B
5 5 4 4 3 3
4 4 LIG11.4/LIG2.1 N
87 87a 15A 5 5 4 4
CAB40.3/CAB106.1 M
30 3 3 6 6
CAB111.1/CAB40.2 N
2 2 7 7 LIG11
S14.1/CAB40.1 B 22B - 22A
1 1
86
FAI91 3 4
CAB40 CAB40
5A
FAI84 1 2
2 4 1
3
LIG12
S14
LIG12
R
R
1 1
CAB35.22A/CAB85.1
CAB74.1/CAB73.1 R
2 2
CAB35.22B/CAB74.1
B
S14.1/CAB73.2 B S4.1/LIG12.3 B
3 3
LIG12.4/LIG2.1 N
4 4
S14.1/CAB74.2
LIG12
3 4
1 2
1 2 1 2
CAB74 1 2 CAB73 1 2 CAB85 1
CAB73 CAB74 3
38
LIG8.1/S4.1 B
1
LIG8
MA-10-03444A
Fig. 86
Contents
G . Calculator supply
EHRB ELC Calculator ............................................. 105
Platform EHRB ELC Calculator............................... 106
AUTO 5 calculator .................................................. 107
AUTO 5 linkage calculator ...................................... 108

Contents
Contents
EHRB ELC Calculator

FAI 84 Cab instrument panel harness (all countries 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
except US) 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
FAI 89 Autotronic 5 Power Shuttle harness 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
CAB 01 EHRB linkage calculator 3

CAB 35 Fuse box CAB35
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
3 Start switch
3A - 3B
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
1 CAB88.1/CAB35.3A R
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
CAB88
F2-7.5A F3-10A
2A - 2B
CAB35.2B/CAB34.3 R
3
FAI84 4
2 1
CAB34 1 2 3 4
CAB124 1
2 1
CAB34 1 2 3 4
N
4 3
CAB124.1/CAB10.2
R
CAB34.3/CAB10.5
FAI74
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1 CAB10
CAB01
CAB01.25/CAB07.5 R 5 4 3 2 1 CAB10
25 25 5 4 3 2 1
24 24
R
23 23
N
22 22
CAB10.5/S4.1
14
1
21 21
CAB10.2/S5.1
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
S4.1/CAB07.5 R S4
16 16 5 5 FAI89
15 15 4 4
14 14 3 3
FAI73 S5.1/CAB07.2 N S5
13 13 2 2
12 12 1 1
13
25
11 11
10 10 CAB07 CAB07
N
9 9
8 8
CAB07.2/S3.1
7 7
1 2
5 4 3 2 1
6 6
3
5 5
4
4 4
5
3 3
2 2
1 1 CAB01.1/S3.1 N S3
CAB01
CAB01 MA-10-03465A
Fig. 87

Contents
Platform EHRB ELC Calculator
FAI 73 Cab internal / linkage harness

FAI 89 Cab Auto 5 adaptation harness 29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
CAB 01 EHRB linkage calculator 17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
CAB 35 Fuse box 17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
3 Start switch 3
CAB35
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A
3A - 3B
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
CAB88.1/CAB35.3A R
1
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A
CAB88 7.5A
F2-7.5A F3-10A
2A - 2B
CAB35.2B/CAB07.5 R
15A
FAI85
1 CAB109
N
CAB07.2/CAB109.1
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1 CAB.07
CAB01.25/CAB07.5 R 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 CAB10
25 25
24 24
R
23 23
N
22 22
CAB10.5/S4.1
14
1
21 21
CAB10.2/S5.1
20 20
19 19
18 18 CAB07
17 17
S4.1/CAB07.5 R S4
16 16 5 5 FAI89
15 15 4 4
14 14 3 3
FAI73 S5.1/CAB07.2 N S5
13 13 2 2
12 12 1 1
13
25
11 11
10 10 CAB07
N
9 9
8 8
CAB07.2/S3.1
7 7
1 2
5 4 3 2 1
6 6
3
5 5
4
4 4
5
3 3
2 2
1 1 CAB01.1/S3.1 N S3
CAB01 CAB01
CAB01 MA-10-03464A
Fig. 88
Contents
AUTO 5 calculator

except US)
FAI 89 AUTO 5 adapter harness
CAB 35 Fuse box
3 Start switch F23-7.5A F24-10A +12V
9 AUTO 5 calculator
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
CAB35 3
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A CAB106 1 CAB88 1
CAB88.1/CAB35.3A R
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
24A - 24B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A CAB35.24A/CAB106.1 M
F2-7.5A F3-10A 23A - 23B

CAB35.23B/CAB34.2 M
S4.1/CAB9.42 R 3A - 3B
42 42
41 41 FAI84
40 40
39 39
38 38
37 37 2A - 2B
36 36 CAB35.2B/CAB34.3 R
35 35
34 34
33 33 4 3
32 32 CAB35
31 CAB34 1 2 3 4 2 1
31
30 30
CAB10.2/CAB9.29 M
29 29 CAB34 1 2 3 4 2 1
S5.1/CAB9.28 N
28 28
4 3
27 27
26 26 S4 CAB10.5/S4.1 R CAB34.3/CAB10.5 R
5 5
25 25 4 4
24 24 3 3
23 23 S5 CAB10.2/S5.1 N CAB124.1/CAB10.2 N
2 2
22 22 CAB34.2/CAB10.1 M
FAI89 1 1
21 21
20 20
CAB10 CAB10
19 19
FAI02
18 18
17 17
16 16
1 2
S5.1/CAB9.15 N
5 4 3 2 1
9 15 15
S4.1/CAB9.14 R
3
14 14
4
13 13
5
12 12
11 11
10 10 1 CAB124
9 9
8 8
29 42
7 7
28
6 6
15
5 5
1 14
4 4
3 3
2 2 MA-10-03466A
1 1
CAB9 CAB9
Fig. 89

Contents
AUTO 5 linkage calculator

FAI 84 X2 instrument panel harness - EU
FAI 89 AUTO 5 cab adapter harness
FAI 116 AUTO 5 cab linkage harness
CAB 01 AUTO 5 linkage calculator CAB01 +12V
CAB 35 Fuse box
1 CAB106
CAB01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 CAB35
FAI84
CAB01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 24A - 24B
29 42
23A - 23B
15 28
CAB35.23B/CAB34.2 M
1 14
FAI116
CAB35
4 3
2 1
CAB34 1 2 3 4
3 4
17A
17B
1A
1B
CAB34 1 2 3 4
13B
29B
1 2
18A
18B
2A
2B
13A
29A
CAB10
FAI89
3A
3B
19A
19B
FAI74
5 5 5 5
14A
30B
4 4 4 4
4A
4B
20A
20B
3 3 3 3
S3.1/CAB01.28 N S5.1/CAB07.2 N S5 CAB10.2/S5.1 N CAB124.1/CAB07.2 N
14A
2 2 2 2
30A
S12.1/CAB07.1 M S12 CAB10.1/S12.1 M CAB34.2/CAB07.1 M

5A
5B
21A
21B
CAB07.1/CAB01.29 M
1 1 1 1
CAB07 CAB07 CAB10

6A
6B
22A
22B
F23-7.5A
23B
7A
7B
23A
F24 CAB124 1
24B
8A
8B
24A
15B
31B
1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1
15A
25A
25B
9A
9B
31A
10A
10B
26A
26B
16B
32B
27A
27B
11A
11B
MA-10-03467A
16A
32A
12A
12B
28A
28B
Fig. 90
Contents
Electronics
11 - Electronics
CONTENTS
11B10 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - Description
GUF511 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Programming and setting parameters
GUF512 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Tests and diagnostics
GUF513 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Error codes
GUF514 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Calibration and adjustments
GUF515 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Electrical diagrams
11C10 - ELECTRONIC LINKAGE - Description
11C12 - ELECTRONIC LINKAGE - Tests and diagnostics
11C13 - ELECTRONIC LINKAGE - Error codes
11C14 - ELECTRONIC LINKAGE - Adjustment
11C15 - ELECTRONIC LINKAGE - Electrical diagrams
Contents
Electronics
Contents
AUTOTRONIC 5 - Description
11B10 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - Description
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Autotronic 5 status flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Autotronic 5 connector pin allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Automatic responses of the Autotronic 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Power Shuttle principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Contents
Contents
Parst list (Fig. 1)

A . General
(1) Autotronic 5 part number
The Autotronic 5 is the transmission controller fitted to (2) Hardware program version
5400 tractors with PowerShuttle. (3) Software program version
The Autotronic 5 controls the automatic functions of (4) Autotronic5 serial number
the transmission according to the driver's actions and (5) Date of production (09 03 = 9th week of 2003).
information from the various sensors.
The Autotronic 5 controls:

- PowerShuttle
- Hare / Tortoise range
- Power take-off
With Wintest, the Autotronic 5 can be :

- programmed: updating of functions control
- parameterised: identified by a 8-digit code indicating
the model of the tractor it is fitted to.
- tested: testing the Autotronic 5 inputs, outputs and
functioning.
The Autotronic 5 is fitted inside the cab right hand side

console, it is fixed between the hand throttle lever and
the hydraulic spoolvalves control levers.
Important: The Autotronic 5 case must be connected
to earth.
The Autotronic 5 is easily identified by its label (Fig. 1).

and possesses one 42-pin connector.
Fig. 1

Contents
B . Autotronic 5 status flowcharts

The Autotronic 5, to operate correctly, must receive
safety information allowing it to manage its automatic
functions. The Autotronic 5 has different status
depending on the information it receives.
Contents
Note : If the battery tension is upper than 16 V, the Autotronic 5 functions remain active, except the Hi/Lo range
that is locked.
STANDBY MODE AUTOTRONIC 5 OFF Reverse indicator light (red) flashes in

sequence error code 43
Auto 5: Locked + AC = 0 + AC = 0 + AC = 12 V - wrong parameters (See GUF513)
PowerShuttle: Locked engine speed = 0
low pressure = 0
+ AC = 12 V
Bottom of clucth switch signal + AC = 12 V
and parameters OK
(a) Low pressure < 9 bar ± 1 and

Standby Wait TRACTOR INITIALIZATION MODE
engine speed < 200 tr/min
(a) For 6 seconds None function active
(b) For 60 seconds
(b) Engine speed < 200 tr/min Auto 5: Locked
and ground speed < 1kmh PowerShuttle: Locked
Low pressure < 9 bar ± 1 and Low pressure > 9 bar ± 1 and
engine speed < 200 tr/min engine speed > 200 tr/min
TRACTOR OK MODE
Hi/Lo range and PTO active
Auto 5: Unlocked
PowerShuttle: Locked
Bottom of clucth switch signal with PowerShuttle lever out of Neutral, low pressure POWERSHUTTLE INITIALIZATION MODE Lever in Neutral without bottom of clucth switch signal, low pressure > 9 bar ± 1 and
> 9 bar ± 1 and engine speed > 200 tr/min PowerShuttle: Locked engine speed > 200 tr/min
POWERSHUTTLE STANDBY 1 MODE POWERSHUTTLE STANDBY 2 MODE

Forward or reverse indicator light flashes Forward and reverse indicator lights flash simultaneously
Lever in Neutral Bottom of clucth switch signal
Low pressure < 9 bar ± 1 or PTO and Hi/Lo alarm. All functions
POWERSHUTTLE OK MODE
engine speed < 200 tr/min locked except PowerShuttle
Low pressure < 9 bar ± 1 and All functions active
engine speed < 200 tr/min
PowerShuttle: Unlocked Low pressure > 9 bar ± 1 and
engine speed > 200 tr/min

Contents
Contents
C . Autotronic 5 connector pin allo-

cation
The Autotronic 5 includes a 42 pin connector of which
the input/output signals are described below.
42 29
15
28
14 1
MA-11-01268A
Fig. 2
Pin Description Signal

1 CAB18 Bottom of clutch switch (BOC) Initialization
2 CAB12 PowerShuttle lever 10V output
3 TR22 Reverse solenoid valve Return of the output (4A)
4 TR23 Forward solenoid valve Return of the output (4A)
5 TR23 Forward solenoid valve Output (4A)
6 TR22 Reverse solenoid valve Output (4A)
7 Not used
8 51 Economic PTO control Digital input (2A)
9 50 ON/OFF/ PTO brake switch Supply to PTO control transistor
10 Not used
11 TR13 Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve Output (2A)
12 49 Dashboard (PTO indicator light) Output (2A)
13 49 Dashboard (Reverse indicator light) Output (2A)
14 +12V ignition on supply to Autotronic 5
15 Autotronic 5 ground
16 CAB12 PowerShuttle lever Analog input
17 Not used
18 TR16 Hare / Tortoise switch Digital input
19 56 Top of clutch switch (TOC) Digital input
20 TR9 17 bar pressure switch Digital input
21 TR24 Transmission oil temperatur sensor Analog input
22 Not used
23 TR11 PTO solenoid valve Output (2A)
24 Not used

Contents
Pin Description Signal

25 Not used
26 49 Dashboard (Forward indicator light) Output (2A)
27 49 Dashboard (17 bar pressure indicator light) Output (2A)
28 Autotronic 5 ground
29 +12V battery supply to Autotronic 5
30 Not used
31 Not used
32 50 ON/OFF/ PTO brake switch Digital input
33 Not used
34 CAB18 Bottom of clutch switch (BOC) Digital input
35 CAB17 Clutch pedal potentiometer Analog input
36 TR2 Theoretical ground speed sensor Frequency input
37 TR25 Gearbox input speed sensor Frequency input
38 TR5 Engine speed sensor Frequency input
39 Can Low
40 Can High
41 Analog reference ground
42 +12V ignition on supply to Autotronic 5
Contents
D . Automatic responses of the

Autotronic 5
Note: The Autotronic 5 can only control all its functions
in PowerShuttle OK mode (see § B).
Functions Driver action Automatic response of the Autotronic 5

PowerShuttle Declutches and starts engine (activates Unlocks if Autotronic 5 receives at least the
bottom of clutch switch) with the 17 bar low pressure signal or engine speed
PowerShuttle lever in Neutral. is above 200 rpm.
Selects a PowerShuttle position: Automatically manages the progressivity of
- Forward the PowerShuttle.
- Neutral
- Reverse
without action on the clutch pedal.
Selects a PowerShuttle position and lets in Manages the progressiveness of the clutch
clutch using clutch pedal. in relation to the pedal potentiometer value.
Supply to indicator lights and solenoid
valves
Forward:
- forward indicator lamp = 12 V
- forward solenoid valve = 12 V
Neutral:
- forward & reverse indicator lamps = 0 V
- forward & reverse solenoid valve = 0 V
Reverse:
- reverse indicator lamp = 12 V
- reverse solenoid valve = 12 V
PowerShuttle locked:
- forward or reverse indicator lamp flashes
- solenoid valve = 0 V.
Note: The PowerShuttle continues to
operate with a low pressure or engine speed
fault, or battery voltage above 16 V.

Contents
Functions Driver action Automatic response of the Autotronic 5

Hare / Tortoise (Hi / Lo) On passing into Tractor OK mode, it
selects the range engaged when placed
on standby.
Wants to change range using gear lever Prohibits shifting from Hare to Tortoise
switch above 8 kph, and from Tortoise to Hare
above 13 kph
Automatic response of the

Functions Driver action
Autotronic 5
Power Take Off (PTO) Starts tractor with the PTO engaged On passing into Tractor OK mode:
- solenoid valve = 0 V if the cab control
is engaged
- The PTO indicator light flashes in
sequence the error code 55
(see GUF513)
Starts the PTO Manages the engagement progressivity
for 7 seconds maximum in relation to
the engine speed.
PTO indicator light flashes slowly.
PTO ON/OFF solenoid valve pulsed.
PTO engaged :
- indicator light is ON
- solenoid valve = 12 V
PTO disengaged :
- if engine speed drops more than 50%
or below 500 rpm:
- indicator light flashes in sequence
the error code 54 (see GUF513)
Starts economic PTO Disengages the PTO if engine speed
above 1780 rpm
- indicator light flashes in sequence the
error code 57 (see GUF513)
Contents
E . Power Shuttle principles

Block diagram
TR25
CAB12
CAB17
CAB18
56 TR23
TR22
49
CAB9
MA-11-01296A
Fig. 3
Part list (Fig. 3) The Autotronic 5 automatically controls the Power-

(CAB9) Autotronic 5 Shuttle according to information received from various
sensors and the request from the driver.
(TR25) Gearbox input speed sensor
(56) Top of clutch pedal switch
(CAB18) Bottom of clutch pedal switch Several mechanical, hydraulic and electrical compo-
(CAB17) Clutch pedal potentiometer nents being involved in the operation of the Power-
Shuttle; it may be necessary to carry out a clutch
(49) Dashboard indicator lights (Forward and Reverse)
calibration (see GUF514) when replacing one of them.
(CAB12)Power Shuttle 3-position analog shift lever
(TR22) Reverse solenoid valve
A permanent autodiagnostics carried out by the
(TR23) Forward solenoid valve
Autotronic 5 in relation to the Power Shuttle allows an
idea of any fault to be indicated by the flashing of the
reverse indicator light on the dashboard (see GUF513).

Contents
Operating modes of the Power Shuttle

Note : The user does not choose the mode of opera-
tion
The information received by the Autotronic 5 allows it

to automatically select one of the two operating
modes.
USE
- Start-up - Manual shifting using the pedal or lever

and / or
- Power Shuttle shifting
OPERATING CONDITIONS
- Speed below 2 kph - Speed above 2 kph

and
- Previous clutch pressure was at least 7.5 bar.
AUTOTRONIC 5 ACTIONS
Without pedal signal Without pedal signal but with lever signal
- Automatic pressure increase in clutch limited to 3 bar - Automatic pressure increase in clutch limited to 7.5
bar
With pedal signal With pedal signal but no lever signal
- Pressure increase in the clutch determined by - Pressure increase in the clutch determined by
position of the pedal and limited to 6 bar position of the pedal and limited to 10 bar
With pedal and lever signals
- Pressure increase in the clutch determined by
position of the pedal and limited to 7.5 bar
Contents
AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Programming and setting
parameters
GUF511 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Programming

and setting parameters
CONTENTS
A . Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Setting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wintest - Issue 5.a GUF511.1

Contents
parameters
GUF511.2 Wintest - Issue 5.a
Contents
parameters
A . Programming
- Switch on the ignition key to carry out this operation.
The engine must be stopped.
- The programming of the Autotronic 5 is necessary:
- if the former Autotronic 5 has been replaced by a
new one,
- when a new program becomes available to
improve the product,
- if the Autotronic 5 was programmed in a different
configuration (ParkLock, suspended front axle,
etc.).
NOTE: It is necessary to set Autotronic 5 parameters
after programming.
- Click on the “Tools” icon and then on “Programming
AUTO5” icon.
Wintest
AUTO5 label - PowerShuttle

Table of AUTO5 constants
Programming AUTO5
List of AUTO5 error codes
MA-11-01281A

Contents
parameters
Autotronic 5 programming is a 3-step process:
1. Searching for calculators present on CAN network
2. Selecting a calculator to be programmed
3. Selecting a soft to integrate into the calculator
4. Starting programming
The following screen is displayed:
Programming Auto 5
Auto 5 present on the CAN network 1. Searching for calculators present
serial n° Application
Auto 5 Parklock-n˚ 002696 H01/B03 -> V02.01 Update -> V02.02
on CAN network
2. Selecting a calculator to be
programmed
Auto 5 selected: Auto 5 ParkLock-n° 002696
3. Selecting a soft to integrate into

Soft Parklock Soft PowerShuttle the calculator
File selected: Auto 5 PowerShuttle - V01.03-B4
Programming 4. Starting programming
Scanning CAN network
MA-11-01277A Fig. 1
NOTE: Each stage must be validated to progress to the

following stage.
If a stage is dimmed, the previous stage has not been
validated.
Contents
parameters
Searching for calculators present on CAN

network
When the window is opened, Wintest automatically
starts an Autotronic 5 search on the CAN network.
However, this search can be refreshed at any time by
clicking on “Scanning CAN network”.
The list of calculators appears as follows:
serial n° Application
Auto 5 ParkLock-n°002696 H01/B03 -> V02.01 Update -> V02.02
Soft integrated into calculators (1) with • H01: Calculator hardware version (calcu- Program update possible
unique calculator serial number Fig. 2 lator version) with new soft version
• B03: Calculator boot version (central hub of included in Wintest
programs) (2)
• V02.01: Soft version integrated into
Autotronic 5
NOTE:
(1) A blank Autotronic 5 is provided as standard with
ParkLock soft in the spare parts
(2) A new Boot version can be included in the new
soft version; however, 2 different software items
will often carry the same Boot version.
Fig. 2

Contents
parameters
Selecting a calculator to be programmed

Double click in the left-hand column of the line of the
calculator you wish to program.
The line turns blue and at the base of the left-hand
column, Wintest specifies which Autotronic 5 has
been selected.
Selecting a soft to integrate into the calcu-

lator
Click on the button of the required soft.
The line under the buttons specifies which soft has
been selected.
Starting programming
Click on the “Programming” button
A gauge indicates the progression of the program-
ming.
At the end of the programming, Wintest automatically
starts a scanning of CAN network.
Contents
parameters
During programming, several error messages may be IMPORTANT: When programming with a Boot update,
displayed. unexpected interruption of programming can be fatal
for Autotronic 5.
To avoid Autotronic 5 breakdown:
Do not disconnect the calculator.
Restart programming (Wintest will offer to reprogram
only the faulty calculator to make it operational).
Error
NOTE:If the l’Autotronic 5 programming is interrupted
File cannot be opened unexpectedly, switch off the ignition key and then
switch it on again. This enables you to resume
programming.
Message:
- File cannot be opened
- Select a soft
- Select a calculator
- Calculator cannot be unlocked
- Bank 1 cannot be erased
- Bank 4 cannot be erased (Boot)
- Programming error
- End-of-programming error
- Reboot error
- Table change reset error
- File name length error
- File run error
Correction method:
- Depending on the type of message, try to follow the
requested indications.
- Cut the ignition and turn it back on.
- Check the CAN BOX interface connections with the
16-pin diagnostics connector.
- The AUTOTRONIC 5 unit is defective.
- If necessary, reinstall the Wintest software on your
PC.

Contents
parameters
B . Setting parameters
Switch on the ignition key to carry out this operation.
The engine must be stopped.
Parameter setting is necessary:
- if the former Autotronic 5 has been replaced by a
new one,
- when improvements to one or more functions have
been made through parameter setting,
- if a programming has been carried out.
Click on the “Tools” icon and then on “AUTO5 label -

PowerShuttle”.
Wintest

Programming AUTO5
MA-11-01281A
Contents
parameters
Auto5 Label Code parameters
Code AA Code B Code C Code D Code E Code F Code G Code H Code I Code J Code K
1 1 1 0 4 4 0 0
AA = 1 - > 5425-35-45
AA = 2 - > 5455-60-65
OK
MA-11-01278A
The tractor label code can be modified either by:

- moving the mouse cursor directly into the relevant
box and entering the appropriate code (it is also
possible to navigate between codes by pressing the
“tabulation” key on the keyboard).
- clicking on the arrow under the code concerned; you
can then scroll down the scroll bar and double-click
on the desired parameter.
Confirm the code by clicking on “OK”.

Contents
parameters
Instrument panel
Models with Autotronic 5 - PowerShuttle Switch n° (*) Code AA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5425 - 5435 - 5445 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 01
5455 - 5460 - 5465 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 02
(*) Switch n°8, units: 0 for Miles or 1 for Kilometres
CODE B CODE C CODE D

Inactive Hare / Tortoise Gearbox type
1 = Synchronised, controlled by 1 = SpeedShift,4 x 2
button on gear shift lever
CODE E CODE F CODE G

Inactive Speedshift Inactive
0 = With Speedshift
CODE H CODE I CODE J

Reverse shuttle Factory code Creeper unit
4 = PowerShuttle 4 = MF 5400 0 = Without
1 = With creeper speeds (min. speed
0.6 kph approx.)
2 = With super creeper speeds (min.
speed 0.2 kph approx.)
CODE K
PTO
1 = With or without
Contents
parameters
- Another screen allows you to display the constants
entered during parameter setting and stored after
calibration.
- Click on the “Tools” icon and on “Table of AUTO5
constants”.
Wintest

Programming AUTO5
MA-11-01281A

Contents
parameters

Select an Auto5 calculator
Auto5 PowerShuttle - n˚002696
Scanning CAN network
List of parameters
Description Status Data
Forward PowerShuttle Current 5 7407
Reverse PowerShuttle Current 6 5719
TOC calib. 7 56008
BOC calib. 8 44572
IDNSW calib. 9 44348
Wintest 10 0
11 0
As with Autotronic 5 programming, reading constants

is a 3-step process:
1. Searching for calculators present on CAN network.
This search can be refreshed at any time by
clicking on “Scanning CAN network”.
2. Selecting the required calculator.
3. Reading searched constants (table title: list of
parameters).
Contents
AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Tests and diagnostics
GUF512 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Tests and

diagnostics
CONTENTS
A . Autotronic 5 statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Gearbox function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Power Take-Off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Contents
Contents
A . Autotronic 5 statuses
The Autotronic 5 operates via 2 main statuses.
The status of the Autotronic 5 is displayed in each test
screen.
List of statuses
- Locked
- Unlocked
AUTO5 - PTO
1523
LS
0
15˚C Auto5: Unlocked

ON
NOITISOP
7K4 X A M
7K4 XAM
7K4
1
2
1 1
R57
R57
R57
NIM
TROFFE
NIM
2 1 ENG20 1 ENG21 ENG22 1
1MM_NOIR
1
2
31
7
1
3
R51
4
5
6
7
81
21
6
8
9
R051
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81
11
12
13
14
R065
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
R57
CAB34
22
51L
W107_ 3MM_ROUGE
1 23
24
R57
6 5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 1112 CAB23 CAB33 25
R001
1
W011_ 5MM_MARRON
1
W108_ 3MM_ROUGE 26
27
28
R051
CAB24 CAB32 CAB35
29
1004N1
W012 3MM MARRON 1 W109_3MM_ROUGE
R001
1 1 1X2 1
30
R065
X4 31
CAB25 CAB21
W113_3MM_MARRON W110_3MM_ROUGE ENG1
1 1
1004N1
R051
No error
MA-11-01280A

Contents
B . Gearbox function
- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Gearbox" icon
Wintest
MA-11-01281A
Contents
AUTO5 - PowerShuttle
1523
3.19 V
0
Forward: 0 mA (+5)
Reverse: 0 mA (-2)
15˚C OFF
Auto5: Unlocked
OFF
PowerShuttle: Unlocked
NOITISOP
7K4 XAM
7K4 X A M
7K4
1
2
1 1
R57
R57
R57
NIM
TROFFE
NIM
2 1 ENG20 1 ENG21 ENG22 1
1MM_NOIR
1
2
31
7
1
3
R51
4
5
6
7
81
21
6
8
9
R051
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81
11
12
13
14
R065
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
R57
CAB34
22
51L
W107_ 3MM_ROUGE
1 23
24
R57
6 5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 1112 CAB23 CAB33 25
R001
1
W011_ 5MM_MARRON
1
W108_ 3MM_ROUGE 26
27
28
R051
CAB24 CAB32 CAB35
29
1004N1
R001
1 1 1X2 1
30
R065
X4 31
CAB25 CAB21
1 1
1004N1
R051
No error ON
2.09 V
MA-11-01279A
Engine speed sensor value in rpm (TR5) Transmission oil temperature sensor value in
°C (TR24)
1523 15
- red = speed under 400 rpm or over 3000 rpm
Power Shuttle lever signal and status
-Forward:...............from 5.52V to 6.24V
Gearbox input intermediate speed sensor
value in rpm (TR25)
Power Shuttle lever signal and status
0 N -Neutral: ................from 1.09V to 2.37V
- Gearbox 30 kph = from 0 to 1 times the engine

speed in range D Power Shuttle lever signal and status
- Gearbox 40 kph = from 0 to 1.26 times the engine -Reverse:...............from 6.59V to 7.36V
speed in range D
- red = over 3500 rpm Bottom-of-Clutch pedal switch (BOC) (CAB18)
Design ground speed indicated by ground
speed sensor in tenths of kph (TR2)
0 - on = violet
- off = white
- red = over 45 kph

Contents
Top-of-Clutch (TOC) sensor (56) Auto5: Unlocked Autotronic 5 status
PowerShuttle: Unlocked PowerShuttle

status
- on = violet - Locked
- off = white - Standby 1 (Standby before unlocking by moving
Power Shuttle lever to neutral position)
Clutch pedal travel potentiometer value in - Standby 2 (Standby before unlocking by switching on
volts (+/-0.01V) TOC and BOC)
The high and low values are determined by - Unlocked
3.19V automatic calibration GUF514 - Calibration
- Adjustment
Progress bar displaying clutch
pedal travel. Bar empty = clutch Error code indication
disengaged and blue bar = clutch engaged No error
Forward proportional solenoid Hare / Tortoise control switch (CAB67)

Forward: 0 mA
valve current value
- lever in neutral position .................................... 0 mA
- lever in forward position..................200 to 1000 mA - on = violet
- lever in reverse position ........ 0 to 120 mA (“offset” - off = white
correction current due to Autotronic 5 internal
components) Available: Creeper gear switch (not
wired)
Reverse 0 mA Reverse proportional solenoid
valve current value
- on = violet
- lever in neutral position .................................... 0 mA
- off = white
- lever in reverse position ..................200 to 1000 mA
- lever in forward position........ 0 to 120 mA (“offset” Forward proportional solenoid valve
correction current due to Autotronic 5 internal status (TR23)
OFF
components)
Number of adjustments to forward clutch - OFF = Solenoid valve at rest = white

(+5) - ON = Solenoid valve open or fully open = blue
progressivity
- (0) = no adjustment since Power Shuttle calibration
Reverse proportional solenoid valve
- (+#) = clutch responsiveness increased
OFF status (TR22)
- (-#) = clutch responsiveness decreased
Number of adjustments to reverse clutch - OFF = Solenoid valve at rest = white

(-2) - ON = Solenoid valve open or fully open = blue
progressivity
- (0) = no adjustment since Power Shuttle calibration
Hare / Tortoise range solenoid valve
- (+#) = clutch responsiveness increased
OFF status (TR13)
- (-#) = clutch responsiveness decreased
- Tortoise = OFF = Solenoid valve at rest = white

- Hare = ON = Solenoid valve supplied = blue
Contents
Indicator light of 17 bar low pressure

hydraulic circuit pressure switch
- If pressure is correct, the background is grey

The display is red if the pressure is below 9 bar ± 1 or
when the instrument panel indicator light is lit
Available: Creeper gear indicator light (not

wired)
Tortoise range indicator light
Hare range indicator light
Forward indicator light
Reverse indicator light

Contents
C . Power Take-Off function

- Start the engine.
- Click on the “Power Take-Off” icon
Wintest
MA-11-01281A
Contents
AUTO5 - PTO
1523
LS
0
15˚C Auto5: Unlocked

ON
NOITISOP
7K4 X A M
7K4 XAM
7K4
1
2
1 1
R57
R57
R57
NIM
TROFFE
NIM
2 1 ENG20 1 ENG21 ENG22 1
1MM_NOIR
1
2
31
7
1
3
R51
4
5
6
7
81
21
6
8
9
R051
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81
11
12
13
14
R065
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
R57
CAB34
22
51L
W107_ 3MM_ROUGE
1 23
24
R57
6 5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 1112 CAB23 CAB33 25
R001
1
W011_ 5MM_MARRON
1
W108_ 3MM_ROUGE 26
27
28
R051
CAB24 CAB32 CAB35
29
1004N1
R001
1 1 1X2 1
30
R065
X4 31
CAB25 CAB21
1 1
1004N1
R051
No error
MA-11-01280A
Engine speed sensor value in rpm (TR5) PTO ON/OFF switch (50)
1523 - on = violet
- red = speed under 400 rpm or over 3000 rpm - off = white
Design ground speed indicated by ground PTO economy mode control switch (51)
speed sensor in tenths of kph (TR2)
LS
0 - on = violet
- red = over 45 kph - off = white
Transmission oil temperature sensor value in Status of PTO solenoid valve (TR11)
°C (TR24) ON
15 - OFF = deactivated = white

- ON = activated = blue
Auto5: Unlocked Autotronic 5 status
No error Error code indication

Contents
Indicator light of 17 bar low pressure

hydraulic circuit pressure switch
- If pressure is correct, the background is grey

The display is red if the pressure is below 9 bar ± 1 or
when the instrument panel indicator light is lit
PTO indicator light
Contents
AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Error codes
GUF513 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Error codes
CONTENTS
A . Reading error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . List of error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Analysing components and their error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Analysing other error codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
WINTEST - Issue 5.a GUF513.1

Contents
GUF513.2 WINTEST - Issue 5.a
Contents
NOTE: Error codes are managed from soft version

01.03.
A . Reading error codes

Reading codes on the instrument panel
Autotronic 5 continuously monitors the power shuttle

function and PTO.
The user is informed of a fault by:

- The flashing reverse indicator light (9) for the Power-
Shuttle function (Fig. 1),
- The flashing PTO indicator light (22) for the PTO func-
tion and PowerShuttle calibration (Fig. 1).
Only one error code can be displayed at a time.
Reading principle:
1. The indicator light flashes in a rapid burst to signal
the code is about to be displayed
2. 1st series of flashes displays the error code
decimal.
3. Approximately one second without flash precedes
display of the error code unit.
4. 2nd series of flashes displays the error code unit.
5. The procedure restarts from the beginning.
9
1/2
15
0 1
10 20
RPMx100
5 25
0000000
22
E 1000
A B C D
- +
P ! !
MA-11-01276A
Fig. 1

Contents
Reading error codes with Wintest
Wintest allows all error codes stored by Autotronic 5 to

be displayed and cleared.
Click on the “Tools” icon and on “List of AUTO5 error
codes”.
Wintest

Programming AUTO5
MA-11-01281A
Contents
AUTO5 - Error(s) stored
CLEAR
MA-11-01316A
- Click on the line of the calculator whose errors you

wish to display.
AUTO5 - Error(s) stored
Error n°222: PowerShuttle lever - Short circuit

Error n°223: Battery voltage <11V or >16V
Error n°209: PTO solenoid valve – Open circuit
CLEAR
MA-11-01315A
Only errors stored when the ignition key is switched

on appear.
The most recent errors are displayed at the top of the - If you click on “CLEAR”, all error codes will be
list. erased from the selected Autotronic 5 memory.
Autotronic 5 PowerShuttle stores a maximum of 10
errors.

Contents
B . List of error codes

The error codes are divided into 3 classes according to
their importance:
Class I: Major error
Class II: Error reducing operating capacity
Class III: Information
Flashing
code on
Errors Components concerned Description
instrume
nt panel
101 11 TR23 Forward solenoid valve Short circuit at +12V
102 12 TR22 Reverse solenoid valve Short circuit at +12V
I 105 41 TR23 Forward solenoid valve Open circuit
106 42 TR22 Reverse solenoid valve Open circuit
113 43 CAB9 Autotronic 5 - PowerShuttle Cheksum error
203 33 TR23 Forward solenoid valve Short circuit at 0V
204 34 TR22 Reverse solenoid valve Short circuit at 0V
207 51 TR11 PTO solenoid valve Short circuit at +12V
208 52 TR11 PTO solenoid valve Short circuit at 0V
209 53 TR11 PTO solenoid valve Open circuit
210 54 Excessive drop in engine speed
50 PTO ON/OFF/brake switch Switch ON and PTO inactive
211 55
TR11 PTO solenoid valve
213 57 51 LSPTO control Engine speed too high (>1782 rpm) in LSPTO
TR24 Oil transmission temperature Transmission temperature over 100°C
212 56
sensor
CAB17 Clutch pedal progressivity Open circuit or short circuit at 0V
215 21
II sensor
CAB17 Clutch pedal progressivity Short circuit at +12V
216 22
sensor
CAB18 Bottom-of-Clutch (BOC) pedal Open circuit or short circuit at 0V
217 23
switch
CAB18 Bottom-of-Clutch (BOC) pedal Short circuit at +12V
218 24
switch
56 Top-of-Clutch (TOC) pedal Open circuit or short circuit at 0V
219 25
switch
56 Top-of-Clutch (TOC) pedal Short circuit at +12V
220 26
switch
221 27 TR25 Intermediate speed sensor Intermediate speed sensor error
222 28 CAB12 PowerShuttle lever Short circuit at +12V or 0V
223 14 Battery voltage <11V or >16V
Contents
Flashing
code on
Errors Components concerned Description
instrume
nt panel
301 35 PowerShuttle calibration Temperature too low
302 36 PowerShuttle calibration Temperature too high
III
303 37 PowerShuttle calibration Wrong engine speed
304 38 PowerShuttle calibration Ground speed not zero

Contents
C . Analysing components and their

error codes
CAB9: Autotronic 5
Description
Location: in the right-hand console
Allocation of Autotronic 5 connectors, see table below.
Some connectors can be configured at their input and
output, as determined by the calculator soft.
Possible error codes

113 : Cheksum error that occured during programming 42 29
or when setting parameters. 28

15
Solution: Reprogram and set parameters correctly. MA-11-01268A

14 1
To reset the system: the Cheksum must be correct Fig. 2

and the engine must be stopped.
Connect
Description Type of signal
or
1 CAB18 BOC Switch Initialisation
2 CAB12 PowerShuttle lever 10V regulated output
3 TR22 Reverse solenoid valve Output 2 return (4A)
4 TR23 Forward solenoid valve Output 1 return (4A)
5 TR23 Forward solenoid valve Input / Output 1 (4A)
6 TR22 Reverse solenoid valve Input / Output 2 (4A)
7 Not used Digital Input / Output 1 (2A)
8 51 LSPTO control Digital Input / Output 2 (2A)
9 50 PTO ON/OFF/brake switch
10 Not used Current output 1 (2A)
11 TR13 Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve Current output 3 (2A)
12 49 Instrument panel (PTO indicator light) Current output 5 (2A)
13 49 Instrument panel (reverse travel indicator light) Current output 7 (2A)
14 Calculator power supply +12 V AC (Ignition key On)
15 Calculator ground
16 CAB12 PowerShuttle lever Analog / Digital input 2
17 Not used Analog / Digital input 4
18 TR16 Hare / Tortoise switch Analog / Digital input 6
19 56 Top-of-Clutch (TOC) pedal switch Analog / Digital input 8
20 TR9 Low pressure switch Analog / Digital input 10
21 TR24 Oil transmission temperature sensor Analog / Digital input (PullUp)
22 Not used Digital Input / Output 3 (2A)
23 TR11 PTO solenoid valve Current output (2A)
Contents
Connect
Description Type of signal
or
26 49 Instrument panel (forward position indicator light) Current output 6 (2A)
49 Instrument panel (transmission oil pressure indicator Current output 8 (2A)
27
light)
28 Calculator ground
29 +12V permanent calculator supply
32 50 PTO ON/OFF/brake switch Analog / Digital input 5
34 CAB18 Bottom-of-Clutch (BOC) pedal switch Analog / Digital input 9
35 CAB17 Clutch pedal progressivity sensor Analog / Digital input 11
36 TR2 Design ground speed sensor Frequency input 3
37 TR25 Intermediate speed sensor Frequency input 2
38 TR5 Engine speed sensor Frequency input 1
39 Low Can
40 Can High
41 Analog reference (Ground)
42 Calculator power supply +12 V AC (Ignition key On)

Contents
CAB12: PowerShuttle lever

Description
Location: to the left of the steering wheel
All resistance switches to form different voltage
dividers.
- Connectors 1: +10V supply

- Connectors 2: Not used
- Connectors 3: Signal
- Connectors 4: Ground
Signals:
Forward: 6.12V
Neutral: 2.15V
Reverse: 7.16V
1540 261
1
1
2
2
2610
3
3
4
3320 1210
4
N
MA-11-01272A
Possible error codes Fig. 3
Reaction of the Resetting the system

Errors Description Solutions
System after clearing error
222 Short circuit at +12V or 0V PowerShuttle Check:
locked - Contacts
Press the clutch pedal to
- Harness connections
contact the BOC
- Wiring
- F12 and F23 fuses
Contents
CAB17: Clutch pedal progressivity sensor

56
Description
Location: on the clutch pedal support (Fig. 4)
Angular sensor. CAB17
- Connectors 1: Power supply

CAB18
Signals:
Varying voltage between 0.5 and 4.5V
MA-11-01269A Fig. 4
3
2
1
MA-11-01223A
Fig. 5

215 Open circuit or short circuit at Check:
0V - Contacts
Clutch fills with Press the clutch pedal to
216 Short circuit at +12V - Harness connections
ramp by default contact the BOC
- Wiring
- F12 and F23 fuses

Contents
CAB18: Bottom-of-Clutch (BOC) pedal

switch 56
Description
Location: on the clutch pedal support (Fig. 6) CAB17
2 switches: NO et NC.
CAB18
- Connectors 2: Power supply
Assembly:
- Tighten the locknut to approximately 8 Nm
3
MA-11-01269A Fig. 6
1
2
2
1
3
MA-11-01270A
Fig. 7

Open circuit or short circuit at PowerShuttle Check:
217
0V locked - Contacts
Press the clutch pedal to
Clutch fills with - Wiring contact the BOC
ramp by default
- F12 and F23 fuses
Contents
TR11: PTO solenoid valve

Description
Location: on the right-hand hydraulic cover (Fig. 8)
ON/OFF solenoid valve controlled by frequency carrier
signal.
Signals:
OFF solenoid valve: 0A TR11
ON solenoid valve: 12V
MA-11-01267A
Fig. 8
1
2
2

MA-11-01266A
Fig. 9

207 Short circuit at +12V Check:
208 Short circuit at 0V - Contacts
- Harness connections Press the clutch pedal to
209 Open circuit contact the BOCor:
PTO locked - Wiring
move the PTO switch
- F6 fuse from ON to OFF
211 Switch ON and PTO inactive Move the PTO switch
from ON to OFF

Contents
TR22: Reverse solenoid valve

Description
Location: on the hydraulic unit of the power shuttle
control (Fig. 10)
Proportional solenoid valve supplied with current
- Connectors 2: Signal return
Signals: TR22
OFF solenoid valve: 0A
ON solenoid valve: approximately 1.2A
TR23
MA-11-01262A
2 Fig. 10
2
1
1
MA-11-01263A

106 Open circuit - Contacts
Reverse Press the clutch pedal to
204 Short circuit at 0V position locked contact the BOC
- Wiring
- F12 and F23 fuses
Contents
TR23: Forward solenoid valve

Description
Location: on the hydraulic unit of the power shuttle
control (Fig. 12)
Proportional solenoid valve supplied with current
- Connectors 2: Signal return
Signals: TR22
OFF solenoid valve: 0A
ON solenoid valve: approximately 1.2A
TR23
MA-11-01262A
Fig. 12
2
2
1
1
MA-11-01263A
Fig. 13

105 Open circuit - Contacts
Forward Press the clutch pedal to
203 Short circuit at 0V position locked contact the BOC
- Wiring
- F12 and F23 fuses

Contents
TR24: Oil transmission temperature sensor

Description
Location: on the gearbox cover (Fig. 14)
Resistant sensor.
TR25
Signals:
Temperature Resistance in ohms

in °C
0 10.7 K (+/- 1.3) TR24 TR16
MA-11-01264A
20 4000 Fig. 14
50 500
Assembly:
- Apply a small amount of Loctite 542 to the thread
- Tighten to a torque of approximately 30 Nm
2
2
1 T˚ analog.
1

MA-11-01226A
Fig. 15
Resetting the system

after clearing error
212 Transmission temperature There are 2 possibilities:
over 100°C - Temperature is too high
• Stop tractor movement, auxiliary spool
valve and PTO operation to allow the trans- Press the clutch pedal to
mission to cool contact the BOC
• Ensure that the oil level is correct
- the sensor is faulty and displays incorrect
data. It must therefore be checked.
Contents
TR25: Intermediate speed sensor

Description
Location: close to the gearbox cover (Fig. 16)
Induction sensor.
TR25
Signals:
Resistance when stopped: 450 Ohm +/- 20
Alternating voltage when pinion is rotating
To adjust the air-gap:

- Apply a small amount of Loctite 5922 to the thread TR24 TR16
MA-11-01264A
- Screw the sensor home in abutment on the pinion Fig. 16
- Unscrew the sensor by 3/4 turn
2
2
1
Possible error codes 1
MA-11-01265A
Fig. 17
Resetting the system

after clearing error
221 Intermediate speed sensor Check:
error - Sensor status
- Sensor resistance of 450 Ohm, as well as
alternating voltage when pinion is rotating Press the clutch pedal to
contact the BOC
- Contacts
- Wiring

Contents
50 : PTO ON/OFF/brake switch

Description
Location: on cab right-hand console
- Connectors +: Power supply +

- Connectors F: Brake signal CAB61
- Connectors P: PTO control signal
F
CAB60
P
CAB59
MA-11-01273A

211 Switch ON and PTO inactive PTO locked Move the PTO switch Press the clutch pedal to
from ON to OFF contact the BOCor:
move the PTO switch
from ON to OFF
Contents
51 : LSPTO control
Description
Location: on cab right-hand console
1550
2000
1
2
MA-11-01274A

213 Engine speed too high (>1782 PTO locked There are 2 possibilities:
rpm) in LSPTO - Operating safety: use
PTO in Load Sensing
mode at a speed lower Press the clutch pedal to
than 1782 rpm contact the BOCor:
- Ensure that during move the PTO switch
normal PTO use, the from ON to OFF
switch does not remain
on, thus giving LSPTO
data

Contents
56 : Top-of-Clutch (TOC) pedal switch

56
Description
Location: on the clutch pedal support (Fig. 20)
CAB17
Assembly:
CAB18
MA-11-01269A Fig. 20

1
2
MA-11-01275A
Fig. 21

Open circuit or short circuit at Check:
219
0V - Contacts
Clutch fills with Press the clutch pedal to
ramp by default contact the BOC
- Wiring
- F12 and F23 fuses
Contents
D . Analysing other error codes

Error Description Solutions
210 Engine speed drops by more PTO locked Ensure that the tool is
than 50% or to under 500 rpm suitable for use with the
tractor and that the engine Press the clutch pedal to
is not working at contact the BOCor:
underspeed, because the move the PTO switch
PTO is protected to from ON to OFF
prevent it from stalling the
engine
301 PowerShuttle calibration:
temperature too low Calibration in
Wait
302 PowerShuttle calibration: standby
temperature too high Place vehicle in conditions
required to carry out
303 PowerShuttle calibration: calibration
wrong engine speed Calibration Press the clutch pedal to
304 PowerShuttle calibration: stopped: contact the BOC
ground speed not zero

Contents
Contents
AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Calibration and adjustments
GUF514 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Calibration and

adjustments
CONTENTS
A . Calibrating the Power Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Adjusting the Power Shuttle progressive shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
C . Adjusting the manoeuvring pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Calibrating the (manoeuvring) clutch pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Contents
AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Calibration and adjustments
Contents
AUTOTRONIC 5 - Power Shuttle - Calibration and adjustments
A . Calibrating the Power Shuttle

The calibration of the Power Shuttle is mandatory
where the following components are changed:
- a Power Shuttle solenoid valve
15
- the Power Shuttle hydraulic control unit
- the Power Shuttle unit or one of its components
10 20
- the Autotronic 5 RPMx100
Calibration is automatic, which allows a deft and

smooth quality of shuttling.
5 25
Preliminary operations 0000000
NOTE : To authorise entry into calibration mode, the
transmission oil temperature must be: MA-11-01282A
Fig. 1
35 / 45° C : the temperature is measured by the
gearbox cover sensor and can be read using Wintest or
by a direct reading of a specific instrument panel Gearbox cover Flashing indicator light
display (Fig. 1). temperature
Reverse Forward
indicator light indicator light
To enter direct read mode:
NOTE : The user has a maximum 0.5 second delay < 15°C ON at 95% OFF
between each operation to enter this mode. = 25°C ON at 50% OFF
- move Power Shuttle lever to neutral position = 34°C ON at 5% OFF
- move gear lever to neutral position
from 35°C to 45°C ON ON
- move Power Shuttle lever to forward or reverse posi-
tion = 46°C OFF ON at 5%
- press the Hare / Tortoise control switch 4 times = 55°C OFF ON at 50%
- move Power Shuttle lever to neutral position
= 65°C OFF ON at 95%
- the display appears on the instrument panel (Fig. 1).
To exit direct read mode, repeat the procedure used to
enter direct read mode, or stop the engine.
NOTE : The tractor can always be used when in
temperature direct read mode, but the position indi-
cator light displayed corresponds with the tempera-
ture.
Calibration autorisation:
- from 36 to 39°C: calibration authorised
- from 39 to 44°C: optimum calibration
- from 44 to 46°C: calibration authorised

Contents
1. Bring the tractor up to temperature, for example: Automatic calibration

Tractor stationary
- Run the engine, gear shift lever and Power
Shuttle levers in neutral, PTO clutch engaged.
10. Release the clutch pedal.
- Then, move the Power Shuttle lever 10 times in
each direction, leaving the lever 5 to 10 seconds 11. Increase engine speed to 1500 rpm ± 100 with the
in each position in order to bring the control unit hand throttle lever.
and solenoid valves up to transmission tempera- 12. Shift into the Tortoise range without declutching.
ture. 13. Place the Power Shuttle lever in forward or reverse
- Measure and note the temperature. position to reset the system and then leave it in
Tractor moving this position.
- Carry out reversing manoeuvres every 5 to 10 14. Choose the correct Speedshift ratio for equal
seconds, in Hare range 1st or 2nd gear. engine and intermediate speeds:
- Measure and note the temperature. - Gearbox 30 kph: ratio D
2. Place the tractor on a hard even surface, free of - Gearbox 40 kph: ratio C
any obstacles 3 metres away at least. NOTE: Access to Automatic calibration mode takes
3. The tractor must be free of any implements. place immediately following the above described
manoeuvres.
4. Stop the PTO, disengage the front axle.
15. Simultaneously, and at least for 4 seconds, press:
5. Stop the engine.
- the button on the gear shift lever to activate the
6. Extinguish any headlights / road lights.
Hare / Tortoise range switch (tractor shifts to
7. Put the gear shift lever and Power Shuttle lever Hare range),
into neutral.
- the differential lock switch.
16. Entry into automatic calibration mode is then indi-
cated by the simultaneous flashing of the forward
and reverse indicator lights. Release the range and
differential lock switches.
17. Calibration takes approximately 5 minutes and is
complete when the 2 indicator lights stop flashing.
Only the indicator light of the selected position
flashes.
18. Disengage the clutch using the pedal and return
the lever to neutral position to complete and vali-
date the calibration of the Power Shuttle.
Contents
Validation Calibration enters standby mode if:

- The engine speed changes from 1500 rpm ± 100
Immediate validation after calibration
Calibration mode is deactivated if:
1. Without stopping the engine, set the engine speed
to 1500 rpm, and engage 4th gear in the Tortoise - The Power Shuttle lever is placed in neutral position.
range.
2. Carry out 10 forward / reverse Power Shuttle NOTE: If the calibration fails, the system uses the previ-
manoeuvres. ously memorised parameters, or the default parame-
3. Carry out 10 neutral to forward and neutral to ters in the case of a new Autotronic 5 unit.
reverse Power Shuttle manoeuvres.
4. Judge the quality of the shuttling which should be
deft and smooth.
Validation of an already calibrated tractor
NOTE: The transmission temperature must be above
20° C.
1. Put the gear shift lever in neutral, the power
take-off must be declutched, the front axle disen-
gaged.
3. Put the Power Shuttle lever in forward position for
at least 1 minute, then at least 1 minute in reverse
position.
4. Put the Power Shuttle lever back into neutral posi-
tion.
5. Engage 4th Tortoise, with an engine speed of 1500
rpm.
6. Carry out 10 forward / reverse Power Shuttle
manoeuvres.
7. Carry out 10 neutral to forward and neutral to
reverse Power Shuttle manoeuvres.
8. Judge the quality of the shuttling which should be
deft and smooth.
NOTE: An abrupt reaction on the 1st manoeuvre is
normal.
Calibration faults
NOTE: A fault due to non-compliance of the conditions
required to access or maintain the calibration mode is
signalled by the flashing PTO indicator light.
Entry in calibration mode is not provided if:
- the transmission temperature is not correct
- the correct Speedshift ratio in relation to the gearbox
(30 or 40 kph) is not engaged
- the engine speed is other than 1500 rpm ± 100
- The Tortoise range has not been engaged before
accessing calibration mode
- the Power Shuttle lever has not been engaged.
1. Check that the access to calibration conditions in
operations 1 to 7 have been met.
2. Check the solenoid valve coils connections.
3. Check that the TOC (top-of- clutch pedal switch) is
connected and correctly adjusted.

Contents
B . Adjusting the Power Shuttle

progressive shifting
Once the calibration has been correctly carried out, it is
possible to adjust the calibration parameters to obtain
faster or slower Power Shuttle reactions if the accept-
able criteria have not been met.
This procedure can be carried out from soft version
01.03.
After a new calibration, the adjustment procedures of
each direction of travel are reinitialised.
NOTE : During the procedure, if the pedal is pressed
down or the ignition key switched off, the modifica-
tions are not stored.
Contents
Preocedure to follow
1) Preliminary operations
Start the engine.
Move Power Shuttle lever to
neutral position
Release the clutch pedal
2) Entering adjustment
mode
The forward and reverse
Press simultaneously and for indicator lights flash quickly
4 s the Hare / Tortoise range After 4 s and simultaneously
switch and differential lock
switch
3) Choosing the clutch As long as the clutch is not

Select the clutch requiring selected, the Auto 5 stays in
parameter adjustment by selection standby mode (3).
The indicator light indicates Once selected, 4 s are
moving the Power Shuttle lever the direction selected
to forward or reverse position, allowed between each
then move the lever to neutral operation
position.
4) Adjusting responsive- This adjustment procedure

ness can be repeated 5 times in
The indicator light of the the same direction for the
Move the lever forwards to selected clutch changes same clutch.
increase responsiveness or status each time the lever In this case return to step
backwards to reduce is moved (1).
responsiveness, then quickly
return the lever to neutral.
5) To
Validate:
The Power Shuttle locks If the operator moves the
Wait 4 s without carrying out lever before 4 seconds has
any operation passed, the Auto 5 returns
Cancel: to step (1).
press the clutch pedal down
within 4 s
MA-11-01283A
Fig. 2

Contents
C . Adjusting the manoeuvring pedal

Manoeuvring pedal assembly (Fig. 5)
(2) Bottom of clutch switch (BOC)
(3) Starter safety switch
(4) Pedal pressed adjustment screw
(5) Pedal released stop adjustment screw
(6) Top of clutch switch (TOC)
(7) Clutch pedal progressivity potentiometer
- The manoeuvring pedal can be used when manoeu-

vring in very tight spaces or when hitching an imple-
ment.
- It is not necessary to use this pedal either when
engaging a gear from neutral, when changing gears
or when reversing the direction of travel.
Fig. 3
- The position of the manoeuvring pedal is transmitted
to the Autotronic 5 by the sensors.
Adjusting BOC
- Tighten to provide a clearance of 0.3 to 1mm
between the switch body and the holder (Section
C-C)
- Tighten the lock nut to a torque of 6 - 9 Nm.
Adjusting the potentiometer and switch

- Fit the potentiometer into its housing.
- Tighten the screws in order to reach the centre of
the lights (Fig. 3).
- Fit the plastic fork and tighten the screws with
Loctite 241 or equivalent (Fig. 4).
- Adjust the released pedal stop adjustment screw (5)
to provide a clearance of 6mm (view B).
Fig. 4
- Fit and tighten the top of clutch (TOC) switch (6) to a
torque of 18 to 30 Nm.
- With the pedal released (top), allow 0.5 to 0.7 mm
clearance between the switch body and screw head
(view A).
Contents
A B
6 4 5
J = 0,5 / 0,7 mm
18 - 30 Nm
2 7 6
J = 6 mm
4
C A
D
3
C 5
B
E
Loctite 241
8 Nm
C-C E-E
2 3
6 - 9 Nm
J = 0,3/1,00 mm J = 0,5 mm
MA-11-01132A
Fig. 5

Contents
D . Calibrating the (manoeuvring)

clutch pedal
Each time the clutch is disengaged then reengaged
(BOC then TOC), the Autotronic 5 gradually readjusts
its calibration parameters to centre the potentiometer
range correctly according to the pedal travel.
The calibration of the clutch pedal must be carried out
each time that one of the following elements is
replaced or modified:
- Clutch pedal progressivity potentiometer
- Autotronic 5
Method:
NOTE: The user has a maximum 0.5 second delay
between each operation to enter this mode.
- move gear lever to neutral position
- move Power Shuttle lever to forward or reverse posi-
tion
- press the Hare / Tortoise control switch 10 times
- press the clutch pedal fully in once, then release.
The pedal is calibrated.
Contents
AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Electrical diagrams
GUF515 - AUTOTRONIC 5 - PowerShuttle - Electrical

diagrams
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Electrical diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
C . Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Contents
Contents
In general, the components or connectors are named

A . General in order to indicate the corresponding elements of the
tractor:
Description CA## Automatic air conditioning
The harnesses fitted on the tractor allow data to be CAB## Cab
exchanged and power to be supplied to the electrical ENG## Engine
and electronic systems. LIG## Lighting
The tractor is fitted with 3 different types of power R## Roof
supply:
TR## Transmission and linkage
• +12V Battery (Permanent)
CDX# External controls
• +12V APC (Ignition key ON)
• +12V ACC (Accessories)
Most harnesses have a maximum of six different wire
colours:
- Black: Ground
- Brown: +12V Permanent
- Red: +12V APC and Accessories
- White: Information
- Yellow: CAN High
- Green: CAN Low
The CAN network wires (yellow and green) are
twisted together.
- Components with only one connector are identified

CAB18
by the connector name:
9 10
2 1
6 5
3 4
CAB16: Clutch pedal progressivity sensor (Fig. 1).

7 8
8 7
- Harnesses performing the same functions have the

1 2
5 6
1 2 3
10 9
4 3
same colour on the diagram (Fig. 1): CAB11 CAB11 3 2 1 CAB18 1 CAB14
CAB11.1/CAB17.1 N
R
1 1
• FAI90: Cab Power Shuttle option harness (pink) 2 2 CAB11.2/CAB18.1 B
S1.1/CAB14.1
CAB11.3/CAB18.3 B S1.1/CAB18.2 R
3 3
4 4
CAB11.5/S2.1 B
5 5
• FAI102: Platform Power Shuttle option harness 6
7
6
7
CAB11.6/CAB17.3 B
CAB11.7/CAB13.1 B
CAB11.8/S1.1 R S1
8 8
(pink) 9 9
R
10 10
CAB17.2/S1.1
- All wires can be identified by the pins of the outgoing FAI102 FAI90
3
and incoming connectors of the harness: 2

1
FAI89
B
N
CAB9.35/CAB11.6 B
CAB9.16/CAB11.5 B
B
CAB9.2/CAB11.9 R
CAB11.2/CAB18.1: The wire connects pin 2 of the

CAB17
CAB11.8/S6.1 R
CAB9.19/CAB11.7
CAB9.34/CAB11.3
CAB9.41/CAB11.4
4 3 2 1
CAB11 connector to pin 1 of the CAB18 connector

- The pin reference for each connector is indicated on CAB12 CAB12
the harness side 1

2
3
4
- The wire colour is indicated: CAB11.2/CAB18.1 B,

the wire is white
Fig. 1
List of colours: MA-10-01005A
- N: Black
- M: Brown
- R: Red
- B: White
- J: Yellow
- V: Green
- The splices inside the harnesses are indicated by a
dot and the letter S (S1).

Contents
Layout
1 or 2 Deutsch connectors (31-way) are connected on
+12V
the front wall of the cab (according to model) Fig. 2.
All these connectors belong to the engine harness.
ENG2 is dedicated to information relating to the elec- ENG1
tronic injection (only present on the relevant models).
ENG36
MA-10-01004A Fig. 2
The fuses of the electrical or electronic board (Fig. 3)

are indicated by a grey mark on their locations on the CAB35
fuse box (CAB35).
FAI2
CAB35
6A - 6B
CAB35.6B/S17.1
1
MA-10-01006A
CAB84
10A
Fig. 3
Contents
B . Electrical diagrams
Electrical supply ......................................................... 7

Safety......................................................................... 9
Power shuttle .......................................................... 11
Hare / Tortoise ......................................................... 13
Differential lock........................................................ 15
PTO.......................................................................... 17
LSPTO...................................................................... 19
GSPTO ..................................................................... 21
CAN network ........................................................... 23

Contents
Harness parts list 53 Electronic PTO control

56 Top-of-Clutch (TOC) sensor
FAI 02 Instrument panel harness
FAI 07 GSPTO harness
FAI 73 Linkage harness Colour reminder
FAI 74 Cab console harness N: Black
FAI 81 Perkins EEM engine harness M: Brown
FAI 88 Power Shuttle GBA20 transmission - 57 l/min R: Red
hydraulics harness B: White
FAI 89 Autotronic 5 Power Shuttle harness J: Yellow
FAI 90 Cab Power Shuttle option harness V: Green
FAI 93 EEM option adaptation harness
FAI 111Proportional PTO switch harness
Component parts list

CAB5 Lifting / lowering / neutral linkage selector
switch
CAB9 Autotronic 5 - Power Shuttle
CAB12 Power Shuttle lever
CAB17 Clutch pedal progressivity sensor
CAB18 Bottom-of-Clutch (BOC) pedal switch
CAB21 16-pin connector
CAB35 Fuse box
CAB55 Right-hand brake switch
CAB56 Left-hand brake switch
CAB62 Differential lock relay
CAB64 Differential lock switch
CAB67 Hare / Tortoise control switch
ENG35 Electronic injection harness junction
TR2 Design ground speed sensor
TR3 PTO speed sensor
TR6 Differential lock solenoid valve
TR7 Clogging indicator
TR8 Booster and lubricating pressure switch
TR12 PTO brake solenoid valve
TR13 Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve
TR15 Transmission oil temperature sensor
TR16 Hare / Tortoise switch
TR22 Reverse solenoid valve
TR23 Forward solenoid valve
TR25 Intermediate speed sensor
3 Start switch
8 GSPTO safety switch
49 Instrument panel
50 PTO ON/OFF/brake switch
51 PTO speed selector switch
Contents
Electrical supply
F23-7.5A F24-10A +12V
29B 29A 30B 30A 31B 31A 32B 32A
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B 22B 23B 24B 25B 26B 27B 28B
17A 18A 19A 20A 21A 22A 23A 24A 25A 26A 27A 28A
CAB35 3
13B 13A 14A 14A 15B 15A 16B 16A CAB106 1 CAB88 1
CAB88.1/CAB35.3A R
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B
24A - 24B
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A CAB35.24A/CAB106.1 M
F2-7.5A F3-10A 23A - 23B

CAB35.23B/CAB34.2 M
S4.1/CAB9.42 R 3A - 3B
42 42
41 41 FAI84
40 40
39 39
38 38
37 37 2A - 2B
36 36 CAB35.2B/CAB34.3 R
35 35
34 34
33 33 4 3
32 32 CAB35
31 CAB34 1 2 3 4 2 1
31
30 30
CAB10.2/CAB9.29 M
29 29 CAB34 1 2 3 4 2 1
S5.1/CAB9.28 N
28 28
4 3
27 27
26 26 S4 CAB10.5/S4.1 R CAB34.3/CAB10.5 R
5 5
25 25 4 4
24 24 3 3
23 23 S5 CAB10.2/S5.1 N CAB124.1/CAB10.2 N
2 2
22 22 CAB34.2/CAB10.1 M
FAI89 1 1
21 21
20 20
CAB10 CAB10
19 19
FAI02
18 18
17 17
16 16
1 2
S5.1/CAB9.15 N
5 4 3 2 1
9 15 15
S4.1/CAB9.14 R
3
14 14
4
13 13
5
12 12
11 11
10 10 1 CAB124
9 9
8 8
29 42
7 7
28
6 6
15
5 5
1 14
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
CAB9 CAB9 MA-11-01285A

Contents
Harness parts list 53 Electronic PTO control

56 Top-of-Clutch (TOC) sensor
FAI 02 Instrument panel harness
FAI 07 GSPTO harness
FAI 73 Linkage harness Colour reminder
FAI 74 Cab console harness N: Black
FAI 81 Perkins EEM engine harness M: Brown
FAI 88 Power Shuttle GBA20 transmission - 57 l/min R: Red
hydraulics harness B: White
FAI 89 Autotronic 5 Power Shuttle harness J: Yellow
FAI 90 Cab Power Shuttle option harness V: Green
FAI 93 EEM option adaptation harness
FAI 111Proportional PTO switch harness
Component parts list

CAB5 Lifting / lowering / neutral linkage selector
switch
CAB9 Autotronic 5 - Power Shuttle
CAB12 Power Shuttle lever
CAB17 Clutch pedal progressivity sensor
CAB18 Bottom-of-Clutch (BOC) pedal switch
CAB21 16-pin connector
CAB35 Fuse box
CAB55 Right-hand brake switch
CAB56 Left-hand brake switch
CAB62 Differential lock relay
CAB64 Differential lock switch
CAB67 Hare / Tortoise control switch
ENG35 Electronic injection harness junction
TR2 Design ground speed sensor
TR3 PTO speed sensor
TR6 Differential lock solenoid valve
TR7 Clogging indicator
TR8 Booster and lubricating pressure switch
TR12 PTO brake solenoid valve
TR13 Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve
TR16 Hare / Tortoise switch
TR22 Reverse solenoid valve
TR23 Forward solenoid valve
TR25 Intermediate speed sensor
3 Start switch
8 GSPTO safety switch
49 Instrument panel
50 PTO ON/OFF/brake switch
51 PTO speed selector switch
Contents
Safety
CAB9
49
TR24
TR24.2/TR21.B5
TR24.1/TR1.1 N
B
2
1
T˚
TR24
analog.
1 2
25 14 29 42
15 28
13 1 1 14 TR8
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 TR8
S1.1/TR8.1 B
CAB47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB9
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CAB9
FAI88
FAI89
C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 TR15
1 2
FAI2 C8 C7C6C5C4C3C2 C1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
A8 A7A6 A5A4A3A2 A1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
TR7.2/TR15.2 B
2
T˚
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
TR21 TR21 TR 21 TR 21 1
A1
analog.
A1 A1 A1 TR15
A2 A2 A2
A2 TR21-A.A3/TR_21-A.A3 B S1.1/TR21.A3 B S1
TR21.A3/CAB47.22 B A3 A3 A3
A3 CAB9.27/TR21-A.A4 B CAB9.20/TR_21-A.A4 B
TR21.A4/CAB47.19 B A4 A4 A4
A4
A5 A5 A5
A5
A6 A6 A6
A6
A7 A7 A7
A7
A8 A8 A8
A8
B1 B1 B1
B1
B2 B2 B2
B2
B3 B3 B3
B3
B4 B4
CAB35 B4
B5 B5
B6
B6
B4
B5
B6 B6
B7 B7 B7
B7
B8 B8
C1
B8
C1
B8 1 2 TR7
C1 C1
C2 C2 C2
C2
C3 C3 C3
C3 TR21-A.C4/TR_21-A.C4 B
C4 C4 C4
C4
C5 C5 C5
C5 2
C6 C6 TR7.1/S1.1 B
C6 C6 1
C7 C7 C7 1
C7
C8 C8 C8
C8 TR7
TR1
1 2
TR9
TR21.A4/TR9.2 B
TR9.1/TR21.C4 R 2
1
TR21.C4/S17.1 R
TR9
FAI88
3 CAB35
FAI2
MA-11-01286A
6B - 6A
CAB85.1/CAB35.6B R S17.1/CAB35.6A R S17
1
10A
CAB85
WINTEST - Issue 5.a

MF 5400 Series Workshop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MF 5400 Series Workshop Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MF 5400 Series Workshop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Massey Ferguson 5400

Workshop service manual

07 - Power take off

Return to the book list

AGCO S.A. All rights reserved Beauvais France May 2004

May 2004 AGCO S.A. All rights reserved Beauvais France

Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a Contents - i

Contents - ii Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a

A . Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

G . Locking compounds and sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 01A01.1

01A01.2 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a

The issue number and date are indicated at the bottom

Using the manual

Repairs and replacements

Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 01A01.3

Model 5425 Type Fixed

Rotational direction Clockwise

Turbocharger No Open Centre 100L/min. Optional

Intercooler No Orbitrol steering unit 100cc

Injection pump Bosch VE10 Brake master cylinder Standard

Fan Viscostatic Assisted braking No

Alternator 80 A / 120 A Trailer brake Optional (*)

Gearbox Auxiliary spool valves 0 - 4 mechanical

Gearbox model GBA20 Couplers Pressure relief

Clutch / Reverse shuttle Dry clutch / Mechanical reverse shuttle Electronics

Handbrake discs 3 Steep nose bonnet Optional

Differential lock Coupler Standard roof Standard

Linkage High-visibility roof Optional

Stabilisers Telescopic / without Slimline roof Optional

Perforated bar Optional Platform Optional

Clevis Standard or assisted

Automatic clevis Standard or assisted

Semi-mounted trailer Closed eye bolt or automatic hook (*)

Swinging drawbar Standard

Roller swinging drawbar Optional

Type Interchangeable / shiftable shaft

540/1000/eco Optional (*)

Number of clutch discs 4

Power take-off brake Hydraulics

Proportional PTO Optional

Front power take-off Optional

01A01.4 Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a

Model 5435 Front axle

Engine Model DANA AG 85

DIN power (CV) 75 Type Fixed

DIN power (Kw) 56 Rotational direction Clockwise

Trademark PERKINS Clutch Coupler

Type 1104C-44 Swinging fender (4WD) Optional

Swinging drawbar Standard

Roller swinging drawbar Optional

Type Interchangeable / shiftable shaft

540/1000/eco Optional (*)

Number of clutch discs 4

Power take-off brake Hydraulics

Proportional PTO Optional

Front power take-off Optional

Massey Ferguson 5400 - Issue 1.a 01A01.5

Model 5445 Front axle

Engine Model DANA AG 85